JP6679111B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  Related to gaming machines.

  The rotating-body type gaming machine (slot machine) starts one game when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of game medals, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. Rotating operation of the rotating cylinders of multiple rows (reel), the rotating cylinder stopping device (stop button) for stopping the rotating operation is used to stop the rotating cylinder, and as a result, a predetermined pattern is displayed on the effective line. When a combination of (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up, a special game state in which the player has a higher profit state than the normal game state (a game state in which the lottery probability of a small win etc. is higher than in the normal state ) Is generally the type that moves to. Here, in the case of a spinning-type gaming machine, a case where an image for staging to enhance the interest of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a form synchronized with the rotation and stop operations of the reels. It is configured to predict and enjoy the game result while comparing the design displayed on the torso with the effect image and the like displayed on the display when operating the spine stop device or the like. There are many things. In addition, in many cases, when some kind of abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, an error may occur that stops the progress of the game. In recent years, as a pachinko gaming machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is performed when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and when the jackpot lottery is won, The game is shifted to a special game state, and the main game machine is a pachinko game machine in which a large winning prize hole provided on the game board surface is opened to obtain a large amount of prize balls. In the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, the probability fluctuation game state that increases the winning probability in the big hit lottery and the time shortening game state that increases the efficiency of symbol fluctuation for notifying the lottery result in the big hit lottery There is also a gaming machine that is provided with the above-mentioned, etc. and enhances the enjoyment of the game by creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player by these gaming states.

JP 2010-259962 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-027874 JP-A-2002-011142 JP 2005-204844 A JP-A-2006-104356

  It is desired to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly progress the game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect,
First information display means,
A second information display means,
As a game section, it has a first section and a second section,
In the second section, after the predetermined processing based on the minimum game time is executed, the information about the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be displayed on the first information display means,
In the second section, after the specific processing based on the acceptance of the start switch is executed, the information about the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be displayed on the second information display means.
In the second section, the game in which the specific drawing result is determined by the internal drawing means is configured to have a case where the instruction game is executed,
In the first instruction game in which the specific drawing result is determined by the internal drawing means executed by accepting the operation of the start switch under the predetermined situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the stop switch on the first information display means After the information on the advantageous operation mode of is displayed, the information on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the second information display means.
In the second instruction game in which the specific drawing result is determined by the internal drawing means executed by receiving the operation of the start switch under the specific situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the stop switch on the second information display means After the information on the advantageous operation mode of (1) is displayed, there is a case where the information on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the first information display means.
<Appendix>
It should be noted that, although other modes different from the present mode will be listed below, the present invention can be carried out without being limited thereto.
The gaming machine according to this another aspect,
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
A stop switch (for example, a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, a right stop button D43) provided for each of the reels and operated by a player when stopping the rotation of the reels;
Storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game media within a predetermined number range;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) for outputting a production sound,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the output of the effect,
The main game department is
Role lottery means for performing a role lottery,
When the stop switch is operated, reel control means for stopping and controlling the reel so as to correspond to the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
A storage number increasing process for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means,
And a payout process for paying out game media,
When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, the game medium can be given to the player,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when a specific number of game media is given, the storage number increasing process is executed. Is configured to execute payout processing without
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is provided. In the case, it is configured to execute the storage number increase process and not execute the payout process,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number When the game medium of is given, it is configured to execute the payout processing after executing the storage number increase processing,
The main game department is
After the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium provision information is configured to be transmitted to the sub game unit,
The sub game department,
Based on the reception of the game medium provision information, it is configured to be able to output from the speaker a game medium provision sound that is an effect sound related to the provision of the game medium,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when the specific number of game media is provided, the game medium provision information Based on the reception of the game media, a predetermined game medium imparting sound (for example, a game medium imparting sound output when the credit increases by one, a game medium imparting sound output when one game medal is paid out) is generated. Output is possible,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is provided. In this case, the predetermined game medium providing sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium providing information,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number When the game medium is added, it is possible to output the predetermined game medium addition sound based on the reception of the game medium addition information,
During execution of the stored number increasing process, a time value from when the number of game media stored in the storing means becomes A (A is a natural number) to A + 1, and N (N is a natural number and 2 ≦ N ) During the execution of the payout process for paying out the game media, M + 1 (M is a natural number, and 1 ≦ M ≦ (N−1)) from the start of the payout process for the (n−1) th game medium A gaming machine characterized in that the time value until the start of the execution of the payout process for the eye game medium is different.

  According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly play a game.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the turning-type gaming machine according to the embodiment in a state where a door is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of a medal slot in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a reel arrangement list in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a symbol combination list 2 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a symbol combination list 3 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a condition device list in the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small wins, replays, and bonus appearance rates in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of a spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flow chart on the side of the main control board in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning-roller type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a non-returnable error process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (second game) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control processing (third piece) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the additional game execution processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of AT state start control processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a game section shift control process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of a timer interruption process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the spine drive control processing on the main control board side in the spine-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram related to a reel rotating operation in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of power-off processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram of a pressing order display in the turning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a sub-program start process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a sub main loop process on the sub control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a sub power-off process on the sub control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one-command processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the effect-related determination processing at the time of start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a battle effect execution availability determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the side of the sub-control board in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the AT effect determination processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the resurrection availability determination processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a process at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of a process during AT during start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the special precursor process at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the additional processing at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the inside BB advantageous processing when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a process at the time of receiving the first rotation stop on the sub-control board side in the rotation drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of a process at the time of accepting the second torso stop on the sub-control board side in the torso gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of a third barrel stop effect-related determination process on the sub-control board side in the barrel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the third time cylinder stop accepting process on the sub-control board side in the spinning game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a menu screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of standby screen display control processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is an image diagram of transition to a standby screen in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 60 is an operation diagram in a game in which a re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example has been won. FIG. 61 is an action diagram in a won game of a re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 62 is an action diagram in a won game of a re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 63 is an operation diagram in the game in which the re-play is won, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. FIG. 4 is a side sectional view schematically showing a relative position between a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the structure inside a hopper. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view showing arrangement of medal auxiliary tank HS and fullness detection electrode DE. It is a schematic diagram showing the size and position of a full detection electrode and screw BS. It is a figure showing composition of a reel band. It is a figure showing composition of a reel band. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (third game) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of a freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of stop-time freeze execution determination processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an AT start effect execution image diagram in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is a lamp unit lighting configuration image applicable to the turning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 79 illustrates an example of a configuration related to payout that can be applied to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 80 is an example 1 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp, which is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 81 is an example 2 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 82 is an example 3 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 83 is an example 4 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 84 is an example 1 of an action that can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example and at the time of operating the settlement button. FIG. 85 is an example 2 of the operation at the time of operating the checkout button, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 86 is an example 3 of an operation at the time of operating the checkout button, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 87 is an example 4 of an operation at the time of operating the checkout button, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing a first mode of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power off, and FIG. 88 (b) is a second timing chart of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power off. 6 is a timing chart showing the mode of (1). FIG. 89 (a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89 (b) shows the state of the setting key switch in the second mode. 6 is a table showing the relationship between the power supply state and the state. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a process of adding the number of credits, a process of paying out a game medal, and a process of outputting a game medium addition sound. FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing on the main control board side applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 94 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push-order navigation applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example when there is no weight in the AT-in-progress state. FIG. 95 is an image diagram of a start timing of the second push order navigation when there is no weight in the AT state, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 96 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push order navigation when there is a weight in the AT state, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 97 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push order navigation when there is a weight in the AT state, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of the start timing of the third push-order navigation applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example, when there is a weight in the AT-in-progress state. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of a spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 100 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is no weight in the AT state, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 101 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push-order navigation that includes the reel window frame lamp when there is a weight in the AT state, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including sound when there is no weight in the AT state, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 103 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including sound when there is a weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 104 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 105 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push-order navigation that can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example and when the push-order bell combination is won in the AT state. FIG. 106 is an image diagram of the end timing of the third pushing order navigation when the pushing order bell role is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 107 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation when the push order replaying game is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 108 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push order navigation when the push order replaying game is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 109 is an image diagram of a change in the display mode of the reel stop control and the push order navigation in the AT state, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 110 is a timing chart showing a mode of detecting a game medal by the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of a game progress control process on the main control board side applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of medal insertion error processing on the main control board side applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the relationship between the detection of game medals by the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor on the main control board side and the credit addition processing, which is applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. is there. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of error detection by a shoot sensor on the main control board side, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing a game medal detection mode of the first insertion sensor, the second insertion sensor, and the shoot sensor, which is applicable to the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 116 is a front view of a medal return member applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a side view of a medal return member applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a locus diagram of gaming medals flowing down the medal returning member, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a locus diagram of game medals to be paid out to the medal receiving port, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a timing chart showing a detection mode of a game medal by the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor when the hopper motor is driven, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is an image diagram of a disk rotation mode from the start of hopper motor drive to the stop of hopper motor drive, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating a main control board applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disabled during the checkout process. FIG. 9 is a first pattern diagram showing a sound output process on the sub-control board side based on a control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a main control board applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, in which the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disabled during the checkout process and the communication is restored. FIG. 10 is a second pattern diagram illustrating audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on a control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 124 shows a main control board applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, in which communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disabled during the wait period and communication is restored. FIG. 10 is a pattern diagram showing a sound output process on the sub-control board side based on a control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 125 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disabled during the medal payout process from the hopper, which is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 8 is a first pattern diagram showing a voice output process on the sub control board side based on a control command transmitted from the main control board side. FIG. 126 shows a case where communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disabled during the medal payout process from the hopper and communication is restored, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a second pattern diagram showing a sound output process on the sub-control board side based on a control command transmitted from the main control board side. FIG. 127 is a table relating to numbers that can be applied to this example.

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer, sometimes referred to as a lottery) for determining some game content in a spinning type gaming machine, in addition to a random number in a narrow sense. It also includes pseudo random numbers (for example, hard random numbers as random numbers, built-in random numbers generated by a main control chip including a CPU, and soft random numbers as pseudo random numbers). For example, a so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, a "winning random number" associated with a special role or a winning role (small role, re-gaming role) for shifting to a special game, etc. Can be mentioned. The “CPU” has the same meaning as that well known in the art, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) and processing performance used. The "power cut (power cut)" means that the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine is below a certain level regardless of whether the power switch provided on the game machine is operated or not. It also includes interruption of power supply due to an unexpected situation such as damage to the unit or power failure. “ROM” has the same meaning as that well known in the art, and physically holds information (for example, “1” if the element configuration is conductive when a current for reading data is applied, conductive If the element configuration does not include "0"). The RAM has the same meaning as that well known in the art, and electrically holds information (for example, when a current for reading data is given, “1” is stored, and if not stored). It becomes “0.” It is general that the backup power is supplied to a part or all of the data held in the RAM when the power is cut off). The "game state" is, for example, a special game state in which a game medal is easy to obtain and is advantageous for the player (so-called big hit game, which corresponds to a bonus game, a first-class BB, a second-class BB, etc.). ), The winning rate of the re-gaming role is a state in which the winning rate of the re-gaming role is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state, which is a predetermined value, and the re-play probability variation gaming state (RT state), the winning combination The reel stop order for winning a prize, the AT (assist time) during which the stop position can be notified, the ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT during state are combined, and the like can be mentioned. Further, even in the normal game state, the transition probability to the RT state, the AT state, and the ART state is different, the high-probability normal game state, the low-probability normal game state, etc. (in this example, the lottery state is called. ) Is mentioned. In addition, there is no problem even if the game state is combined (further, these game states and functions (for example, lottery for transition to AT state, output of notification instruction regarding reel stop order, etc.) control the game progress. There is no problem if all are mounted on the main control board side}. Further, in this example, the state regarding the AT and the RT state are individually described, and the RT state is referred to as “RT1” and the state regarding the AT is referred to as “normal gaming state”. As a state related to ART, the state related to ART may be collectively referred to as “normal game state”. The "winning combination" is the type (or condition device number) of the condition device that is won by an internal lottery (sometimes referred to as an internal pouring lottery). The "notification state" is a state related to an AT capable of executing a push-order navigation described later, and even if the condition device wins the condition device in which the push-order navigation is not executed because the winning combination is not different depending on the reel stop order. , If the state related to the AT is a state in which the push-order navigation can be executed, the "notification state" is set. The "counter value" is also referred to as the "notifying game executable number" and is the AT remaining game number or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "notifying game executable number" is 1 or more (may include the game that has become "0"), the push-order navigation described later can be executed. Also, as the "number of notification game executable", the difference number of game media (the number of payouts minus the number of insertions) obtained based on the fact that the small winning combination (mainly, the pushing order Bell winning combination) is won, The number of wins for the forward bell role may be adopted. Further, the "special notification state" is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the AT-related states, and in this example, it is referred to as "addition specialization state". Further, the “specific condition” is a condition that the AT counter value can be subtracted, and, for example, the specific condition is that one game is finished, a predetermined winning combination (for example, a push order bell winning combination) is won, and the like. The "type 1 special accessory" is an accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols relating to winning for each specified number or increases the probability that the condition device relating to winning for each specified number will operate. It is operated when it is given, and it is possible to continue the operation until the result of the number of times of the game of less than 12 times is obtained, and it may be called RB (regular bonus). "First-class special accessory continuous operating device" is a device that can continuously operate the first-class special character, when the combination of specific symbols is displayed and is predetermined The operation is ended at this time, and may be referred to as a BB (big bonus) or a first type BB. The "second-class special accessory" is an accessory that activates the condition device for winning regardless of the result of the lottery, and operates in a predetermined case to obtain the result of one game. The operation is terminated in the case of, and may be referred to as a CB (challenge bonus). "Second-class special accessory continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the second-class special accessory, and it operates when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is finished at this time, and may be referred to as MB (middle bonus) or second type BB. The "ordinary character" is a character that increases the number of combinations of symbols relating to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device relating to winning for each specified number will operate, with a specific symbol. It is supposed to operate when a combination is displayed and to end the operation when a result of one game is obtained, and may be referred to as SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is considered to be JACIN when the first-class BB combination wins, and is always in RB during execution of the first-class BB. Further, the "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which during non-RB and during RB, the first type BB is repeatedly executed. Further, the "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in a state where pull-in control that can be performed after performing a stop operation is not performed, and a state in which the reel is stopped at the closest reel position that can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation is accepted. It is a reel. The "all CB type" is a configuration in which the CB is always in operation when the second type BB is executed. The "CB transfer lottery type" is a configuration in which during non-CB and during CB, the second BB is repeatedly executed.

  Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, and the like, It is not limited to the following modes. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification to one embodiment is a modification to another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described.

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the spinning-type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the configuration), the basic structure on the front surface side of the spinning-roller type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. The rotating body type game machine P mainly includes a front door (also called a front door), a back box (also called a cabinet or a base body), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. A substrate M (a substrate on which the main control chip C including the CPUMC is mounted) and a sub-control substrate S (a substrate on which the sub-control chip SC including the CPUSC is mounted) are configured. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for visually recognizing a game state, a mechanism for enabling input of a game medium, a mechanism for operating a reel unit, other mechanisms, and the like. Specifically, as a mechanism for making the game state visually recognizable, a reel window D160, an insertion number display lamp D210, a start lamp D180, a re-game lamp D290, an insertion possible lamp D300, a special game state display device D250, a credit number A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section display YH, and the like are attached. Also, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of game media and input of the number of bets (the number of bets), a mechanism for enabling a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, and a payout of inserted game media, Button D60 is attached. As a mechanism for operating the reel, a start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached. The spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2, and the like. It has a console that protrudes to the side. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

<Mechanism for making the game state visible>
Next, a description will be given of a main part of a mechanism for making the game state visible. The reel window D160 is a transparent member that is made of synthetic resin or the like that forms a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be viewed through the reel window D160. Further, the inserted number display light D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (inserting a game medal necessary to start one game) is turned on. Is configured. Specifically, the insertion number display lamp D210 is configured by three LEDs (lamp) of a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and one game medal is bet. In this case, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212: turns off, and the 3-bet lamp D213: turns off. : ON, 3-bet lamp D213: OFF, and if there are three game medals bet, 1-bet lamp D211: ON, 2-BET lamp D212: ON, 3-BET lamp D213: ON (re-game) This is not always the case with the next game in which is stopped and displayed, and details will be described later. The start lamp D180 is configured by an LED. The start lamp D180 is lit when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is received), and the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (operation is not received). It is configured to turn off the light in a certain case. Further, the re-game lamp D290 is configured by an LED, and is turned on when the re-game is stopped and displayed, and turned off when the next game in which the re-game is stopped is completed. The insertable lamp D300 is turned on (or may blink) when the insertion of a game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is effective or the operation of the bet button D220 is effective, and the insertion of the game medal is enabled. The light is turned off when the operation is invalid or the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. The special game state display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. It should be noted that the special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a case, the total number of the payouts may be displayed on an effect display device S40 (also referred to as a second information display unit) described later. Is displayed, the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, and can provide a user-friendly gaming machine. Further, the credit number display device D200 is configured by a seven-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (the number of credits) stored in the gaming machine as medals possessed by the player. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is constituted by a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button) (The stopping order of D43), a condition device in which the winning combination may be different ｛a so-called pushing sequence (sometimes referred to as a pushing sequence combination), but when the winning combination and the symbol combination to be stopped are different. Is generally configured so that the profit rate (payout number, subsequent RT state, etc.) given to the player can be different. In a game in which｝ is established, the reel which is most advantageous to the player is The stop order is configured to be notified (the notification may be referred to as a push order navigation). As described above, the payout amount display device (pushing order display device) D270 is configured so as to be able to execute two displays, that is, the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order that gives the highest profit to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not erroneously recognize which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. In addition, the AT counter value display device D280 plays a game in accordance with the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as a first information display unit) among the states related to the AT (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games that can stay in a state related to the AT (in this example, also referred to as a push-navigation state, which is also referred to as a notification game, which will be described in detail later) which is advantageous to the player that is guaranteed when the game progresses. It is configured as follows. The AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided. In such a case, the number of games that can stay in the AT state is displayed on the effect display device S40. Can recognize the number of games in which the state regarding the advantageous AT is guaranteed, and can provide a user-friendly gaming machine. Note that the number-of-payouts display device (push-order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices, a number-of-payouts display device and a push-order display device.

  Further, the advantageous zone indicator YH is configured by an LED, and is configured to be turned on when it is the “advantageous zone” and turned off when it is not the “advantageous zone” (for the lighting and extinguishing timing, See below). Here, in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example, like the conventional rotating body type gaming machine, it is easy to obtain game medals and advantageous for the player in a special game state (so-called big hit game, bonus game And the type 1 BB, type 2 BB, etc. are applicable), and the winning rate of the re-playing combination is higher (or lower) than that of the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the re-playing combination is a predetermined value. The re-play probability variation game state (RT state), which is the state, the reel stop order for winning the winning combination, the AT (assist time) state that can inform the stop position, the RT state and the AT state. A composite ART (assist replay time) state, etc. can be adopted, but in addition to these "gaming states", one of the three "gaming zones" of "normal zone", "standby zone" and "advantageous zone" Can be set Going on. In this example, the "stand-by section" is not set, but either the "normal section" or the "advantageous section" is set. Of these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than the other "gaming section". For example, the "gaming state" is the AT state or the ART state. "Advantageous section" is associated. That is, when the "game state" is the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous zone display YH is turned on. However, as will be described later, the "game zone" setting control is also the "game state" setting control. Similarly, since it is performed on the main control board side that controls the progress of the game, whether or not the progress of the game is relatively advantageous to the player depending on whether the advantageous section display YH is turned on or off. It is possible to communicate to the player without lying. As will be described later, if the “advantageous section” continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games), the “normal section” is forcibly set, but at that time, it remains. Since the state related to AT is forcibly terminated (information for maintaining the state during AT is cleared and initialized), the change in the "gaming section" that is set also affects the transition to the "gaming state". It is possible to automatically suppress a significant increase in gambling due to a "gaming state" such as an AT state or an ART state in which the degree of freedom in design is relatively high. Of. As described above, if the “advantageous section” continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games), the “normal section” is forcibly set, that is, the “advantageous section” ends. However, the condition for ending the “advantageous section” is not limited to this. The ending condition of the "advantageous section" in the spinning-roll type gaming machine according to this example is "a pushing combination that can obtain the small winning combination with the largest payout number among the small winning combinations that make up the" pressing winning combination " Normal navigation 1 time execution (For example, when there are 7, 3, and 1 small wins as the small wins that make up the push forward win, the 7 most paid-out wins are the push forward wins. If there is a push order combination that can obtain 7 or 1 piece depending on the push order and a push order combination that can obtain 3 pieces depending on the push order, a push order navigation that can obtain 3 pieces is called here. "It does not correspond to the push order navigation)" or "Win one of BB, RB, MB", and "Arbitrary end condition (40G 1 set loop lottery not win (AT), fixed 32G "Elapsed (premature sign) etc." "or" Meeting zone 1500G "is the end condition. To have. In the case of a specification in which there is no push order bell combination (eg, a specification in which there is a push order for replay for shifting the RT state, but there is no small combination in which the payout number differs depending on the push order), The condition for ending the advantageous section of "1 push-order navigation that can obtain the small win with the largest number of payouts" is excluded. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the small wins including the small win corresponding to 11 wins and the small win corresponding to one win are configured as the small wins constituting the push-forward win, "the payout number is the largest. "Execution of one push order navigator capable of winning a small winning combination" refers to informing a pushing order in which 11 medals can be acquired (11 winning combinations can be won).

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media>
Next, a description will be given of a main part of a mechanism for enabling input of a game medium. The medal insertion slot D170 is a game medal insertion slot, and the game medals inserted into the insertion slot under the condition that the medal can be accepted are guided to the inside of the gaming machine. Further, as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, an insertion reception sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided inside the gaming machine, and the game is guided to the inside of the gaming machine. When it is determined that a game medal has been normally inserted, the inserted medal can be detected as a betted medal. Further, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to bet the stored medals (credit medals) by the operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and by operation, the stored medal (medal of credit) and / or the betted medal can be paid back to the player. I have. The game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured so that it can be operated by the player, and the operation of the reel can be started by the operation. The stop button D40 is provided with a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and the reel operation can be sequentially stopped by operating each stop button. Has been done.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, main parts of other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to a perspective view showing the internal configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine P by opening the front door DU in FIG. The front door DU includes, as a mechanism for enhancing the interest of the game, an effect display device S40 for displaying an effect such as a notice effect or a background effect, and a game effect lamp D26 (not shown) that can be turned on in various lighting modes. Illustrated), a door board D for signal relay, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, etc., a speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, a middle panel (middle decorative panel) which is a member formed of synthetic resin or the like. , An upper panel D130 and a lower panel D140. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper portion on the back side of the front door DU so that a display unit for displaying effects and the like can be visually recognized through a see-through area formed on the upper panel. Further, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emitting source that emits light in accordance with the progress of the game of the spinning-type gaming machine P, and the decorative lamps are provided on the right and left sides of the lower panel D140, respectively. A unit D150 is provided, and an LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right and left sides of the upper panel D130. (The decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 may be collectively referred to as a lamp unit. ). A door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU, and the door board D receives input signals such as the stop button D40, the start lever D50, and the adjustment button D60. Is input, and has a function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs the processed signal to a main control board M described later. In addition, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided near the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU, corresponding to the medal slot D170, for detecting the medal inserted from the medal slot D170 and for simplifying. It has a function of performing proper authentication, guiding an appropriate medal to a hopper H40 described below, and returning an inappropriate medal to a medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door substrate D. The middle panel is the upper part of the console, the lower part of the upper panel D130, and the panel part including the above-described reel window. The sub-input button SB and the cross key SB2 attached to the console D190 described above are used for operations on a menu screen, which will be described later, and a button-stroke effect on the sub-control board S (continuous tapping of the sub-input button SB). This is a member used for performing an effect related to whether or not a bonus has been won), a mini game (for example, an effect of success or failure of entering the “AT state”) and the like. In the front door DU of the spinning-type gaming machine P, a medal tray D230 that receives game medals (or may be simply called medals) discharged from the discharge port D240, and an open / closed state of the front door DU can be detected. A door switch D80 is provided. The front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and a key (door key) matching the shape of the keyhole D260 is inserted into the keyhole D260 {in addition, by twisting in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}. The front door DU can be opened. Further, in the present embodiment, the door key is inserted into the keyhole D260 (in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)) so that the error state (door opening error or the like) can be released. There is. A bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220, and the bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 is turned on (or blinks). By doing so, the player can perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is effective. Further, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (the stop button lamp S60 is provided on each of the three stop buttons of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). Is configured by an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the player determines that the operation of the stop button D40 is effective by the presence / absence of lighting (or blinking) of the stop button lamp S60 and / or the lighting color. Can be perceived. It should be noted that since only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the valid stop button D40 is illuminated in the lighting color corresponding to the valid stop button D40, for example, the left stop button D41 is invalid. When the middle stop button D42 is valid and the right stop button D43 is valid, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is lit, and the right stop. The stop button lamps S60 corresponding to the button D43 are illuminated, so that the three stop button lamps S60 can be differently illuminated. In addition, by changing the lighting color and the lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (the lighting color and the blinking may be different, or the lighting speed and the blinking speed may be different), the pressing order navigation is executed. In the game, it may be configured so that the player can easily determine the stop button to be currently stopped, for example, all the reels are rotating, and the pressing order of “left → middle → right” is correct ( The stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button blinks in white when the push order bell which has the maximum payout number) is won, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop corresponding to the right stop button When the button lamp is lit in blue and the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off and the middle stop button is turned off. Blink white stop button lamp may be configured so as to light the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button blue.

  Next, a back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a base) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to substantially the center of the back box so that a part thereof can be visually recognized through a reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a driving source (such as a stepping motor) for the reel M50. Further, the reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel portion is formed of synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel portion (on the reel strip MO). Then, based on the operation of each stop button of the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, the respective reel units can be rotated and stopped. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LEDs are turned on, the outer periphery of the reel unit is turned off. Is configured to be visually recognized as if the outer periphery of the reel unit is lit by light transmitted through the reel unit. Further, above the reel M50, there is stored a below-described spinning drum substrate K for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53).

  Above the reel M50, a main control board M for controlling the entire game, which will be described later, is stored. To the left of the reel M50, the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. The sub-control board S, which will be described later, controls the control of various effects performed by using the above-described control. The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change a setting), which will be described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing a set value and canceling an error. Button M30 is connected. In FIG. 2, the setting key switch M20 and the setting / reset button M30 are not shown, but may be provided at appropriate positions on the main control board M (for example, when the front door DU is opened). If not, it is sufficient if it is provided at a position where human access is difficult).

  Below the reel M50, a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals are provided, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire spinning-type gaming machine P is provided. E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through the coin shooter D90 and are paid out from the outlet D240. In addition, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the spinning-type gaming machine P is provided on a front surface of the power supply board E (also referred to as a power supply unit E). The details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the path (selector) of the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the rotating-type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion reception sensor D10s serving as a path of a game medal inserted from the medal insertion port D170 near the door substrate D, and a game medal discharge port D240 below the insertion reception sensor D10s. And a coin shooter D90 for guiding the player to the vehicle. The insertion receiving sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on dimensions and accepting only game medals that conform to standard dimensions, and determines that the game medals are not adapted by this function. The medal (or other foreign matter) that has been given is configured to be refunded to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. If the player inserts a game medal before the player operates the start lever D50 (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medal is selected by the insertion reception sensor D10s, and only the game medal that satisfies the standard is selected. The medals that are thrown into the hopper H40 and do not satisfy the standard pass through the coin shooter D90 and are returned to the discharge port D240. On the other hand, when the game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is not valid), the game medal inserted regardless of whether or not the standard is satisfied. Is returned to the outlet D240 through the coin shooter D90. A medal insertion sensor, which will be described in detail later, is provided inside the insertion reception sensor D10s (at the back of the flow path), and when a game medal that satisfies the dimensional standard and is accepted passes therethrough, the first insertion sensor D20s. The signal is detected by the second input sensor D30s, and the signal is supplied to a main control board M described later.

  Next, a sensor relating to medal insertion will be described in detail. The game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first pass through the insertion reception sensor D10s. The insertion receiving sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed down to turn on and the game medal can pass normally through the passage. . Further, with such a configuration, when a foreign substance that is not a game medal (a foreign substance that does not satisfy the standard, for example, a diameter smaller than the game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed down. Not done. Such medals cannot pass through the passage because the medals cannot be kept upright (the medals fall down), and are paid back to the outlet D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input acceptance sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine that there is an error (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off) even when the on time continues for a predetermined time or more. .

  When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, the game medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s immediately after passing. This insertion sensor (first insertion sensor D20s and second insertion sensor D30s) is composed of two sensors (adjacently arranged at a distance smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off status (the transition sequence of the on / off combination of the first closing sensor D20s and the second closing sensor D30s, etc.) and the on / off time. Is configured.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to a front view and a top view of the medal payout device H in FIG. The medal payout device H operates the settlement button when there is a credit (game medal electronically stored inside the gaming machine) or a betted medal (medal inserted for starting a game). It is activated when a game medal is paid out or a prize is paid out. In operation, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 about the disk rotation axis H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout apparatus H are displaced by the discharge urging means H70 and flow down from the game medal exit H60 toward the discharge port D240. The payout sensors (the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s) are composed of two sensors, and the on / off state of each sensor (the ON / OFF state of the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s). Various errors can be detected by monitoring the transition order of the combination of OFF, etc.) and the ON / OFF time. More specifically, for example, when normally passing through the game medal exit H60, the displacement of the discharge urging means H70 causes the first payout sensor H10s to be turned off and the second payout sensor H20s to be turned off. 1 payout sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout The sensor state transition is such that the sensor H10s = off, the second payout sensor H20s = on, the first payout sensor H10s = off, and the second payout sensor H20s = off. Therefore, when a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected. , An error can be exemplified.

  Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of a spinning-type gaming machine in the present embodiment. In the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number (the maximum number of gaming medals that can be bet in one game) is 3, and the number of frames on each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20. The effective line for which the winning determination is made is one line of “upper left reel M51, middle middle reel M52, lower right reel M53”. The maximum payout number is 11 and the minimum payout number is 1 (the association between the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (pull-in priority order) is “re-gaming role → small role (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus”. For example, if the re-gaming role and bonus are simultaneously established, , The symbol combination serving as the re-game combination is stopped and the bonus cannot be won. When the bell and the watermelon are established, when the stop button is pressed at a position where both of them can be retracted (a position within 4 frames to the stop position for winning), the small payout with a large payout number is given priority. It is configured to retract. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and the number of frames on each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), and the configuration of effective lines is changed (for example, 5 horizontal 3 lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem if the line is changed to one line of the lower reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. In addition, as the pull-in control when a push order small combination in which a different profit is given to the player depending on the push order is won, a small combination with a large payout number when operated in a predetermined correct answer push order is used. Is controlled so that it is pulled in with priority (number-of-sheets priority control), and if the operation is performed in the wrong push order different from the correct answer push order, stop display is possible (the position within 4 frames from the stop operation is displayed). Among the symbols (arranged), a control (a number priority control) for increasing a winning possibility (a number of winning combinations among a plurality of possible winning combinations is the most likely to win) is performed.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of a spinning-type gaming machine in the present embodiment. As shown in the drawing, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 (0 to 19), and the symbols are "black seven", "white seven", and "white seven". Sheep, blank, bell, replay A, replay B, watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Here, “blank” is a symbol included in the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute the winning combination, but a symbol that constitutes the winning combination that includes “blank”. As a combination, for example, “watermelon B / replay A / blank” is replay 02. It should be noted that the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the number of symbols is increased or decreased.

  Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbol combinations exist for each condition device, and as will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, either The one symbol combination is configured to be stopped and displayed on the activated line (the above-mentioned one line). Even when the same type of symbols are not available on the activated line, the player can easily see the same symbols in a line on lines other than the activated line when viewed from the player (in the case of watermelon, the middle stage is It is structured so that three watermelon symbols are aligned in a straight line on one of the reels, such as aligned in a horizontal line). Further, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols to be a first-class BB combination (which is a so-called first-class special accessory which is a continuous accessory operation device, but may be simply referred to as a BB combination hereinafter), 1 type BB-A (RB-A is continuously operated and finished with paying out more than 264 sheets) and 1 type BB-B (RB-B is continuously operated and 132 sheets are "Black Seven / Black Seven / Black Seven" which will be completed when the payout exceeds the amount) and "White Seven / White Seven." Which will be the 1st type BB-C (continuously operating RB-B and ending when the payout exceeds 132 sheets). It has 3 symbol combinations with "White Seven". In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first-class BB combination is won and the BB is executed (the character object operates), one game is executed in all the games in the BB while the BB is executed. The lottery table is referred to, and a winning combination (small winning combination, re-playing combination) other than the accessory is configured to be drawn (a method in which the table referred to in the role drawing is not switched during execution of one BB). And may be referred to as an all-JACIN type hereinafter). Note that the format of the first-class BB winning combination is not limited to this, and the tables to be referred to in the winning combination lottery may be switched during execution of one BB. Further, when the RT state is "RT1" and the symbol combination which is the replay 04 corresponding to Nos. 14 to 16 is stopped and displayed, it is configured to shift to RT0 (for details of the RT state, see See below). Since "RT0" is more unfavorable to the player than "RT1", the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" may be referred to as a fall. In addition, when the symbol combination which is the replay game 05 corresponding to No. 17 is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" can be stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and the No. 18 is displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 05 is stopped and displayed, "white seven" can be stopped and displayed in the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, when the push order bell, which is a condition device for "winning-A1" to "winning-A6" described later, is won, if the reels are stopped in the most advantageous pushing order for the player, the numbers 21 to 27 The symbol combinations corresponding to "winning prize 01" to "winning prize 03" are stopped and displayed, and 11 game medals are paid out, while the reels are stopped in a pressing order different from the most advantageous pressing order for the player. , Symbol combinations corresponding to "winning 08" to "winning 11" corresponding to Nos. 39 to 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In the figure, "-" indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "bell-bell" corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed, 11 game medals can be acquired regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the middle reel M52.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in the present embodiment. In the figure, the condition device number is referred to as a winning number, and the condition device number may hereinafter be referred to as a winning number. In the present embodiment, the re-gaming combination is provided from re-gaming-A to re-gaming-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), in the stop order and stop positions of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Accordingly, the re-play combination to be stopped and displayed may be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in the item “condition device” in the rightmost column, a plurality of left reels M51, middle reels M52, and right reels M53 are arranged in accordance with the stop order and stop positions. “Condition device (name)” in the third column from the right is configured such that condition devices of different types can be stopped and displayed, and condition devices having the same winning number among the plurality of kinds of condition devices are collected. The item is illustrated. Specifically, for example, in the "replay-A" which is a condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, "replay" is performed according to the stop order and stop positions of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three types of condition devices "01", "replay 02", and "replay 03" can be stopped and displayed. The “condition device (name)” may be simply referred to as a condition device. In addition, a condition device related to re-play such as "re-game 01" may be referred to as a re-game combination, and a condition device for which a game medal is paid out by winning a prize such as "win 01" may be referred to as a small combination. The condition device that causes the BB to start when a stop display such as "1st class BB-A" is displayed may be referred to as a BB role. In addition, when the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB combination and the small combination are overlapped, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the selected small combination is stopped. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a displayable position, the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not stopped and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed, while the symbol When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol is not stopped (retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small win is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the BB win Is configured to stop. Specifically, for example, in the case of winning "1 type BB-B + winning-C" which is the condition device of the winning number 21, "cherry 12" or "13 winning" and "1 type BB" Either Black Seven which is -B "can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, in the case where the reels are stopped in the order of the left reel M51 → the middle reel M52 → the right reel M53, (1) at the first stop, the symbol numbers 0 to 4 (FIG. When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the (reel array of No. 12) is located, the symbol number 4 corresponding to "winning 12" is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52. Also, regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, "Prize 12" is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "winning 13" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to is stopped, and "winning prize 13" is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "1" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "seed BB-B" is stopped. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing at which the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1 The symbol number No. 18 corresponding to "seed BB-B" is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers Nos. 13 to 17 are located in the lower stage of the right reel M53 at the third stop. In this case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "1 type BB-B" is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing at which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1 The symbol No. 18 corresponding to "seed BB-B" cannot be stopped, and none of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

  Next, in the "role" item, the role of the "condition device (name)" is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to the winning number 1 is in the order of pressing the stop button. Regardless, it is a condition device related to the re-play that the re-play role whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. The "reverse push white 7 set replay" corresponding to the winning number 2 is RT regardless of the order of pushing the stop button. Although it is a condition device related to the re-game in which the re-game combination that does not change the state is stopped and displayed, the right reel M53 is pressed by reversely pressing (stopping the reels in the order of the right reel M53 → the middle reel M52 → the left reel M51). No. 18 to No. 2 range, middle reel M52 range of symbol Nos. 9 to 13 and left reel M51 range of symbol No. 5 to No. 10 are stopped at the operation timings located at the bottom of each reel. Operate buttons And by, the right reel M53, "white Seven" is stopped and displayed in the lower part of the center reel M52 and left reel M51, white Seven has been configured to appear to be aligned in the lower part when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game which was won in the re-game-B and was selected in the AT-additional lottery, by performing an effect of instructing the player to aim for "white seven" by pressing in reverse (details will be described later), the player was elected in the AT-additional lottery. It is configured to notify the player to the effect. “Successive push black 7 replay” corresponding to the winning number 3 is a condition device related to a replay in which the replaying game whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed regardless of the pressing order of the stop button. Stopping the reels in the order of the left reel M51 → the center reel M52 → the right reel M53), the range of the symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of the symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, and the right reel By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of the symbol Nos. 13 to 17 of M53 is located in the lower part of each reel, "Black Seven" is displayed in the lower part of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Is stopped and the player sees black sevens as if they were aligned at the bottom. In addition, in the game that was won in the replay game-C and was selected in the AT-additional lottery, an effect of instructing the player to aim for “Black Seven” by pushing forward (details will be described later) was executed, thereby winning the AT-additional lottery. It is configured to notify the player to the effect.

  Further, in “RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 4, which one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is used as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated Or) is a condition device in which the re-game combination that is stopped and displayed may be different, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the re-game 01, re-game 02 or re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift. Is stopped and displayed, and when the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the re-game 04 that can shift the RT state from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, “RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 options)” corresponding to the winning number 5 indicates which one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is the first stop reel (which stop button is operated. Depending on whether or not), the re-game combination that is stopped and displayed may be different, and when the first stop reel is the middle reel M52, the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the re-game 04 which can shift the RT state from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in “RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 6, which one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is used as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated Depending on whether or not), the re-playing combination that is stopped and displayed may be different, and when the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the re-play 01 or the re-play 03 that the RT state does not shift is displayed as a stop. When the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the re-game 04 that can shift the RT state from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

  The "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are condition devices in which the winning combination may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected. For example, “left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3” and “123” are stopped in the pressing order of “left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53”. For example, in the case of "winning A-1" (winning number 7), when "123" is stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (the answer is correct in the order of pushing), the maximum number of obtained sheets is reached. The symbol combination of “winning 01” in which eleven game medals can be obtained is stopped and displayed. Incidentally, "123" of "push order bell 123" or the like indicates a push order (reel stop order) with which the maximum number of wins in the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in the pushing order other than the pushing order in which the maximum number of acquired coins can be acquired, that is, if the answer is not correct in the pushing order, one payout is made. In the AT-related state such as the "AT state", the navigation order of the push order of the replaying game and the bell is displayed (the push order indicating the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and the "normal game state" is displayed. , Etc., a plurality of gaming states with different profit rates of the player can be created in which the pushing order is not navigated to. Note that the state regarding the AT will be described later.

  In addition, the “common bell” corresponding to the winning number 13 can acquire 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of winning medals even if any of the prize 04 to the prize 07 are stopped. It is a condition device that can be acquired, and may be referred to as a bell regardless of the order of pushing. The “watermelon A” corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (any of the watermelon A and the watermelon B) can be easily aligned in a parallel line. Reference numeral 14 indicates that three watermelons A are arranged in the middle stage of each reel. Further, “watermelon B” corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured such that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) are easily aligned on a diagonal line. For example, the 66th prize in FIG. 16 is such that three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward and to the right like watermelon B in the upper part of the left reel M51, watermelon B in the middle part of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A in the lower part of the right reel M53. In addition, the “BB medium weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)” corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device that allows three bells to be aligned on the activated line. This is a condition device in which the AT additional lottery is executed by performing. The “BB middle strong rare small role (V-bell-aligned)” corresponding to the winning number 18 is a condition device in which the bell can be stopped and displayed on the upper left reel M51, the middle middle reel M52, and the upper right reel M53. Although details will be described later, this is a condition apparatus in which an AT-additional lottery is executed by winning during BB.

  Next, in the item “bonus winning information”, numerical values 0 to 3 are distributed for each winning number. In the present embodiment, a winning number that does not include a bonus (BB combination) has 0 as bonus winning information, and a winning number (19) that includes 1 type BB-A as a winning number that includes a bonus (BB combination). 1. The bonus winning information of 1, the bonus winning information of the winning number (20 to 23) including the 1 type BB-B is 2, and the bonus winning information of the winning number (24 to 27) including the 1 type BB-C is 3 I am trying. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which BB is established and which BB combination is won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are allocated for each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning numbers (winning number 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 corresponding to the bonus) that do not include the replaying role and the small role are set to 0 as the winning / replaying winning information. The 1 to 18 winning / replay winning information is distributed for each condition device with respect to the winning number including the replaying role or small winning combination. By storing the winning / re-game winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information on which re-gaming role or small role has been won. The details of the winning / re-game winning information will be described later.

  Next, numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned to each of the winning numbers in the item "effect group number". By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. The details of the effect group number will be described later.

  Next, in the item of the payout group number, numerical values from 0 to 13 are allocated for each winning number. The main control board M stores the payout group number, and executes the lottery process related to the AT by using the stored payout group number when performing the lottery related to the AT (for example, the AT lottery, the AT addition lottery). Program and data capacity required for the operation can be reduced. Note that the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery are not executed even if the condition device with the payout group number of 0 is won. On the other hand, when the condition device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT additional lottery can be executed. The details of the payout group number will be described later. In addition, even when the condition device in which the payout group number becomes 0 is won, an AT lottery or an AT addition lottery may be configured to be executed. In such a case, the payout group number may be changed. It is preferable that, when the condition apparatus that becomes 0 wins and the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery is executed, the lottery result is always lost (non-winning).

  Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery probability in which a winning number (also referred to as a condition device number, also referred to as a winning role) and a bonus (also referred to as a BB role, BB) for a small role, a replaying role in the present embodiment are determined by the role lottery means. It is a list showing (winning rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

  First, the lottery probabilities in "RT0", "RT1", and "RT2" when the BB is not operated will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning combination (particularly, the re-gaming combination) may be different depending on the RT state, and the “re-gaming combination” (the total appearance of all re-gaming combinations) In the case of “RT1”, the appearance rate is higher than the other RT states. Also, "re-game 04" that can be stopped and displayed with the winning numbers 4 to 6 (a so-called falling re-game role, "RT1", and a symbol corresponding to the re-game role in a situation where the bonus is not won. When the combination is stopped and displayed, the subsequent transition to “RT0” will be mainly won in “RT1” and almost no appearance in “RT0”. In "RT2", the "replay 04" that can be stopped and displayed with the winning numbers 4 to 6 can appear, but the RT state does not shift even when "replay 04" is stopped and displayed. In addition, when "replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", a falling effect (for example, effect display device S40) that is an effect to notify that "RT0" has been transferred, that is, the RT state has fallen When "replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT0", the fall effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the BB has been won because the "replay 04" is stopped and displayed, but the falling effect has not been executed, and the entertainment of the game can be enjoyed. You can improve your sex. In the case of such a configuration, a sound effect output when "replay 04" is stopped and displayed and a replay combination other than "replay 04" (for example, "replay without RT state transition" 01 ") may be configured to be different from the sound effect output by being stopped and displayed, and by such a configuration, the player recognizes that" replay 04 "is stopped and displayed. It can be configured easily. In addition, a state relating to an AT in which push-order navigation does not occur (for example, a "normal game state", which may be referred to as a non-AT game state) and a state relating to AT in which push-order navigation may occur (for example, " There is a case of staying in "RT1" in both cases of "AT in progress" and sometimes "AT gaming state". At this time, when a winning number that has a possibility of shifting (falling down) from “RT1” to “RT0” is won, and a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall down when in a non-AT gaming state, The output may not be output based on the operation of the start lever D50. As a result, in the non-AT game state, it is possible to shift the game state without notifying the player that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0". On the other hand, in the AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall down is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-gaming role in which the RT state does not fall down is displayed stopped. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). This allows the player to operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified, being careful so that the RT state does not fall. In addition, "re-game 05" that can be stopped and displayed with the winning number 2 or 3 (re-play role that can inform that the player has won the AT additional lottery when stopped and displayed in the AT state) is mainly "RT1". , And almost never appears in other RT states. Incidentally, the state transition regarding the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination which becomes the re-play combination will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the push order navigation for notifying the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player can be executed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. . Incidentally, there is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the bonus is configured so as to be able to overlap with the small winning combination, and is duplicated with a part of the watermelon A, the watermelon B, and the cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are condition devices in which the bonus and the small winning combination are overlapped.

  In addition, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB has been won and the BB is inactive, the winning combination of the winning numbers 20 and 24 is the BB combination (a single combination that does not overlap with the small combination. In the case of winning the BB combination, which may be referred to as a single BB combination or a single BB combination), the new winning of the BB combination becomes invalid, and only the small combination winning is valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of being "RT2" and winning (carrying over) one type BB-A, when the winning number "1 type BB-C" is won, , Class 1 BB-C related to the winning number 24 is invalid. In other words, the situation is the same as when the “Loss” of winning number 0 is won. The carried-over 1st class BB-A will continue to win. In addition, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB has been won and the BB is inactive, the small winning combination of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB winning combination are In the case of winning the overlapping condition devices, the new winning of the BB combination becomes invalid, and only the winning of the small combination becomes valid. Specifically, for example, in the situation of being “RT2” and winning (carrying over) 1st class BB-A, the winning number 21 “1st class BB-B + winning-C” was won. In this case, the type 1 BB-B associated with the winning number 21 is invalid, and only the winning-C is valid. In other words, the situation is the same as in the case where the winning number "winning prize-C" is won. The carried-over 1st class BB-A will continue to win. The overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small winning combination, and may be overlapped with a part of the re-playing combination. For example, some of the re-play combinations of winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus combination. In this way, the bonus is also overlapped with the condition device including the RT transition replay (re-playing role in which the RT state can be transferred), so that the bonus is won even when the condition device including the RT transition replay is won. There is a possibility that the bonus will not be denied even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, so that the player can be expected. In the case of such a configuration, the RT state is controlled so as not to shift even if the RT shift replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have transitioned to the RT state (shifted to the RT state where the replay probability is relatively low), but the replay probability has not become low (frequently win the replay), etc. Therefore, it becomes possible to enhance the interest in the game, such as the possibility of winning the bonus.

  Next, the lottery probability in "1st type BB-A, B, C" during BB operation will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, while the BB is operating, the winning number 13 is “common bell”, the winning number 17 is “BB medium weak rare small role (oblique bell alignment)”, and the winning number 18 is “BB medium strong rare small role”. (V-shaped bell-matching) ”is configured so that three small wins can be won, and while the BB won in the“ AT status ”is in operation,“ BB medium weak rare minor-winning (diagonal bell-matching) ”. Alternatively, when the "BB medium strong rare small combination (V-shaped bell alignment)" is won, the AT additional lottery is executed (details will be described later).

  In the upper part of the figure, the small combination appearance rate when the set value is 1 is illustrated. In the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to be different depending on the set value (six levels in this example). Specifically, the setting number in setting 1 is 3204, the setting number in setting 2 is 3404, the setting number in setting 3 is 3604, the setting number in setting 4 is 3904, the setting number in setting 5 is 4204, and the setting number in setting 6 is Is 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate. With such a configuration, for example, when the player proceeds with the game while measuring the number of appearances of the common bell (the number of wins), the player frequently wins the common bell, thereby providing a game machine that is playing. The game can be advanced while expecting that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate. The appearance rate of the common bell is configured to be different depending on the set value. However, depending on the winning of the common bell, AT lottery, AT addition lottery, and high-probability state transition lottery described later are not executed. It is configured so as not to affect the transition lottery of the state related to (also referred to as the lottery relating to the AT).

  The middle row of the figure is an expected value list when there is a push-order navigation. In the figure, when the push-order navigation is executed in a state where the push-order navigation can be executed on the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as "AT in progress", the reel is stopped according to the navigation. Average number of payouts per game (the average number of medals paid out by a winning small role, also called the expected number of game media obtained in one game) and the expected medal increase / decrease value per game ( This is the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when playing a game with three bets. If it is greater than 1, the expected value will be positive and the number of medals will increase. The value becomes negative and medals will decrease). The average number of payouts per game is "the sum of the numbers of replay combinations (the sum of the numbers of winning numbers 1 to 6) x the number of payouts (3) in the replay combinations + small wins (11) Total number of characters (small role appearance rate) (total number of characters for winning numbers 7 to 16) x number of payouts (11 cards) in small character (11 characters) / total number of all characters (65536) ) ”. The expected medal increase / decrease value per game can be calculated as "average payout number per game / number of inserted medals per game (3)". The number of medals inserted per game (the number of game media inserted when playing one game) is three, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, expectation of increase or decrease of medals per game The value is configured to be larger than 1. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, “RT1” has a relatively largest expected medal increase / decrease value per game. The numbers in the figure do not consider the increase or decrease of medals due to bonuses. That is, when a game progresses in a situation where a push-order navigation occurs (also referred to as an optimal operation mode or an advantageous operation mode), medals are increased in "RT1". Although not shown in "RT0" and "RT2", the medal increase / decrease expected value per game is smaller than 1 in a situation in which the push-order navigation does not occur, and the medal is less than 1. Will decrease. In the present embodiment, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game is larger than 1 when there is a push-order navigation in “RT0” or “RT2”, but the present invention is not limited to this. ] Or “RT2” may be configured such that the expected medal increase / decrease value per game when there is a push-order navigation is smaller than 1. Incidentally, when the symbol combination which becomes the re-play combination is stopped and displayed, the bet number (3) in the previous game is actually bet, but in calculating the expected medal increase / decrease value in this embodiment, the medal is calculated. The calculation is based on the assumption that three pieces are paid out. Note that one game may be referred to as one game.

  The average number of payouts per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 4.737915039 when the RT state is “RT1”. Is 3.67137146 when is "RT2". In addition, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 1.579305031 when the RT state is “RT1”. In the case where is "RT2", it is 1.2237790487, and when there is a push order navigation, the case where the RT state is "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The numerical value is a value in the case of setting 1. Note that the winning numbers and the lottery probabilities of bonuses relating to the small combination and re-combination combination are merely examples, and for example, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in “RT2” in which BB is being internally established (when there is a push order navigation) May be configured to be less than 1. With such a configuration, in a situation where the push order navigation occurs and when it is “RT2” (when BB is being established internally), if the bonus is not aligned in a game in which the bonus can be aligned, In addition, the possession medals gradually decrease, and in the game where the push order navigation occurs and when the RT is “RT2” (BB is being established internally), a game in which the bonuses can be aligned intentionally. By not setting up bonuses, it is possible to prevent a strategy in which the number of medals is increased. Specifically, it is preferable to design the probability of losing in "RT2" to be higher than the winning probability of all the small wins (winning-A1 to winning-I) in "RT2". It is preferable to set the winning probability of the re-gaming combination so that it is designed as follows. It is preferable to design so that it does not become too much). In addition, in "RT2" of this example, the winning probability of all small wins is 18784/65536, the winning probability of all replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of losing is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and the probability of losing is designed to be higher than the winning probability of all small wins.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of the first type BB-A is assigned the same numeral 40 for all of the settings 1 to 6. Further, as the appearance rate of the type 1 BB-C, the same numeral 160 is assigned to all of the settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, with respect to the appearance rate of the 1st type BB-B, 160 is assigned to setting 1, 180 is assigned to setting 2, 200 is assigned to setting 3, and 4 to setting 4. 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, with respect to the appearance rate of the first type BB-B, the assigned number differs depending on the set value. In this way, the 1st type BB-A and the 1st type BB-C have no difference in setting (the 1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C are sometimes referred to as the no setting difference BB and the no setting difference bonus) The first type BB-B functions as a BB having a setting difference (the first type BB-B may be referred to as a BB having a setting difference and a bonus having a setting difference). In addition, the appearance rates of 1st type BB-A, 1st type BB-B and 1st type BB-C are uniform regardless of the RT state ("RT0" and "RT1"). The appearance rates of the 1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C (total) are the same regardless of the set value, but the 1st type BB-B (total) appearance rate differs depending on the set value. Although the appearance rate summed up as the appearance rate of the first type BB-B is the same even if the setting value is different, the appearance rate for each winning number may be configured to be different depending on the setting value. Even when configured, the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a BB with setting difference.

  Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12, an electrical schematic configuration of the rotating body type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is centered on the main control substrate M for controlling the progress of the game, the sub control substrate S, the door substrate D, the spinning drum substrate K, the power supply substrate E, the relay substrate IN, A setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, and the like are connected so that data can be exchanged. It should be noted that the solid line in the figure indicates the movement related to data exchange, and the broken line in the figure indicates the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this. For example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN or the door board D without going through the main control board.

  A main control board (may be referred to as a main control means, a main board, a main control means, a main board, and a main game section) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game performed in the spinning-type gaming machine P. On the main control board M, a main control chip C is mounted. The main control chip C is connected to a CPU C100 (also referred to as a CPUMC), a built-in ROM C110, a built-in RAM C120, etc. via a bus so that data can be exchanged with each other. Has been mounted. The main control board M receives a signal or the like indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub-control board S, the door board D, and the spinning board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or a control signal) toward K or the like. For example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information) is directed toward the sub-control board S. ), The sub-control board S can execute the pushing order navigation on the effect display device S40.

  In addition, the sub-control board SC (also referred to as a sub-control unit, a sub-board, a sub-control unit, a sub-board, and a sub-game unit) S also has the sub-control chip SC mounted thereon in the same manner as the main control board M described above. The sub-control chip SC includes a CPU SC100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is configured so as to be able to exchange data with each other via a bus. In addition, the sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a torso backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Is connected. Here, the torso backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates a symbol drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes various control commands received from the main control board M and outputs drive signals to various LED lamps S10, speakers S20, effect display device S40, rotating body backlight S30, etc. Is being directed. In the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example, the player can select nine ranges of the upper, middle, lower, upper, middle, and lower reels of the left reel, and the upper, middle, and lower stages of the right reel. A plurality of LEDs are provided as the torso backlight S30 so that they can be individually identified. As an example, the LED corresponding to the upper stage of the left reel is turned on and all the other LEDs are turned off, whereby the player can identify that the upper stage of the left reel is turned on. In addition, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the turning type gaming machine according to the present example changes the lighting mode of the turning backlight S30 to indicate that the predetermined symbol combination has been stopped and displayed. (Referred to as "backlight effect").

  On the door substrate D, the above-described input receiving sensor D10s, first input sensor D20s, second input sensor D30s, stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and start for starting rotation of the reel M50. A lever D50, a payout button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals and ending the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying the state of the game (not shown). The inserted number display lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the re-game lamp D290, the insertable lamp D300, the special game state display device D250, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270, the credit number display device D200, the advantageous section A set of display devices such as a display YH, etc., for determining whether the front door is open / closed, canceling errors, and setting values. Door switch for performing further D80, is determined to be incompatible after being turned a medal (or other foreign) blocker D100 like to reimburse the outlet D240 and are connected. The door board D is connected to the main control board M so that data can be exchanged. Therefore, when the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the settlement button D60, and the like provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal relating to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, a signal indicating that the insertion reception sensor D10s has detected the passing of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

  In addition, a turning drum motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a turning sensor K20 for detecting the rotation position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the turning drum substrate K. The rotating body substrate K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the rotating body motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 by the rotating body sensor K20. I have. In the spinning machine of the present embodiment, a so-called stepping motor (sometimes called a stepping motor) is used as the spinning motor K10. The step motor is set to 480 steps as the number of steps for the reel M50 to make one rotation. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols are set on each reel (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) with a substantially uniform size. Is set to 24 steps (= 480/20). It should be noted that there is no problem if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel are changed.

  Further, the medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. The action to put out The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s for determining whether or not medals are normally paid out and measuring the number of paid out game medals, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

  The power consumed by these various control boards and the boards is supplied from a power board E (a board that controls the presence or absence of power supply by a power switch E10). In FIG. 12, the manner in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is indicated by broken-line arrows. As shown in the figure, the main control board M and the sub-control board S are directly supplied with electric power from the power supply board E, and various boards (door board D, swirl board K, relay board IN) Electric power is supplied through the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of an AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and the power is converted into a specified DC voltage and then supplied to the control board and the board.

  Further, on the main control board M, a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change a setting) described later, a setting / reset capable of changing a set value, releasing an error, etc. Button M30 is connected. Further, the main control board M is a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stop of the reel M50 (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and an "AT mid state" which is a state relating to AT which is advantageous to the player. AT lottery means for executing the AT transition lottery to shift to AT, and AT additional lottery for increasing the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60) that is the number of games that can be stayed in the "AT in progress" state And an AT addition lottery means to be executed.

  Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the present embodiment.

  The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (shown by rounded rectangles) indicating start, end, return, and the like. ing. Further, in the case where the details of the processing steps are shown in another flowchart, the reference to the other flowchart is shown as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle whose left and right lines are double lines). . Here, at the game machine development stage, game machines with different specifications are also being developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine (a subroutine executed by the game machine with different specifications is executed in the main process). Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left, so that processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed is prevented from being executed due to noise or cheating.

  First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPU C100 of the main control board M after the power of the spinning-type gaming machine P is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, in step 1000, after turning on the power of the spinning-type gaming machine P, in step 1002, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of a timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is started. Instead, only the type of timer interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, a flowchart relating to a timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes setting of serial communication (setting of speed, data length, data transmission method) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the top address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area, power-off / power-off recovery). Checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held) and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

  If Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completed flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). Check result) is checked to determine whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPU C100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the processing at power-off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area and determines whether the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. If Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes reading of the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag, and returns to the processing at power-off according to the restored stack pointer.

  If No in step 1016, in step 1024, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in a register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-returnable error process described later.

  If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, displayed on the number-of-payouts display device D270) (for example, in the register area). To set). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-returnable error process described later.

  If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completion flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and checksums all RAMs (step 1904). With reference to the result of the check in 1006), it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding a storage area for storing set values (set value data) in the RAM. For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. The range that is not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area for storing the set value (set value data). The total number of games in the “advantage section” and the total number of game sections (advantage section + (Normal section) The number of games, the result of calculating the staying ratio of the "advantageous section", and the like are also ranges that are not included in the initialization range of the RAM. With such a configuration, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the "advantageous section" in the game (advantageous section ratio). In addition, the calculation process of the advantageous zone ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. The advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at an interval of 5 seconds in the order of “advantageous section ratio → continuous bonus ratio per 6000 games → principal ratio per 6000 games → cumulative continuous bonus ratio → cumulative bonus ratio”. Is displayed. Note that the continuous bonus ratio is “the number of payouts when the RB is operating / the total number of payouts”, and the bonus ratio is “the number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is operating. / Total number of payouts ". On the other hand, if No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range including a storage area for storing set values (set value data) in the RAM. Set (for example, set in the register area), and then go to step 1034. Next, in Step 1034, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area in the initialization range determined in Step 1030 or Step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

  Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (the value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area or the like) mounted on the main control board M is not set to the value at which the special game is executed. (In order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the processing for determining the execution of the special game is executed due to noise or cheating immediately after the start of the processing of the program). Although not shown, when storing random numbers such as winning random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured and the bytes storing information related to the random numbers are stored in the bytes. It is preferable to configure such that only information related to the random number is stored (various timer values and other information is not stored) (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, noise is generated. (To prevent information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process related to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, which is also called a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPU C100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed by 1 to 6, it is necessary to perform the initialization of the RAM and return the set value to "1" when the set value becomes "0". Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the set value (set value data) as 0 to 5, the correction processing of the set value (set value data) after the initialization of the RAM (step 1106 and The processing of step 1108) can be omitted, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. If Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = a value that is most unfavorable to the player) to the set value (set value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the payout amount display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, "88" for lighting all segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the set display LED (not shown) (the display related to the set value is a value obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112 Move to. As described above, the payout amount display device D270 is also used when notifying the pushing order. With such a configuration, for example, when a malfunction occurs in a part of the 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be lighted), incorrect information can be reported when informing the pressing order. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, by making the payout amount display device D270 turn all seven segments "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to confirm whether or not the seven segments are out of order. It can prevent giving profits. Further, as a configuration relating to the display of the set value (set value data), the storage of the set value display RAM for storing the data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value. An area may be provided and the set value may be displayed by referring to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the mode is changed to the setting change mode to the sub control board S side is executed.

  Next, in step 1112, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. If Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) (if the added set value (set value data) exceeds 5) The set value (set value data) becomes 0), the process proceeds to step 1116. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1112, the process proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 is switched from off to on. In the case of No at step 1116, the process moves to step 1112, and the processing of steps 1112 to 1116 is looped. If Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays that the operation of the setting change device has been completed on an error display LED (not shown), and turns off the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value (set value data) is deleted, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command to end the setting change mode to the sub-control board S is executed.

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the non-recoverable error processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 (and called in other flowcharts) in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPU C100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (from now on, the flowchart relating to the timer interrupt time process described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (in this example, 0 to 6, which are display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, the display output to various LEDs and the drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the output to each output port is completed. If Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process concerned. When the power supply voltage drops, the reset signal is input and the process ends. (That is, since it enters an infinite loop, it does not accept any operation that prompts a return). Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1310, the process moves to step 1306. Note that the processing of steps 1306 to 1310 is processing for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, the information regarding the error, the game progress status at the time of the error, etc., are hall computer side. It is possible to output to).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first game) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the data (for example, the upper limit number of bets, the winning winning line, etc.) in the RAM area necessary for the game. Incidentally, the step 1203 is data for clearing the data (for example, condition device number (winning number), effect group number, instruction information) used in the previous game (of "0" for clearing the RAM address). The process of setting (data) in the RAM is also included. The condition device number, the effect group number, the instruction information, etc. may not be cleared, but the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (eg, “RT0”) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the command relating to the RT state (command to the sub side) set in step 1204. The process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. Also, in step 1704, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub side, it is not always necessary to transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a state relating to the AT in the game (for example, “AT in progress”) (step 1420, step 1429 in FIG. 21, step 1435 in FIG. 22, 23. Steps 1439, 1443, and steps 1444-3 and 1444-4 shown in FIG. 23 are set for the AT). Next, in step 1207, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command relating to the state related to the AT set in step 1206 (command to the sub side). Further, the processing for setting the state relating to the AT may be executed in steps 1416 and 1428 of FIG. 21, step 1438 of FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 of FIG. Moreover, when transmitting the state regarding AT to the sub side, it is not always necessary to transmit, and the state regarding AT may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, "advantageous section") in the game (the game section determined in steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 of FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, it is provided with a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H, and two full detection electrodes DE (which will be described later in detail) capable of penetrating into the medal auxiliary tank HS. It is determined by the conduction / non-conduction of the current due to (Yes) (when the current is conducted through the medal, it is determined to be full). If Yes in step 1209, the process moves to step 1218.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error using a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, the current is not conducted by the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS and the setting / It is determined whether or not the reset button M30 has been pressed. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off). Control is passed to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process moves to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPU C100 of the main control board M permits the medal insertion reception (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the re-play combination), and the next processing (step 1220). Process). Here, in step 1218, an ON process of the blocker D100 (a process of forming a medal channel) is performed. Specifically, when the replaying game is established in the previous game, the ON processing of the blocker D100 is performed on condition that the current number of stored credits is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Run. In other words, if the current stored number (credit) is the predetermined value, the ON processing of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, if the replay combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is uniformly turned on. With such a configuration, even if the replaying game is established, if the number of stored credits does not reach a predetermined value, a game medal can be inserted, and the game medal such as "RT1" can be inserted. When staying in the RT state (for example, “RT1”) where the probability of winning the replaying role is higher than the RT state, or the replaying role that is visually difficult to understand is a replaying role (replaying as a small role: Even when the bell-bell-bell or the symbol combination in which the cherry stops on the left reel on the invalid line is stopped, the player can play the game with a good rhythm (without feeling uncomfortable).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second game) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not gaming medals have been bet or have not been saved (no credit exists). If Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPU C100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on, the condition is satisfied). Or not. If Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout amount display device D270, the credit amount display device D200, and the inserted amount display light D210). The value is displayed (transition to the setting confirmation mode), and the process proceeds to step 1221 on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, a process for transmitting a command indicating the start of the setting change mode to the sub-control board S side, and the setting change mode when the ending condition of the setting change mode is satisfied Is executing a process for transmitting a command indicating that the process ends. In the case of No at step 1220 or step 1221, at step 1224, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes management related to insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPU C100 of the main control board M confirms the acceptable number of game medals. Next, in step 1226, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on. If Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is ON (in the present embodiment, insertion of a medal is performed). It has two insertion sensors for detecting, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received). If Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first closing sensor D20s and the second closing sensor D30s are off (first closing sensor D20s or second closing sensor D20s). When the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that the accepted one game medal has passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been accepted. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the credits are the upper limit number (50 in this example) and the bet number is the maximum number (3 in this example). If YES, and if YES, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (state in which the medal flow path is not formed). In addition, in the case of No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and in the case of No in step 1226 or step 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

  Next, in step 1232, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the settlement button D60 has been operated. If Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of credits or a betting game medal. If Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and the game is played. The payout of one medal is executed. Next, in step 1236, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is ON (in the present embodiment, for detecting the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that the payout operation for one game medal is being performed). If Yes in step 1236, the process moves to step 1247. Here, although not explicitly stated on the flow chart, when the previous game is a re-game combination, only the remaining number of credits is the object of settlement.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). . Specifically, it is determined whether or not a medal has not been paid out for a predetermined period of time even though the hopper drive signal is transmitted to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1241, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to on) in step 1242. Next, in step 1244, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been released (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), Move to 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process moves to step 1244.

  Next, in step 1247, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on. After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of the one game medal, for which the payout operation has been performed, is completed). If Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag, and proceeds to step 1233. Note that if No in step 1241 or step 1247, the process moves to step 1236.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1232 or Step 1233, at Step 1251, the CPU C100 of the main control board M has the start lever D50 enabled (for example, a predetermined number of game medals for starting the game are inserted). It is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. If Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the set value in the RAM area is within a normal range (0 to 5 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a process of obtaining a random number and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (process of step 3600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. If the result of step 1251 is No, the process moves to step 1220.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control processing (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is a state in which the AT additional lottery is possible. Here, in the present example, the states related to the ATs in which the AT addition lottery can be executed are “AT-in-progress state”, “additional specialization state”, “specialization precursor state”, and “advantageous BB state”. In the “advantageous BB inside middle game”, the AT counter value may be larger than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is in order to prevent a situation in which the player does not intentionally arrange the BB symbol combinations in the “advantageous BB inside middle game” to be more advantageous to the player. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute the AT addition lottery in the “advantageous BB inside middle game”, and in such a case, it is possible to win the AT addition lottery in the “advantage BB inside middle game”. Alternatively, it may be configured not to notify immediately, but to notify that an AT addition lottery has been won at the timing when BB has ended thereafter or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games has been added.

  If Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the additional game execution processing described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1259, the process shifts to step 1400. In this game number addition execution processing, it is possible to execute a lottery using a different lottery table according to the state related to the AT, but the lottery probability does not differ according to the set value (using the same lottery table). Executing a lottery) is preferable. Next, in step 1400, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an AT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a condition device number management process described later.

  Here, the states related to the AT in this example will be listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 30). (1) The "low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to transition to the "AT in progress" has not been acquired), and the bonus combination has not been won. The "low probability state" is a so-called "normal state", and thus may be referred to as a "normal state". (2) "Normal BB inside game" is a state in which the BB combination has been won in the "low probability state", the BB combination has not been won, and the AT lottery has not been won. (3) "Normal BB state" means that when the winning combination for the BB combination in the "low probability state" is not achieved and the AT lottery is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, it is a state that is executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “normal BB inside game”. (4) "High probability state" is a state in which the player has not won the AT lottery (has not acquired the right to shift to the "AT in progress" state) and has not won the bonus role. In this state, it is easier to win the AT than in the above-mentioned “low probability state”. As will be described later, when a new "high-probability state" is entered, the "low-probability state" is not entered until the number of high-secure obstacle games has passed (5) "AT in progress state". "Is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the AT remaining game number (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, when the continuous lottery described later is won, the AT counter is set to a predetermined value and the "AT in progress" state continues (6) "Specialization omen state" Is a state in which the right to shift to the "add-on specialized state", which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily added to the "AT in-state", is acquired. (7) The "addition specialized state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily added to the "AT in progress state". (8) “Advantageous BB inside game” means winning the BB role in the “high probability state”, “AT in progress”, “special omen state” or “addition specialization state”, and the BB role is It is in a state where no prize has been won. (9) "Standby BB inside game" is a state where the BB combination has been won in the "low probability state", and the BB combination has won the AT lottery, and the BB combination has not won. . (10) The "advantageous BB state" is a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role that is won in the BB role in the "high probability state", the "AT in progress state", the "special omen state" or the "additional specialized state". When the stop display is displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination in the "advantageous BB inside game" is displayed in the stop display, or the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", and , BB winning the AT lottery, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "standby BB inside game" It is a state that is sometimes executed. (12) “Restorability state” is a state related to the AT that is transferred when the AT counter value is 0 and the continuous lottery described below is not won. In the “recoverable production state”, a later-described revival lottery is executed, and when the revival lottery is won, the state shifts to “AT in progress” (the AT counter is set to a predetermined value) and the revival lottery is not performed. If it is elected, it will move to the "low probability state".

  Next, in step 1550, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M requests the drawing point creation request (determined to determine the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the stop order). Or as required according to the stop positions of other reels). If Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1262, the CPU C100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point, and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, if No in step 1261-1, the process moves to step 1263. As described above, in the “BB inside game”, in the game in which the push order bell is won, the stop button is not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1). Even if you do not stop the stop button in the order of "left → middle → right") (when you stop the reels in the wrong pressing order), there are 11 combinations of symbols that will be paid out by reel stop control. Configured to win. Next, in step 1263, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance availability check. Next, in step 1264, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. If Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the stop button operated (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). . On the other hand, if No in step 1264, the process moves to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an all-reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, the right reel M53) have stopped. If Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPU C100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stoppable position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (if the winning combination determined by the internal lottery does not match, it is abnormal. Is determined). In addition, in step 1269, whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal is determined whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, and the winning combination is won. In the game being played, when the operation of the stop button is executed in an operation mode in which the winning combination can win the prize, the reel position actually stopped is not normal (the prize determined by the internal lottery becomes possible Even if the winning combination does not appear to be stopped by the player), if the reel stop control has been normally executed by the internal processing of the gaming machine, the game medal based on the winning of the winning combination will be displayed. The payout is configured to be performed. If Yes in step 1269, the process moves to step 1274. On the other hand, if No in step 1269, in step 1270 the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the display determination error display (for example, sets it in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process moves to step 1261-1.

  Next, in step 1274, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a payout process of a game medal by winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out a game medal. The game medal obtained by the winning exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). In this case, the payout of the game medal is executed. If Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven) and executes payout of one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on. Then, it is determined that the payout operation for one game medal is being performed). In the case of Yes at step 1277, the process moves to step 1286.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1276). . In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the medal empty error display with the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been released (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and proceeds to step 1283. The process proceeds to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process moves to step 1281.

  Next, in step 1286, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on. After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of the one game medal, for which the payout operation has been performed, is completed). If Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag, and proceeds to step 1290. In addition, in the case of No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning which becomes Yes in step 1275) is completed. If Yes in step 1290, the process moves to step 3400. In addition, if No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277, if No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400, and if No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

  Next, in step 3400, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a remaining game number management process described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a later-described RT state transition control process. Next, in step 1750, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an AT state start control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game section shift control process described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game ending process (for example, clearing the number of bets, shifting a game state, and the like), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1202).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table in which a winning number, a set number for comparison with an acquired random number, and the like are stored and used when executing the internal lottery). Then, control goes to a step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the winning number associated with the set internal lottery table address. Winning / re-game winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if the bonus and the small role are overlapped and the bonus is won, or if the bonus and the replaying role are overlapped and the winning is performed, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are determined from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. Specific generation processing will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same payout group number and the same number for comparison with the obtained random number, and is stored in the ROM of the main control board M in advance. It is remembered. For example, the payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the number is the same for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 that are the re-playing game. Since the numbers are the same for the six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12, which are the pushing order bell role, the number of repetitions related to the pushing order replaying role is 3, and the pushing order bell The number of repetitions for the role is 6. In addition, the lottery table used when acquiring the winning numbers 4 to 6 which are the push order replaying game and the lottery table used when acquiring the winning numbers 7 to 12 which are the pushing order bell role are a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the payout group number associated with the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

  Next, in step 3610, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery is won, the determination (lottery) is not executed for the subsequent internal lottery table address, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1259). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process moves to step 3610, and the processes of steps 3610 to 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 3618, in step 3620 the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address relating to the next payout group number), moves to step 3604, and moves to step 3604. Perform the following processing. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT is the “in-AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, or the “additional specialization state”. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the payout group number relating to the game to an additional during AT (winning number that can add the remaining number of AT games in the “in AT state”). In this example, it is determined whether or not the payout group number (1, 3 in this example) related to the replay-B, the replay-C, and the winning-D. If Yes in step 1504, the process moves to step 1514. In addition, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, when the state related to the AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the payout group number related to the game in the BB additional role (“ In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add the remaining number of AT games, and in this example, is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I). Is determined. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is “additional specialization state”. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M may add the payout group number relating to the game during the specialization additional role (in the “additional specialization state”, the number of remaining AT games and In the "AT state", the winning number is the winning number which does not add the remaining AT game number, and in this example, the payout group number relating to replay-A, replay-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6) (In this example, 2, 13) is determined. If Yes in step 1508, the process moves to step 1514. If the result of step 1506 or 1508 is No, the process moves to step 1518.

  Next, in step 1514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the number-of-additional-games lottery table at the time of winning and determines the number of AT-added games based on the payout group number of the game (for example, in the margin). In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether the latched random number value falls within any range). Determining the number of AT-added games is also referred to as performing an AT-added lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of added games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the command related to the determined number of added games (the command is directed to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S receives the command, It is set whether the additional number of AT games has been executed or not and the number of additional games can be recognized). In addition, in the case of the payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are payout group numbers related to the winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) including the bonus, the lottery regarding the AT (AT lottery, AT addition lottery) can be executed. .

  Here, the lottery table shown outside the drawing is an example of the additional game number lottery table at the time of winning. In the AT state ”,“ special omen state ”,“ addition specialization state ”,“ advantageous BB state ”), when the additional role is won at the time of winning, based on the payout group number related to the game, The number of games to be added to the AT is determined by lottery from “0” to “300”, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. When "0" is determined, the number of remaining AT games is not increased (when "0" is determined, the AT additional lottery may be referred to as "non-win").

  Further, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT additional games when the winning combination is won is a value as shown in the figure. As a specific calculation method, the winning combination is the watermelon A. In this case, {numerical value (600) × AT additional game number (0) + register number (100) × AT additional game number (10) + register number (300) × AT additional game number (30) + register number ( 24) × AT additional games (100)} / total number of copies (1024) = 12.1 (game).

  Next, when the winning combination is replay-B or replay-C, the number of placements (500) × the number of AT-added games (0) + the number of placements (200) × the number of AT-added games (50) + The number (300) × the number of AT-added games (100) + the number of (AT) (24) × the number of AT-added games (300)｝ / the total number of placed numbers (1024) = 46.1 (game). be able to.

  Next, when the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, winning-A1 to A6, {numerical value (300) × AT additional game number (10) + numerical value (600) × The number of games to be added to the AT (30) + the number of games to be added (124) × the number of games to be added to the AT (50)} / the total number of games (1024) = 26.61 (game). In addition, when the winning combination is replay-A or replay-D1 to D3, winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games is added only when the state related to AT is “additional specialization state”. Has become.

  Next, in the case where the winning combination is a BB medium-rare rare combination, {numerical value (800) × AT additional game number (0) + register number (100) × AT additional game number (10) + register number (100 ) × AT additional game number (30) + register number (24) × AT additional game number (100)} / total number of register numbers (1024) = 6.3 (game).

  Next, in the case where the winning combination is a BB middle strong rare role, $ (300) × the number of AT-added games (0) + number of (300) × AT-added games (30) + (400) ) × the number of AT-added games (50) + the number of set (24) × the number of AT-added games (300)｝ / total number of set (1024) = 35.4 (game).

  In the present embodiment, when an AT-addition lottery is executed, the average value of the number of AT-added games may be different depending on the type of the winning combination. The average values are configured not to differ. Here, in the case of performing the AT-added lottery based on the winning number, for example, when executing the same processing as the AT-added lottery with the winning number 7 and the winning number 8, the winning number is 7. Although it is necessary to execute a process of determining whether the number is 8 or 8 as in the present embodiment, by executing the AT addition lottery based on the payout group number, the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are obtained. When the same process is executed as an AT-addition lottery, the process relating to the AT-addition lottery of either the winning number 7 or the winning number 8 is executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2. Can be done.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPU C100 of the main control board M may judge by the winning number (or the winning / replaying winning information, or the payout group number) related to the game. ) Determines whether or not it is a winning number relating to re-game-B (reverse-play white 7 replay, which is a re-play in which white seven can be aligned in a straight line by stopping by reverse push). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an AT game number increase by re-game-B, in other words, the AT additional game number by winning re-game-B is It is determined whether it was not 0. If Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPU C100 of the main control board M issues a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and reverse push (“right → middle → left”) causes an invalid line). (The effect for instructing to align the white seven is executed) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a command other than a reverse press avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side and a reverse press (“right → middle → left”)). The pressing order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the white sevens on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to step 1526. Even if No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that the winning number (or the winning / re-game winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game is a re-playing-C ( It is determined whether or not it is a re-play that allows Black Seven to be in a straight line on the invalid line by stopping the game by pressing it forward (forward pressing black 7 replay). If Yes in step 1526, in step 1528 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an AT game number increase by re-game-C, in other words, the number of AT additional games by winning re-game-C is It is determined whether it was not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPU C100 of the main control board M issues a forward push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and forward push (“left → middle → right”) causes an invalid line). (The effect for instructing to align the black seven is executed) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sends a command other than the normal push (“left → middle → right”), which is a command to the sub control board S side. The pressing order is instructed, an effect for not aligning the black sevens on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Even if No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). Note that in the present embodiment, the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command are transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives these commands. The control board S is configured to be able to execute the effect related to the push-order navigation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the AT additional lottery is won, the fact that the AT additional lottery is won and the number of AT additional games are related When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT-added games related to the process of step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S side and the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side pushes the navigation sequence. You may comprise so that the execution timing and the production mode of the production regarding may be determined. As an example, the re-game-B is a winning game, and the sub-control board S side selects the effect mode instructing the reverse push in the game that received the command (the game in which the AT game number is added). The sub-control board S side may not perform the effect of instructing the reverse push in the game in which the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S, and a predetermined condition after that (for example, a specific re-game combination (for example, In the game satisfying the game-B or C)), the effect of instructing the push order that allows 7 sets in the ineffective line may be executed. Alternatively, in the game in which the re-game-B has been won and the sub-control board S has received the command (the game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and thereafter, Of a predetermined number of games (for example, a continuous effect may be executed at the same time (in which case, the final effect of the continuous effect may be executed at the same time), the AT game number is added to the effect (displayed on the effect display device S40). This is an effect in which the display relating to the number of remaining AT games is increased, and for example, "+ 30G" may be displayed.) In this example, the number of remaining AT games is also displayed in the effect display device S40. The display is configured to be displayed, and the display and the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side may be the same or may be different. B won In the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side (the game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed and the subsequent predetermined condition is satisfied. As an example of the case where the AT game number addition effect is executed, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) that fuels the winning of the bonus is being executed on the side of the sub-control board S (replay in the bonus- Since the probability of winning B is low (including 0%), the player will be aware that the bonus is not won if the push order in which 7 sets are possible is notified). The information that the sub control board S side determines that the AT additional game number has been added to the main control board M side and the AT remaining game number has been added is as follows. (1) AT remaining game After the information is added to the AT and the lottery is performed, the information is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S. After that, the sub control board S side transmits the information about the AT remaining game number transmitted last time and the AT remaining game transmitted this time. Calculate the difference with the information regarding the number and grasp the number of AT addition games won in the AT addition lottery. (2) Sub-command of the AT addition game number obtained as a result of the AT addition lottery on the main control board M side It is transmitted to the control board S. When the AT addition lottery is not won, a command indicating that the AT addition lottery is not won is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side is concerned. When the command is received, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the effect mode of the effect related to the push-order navigation, for example, the re-game-B is a winning game. Then, the sub-control board S side presses the game in which the command is received (the game in which the number of AT games has not been added) is middle-pressed (the first stop is the operation of the middle-stop button, which is a push order for avoiding 7 sets). It may be configured to select and execute an effect mode instructing. Although the AT additional lottery is executed on the main control board M side, the sub-control board S side determines that the AT additional game number has not been added by (1) information on the AT remaining game number. After the AT addition lottery, the data is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. After that, the sub-control board S calculates the difference between the information about the remaining AT game number transmitted last time and the information about the remaining AT game number transmitted this time, and grasps the number of additional AT games won by the additional AT lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information about the AT remaining game number transmitted this time from the information about the AT remaining game number transmitted last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery has not been won), (2) Main control board As a result of the AT addition lottery on the M side, a command regarding that the number of AT addition games is 0 is transmitted to the sub control board S side.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first sheet) of the AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is an AT-executable state. In the present embodiment, the only AT-related state in which the AT lottery can be executed is the “high probability state”, and by winning the BB in the “high probability state”, the “advantageous BB inside game” is achieved. After that, when the BB combination is won, the game shifts to the “advantageous BB state”, and when the executed BB ends, it shifts to the “AT in progress state” and the AT counter shows the initial number of AT games. A value of 50 times will be set. Even if the BB is won in the "low probability state", the "normal BB inside game" is moved to and the "AT in-game state" is not moved thereafter. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the BB is won in the "normal game state", the BB combination may be used as an opportunity to win the AT lottery. In such a case, if the player wins BB in the "normal game state" and wins the AT lottery triggered by the BB role, the game shifts to "advantageous BB inside game", and then BB By aligning, the state shifts to the “advantageous BB state”. Incidentally, in a state where the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the BBs are not aligned, the game section may be the "advantageous section" or the "standby section". If Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device relating to the game is an AT lottery combination (in this example, a first-class BB-A or a first type BB combination having no setting difference BB combination). It is determined whether or not the species is BB-C). In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning number of the BB alone with no setting difference (winning numbers 19 and 24) and the winning number of the BB with no setting difference and the winning numbers (winning numbers, 25, 26, 27) in which the small wins overlap. Both are AT lottery players. If Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game to be “advantageous BB inside game”, and proceeds to step 1410. Also, in the case of No in step 1402 or step 1404, the process proceeds to step 1410. In the present embodiment, the AT win rate (whether winning or not winning) relating to the AT lottery is configured to be different when the state relating to the AT is different, but when the state relating to the AT is the same, Has the same AT win rate in the AT lottery even if the set values are different (when the BB is won in the “high probability state”, the AT is always won regardless of the set value = then, “ AT state ").

  Next, in step 1410, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT after the next game has been determined. If Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is the “low probability state”. If Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a state promotion combination (a small state that can be shifted from the “low-probability state” to the “high-probability state by winning”. In this example, it is determined whether or not it is “Cherry”. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPU C100 of the main control board M wins at a predetermined probability (in the present example, it is 1/2, and if there is no difference depending on the set value, there is no problem in changing). A high probability state shift lottery is executed. Next, in step 1418, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPU C100 of the main control substrate M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game to be the “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

  Further, in the case of No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is the “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the counter value of the high security obstacle counter KHc to 1 (the high security obstacle final game, and is the tenth game since the high probability state). ) Is determined. If Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the low-probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in this embodiment, when the state related to the AT is the “high probability state”, the game section is the “advantageous section”, and when the game section is the “advantageous section”, the push order is The navigation is executed one or more times, or the "advantageous section" is not ended unless the predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) is continued. Even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, the "high-probability state" is configured not to end if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push-order navigation has not been executed more than once. ). In addition, when the BB role is won in the “advantageous section” and the BB is executed, the “advantageous section” is set at an arbitrary timing even if the pushing order navigation is not executed even once in the “advantageous section”. It may be configured to be terminated. If Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game to be the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low-probability transition condition is satisfied when the push-order navigation is executed once. In addition, as a push order combination (a winning number in which the winning combination is different depending on the reel stop order and the profit ratio of the player is different), a combination with a maximum payout number of 8 and a combination with a maximum payout number of 11 is provided. In such a case, the low-probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation of the winning combination in which the maximum payout number is large and the maximum payout number is 11 is performed once. Incidentally, even if the result of Step 1410, Step 1414, Step 1418, Step 1424, Step 1426 or Step 1428 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1430. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new high probability state is entered, the high securement obstacle counter KHc is set to 10 games, which are high securement obstacle games, until the counter value becomes zero. Is configured so that it does not enter the "low probability state". Note that such a lottery system is merely an example, and for example, the low probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games after the transition to the "high probability state" (the stay in the "high probability state" is guaranteed. ), After the lapse of the 10 games, a lottery for transitioning from the “high probability state” to the “low probability state” with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) may be executed in each game. The AT lottery combination (low-probability AT lottery combination, high-probability AT lottery combination) and state promotion combination have the same winning probability in all set values.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second sheet) of the AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is the “AT in progress state”. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is equal to or larger than a predetermined value (4 in this example). Here, in the present embodiment, when the AT-related state is the “AT in progress”, the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the AT remaining game number is 4 or more, the watermelon B In the case where the right to transition to the "specialization state for specialization" can be acquired with a probability of 1/2 when elected to, and the state related to AT is "AT in progress state" , If the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, even if the player wins the watermelon B, the lottery (specialization The state transition lottery may be performed), and the state is not shifted to the “specialization omen state” and the “additional specialized state”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery that wins the watermelon B and acquires the right to shift to the "additional specialized state" (also referred to as a specialized state transition lottery It may be configured to execute), and in such a configuration, the right to shift to the "addition specialized state" by winning the watermelon B in a situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less is provided. When the lottery to be won is won, it may be configured such that the next game won in the lottery can be (shift to) the "special omen state" or "additional specialized state", or the AT counter value It may be configured such that it can be (shift to) a "specialization warning state" or an "additional specialization state" when a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0) is reached, or the game won in the lottery. After the execution of a certain number of games from "special omen state" or " Place may be configured as capable of becoming a specialized state "(which can migrate to). Further, when shifting to the "addition specialized state", it is not always necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state", and for example, it is possible to directly shift from the "AT in progress state" to the "addition specialized state". You may. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device relating to the game can execute a lottery to acquire a special right to move to the special transition role (addition special state). It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the specialization state transition lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 1434, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialization state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to be the “special omen state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1431, in step 1436, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, the AT final game is started). judge. If Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery to win with a predetermined probability (2/3 in this example). Next, in step 1438, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1438, in step 1439 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the AT-related state after the next game to be “AT in progress”, and shifts to step 1444-1 (AT state shiftable condition is set). In order to be satisfied, the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to be the “recoverability production state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. Even if the result of Step 1430, Step 1432, Step 1434, or Step 1436 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1444-1. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game and the continuous lottery is won, the initial value of 50 games is set again in the AT counter M60. That is, when the addition of the number of AT games is not taken into consideration, the AT of 50 games per set has a playability of continuously looping by 2/3. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the AT final game. For example, the first game of AT (after the initial value is newly set in the “AT in progress” or the AT counter M60) is set. The continuous lottery may be executed in the first game). With such a configuration, it is already determined whether or not the next set (AT related to winning the continuous lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT will continue) in the “AT in progress” state. , The production during AT can be different when the continuous lottery is won and when the continuous lottery is not won. For example, when the continuous lottery is won, the counter value of the AT counter M60 When B is 1 or more (in the middle of AT execution), BGM can be changed (a song plays, etc.), or an effect in which it is definite that the player has won the continuous lottery can be executed.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third sheet) of the AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a resilience availability state. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device relating to the game is a winning combination in the resurrection role (“resurrection enable / disable effect state”) so that the next game is executed. It is determined whether or not it is a role that can be shifted to the “AT-in-progress state”, in other words, a role that allows the AT to be pulled back. Here, in the present embodiment, the resurrection role is a role that includes any one of the watermelon A, the watermelon B, the cherry, and the bonus role (only the BB role without the setting difference and not including the BB role with the setting difference). It is said that when the condition device related to the game becomes a resurrection hand, the resurrection lottery is won. If Yes in step 1444-2, in step 14444-3, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “AT-in-progress state”, and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set to the AT counter in order to satisfy the AT state shiftable condition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game to be the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1445. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1441-1, the process proceeds to step 1445. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the game is the AT final game and the continuous lottery is not won, the state shifts to the “resurrection feasibility production state”, and the resurrection is performed in the “resurrection feasibility production state”. If the lottery can be won, the game shifts to the “AT state” from the next game. Note that the “resurrection availability state” is “advantageous section”, but the lottery relating to the AT in the “during the AT state” (AT addition lottery, continuous lottery, etc.) is not executed, and the resurrection lottery can be executed. The "state during AT" and the "state for resurrection effect production" are different in the manner of executing the lottery relating to the AT.

  Next, in step 1445, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT after the next game has been determined. If Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state transition condition regarding the AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, “specialization omen”). It is satisfied when 10 games, which is the number of precursor games, are consumed in “state”). If Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game and moves to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, “specialization”). When the number of precursor games is exhausted in the "precursor state", it is determined as "additional specialized state"). Even if No in step 1445 or step 1446, the process proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPU C100 of the main control board M guarantees the high securement obstacle counter value command (in this example, the command to the sub side, the current high securement obstacle counter value, in other words, the high probability state is guaranteed. The command relating to the remaining number of games) is set, and the routine goes to Step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state regarding the AT after the next game is determined to be "advantageous BB inside game". In the case of Yes in step 1449-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high security obstacle counter KHc to zero in step 1449-2, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1450). Even if No in step 1499-1, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1450).

  In the present embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to be different depending on the lottery state, and when the BB combination (the BB combination without setting difference) is won in the “low probability state”, the AT transition drawing is won. No (there is no transition to the “AT in progress” state) On the other hand, if the BB role (the BB role with no setting difference) is won in the “high probability state”, the AT transition lottery is won (then in the “AT in progress state”). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is set as the AT lottery, and the “high probability state A” and the “high probability state” are set as the states related to the AT which is the “advantageous section”. If the condition device A is won in the "high probability state A", the AT transition lottery is won by 1/10, and the condition device is in the "high probability state B". If you win A, you will get 1/2 AT transfer lottery It may be configured so as to be selected. When the AT transfer lottery is won, the state shifts to the “AT preparation state”, which is the preparation state before the transition to the “AT-in-progress state”, as the state relating to the AT, and then a predetermined end condition (for example, “AT preparation state”). The state may be changed to the “AT state” when 10 games have passed since the transition to the “state”.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the conditional device number management process according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is the “advantageous section”. If Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPU C100 of the main control board M issues a command relating to the winning / re-game winning information (a command on the side of the sub-control board S, for example, winning / re-play winning relating to the game. Command related to information). Next, in step 1454, the CPU C100 of the main control substrate M is a condition device relating to the game is a winning combination having a pressing order (a winning condition is different depending on the pressing order, for example, winning-A1). Or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a pushing order number) in the game based on the winning / replaying winning information related to the game and gives an instruction. The number is stored in a RAM address for storing the number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push-order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub-control board S can display the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. The instruction number is determined (the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number (not shown) even when the push-order navigation is not executed. When executing the push order hitting game, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the push order hitting game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). See Figure 34 for the image). Next, in step 1466, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for the display image of the push order navigation display on the sub control board side). In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels which is the most profitable to the player on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as displaying the push order navigation or the push order navigation display. ing. In the present embodiment, the push-order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push-order display device D270 displays the push-order of “left → middle → right” as “= 1”. It is configured to display "= 1" both in the case of the push order bell and in the case of the push order replay. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the push order bell, the case of displaying the push order navigation of “left → middle → right” on the push order display device D270 and in the game relating to the push order replay. You may comprise so that it may become a display mode different from the case where the push order navigation of "left-> center-> right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of the display mode of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of the winning / replay winning information.

  If No in step 1451 or step 1454, in step 1468, the CPU C100 of the main control board M performs a mask process on the winning / replay winning information of the game, and stores the masked information in a predetermined address of the RAM. To memorize. Here, if the winning / replaying winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and if the winning / replaying winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, a high profit related to the game is obtained. Therefore, the pressing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in the present example, the sub-control board S is executed after performing the masking process {the process of concealing the winning / re-game winning information (particularly the information related to the pressing order)} on the winning / re-game winning information related to the game. , So that it is not possible to recognize a high profit push order. As a masking method in the present embodiment, a plurality of winning / re-game winning information (winning / re-gaming winning information having a similar role is preferable, and for example, the RT state shifts depending on the pushing order. Performance as a single production group number (for example, winning / replay winning information 4-6 is production group 4 etc.) with a plurality of winning / replaying winning information) in which a symbol combination that is a re-playing combination can be stopped and displayed. The group number is transmitted to the sub control board S side. The mask processing method is not limited to this. For example, after the provided prize / replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example), a new prize / replay after mask processing is performed. You may comprise so that winning information may be provided. Also in such a case, a plurality of winning / replay winning information out of the existing winning / replay winning information, such as the effect group number, is converted into one winning / replay winning information as the winning / replay after mask processing. It is desirable to provide the game winning information (for example, the winning / re-game winning information 4 to 6 is replaced with the winning / re-game winning information 19 which is the winning / re-game winning information after mask processing (the newly provided winning-information).・ Replay winning information). If it is determined that the game is to notify operation information (push order navigation) on the basis of the state of the AT on the main control board M, etc., winning / re-game winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In a game in which the operation information is not notified, the effect group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. With this configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side or may not be transmitted.

  Next, in step 1470, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets (for example, sets in the register area) a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing, Moving to 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the bonus winning information (the sub side can recognize whether or not the bonus is won) (for example, (Set in the register area), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1550). In the present embodiment, the winning / re-game winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number, but the derivation method will be described later. Further, as shown in the lower part of the figure, as a display example of the push order navigation, in the case of "AT in progress", (1) if the falling re-playing combination is included → the falling re-playing combination is not stopped and displayed In the order of navigation, in the case of (2) bell (single / 11), the navigation order is the one with the largest number of payouts. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game section is the “advantageous section”, the winning / re-game winning information (the type of winning combination and the most advantageous pushing order for the player is displayed on the side of the sub-control board S. While the game section is a "normal section", the sub-control board S is configured to be transmitted. The production group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the side. That is, in the “advantageous zone”, the winning / re-play winning information related to the game including the winning / re-play winning information in which the game result and the player's profit are different depending on the pushing order is directly stored in the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in the gaming section which is not the “advantageous section”, the winning / replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and the winning / replay in which the result of the game and the profit of the player are different depending on the pushing order. In the case of the winning information, the effect group number in which the information related to the pressing order is concealed is transmitted to the sub control board S side.

  When the game section is not the “advantageous section” or the like, a mask process is executed when transmitting the winning / re-game winning information determined by the main control board M to the sub-control board S to determine the effect group number. Then, the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board S. The production group number is the winning / replay winning information related to the winning / replaying winning information, which is related to the winning role having the same role (for example, the replaying role including the falling replaying role, the push order bell, etc.). Are grouped and numbered. It is configured such that mask processing (processing for concealing the winning / replaying winning information (especially information relating to the pressing order)) is executed on the winning / replaying winning information related to the game and then transmitted to the sub-control board S. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the information related to the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, and the pushing order (reel stop order) that is a high profit related to the game is recognized.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0 or not. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) to be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). Is a timer that measures If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU C100 of the main control board M newly sets the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 to a minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) and starts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the pressing order related to the ended game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the stopped reels related to the ended game and the draw-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPU C100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data relating to the ended game. Next, in step 1562, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an output request during the reel rotation start standby state related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1260). In other words, the process of step 1562 and step 1564 makes it possible to send a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the reel starts rotating.

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the “advantageous section” is one of the game sections, and a situation of the game that is advantageous to the player when the state related to the AT is “the AT state”. It is a game section that is easy to be set at. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M initializes the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc−1 (which is a decrement counter and the maximum number of games that can stay in the “advantageous section” is 1500). The counter value of a counter which is set as a value and can be decremented for each game during a period of “advantage section” is decremented by one.

  Next, in step 3408, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is the “AT in progress”. If Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPU C100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value. Next, in step 3412, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is the high probability state. If Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPU C100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high security obstacle counter KHc, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700). Even if No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT-related state that the push-order navigation can display is the “AT in progress”, the AT counter value for each game is decremented, but the “advantageous BB state”, In the case of "advantageous BB inside game", "special omen state" or "addition special state", the AT counter value is not decremented even if the game is executed. That is, when the "AT in progress" state transitions to the "special omen state" while the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains), the "AT in progress" is maintained while the AT counter value is maintained. It is configured to be able to make a transition (transition) from “state” → “prediction state of specialization” → “additional specialization state”. Even if the AT-related state is the “AT in progress”, it is possible not to decrement the AT counter value by 1 when the winning number including the bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is subtracted. You may control. For example, if the AT counter value is "30" and the game is executed and the bonus is won when the remaining AT remaining game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", the AT counter value is "30". "30 + α", which is a value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery related to the game, is stored, but is displayed on the effect display device S40 upon the operation of the start lever D50. "29" may be displayed as the number of remaining AT games, or "29 + α", which is a value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT additional lottery (note that "α" obtained by the additional lottery is , In the specific game after the game (bonus game start, during bonus game, at the end of bonus game, or after satisfying the predetermined condition after bonus game), without giving notice in the game You may notify "α"). Then, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is also decremented by one for each game in the "advantageous BB inside game", and an effect (for example, a bonus decision screen) that suggests bonus decision is output. Up to the number of remaining AT games can be subtracted for each game. With this configuration, when the bonus is won in a state where the push-order navigation such as the “AT in progress” state can be executed, the bonus win can be prevented from being immediately recognized by the player. In other words, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games that fuels whether or not the bonus is won can be executed using the effect display device S40 or the like to enhance the interest of the game. The number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is “30” or a value of “30” or more when the result of the AT addition lottery is selected and the result of addition is notified. Can be controlled to be displayed. When the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", the game is executed and the bonus is won, it is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display relating to the number of remaining AT games is "0", but while maintaining this state, a continuous effect over a plurality of games is played to fuel whether or not the bonus is won, and the AT counter value is "1". , A winning number (or winning / re-game winning information, or a winning group number) at which the game is executed and the AT additional lottery can be executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1". If the player wins and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games becomes “0” and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 becomes “0”. Further, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing the continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state shiftable condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transferable conditions are execution of RAM clear (initialization of RAM), replay stop display (in this example, replay 04 stop display), BB winning / starting. -It is configured to be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state can be moved and the RT state of the next game or later based on the satisfied RT state transferable condition (RT state transition of FIG. 28). (See the figure), and the next process (process of step 1750) is performed. Even if No in step 1702, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1750). In the present embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after stopping all reels. However, when shifting to "RT1", the shift timing may shift to when the lever is turned on. The timing of shifting the RT state (storing the RT number in the RAM) can be appropriately determined.

  Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are four RT states “RT0” to “RT2” and “one kind of BB-A, B, C”, and the RT state is satisfied by satisfying the condition indicated by the arrow in the figure. Will be transferred. As a specific example of the transition of the RT state, when the RT state is “RT1”, the RAM is initialized, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the transition is made to “RT0”. The replay game 04 is a stop display, specifically, when the left stop button is operated as the first stop when the “replay game-D1” is won in a situation where the RT state is “RT1”. The replays 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, in the case where the RT state is “RT1” and the “replay-D1” is won, if the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the replay 04 is stopped and displayed. , RT state shifts from “RT1” to “RT0”.

  When the RT state is “RT0” or “RT1”, the winning combination of BB is won and the winning combination of BB is not won in the winning game. ) And the RT state shift to “RT2”. When a BB combination is won at “RT2” (one type of BB-A, B, C is activated), the process proceeds to “one type of BB-A, B, C”. When the BB is completed at "one type BB-A, B, C" (the operation of one type BB-A, B, C is completed), the process proceeds to "RT1". When the state regarding the AT is the “low probability state”, the player wins the BB, and when the BB ends, the RT state shifts to “RT1” which is highly profitable for the player. In the state where the pressing order navigation does not occur, the pressing order of the incorrect answer when the “re-game-D1 to D3” is won (the first stop is three choices of the left button, the middle button, the right button, One of the three choices is in the correct push order and replays other than the replay 04 are stopped and displayed, and two of the three choices are in the wrong push order and the replay 04 is stopped and displayed). When the game is stopped, the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, and the game shifts from "RT1" to "RT0". If the state related to the AT is “high probability state”, “during AT state”, “specialization precursor state” or “additional specialization state”, BB is won, and if BB ends, RT state is set. Means that the game shifts to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to the AT is a state in which the push order navigation occurs. Even when "re-game-D1 to D3" is won, the re-game 04 Navigates in the order in which the correct answers are not stopped and displayed, so that "RT1" can be maintained.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control processing according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state shiftable condition is satisfied in the game. The AT state transferable conditions are, for example, (1) when the BB with no difference in setting won in the "high probability state" is completed, (2) when the continuous lottery is won, and (3) when the revival lottery is won. If it does, it will be satisfied. If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPU C100 of the main control substrate M newly triggers the "AT warning state" to trigger the number of AT initial games (50 in this example, "AT in progress"). The number of games in which subtraction is started after shifting to "state" is set in the AT counter M60, and the processing proceeds to step 1756. Even if No in step 1752, the process moves to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is a high-probability state. If Yes in step 1756, in step 1758 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT-related state of the next game is the high-probability state. If Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the number of high securement obstacle games (10 in this example) in the high securement obstacle counter, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 3500). Transition. Even if No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process moves to the next process (process in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and shifting to the "advantageous BB inside game", the BB is won to shift to the "advantageous BB state" and the AT game in the "advantageous BB state". When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the BB ends and the "advantageous BB state" shifts to the "AT in progress state". Specifically, when the number of AT games is increased by 30 in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state is changed to the "AT in progress", the AT counter is set to 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30). become. At this time, when the player is informed that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”, the player is informed that the AT initial game number is 80 at the start of the “AT in progress state”. Although it is desirable to notify it, as another notification method, the default value is set at the start of the "AT state" without performing the effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, it is shown to the player that 30 games have been added during AT (for example, immediately after the start of the “AT in progress” state or the state in which the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 is small). An informing method for producing an informing effect is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly understand whether the number of AT games has been increased in the “advantageous BB state” or how many games have been added. It is possible to enhance the interest in the additional presentation that suddenly occurs while the cause is unknown during AT (a state where push-order navigation can occur). In this example, the AT initial game number is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process of setting the AT initial game number is not limited to that in this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control processing in step 1400 described above. Further, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the number of initial AT games) is configured to be subtracted from when the game after the BB ends (state related to AT is "AT in progress"). (Do not start subtraction during BB). Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

  Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, “low probability state”, “normal BB internal medium game”, “normal BB state”, “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional special state” , "Advantageous BB inside game", "advantageous BB state", and "state of resurrection performance" for 10 ATs. By satisfying the condition indicated by the arrow in the figure, the AT is related. The state will transition. For example, when the watermelon B is won in the “AT-in-progress state” and the specialization state transition lottery in which the player wins at １ ／ is selected, the state transitions to the “specialization precursor state”. Further, when ten games have elapsed (digested) since the transition to the “specialization precursor state”, the state is shifted to the “additional specialization state”. Note that, as the game section, three low-probability states, a normal BB internal medium game, and a normal BB state are set in the “normal section”, and the “high-probability state” The state relating to the seven ATs of “state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”, “advantageous BB inside game”, “advantageous BB state”, and “state of whether or not resurrection is possible” is “advantaged section”. Is set. In other words, even if the states related to the seven ATs that are “advantageous sections” are transitioning (shifting), if 1500 games have elapsed without setting the “normal section”, the “advantageous section” is forcibly terminated. “Normal section” is set. Further, when the notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed is the “AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, or the “additional specialization state”, the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed. Also, the gaming state is maintained.

  As described above, in the “AT in progress” state, when the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuous lottery is not won, the “revival possible / impossible producing state” is set. When the resurrection lottery is won in the “resurrection availability state”, the state can be returned to the “AT state” again. On the other hand, when the resurrection lottery is not won in the “resurrection availability state”, the state shifts to the “low probability state”, and the “interest section” is changed to the “normal section”.

  When the BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A or 1st class BB-C) is won in the "high probability state", the BB without setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the "AT in progress state" ". Also, when the BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A or 1st class BB-C) is won in the “AT state”, the BB without setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends, It shifts to "AT state". In addition, when the BB without the setting difference (one type BB-A or one type BB-C) is won in the “resurrection availability state”, the BB without the setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends. Also shifts to the "AT state" (to win the resurrection lottery). In addition, the BB with the setting difference is won in the “state of the resurrection feasibility effect” (one type BB-B), the BB with the setting difference is activated, and when the “advantageous BB state” ends, the BB with the setting difference is alone. If the winning number related to the BB role (winning number 20) is reached, the state becomes “low probability” after the BB ends (because the BB role does not trigger the resurrection lottery), and the BB with the setting difference is rare. If the winning number is the same as the winning combination (winning numbers 21 to 23), the state becomes "AT in progress" after the BB ends (because the rare winning role triggers the resurrection lottery).

  In addition, when there is a setting difference BB (1st class BB-B) in the case of “advantageous section” and “high probability state”, the setting difference BB operates, and when the “advantageous BB state” ends, Transition to "high probability state".

  Further, the state regarding the AT to be shifted to after the “advantageous BB state” ends is the state after the BB that has been won during the AT (“the AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”) (setting difference). In both the presence BB and the BB without the setting difference), the state shifts to the state relating to the AT at the time of the BB win among the “in-AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, and the “additional specialization state”. After the end of the BB without setting difference, which has been won in the “high probability state”, the state shifts to the “AT state”. In addition, after the BB with a difference in setting won during non-AT (“high probability state”), the state shifts to “high probability state”.

  The AT-related state is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and for example, the AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in the “low probability state” or the “high probability state”, and the AT lottery is executed. It may be configured to shift to the “predictive state” by winning, and transition to the “AT in progress” state after 16 to 32 games have passed. In such a case, the predetermined condition device is If the AT lottery is executed by winning, and if the AT lottery is not won, the state shifts to "Gase sign state", and after 16 to 32 games, shifts to the "low probability state" or "high probability state". It may be configured to. Further, as a game section, a "standby section" different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided, and for example, when the AT lottery is executed by winning "Cherry", BB is set. If you win "BB + Cherry" that overlaps with "Cherry" and win the AT lottery, the state inside the BB until "BB" of "BB + Cherry" wins is set as "Standby section". May be. In this way, by providing the “standby section”, the BB is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery is not won, and the BB is won in the “low probability state” and the AT is selected. In the case of winning the lottery, until the symbol combination of BB is completed (until the advantageous zone indicator lights up), the advantageous zone indicator YH is off, so win the AT lottery. It is possible to encourage the player whether or not there is. Further, when the BB is elected in the "add-on specialized state", the "add-on specialized state" may be restarted after the end of the BB. In such a case, during the BB, As a BB won in the "addition specialized state", execute an AT addition lottery different from the BB won in the "AT in progress" (for example, win the AT addition lottery than the BB won in the "AT in progress") It is easy to play, and the number of games per one time is relatively large in addition to the number of AT games). In addition, when the BB is elected in the “special omen state”, it may be configured to shift to the “additional specialized state” after the BB ends. In such a case, during the BB, The AT additional lottery may be executed in the same manner as the winning BB in the "addition specialized state".

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section shift control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, a game section is provided as a section relating to the state of the game, and as the game section, a “normal section” which is relatively low profit for the player and a relatively high section for the player. It has two game sections, an "advantageous section" that is a profitable section. As an explanation of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. If Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the game section corresponding to the current AT-related state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is the “advantageous section”, in step 3514, the CPU C100 of the main control board M indicates that the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 0. In other words, it is determined whether the "advantageous section" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears all the information related to AT (therefore, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of stay games in the “special omen state”). Things will be 0). On the other hand, if No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous period end condition is a condition for ending the “advantageous period” except when the counter value of the advantageous period remaining game counter YKc-1 is 0, and for example, when the AT counter value is 0. When the push order navigation is performed a predetermined number of times, the case is displayed. In the case of No in step 3518, that is, in the case where the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “advantageous section” is finished and the “normal section” is set after the next game, information related to AT (the number of continuous AT games, the number of remaining AT games, etc.) All the information related to (1) is cleared, so that the condition for becoming the “advantageous section” again in the subsequent “normal section” will not be relaxed. The information related to the AT that is cleared by the processing of step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1, the flag indicating the gaming state, and the like. Further, although these pieces of information are also cleared by clearing the RAM at the time of changing the setting, depending on the clearing of the RAM at the time of changing the setting, the “condition device relating to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)” and the “RT state” , The information regarding the “number of stored sheets” and the like is cleared, but depending on the processing of step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section), “conditional apparatus relating to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)” and “RT state” , Information regarding the “number of stored sheets” and the like is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the setting is different from the clear range at the end of the “advantageous section” (for example, at the time of executing the process of step 3515). The RAM may be cleared when the setting is changed to retain the "conditional device relating to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT state". Further, the addresses in the range cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous. By thus continuing the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section", it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the start address to be cleared in the clearing process and the range of addresses to be cleared. In addition, when the “advantageous section” ends, a command relating to the end of the “advantageous section” is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to erase the game history such as information indicating that the "advantageous section" has been reached and information regarding how many "AT in progress" games have been executed. ing. However, when the RAM clear at the time of changing the setting is executed, the game history of the sub-control board S side, such as the fact that it is the “advantageous section” and the information regarding how many games the “AT in progress” has been executed. Will also be erased.

  When the "advantageous period" ends because the counter value of the advantageous period remaining game counter YKc-1 becomes 0, (1) when the current AT-related state is the "high probability state" In the next game, the AT-related state becomes a "low probability state". (2) When the current AT-related state is "advantageous BB inside game", the AT-related state in the next game is " "Normal BB inside game", (3) If the current AT-related state is "advantageous BB state", the AT-related state in the next game will be "normal BB state", (4) present If the AT-related state is "AT in progress", "special omen state", "additional specialized state" or "resurrection possibility producing state", the AT-related state is "low probability" in the next game. State "(AT For relevant information is cleared).

  Next, in step 3516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a game section after the next game to a “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous zone indicator YH because the "advantageous zone" has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. It should be noted that the advantageous section indicator YH is configured to be turned off when the “advantageous section” is completed and the “normal section” is set. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal is inserted in a game in which the "advantage section" ends and the "normal section" ends. In other words, it is sufficient that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off before the start lever D50 at which the next game can be started is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game to be “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3528.

  Next, in step 3528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines to set a new “advantageous section” in the next game (determined to set “advantageous section” from “normal section”). It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1. It should be noted that the predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed numerical value (1500 in this example) common to all set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1293). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3528, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1293). In the present embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the lighting of the advantageous section indicator YH is performed. The timing may be from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new “advantageous section” (the game in the “normal section”) to the timing at which the game medal can be inserted in the game in the new “advantage section” (new “ If the game before the “advantageous section” is a game related to the replay, the game is appropriately set during the period until the start lever operation becomes effective in the new “advantageous section” game). Is also good.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the present embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example). Is performed as a cycle.

  First, in step 1602, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes processing at the time of starting an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPU C100, checking an input port of a power failure detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power interruption is currently detected (during the interrupt process this time). In the case of No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process, which will be described later. On the other hand, if Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPU C100 of the main control board M generates the input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes a settlement button D60, a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a door switch D80, a setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, a power failure detection signal, a closing acceptance sensor D10s, and a first closing sensor. D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. is information related to the detection (that is, the presence or absence of operation of these operation members and the sensor detection state is sampled at the interrupt interval T). Be done).

  Next, in step 1610, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switch (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over a plurality of times of sampling, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. Can also be detected). Next, in step 6100, the CPU C100 of the main control board M performs a spinning drum drive control process (control of driving of the reel M50) of all reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53). Will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (the number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Even if No in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processes of steps 1612 and 1613 are unnecessary. Next, in Step 1614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off all the error flags (not shown, but the inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to errors, such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, and a door switch flag, are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side and a command indicating that no error is detected) (for example, a register (Set in the area), and the flow proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error is detected) (for example, (Set in the register area), and the flow shifts to step 1622. Incidentally, in step 1620, the information related to the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. The error undetected command may be set only when the error is released from the state where the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off). It is not necessary to execute the information setting process (the step 1618 may be omitted). Further, the error detection command may execute the setting process only when an error has occurred from a state where no error has occurred, or may be performed from a state where a first error (for example, an inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The setting process may be executed when the type of error changes like a second error (for example, a payout medal staying error).

  Next, in step 1622, the CPU C100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set) Control command is transmitted). Here, as a command to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command relating to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), a command relating to the first reel stop reception timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop) Immediately after), a command related to the second reel stop reception timing (transmitted immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop reception timing (the stop button as the third stop) Transmitted immediately after operation), transmitted immediately after all reels have stopped), a command relating to the stop timing of the stop display symbol (transmitted immediately after operating the stop button as a display symbol stop), winning and re-starting Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever (only during the advantageous section)), bonus Commands related to information (transmitted immediately after start lever operation), commands related to the RT state (transmitted from the time when all reels stop until the next game is started), commands related to the state related to AT (Transmitted from the time when all reels stop until the next game is started), a high failure counter value command (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), a command related to the AT remaining game number (all Commands transmitted during the period from the stop of the reels to the start of the next game or immediately after the operation of the start lever) (commands from the stop of all reels to the start of the next game) Sent in between), etc. Next, in step 1624, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the spinning-type gaming machine P to an external hall computer or the like). It should be noted that as information relating to the error output by the external signal, although not shown, a door opening error, a loading abnormal error, a dispensing abnormal error, a loading reception sensor staying error, and the like are output. Note that the door opening error is configured to generate an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on. Is configured to generate an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs the output data of the LED (such as a 7-segment LED lamp) (for example, turns on a predetermined 7-segment LED unit out of a plurality of 7-segment LED units). A predetermined segment of the segment is turned on) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Step 1628 may not be performed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a soft random number management process (such as a process of updating a random number value managed by software). Next, in step 1632, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not an abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is not set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, an abnormality flag bit is set. If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is not set). Is determined. If Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt end process, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the above-described unrecoverable error processing.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the barrel driving control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. It should be noted that although the processing for one reel is illustrated as an example in this processing, it is supplemented that the processing corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is executed. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after the execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. If Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, if No in step 6102, the process moves to step 6106.

  Next, at step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing at which the reel rotation start standby state ends and the reel acceleration processing starts). (The execution timing of the process). If Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in Step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel acceleration process, and proceeds to Step 6112. If the reel is stopped, the rotation of the reel is started by this processing. On the other hand, if No in step 6106, the process moves to step 6112.

  Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel acceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, all the interrupt processes for the “number of interrupt executions” in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described later). (Timing) is determined. If Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in Step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel constant speed maintaining process, and proceeds to Step 6120. Even if No in step 6112 or step 6114, the process proceeds to step 6120.

  Next, at step 6120, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel constant speed state. In the case of Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, the CPU MC of the main control board M enters the reel constant speed state (after executing the processing of step 6116), and the reel sensor corresponds to the reel (corresponding to the processing of this subroutine). It is determined whether or not the index provided on the reel) is detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one (or more than two) index. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel, and is used when detecting whether the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one rotation, or the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor. The signal from the reel sensor is electrically connected to the main control board M. Then, when the reel sensor detects (turns off) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is detected that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPU MC of the main control board M has passed a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state has reached the reel constant speed state. It is determined whether or not. In the case of No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has become a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. As described above, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed is normally constant by detecting the index within the predetermined time after the reel drive state is changed to the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In the present example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing 400 interrupt processes (configured to rotate 400 steps in 400 interrupt processes), and when the reel rotation speed is constant. It is longer than the time required for the reel to make one rotation (one revolution) (for example, one rotation of the reel has 336 steps, and the time value for executing the interrupt process 336 times). With such a configuration, the distance between the index and the reel sensor (the distance until the reel is rotated and the index is detected by the reel sensor) at the time when the reel driving state becomes the constant speed state is long. Even if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (time value at which the interrupt process is executed 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the constant reel speed. It is configured to be able to.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 6124, in step 6126, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel re-acceleration process, and proceeds to the process of step 6130. As described above, in this example, if the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state, Then, the reel driving state is updated to the reel acceleration state again, and the reel re-acceleration processing (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration processing) is executed. It should be noted that, also in the case of No in step 6120, the processing shifts to the processing of step 6130. Note that the reel re-acceleration processing need not be the same as the above-described reel acceleration processing. The reel re-acceleration processing and the reel acceleration processing are performed by interrupt processing for each combination of the phases to be excited by the stepping motor and each combination of the phases to be excited. May be made different.

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop processing according to the subroutine of step 6200 in FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines a reel deceleration standby state start timing (a timing at which the reel constant speed state ends, for example, a reel deceleration standby state start timing by operating a stop button). Is determined) or not. If Yes in step 6130, in step 6132, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel deceleration standby state, and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, if No in step 6130, the process moves to step 6134.

  Next, in step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel deceleration standby state. If Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (the timing to start executing the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts reel deceleration (reel deceleration processing). Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel deceleration state, and proceeds to the processing in step 6142. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 6134 or step 6136, the processing shifts to step 6142.

  Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel deceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing to end the execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel stopped state, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1612). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 6142 or step 6144, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1612).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the rotation operation of the reel M50 of the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. The rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained below (reel When the driving state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed, but the rotation speed may not actually reach the constant speed). Then, when any of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a four-phase stepping motor having four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (there is no problem even if the stepping motor is not a four-phase stepping motor). Rotation is controlled by phase excitation. That is, the stepping motor can be rotated in the forward direction by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of exciting phases). In the same figure, among the Φ0 to Φ3, those indicating that which phase is to be excited are indicated in the column of “exciting phase” (details will be described later).

  Further, as shown in the “reel rotation speed image” at the top of the figure, the driving state from the start of rotation to the stop of the stepping motor is divided into six, and the stepping motor is driven according to a driving pattern corresponding to each driving state. Drive control. Here, the driving state includes a "reel stop state", a "reel rotation start standby state", a "reel acceleration state", a "reel constant speed state", a "reel deceleration standby state", and a "reel deceleration state". In the “reel rotation speed image”, the vertical axis indicates the reel rotation speed, and the speed increases in the upward direction. The horizontal axis indicates time, and the time elapses in the right direction. I have. Also, the example shown in the figure illustrates a case where the reel rotation failure has not occurred.If the reel rotation failure has occurred due to factors such as holding the reel by hand, step-out, etc. This is not the case (reel rotation failure will be described later).

  The “reel stopped state” indicates a state in which the reel is stopped. When the reel is in the “reel stopped state”, the reel is in a stationary state, and all four phases of the stepping motor are set. Are not excited.

  Next, in the state of “reel stop state”, the reel drive state is updated to “reel rotation start standby state” based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing (1) in the drawing. . Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state of waiting until the stepping motor acceleration processing (reel acceleration processing) is started after the start lever D50 is operated. This standby period is a period until the reel driving state shifts from the “reel stopped state” to the “reel acceleration state”. For example, the time from when the drive state of the reel becomes the “reel acceleration state” in the previous game is counted, and the start lever D50 related to the current game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses. In this case, a "reel rotation start standby state" is entered.

  Next, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerated in order to reach a constant speed from the state in which the reel is stationary. In this example, when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times (“100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220”, refer to the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the lower left part of the figure), the acceleration state ends (the reel drive state is changed to “reel constant speed”). Update to "state"). Next, at the timing of (3) in the figure, in other words, at the timing when the "reel acceleration state" is finished by executing the timer interrupt process once more, the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed. At this timing, the reel drive state remains the "reel acceleration state". Next, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state", and the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times. The status is updated to "reel constant speed status". As described above, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed, the reel driving state remains in the “reel acceleration state” for one timer interrupt process, in other words, in the “reel acceleration state”, In the case of "φ3, φ0", which is the combination of exciting phases, the interrupt process is executed only once. Similar to the "reel constant speed state" in which the interrupt process is executed once for each combination of exciting phases. (When no reel rotation abnormality occurs). With this configuration, it is possible to stably execute the acceleration process until the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed.

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a “step motor excitation image”. FIG. 3 illustrates a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel acceleration state” and a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel constant speed state”. First, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of FIG. The "exciting phase" is a combination of exciting phases, and the "interrupt execution count" is the number of times interrupt processing is executed in which the exciting phase is excited. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the step motor (stepping motor) is configured to be excited by the timer interrupt process 220 times, and the interrupt process is performed 100 times in (KA) “φ0” → ( KB) Interrupt processing is performed 60 times at “φ0, φ1” → (KC) Interrupt processing is performed 30 times at “φ1” → (KD) Interrupt processing is performed 15 times at “φ1, φ2” → (KE) “φ2” 8 times interrupt processing → (KF) 4 times interrupt processing with “φ2, φ3” → (KG) 2 times interrupt processing with “φ3” → (KH) Interruption with “φ3, φ0” It is configured to execute an interrupt process as in the case of once to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of executions of the interrupt process is only an example and there is no problem if it is changed). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the reel acceleration process is performed, the number of times of executing the interrupt process in one combination of the phases to be excited is gradually reduced.

  Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel constant speed state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in the constant speed state (when the constant reel speed maintaining process is executed), the interrupt process is performed once by (TA) “φ0” → by (TB) “φ0, φ1”. Interrupt process once → (TC) "φ1" once interrupt process → (TD) "φ1, φ2" once interrupt process → (TE) "φ2" once interrupt process → (TF) “φ2, φ3” once interrupt processing → (TG) “φ3” once interrupt processing → (TH) “φ3, φ0” once interrupt processing → (TA) “ The interrupt processing is performed once in φ0 ”→ (TB) The interrupt processing is performed once in“ φ0, φ1 ”→ ..., and (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed once in each interrupt processing. To excite a stepping motor (stepping motor). As described above, in the present example, when the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed, the number of times of executing the interrupt process in one combination of the phases to be excited is all one.

  Next, when the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state", the stop button corresponding to one of the reels is operated at the timing of (5) in the figure, and the reel drive state is the "reel deceleration standby state". Will be updated. Here, the “reel constant speed state” is a state in which the rotation speed of the reel is constant (a state in which a combination of phases to be excited is switched for each interrupt process), and a “reel deceleration standby state”. Indicates the state from the time when the stop button is operated by the player to the time when the stop control is started (in the reel deceleration standby state, the slip of the reel corresponding to the number of slip frames has occurred). . The period of this drive state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

  Next, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and the deceleration of the reel is started. When the reel driving state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined time in order to stop the rotation of the reel. 4-phase excitation is performed to excite everything. When excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel is stopped.

  As described above, in the spinning machine according to this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state again, and the reel re-acceleration processing (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration processing) is executed. When the reel drive state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, it is not determined whether or not the reel has been normally accelerated. The processing in step 6124 (the reel driving state is changed to the reel constant speed state) is to check whether the reel acceleration is performed normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether the reel rotation failure is not occurring). The determination is made after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the update. However, in the processing of step 6124, the reels are not at a constant speed because the reel sensor did not detect the index (reel rotation failure occurs. When it is determined that the reel acceleration has occurred, the reel re-acceleration processing is executed, that is, the reel acceleration processing is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by not configuring whether or not the reel acceleration has been performed normally during the execution of the reel acceleration process, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, When the reel rotation speed has reached the constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel rotation failure is eliminated and the reel acceleration processing is completed, the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. When the reel sensor detects the index before the predetermined time elapses after the update, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed without executing the re-acceleration process. , The game cannot proceed (the stop button cannot be operated). In addition, during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, by not executing the processing for determining whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed, it is possible to reduce the data amount required for the processing related to the reel rotation. In addition, since the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured as described above, if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the following operations are performed. Becomes

<Function 1>
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to reel acceleration state → Execute reel acceleration processing → End reel acceleration processing → Update reel drive state to reel constant speed state → Execute reel constant speed maintenance processing → Reel constant Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the speed maintaining processing → detection of reel rotation failure → reel re-acceleration processing is executed.
In addition, the reel rotation failure means that the rotation of the reel is hindered by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160) or the reel is accelerated due to loss of synchronism. Is not executed normally. As described above, by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed even when the reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintaining process, the game can be smoothly advanced.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Updates reel drive state to reel acceleration state → Executes reel acceleration processing → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continues reel acceleration processing → Ends execution of reel acceleration processing → Update the reel driving state to the reel constant speed state → Execute the reel constant speed maintaining processing → Detect a reel rotation failure → Execute the reel re-acceleration processing It is configured to be able to operate as described above. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel re-acceleration processing is executed when the reel rotation failure is detected thereafter, so that the game proceeds smoothly. Will be possible. In addition, as described above, even when a rotation failure of the rotating drum occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel acceleration processing is continuously performed, and the same interruption as that in the case where the rotation failure of the rotating drum does not occur occurs. When the reel acceleration processing has been executed for the number of times, the execution of the reel acceleration processing ends. With this configuration, the reel rotation speed can easily reach the constant speed without performing the reel re-acceleration process when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of the reel acceleration process. it can.

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state → Executes the reel acceleration processing → A power failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing → Recovers from the power failure → Continues the reel acceleration processing (not processed Reel acceleration processing) → Reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue reel acceleration processing (execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → End of reel acceleration processing → Reel driving state Is updated to the reel constant speed state → reel constant speed maintaining processing is executed → reel rotation failure is detected → reel reacceleration processing is executed. As described above, even when the power is cut off during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel acceleration processing is continuously performed after the power is restored, and thereafter, the reel driving state is updated to the reel constant speed state within a predetermined time. By executing the reel re-acceleration process when the reel sensor does not detect the index, the game can proceed smoothly. In addition, when the power is cut off during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel acceleration processing is continuously performed after the power is restored, and then the reel sensor is updated within a predetermined time after the reel driving state is updated to the reel constant speed state. Is configured not to execute the reel re-acceleration processing when an index is detected. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot proceed with the game (cannot operate the stop button) due to the reel re-acceleration processing. It can be hardly generated.

<< Action after final stop button operation >>
In the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example, after the final stop button (third stop button) is operated, the final reel (the reel that rotates to the end, also referred to as the third reel) stops, and the winning combination is established. Although the payout of the game medals is configured to be executed when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the operation related to the payout of the game medals may be configured as follows.

<Function 1>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has won the winning combination → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Stops first reel as first stop operation Button operation → first reel stopped display → second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → second reel stopped display → third reel stop operation as third reel stop operation (third stop button) Operation) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power loss occurs → Move the third reel to the stop display position (rotation) → Detect power loss → Execute power-off processing → Return power → Reel The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → the processing relating to the payout of the game medals may be executed. With this configuration, in a game such as the above-described common bell that can win a win regardless of the operation timing of the stop button in the case of winning, a stop operation of the third stop button is accepted. Immediately after the power failure due to a power outage of the game arcade or the like, regardless of the expected stop position of the third reel (even when the number of sliding frames is maximum), the power failure is detected before the power failure is detected. The movement (rotation) to the expected stop position can be configured to be completed. Further, when the symbol combination (for example, the common bell) forming the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the power is restored, it is possible to normally pay out the game medals, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has won the winning combination → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Stops first reel as first stop operation Button operation → first reel stopped display → second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → second reel stopped display → third reel stop operation as third reel stop operation (third stop button) Operation) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → Wins the reel as viewed from the player Is not stopped, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 (the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is correct). It is a case where it is determined that it has been completed, for example, in the game in which the winning combination is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination Bell is not displayed on the reels as a player, but the player When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is normally executed by the process inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button) → The process related to the payout of game medals is executed It may be configured to. With this configuration, even when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, In the internal processing of the gaming machine, the winning button is won and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is received at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the payout of the game medals can be executed, and the disadvantage is not easily generated for the player. can do. The timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and the reel rotation failure occurs during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the processing related to the payout of the game medals. If the reel corresponding to 3 stops cannot be stopped at the expected stop position, all of them can be applied (the present invention is also applicable to the operation related to reel rotation failure exemplified below). In the above-described operation 2, the operation in the game in which the winning combination is won is illustrated. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (the same operation is performed when the rotation failure and the power supply interruption do not occur in other operations, too). Good).
The reel starts rotating as a winning game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → First stop as the first reel stop operation Button operation → first reel stop display → second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → second reel stop display → third reel stop operation third stop button (third stop button → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player Therefore, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 and the process relating to the payout of game medals is executed. The winning combination may be a winning combination (for example, a common bell) that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop button in the selected game, and there may be a case where the winning game is won depending on the operation timing of the stop button and a case where the prize is not won. It may be a role (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry). Further, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, reel rotation failure or power failure does not occur, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( When the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect of flashing (may be referred to as a back lamp) (also referred to as a back lamp effect), the predetermined game state is set. In the game in which the predetermined winning combination has been won, a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, and the back corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. You may comprise so that a lamp production may be performed. Further, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is scheduled to stop due to reel rotation failure. The present invention may be applied when the reel cannot be stopped at the position, or when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position due to the reel rotation failure (the same applies to other operations. Applicable).

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has won the winning combination → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Stops first reel as first stop operation Button operation → first reel stop display → second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → second reel stop display → power cutoff and power supply to gaming machine is stopped → third reel Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power-off → Execute power-off process → Player on third reel Cannot be moved (rotated) to the expected stop position as viewed from the side → Although the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269. (This is a case in which it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which the bell role has been won, a bell which is a winning combination on the reel as viewed from the player) Although the symbol combination corresponding to the role was not stopped and displayed, the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role was normally executed by processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. (Case) → Execute processing related to payout of game medals. It may be configured to operate as described above. Note that the timing of detecting the power-off, the timing of the power-off occurring and stopping the supply of power to the gaming machine, the timing of determining that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269, and the timing of returning to the power supply are as follows. The timing is not limited to the timing described above, and during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the processing relating to the payout of the game medals, the timing of detecting the power-off, the power supply to the gaming machine after the power-off occurs. , The timing at which the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269, and the timing at which power is restored may be present. Can be applied when the vehicle cannot be stopped at the expected stop position. The way is). With this configuration, the power is cut off immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. In this case, the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is selected at the timing when the winning combination is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the operation is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the payout of the game medals after the return of the power (the payout of the game In addition to the payout from the discharge port, the display of the credit number display device (the number of credits) is assumed to be increased), and the player can Can benefit constitutes such that less likely to occur. Note that the timing at which the power is cut off and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped may be referred to as the timing at which the power cut occurs. Further, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination has been won in a predetermined gaming state, when reel rotation failure or power interruption does not occur and a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, a reel backlight ( When the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect (which may be referred to as a back lamp effect) in which a back lamp is sometimes flashed, the predetermined game state is established. In the game that has won the predetermined winning combination, even if a power failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back lamp corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. The effect may be configured to be performed. Also, in the present operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the expected stop position was described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be applied to the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the expected stop position due to the power cutoff (the same applies to other operations). Is).

<Action 4>
As the game that has been lost, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → The first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel -> The first reel is displayed as a stop-> the second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel-> the second reel is displayed as a stop-> the third stop button is operated as a stop operation for the third reel (of the third stop button Operation is accepted) → Reel drive status is updated to reel deceleration status → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen by the player → Wins the reel as seen by the player Although the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269 (the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally performed. For example, in a lost game, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss was not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but a game corresponding to the operation of the player's stop button was performed. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the losing is normally executed by the processing inside the machine) → the payout of the game medal is not executed. With such a configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reel corresponds to a winning combination as viewed from the player. Even if the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and it will correspond to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed If the stop button operation to accept the stop button is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game medal is displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Can be configured not to execute the payout, a fair gaming machine can be provided, and a game that does not cause unintended disadvantages at the game hall can be achieved. It can be a machine. The action 4 is not limited to the loss. For example, in a game that has not been won by a bell (a game that has been won as a replaying game, a game that has been won by a watermelon, or the like), a reel rotation failure may occur. It is supplemented that the present invention can be applied to the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the generated bell is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed as viewed from the player is a symbol combination that is not consistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation. Since the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (the display determination error is not determined to have occurred).

<Action 5>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is stopped → The power is cut off and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped → The third reel Operation of the third stop button as a stop operation of the (reception of the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect the power-off → Execute the power-off process → From the player Unable to move (rotate) to the expected stop position as seen → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269. Judgment (when it is judged that the stop control of the reel based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, for example, in the game that is lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player. There was not, but when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the process inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the player) → Power return → The payout of game medals It may be configured to act as described above but not performed. With this configuration, in the game that is lost as a result of the lottery, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel is viewed from the player as a winning combination. Even when the symbol combination to be displayed is stopped, it is lost due to internal processing of the gaming machine, and it corresponds to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the stop button operation is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game medal is displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. A game machine that can be configured so as not to perform payout of a game machine, can be a fair game machine, and does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game arcade. It can be. In addition, the action 5 is not limited to losing only. For example, in a game not winning the bell (a game winning the re-playing combination, a game winning the watermelon, etc.), a reel rotation failure is caused. It should be supplemented that it can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed as viewed from the player is a symbol combination that is not consistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation. Since the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (the display determination error is not determined to have occurred).

<Function 6>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped and displayed. → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel. → The second reel is stopped and displayed. → The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the third reel. Operation is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → the bonus role (reel) as viewed from the player For example, the symbol combination corresponding to BB combination is stopped and displayed, but in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal (reset based on the operation of the stop button). This is a case where it is determined that the stop control of the game has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which a bonus combination has not been won and a loss has occurred, a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on a reel as viewed from a player. Is stopped and displayed, but the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by the processing in the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player is normally executed) → The bonus does not start, In addition, it may be configured to operate as described above in which the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reel corresponds to the bonus role as viewed from the player. Even if the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and it will correspond to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed If the stop button operation to accept the stop button is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the bonus is not displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. A game machine that can be configured not to start, can be a fair game machine, and does not cause unintended disadvantages to the game hall It can be a machine. Note that the action 6 is not limited to the loss, for example, a game in which the bonus combination has not been won (not inside the bonus) and the bonus combination has not been won (the replaying game has been won). In addition, the present invention can be applied to a case where a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a case where a reel rotation failure occurs in a game, a game having won a watermelon, and the like. In the above-described operation 6, an operation in a game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (there is also applicable in the case where the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel Is a stop display → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stop → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. It is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process → the bonus operation is not started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game or the inside of the bonus winning, the following operation is performed.
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel Is displayed as a stop → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stopped → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. It is possible to exemplify such an effect that it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the execution of the bonus is started and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above description, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated. However, depending on the type of the bonus (the type of the bonus combination), a bonus in which the freeze is executed and a bonus in which the freeze is not executed may be provided. The execution of the freeze may be made different depending on the gaming state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Action 7>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is stopped → The power is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The third reel The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the player (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power-off is detected → Power-off processing is executed → The third reel is received from the player Unable to move (rotate) to the expected stop position as seen → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, but in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined. It is determined that the combination is normal (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally, for example, in a game in which the bonus combination has not been won and the game has been lost) The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. If the control is executed normally) → power return → the bonus does not start and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery has been lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel is given a bonus role from the player's point of view. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is lost due to internal processing of the gaming machine, and at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) The operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed, the game is played. It can be configured so that it does not start the medal bonus, it can be a fair game machine, and it causes unintended disadvantages to the game hall. It was not can be a game machine. Note that the action 6 is not limited to the loss, for example, a game in which the bonus combination has not been won (not inside the bonus) and the bonus combination has not been won (the replaying game has been won). In addition, the present invention can be applied to a case where a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a case where a reel rotation failure occurs in a game, a game having won a watermelon, and the like. In the above-described operation 6, an operation in a game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. In other words, the following operation is performed when the power supply is not interrupted (applicable when rotation failure and power interruption do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel Is a stop display → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stop → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. It is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process → the bonus operation is not started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel power is not cut off during the game or the inside of the bonus that has been won, the following operation is performed.
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel Is displayed as a stop → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stopped → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. It is possible to exemplify such an effect that it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the execution of the bonus is started and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above description, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated. However, depending on the type of the bonus (the type of the bonus combination), a bonus in which the freeze is executed and a bonus in which the freeze is not executed may be provided. The execution of the freeze may be made different depending on the gaming state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Action 8>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed during the bonus or as a game won as a bonus combination → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operation of the first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → Display of the first reel stopped → Operation of the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Display of the stop of the second reel → Stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Move the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (rotation) No → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination Align starts determination → bonus to be normal, and may be configured to act as described above to freeze Bonus start is executed. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus has been won or a game where a bonus has been won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after a stop operation of the third stop button is received, Even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reels as viewed from the player, each reel (the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel) is displayed at the timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the corresponding stop button is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. Can also be configured to start a bonus and to execute a freeze that is performed at the start of the bonus. It can be configured so as not to cause a significant disadvantage for the player such that the reel is not started due to the reel rotation failure in the situation to be performed, and the bonus is the same as when the reel rotation failure does not occur By executing the freeze at the start, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable.

<Action 9>
Spinning of the reels starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game that wins the bonus role → Updates the reel drive status to a constant speed status → Performs constant speed status maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Operate the second reel as a stop display → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Power off occurs and play Power supply to the machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power failure is detected → Power off Time processing is executed → The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is stopped on the reel as seen from the player Although not shown, in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → return to power → the bonus is started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. Good. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus has been won or a game where a bonus combination has been won, a power-off process is executed immediately after a stop operation of the third stop button is received. Even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reels as viewed from the player, each reel (the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel) can be stopped and displayed with the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination. When the stop button operation corresponding to the bonus combination is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. Can be configured to start a bonus and to execute a freeze that is performed at the start of the bonus, It can be configured so as not to cause a significant disadvantage for the player such that the bonus is not started due to power cutoff in the situation to be performed, and at the same time as when the reel rotation failure does not occur, Is executed, the player can proceed with the game without a sense of incongruity.

<Operation 10>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped and displayed. → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel. → The second reel is stopped and displayed. → The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the third reel. Operation is accepted) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to expected stop position as seen from player → Replay role on reel as seen from player Is stopped and displayed, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normal). This is a case where it is determined that the game has been completed.For example, in a lost game, the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but the game corresponding to the operation of the player's stop button is performed. If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the machine, the automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-game combination is not performed, and the re-game lamp D290 is newly added. It may be configured to operate as described above without lighting. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reel is viewed from the player as a re-playing role. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, a loss occurs in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is displayed at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed. An automatic bet is not made, and the re-game lamp D290 is not newly turned on. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination that the RT state shifts when the stop display is performed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed from the player's perspective, The internal processing causes a loss, and the stop button operation corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is received. When the stop control for stopping and displaying is normally executed, the RT state does not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination in which the RT state other than the re-play combination shifts is stopped and displayed. The same is applicable to the case). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game arcade. The action 10 is not limited to the loss, and is applied to, for example, a case where a reel combination failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped and displayed in a game that has not been won as a replaying game. Supplement what you can do. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (there is also applicable in the case where the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Updates reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as first reel stop operation → First reel Is displayed as a stop → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stopped → operation of the third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed as stopped on the reel as viewed from the player. It is determined that the combination is normal → the automatic bet is not performed, and the re-game lamp D290 does not light up anew.
The automatic bet means that a predetermined number (for example, three) of game medals that have been bet in a game that has been won as a re-game combination is displayed with the re-game combination stopped and a bet button (max bet button) is displayed. No bet operation or game medal insertion from the medal insertion slot will bet automatically.
On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game that has been won as the replaying combination, the following operation is performed.
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel Is a stop display → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stop → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the stop expected position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. It is determined that the symbol combination is normal → The automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the player has won the replay in the previous game, the replay is performed. Lamp D290 will continue to light up)
The following operation can be exemplified.

<Action 11>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is stopped → The power is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The third reel The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the player (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power-off is detected → Power-off processing is executed → The third reel is received from the player The player cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position. → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player. However, in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is normal. When it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, for example, in the case of a lost game, a symbol combination corresponding to the re-play combination is displayed on the reel as seen from the player. When the stop display is displayed, but when the stop control is normally executed to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the player) → Power restoration → Replay The automatic bet corresponding to the stop display may not be performed, and the re-game lamp D290 may not be newly turned on. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, the power-off process is performed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reels are replayed on the reels as viewed from the player. Even when the symbol combination corresponding to the symbol is stopped, the reels (left reel, middle reel, right reel) are lost at the timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed in the internal processing of the gaming machine. When the stop button operation corresponding to the replaying combination is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped and displayed. No automatic bet is made, and the re-game lamp D290 is not newly turned on. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination that the RT state shifts when the stop display is performed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed from the player's perspective, The internal processing causes a loss, and the stop button operation corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is received. When the stop control for stopping and displaying is normally executed, the RT state does not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination in which the RT state other than the re-play combination shifts is stopped and displayed. The same is applicable to the case). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game arcade. The action 11 is not limited to the loss, and may be applied to, for example, a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped and the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped in a game in which the replaying game has not been won. Supplement what you can do. In other words, the following operation is performed when the power supply is not interrupted (applicable when rotation failure and power interruption do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Updates reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as first reel stop operation → First reel Is displayed as a stop → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stopped → operation of the third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed as stopped on the reel as viewed from the player. It is determined that the combination is normal → the automatic bet is not performed, and the re-game lamp D290 does not light up anew. On the other hand, the following operation is performed when the power supply is not cut off in the game that has been won as the replaying role.
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel Is a stop display → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stop → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the stop expected position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. It is determined that the symbol combination is normal → The automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the player has won the replay in the previous game, the replay is performed. Lamp D290 will continue to light up)
The following operation can be exemplified.

<Action 12>
Reel rotation starts as a game won for replay → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Perform constant speed state maintenance process → Accept stop button effective → First stop as stop operation for first reel Button operation → first reel stop display → second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → second reel stop display → third reel stop operation third stop button (third stop button Operation is accepted) → The reel drive status is updated to the reel deceleration status → The reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Replay to the reel as seen from the player Although the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed, in the determination processing of step 1269 it is determined that the symbol combination is normal. It is, and replay lamp D290 may be configured to act as described above to be newly turned. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is a replay, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the replay of the replay Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed, each reel (the left reel) is selected at the timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination can be stopped and displayed. , The middle reel, the right reel) and accepts the operation of the stop button. If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is normally executed, the replaying game is supported. Even if the symbol combination to be performed is not stopped and displayed, an automatic bet is made and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying role is not stopped and displayed, so that even if the reel is visually recognized, Even if it cannot be determined whether or not the player has won the role, by visually checking whether or not an automatic bet has been executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290, the situation of the game can be prevented from being erroneously recognized. Further, in the action 12, if the player has won the replaying game to which the RT state shifts when the stop display is performed in the current RT state, the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped and displayed. If not, the RT state shifts. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is unlikely to occur, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

<Action 13>
Reel rotation starts as a game won in the re-game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First stop as first reel stop operation Button operation → first reel stop display → second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → second reel stop display → power cutoff and power supply to gaming machine is stopped → third reel Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power-off → Execute power-off process → Player on third reel Cannot be moved (rotated) to the scheduled stop position as viewed from the side → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269 There a decision → power supply recovery → automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the replay combination has been made, and replay lamp D290 may be configured to act as described above to light anew. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is a re-game, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the game is re-played to the reels as viewed from the player. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the role is not stopped and displayed, the reels are won at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game has been won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming role can be stopped and displayed. (Reel, middle reel, right reel) operation is accepted, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is normally executed, Even if the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, an automatic bet is made and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying role is not stopped and displayed, so that even if the reel is visually recognized, Even if it cannot be determined whether or not the player has won the role, by visually checking whether or not an automatic bet has been executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290, the situation of the game can be prevented from being erroneously recognized. Further, in the operation 13, if the player has won the replaying role to which the RT state shifts when the stop display is performed in the current RT state, the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped and displayed. If not, the RT state shifts. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is unlikely to occur, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

<Action 14>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has been won in a role where the RT state shifts (sometimes referred to as an RT shift combination) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → reception of a stop button is performed. Becomes valid → Operation of the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Display of the first reel stopped → Operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Display of stop of the second reel → Display of the third reel Operate the third stop button as a stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Move the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (Rotation) is not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transfer combination is not stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → R State transitions may be configured to act as described above. With this configuration, in the game that has been won as the RT transfer combination, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol corresponding to the RT transfer combination appears on the reel as viewed from the player. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel) is selected at the timing when the RT combination has been won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT combination can be stopped and displayed. , Right reel), the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transfer combination is normally executed when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transfer combination is normally executed. Even if is not stopped, the RT state is shifted. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and to allow the game to progress along the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has, and The administrator can operate the gaming machine with ease. Note that the RT transfer combination is a combination that shifts to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the predetermined RT state. Or not. That is, in RT state A, predetermined role A is an RT transfer role, but in RT state B, predetermined role A may not be an RT transfer role. In RT state A, predetermined role A is an RT transfer role. However, the predetermined combination A may not be won in the RT state B.

<Action 15>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has been won in a role where the RT state shifts (sometimes referred to as an RT shift combination) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → reception of a stop button is performed. Enabled → Operate first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel stop display → Operate second stop button as stop operation of second reel → Second reel stop display → Power off occurs Supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped and the third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → power cutoff is detected → Execute power-off processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transfer combination is not stopped and displayed as viewed from the player, but step 1 Symbol combination in determination processing 69 and the determination → RT state transitions is normal (to RT conditions may shift after power restoration, may shift the RT state before power restoration)
It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in the game that has been won as the RT transfer combination, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reel corresponds to the RT transfer combination as viewed from the player. Even when the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel) is selected at the timing when the RT combination is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT combination can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button corresponding to the reel or the right reel is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transfer combination is normally executed, the symbol corresponding to the RT transfer combination is executed. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT state shifts. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and to allow the game to progress along the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has, and The administrator can operate the gaming machine with ease.

<Action 16>
Reel rotation starts as a game that does not win the role in which the RT state transitions (sometimes referred to as the RT transition role) → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintaining process is executed → the stop button Reception is validated → The first stop button is operated as the operation of stopping the first reel → The first reel is stopped and displayed → The second stop button is operated as the operation of stopping the second reel → The second reel is stopped and displayed → The third reel Operating the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accepting the operation of the third stop button) → Updating the reel drive state to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel is at a planned stop position as seen by the player Can not move (rotate) until → the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but in the determination processing of step 1269 it is determined that the symbol combination is normal It may be configured to act as described above for RT state is not migrated. With this configuration, in a game that has not been won as the RT transfer combination, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reel corresponds to the RT transfer combination as viewed from the player. Even if the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With such a configuration, for example, when the push-order navigation for preventing the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player in the AT state, is performed, the player operates the stop button according to the push-order navigation. Nevertheless, even if the RT combination shifts (falls down) due to poor reel rotation and the symbol combination appears to stop, the RT state does not shift, which is not intended by the player. This can be a gaming machine that does not generate a profit, and the game can be advanced along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine, and the gaming machine manager can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 17>
Reel rotation is started as a game that has not been won in a role in which the RT state shifts (sometimes referred to as an RT shift combination) → the reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → stop button is pressed. Reception is enabled → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Display the stop of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Display the stop of the second reel → Power off Occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power is turned off → The power-off process is executed → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transfer combination is stopped and displayed as viewed from the player, Step In the determination process in 1269 may be configured to act as the symbol combination is that no shift determination → RT state to be normal. With such a configuration, in a game that has not been elected as an RT transition combination, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel is changed to the RT transition combination as seen from the player. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With such a configuration, for example, when the push-order navigation for preventing the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player in the AT state, is performed, the player operates the stop button according to the push-order navigation. Nevertheless, even if the RT combination shifts (falls down) due to poor reel rotation and the symbol combination appears to stop, the RT state does not shift, which is not intended by the player. This can be a gaming machine that does not generate a profit, and the game can be advanced along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine, and the gaming machine manager can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 18>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user → the speaker does not output the tempai sound.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user (when the second reel moves to the expected stop position, the symbol combination of the first reel and the second reel is not displayed). The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line.) → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. Also, when no reel rotation failure occurs, the operation is as follows.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to a scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The first reel as viewed from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the second reel → a tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to a scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The first reel as viewed from the player In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination may not be stopped and displayed on the activated line on the second reel → the speaker may not output a tempered sound.
With such a configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery has been lost, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first stop. And stopped to the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempe, if the bonus symbol is not tempeeed when stopped at the scheduled stop position of this example, the tempo sound is not output. Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the output from the speaker enables the player to quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure occurs. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second stop. Even if the stop did not stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not change, if it stopped at the expected stop position in this example, a tempai sound was output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to change. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker.

<Function 19>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Power supply is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Detect power loss → Perform power off processing Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → A symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player → Power Return → No sound is output from the speaker.
As the game that has been lost, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel Operate → Stop display of the first reel → Stop power supply to the gaming machine due to power failure → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Detect power failure → Process at power failure Execution → The second reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position from the viewpoint of the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player ( When the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel) → power recovery → speaker May be configured to act as described above to Luo Tenpai sound is output. In addition, when the power is not turned off, the operation is as follows.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to a scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The first reel as viewed from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the second reel → a tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to a scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The first reel as viewed from the player In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination may not be stopped and displayed on the activated line on the second reel → the speaker may not output a tempered sound. The timing at which the speaker outputs the tempai sound may be before the execution of the power-off process is completed, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first. Stop and stop as the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempe, if the bonus symbol is not tempeeed when stopped at the scheduled stop position of this example, a tempe sound is output. Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the output from the speaker enables the player to quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure has occurred. Similarly, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second stop. Even if the bonus did not stop as a stop, in other words, if the bonus symbol did not stop, a stop sound was output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to stop when the stop at the expected stop position in this example. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the first stop operation is executed. Shortly after the rotation of the reel has occurred).

<Function 20>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Enables first reel Operation of the first stop button as a stop operation → Display of the first reel stopped → Operation of the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Reel rotation failure occurred → The second reel reaches the expected stop position as viewed from the player The player cannot move (rotate) → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player → the bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won as a bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → Enables the first reel Operation of the first stop button as a stop operation → Display of the first reel stopped → Operation of the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Reel rotation failure occurred → The second reel reaches the expected stop position as viewed from the player Unable to move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stop-displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player (if the second reel moves to the expected stop position, The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel.) → Bonus confirmation sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to act as described above. Also, when no reel rotation failure occurs, the operation is as follows.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won as a bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → Enables the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Move the second reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (rotation) → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user → a bonus confirmation sound is output from the speaker.
The reel starts rotating as a game that is not in the bonus and is lost → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → The first reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation → The first reel is stopped and displayed → The second stop button is operated as a second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the scheduled stop position from the player's perspective → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stop-displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel from the viewpoint of the person → The bonus confirmation tempo sound is not output from the speaker. The bonus confirmation tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the activated line (tempai) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It is a sound.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is a loss and the bonus is not in the inside of the bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and a symbol constituting the bonus symbol If the combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, if the bonus symbol is tempered, if it stops at the expected stop position in this example, if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempered, Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation failure, the player can quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure has occurred, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure. can do.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role lottery becomes a bonus combination or a game executed during the inside of the bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and a bonus symbol is formed. If the symbol combination does not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, if the bonus symbol does not stop, the bonus symbol will stop if the stop is at the expected stop position in this example. In this case, a bonus confirmation tempi sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation defect, the player will experience a reel rotation defect due to the output from the speaker. Can be quickly detected. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the first stop operation is executed. Shortly after the rotation of the reel has occurred).

<Action 21>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Power supply is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Detect power loss → Perform power off processing Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → A symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player → Power Return → No sound is output from the speaker.
As the game that has been lost, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel Operate → Stop display of the first reel → Stop power supply to the gaming machine due to power failure → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Detect power failure → Process at power failure Execution → The second reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position from the viewpoint of the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player ( When the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel) → power recovery → speaker May be configured to act as described above to Luo Tenpai sound is output. In addition, when the power is not turned off, the operation is as follows.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to a scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The first reel as viewed from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the second reel → a tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to a scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The first reel as viewed from the player In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination may not be stopped and displayed on the activated line on the second reel → the speaker may not output a tempered sound. The timing at which the speaker outputs the tempai sound may be before the execution of the power-off process is completed, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With such a configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first. Stopped and stopped as the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempai, if the bonus symbol is not tempaied when stopped at the scheduled stop position of this example, a tempai sound is output. Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the output from the speaker allows the player to quickly detect that the reel is abnormal due to the power failure. You can Similarly, in the game in which the result of the lottery is lost, the power is cut off immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second stop. It did not stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not tempe, if the bonus symbol was scheduled to be tempeed when it stopped at the scheduled stop position of this example, a tempai sound is output. Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the output from the speaker allows the player to quickly detect that the reel is abnormal due to the power failure. it can. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the first stop operation is executed. Immediately after the power-off process is performed).

<Action 22>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Enables first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → display the stop of the first reel → stop power supply and stop supplying power to the gaming machine → operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → power off Detection → Power-off processing executed → Second reel cannot move (rotate) to scheduled stop position as viewed from player → Corresponds to bonus combination on activated line on first reel and second reel as viewed from player The symbol combination is stopped and the bonus confirmation sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won as a bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → Enables the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → display the stop of the first reel → stop power supply and stop supplying power to the gaming machine → operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → power off Detection → Power-off processing executed → Second reel cannot move (rotate) to scheduled stop position as viewed from player → Corresponds to bonus combination on activated line on first reel and second reel as viewed from player The symbol combination does not stop and display (when the second reel moves to the expected stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination stops on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel. Shimesuru) → may be configured to act as described above bonus determined Tenpai sound is output from the speaker. In addition, when the power is not turned off, the operation is as follows.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won as a bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → Enables the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Move the second reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (rotation) → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user → a bonus confirmation sound is output from the speaker.
The reel starts rotating as a game that is not in the bonus and is lost → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → The first reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation → The first reel is stopped and displayed → The second stop button is operated as a second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the scheduled stop position from the player's perspective → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stop-displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel from the viewpoint of the person → The bonus confirmation tempo sound is not output from the speaker. The bonus confirmation tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the activated line (tempai) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It is a sound.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is a loss and the bonus is not in the inside, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and the bonus symbol is configured. When the symbol combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even when the bonus symbol is tempered, when the bonus symbol is stopped at the expected stop position in the present example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempered. Will not output the bonus confirmation sound, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the player will have an abnormality on the reel due to the power failure due to the output from the speaker. Can be detected quickly.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a bonus combination or a game executed during the bonus, a power-off process is performed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and the bonus symbol is displayed. If the constituent symbol combination does not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not stop, the bonus symbol will stop when the stop is at the scheduled stop position in this example. If it was scheduled, a bonus confirmation tempai sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the player will output an abnormal sound on the reel due to the power failure. It can be quickly detected that the problem has occurred. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the first stop operation is executed. Immediately after the power-off process is performed).

<Action 23>
The number of credits is one or more, and reel rotation starts as a game that has been won as a predetermined replaying role → reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → reception of a stop button is enabled → Operate the first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Display the stop of the second reel → Stop the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Move the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (rotation) No → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination does not stop display → Max bet lamp does not light
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is one or more and has not been won as a replaying role → the reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → reception of a stop button is enabled → Operate the first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Display the stop of the second reel → Stop the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Move the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (rotation) It may be configured such that the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination is stopped and the max bet lamp is lit. Also, when no reel rotation failure occurs, the operation is as follows.
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel is started as a game that has been won as a predetermined re-play combination → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Display stop of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the third reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay Symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped display → Max bet lamp does not light up
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel is started as a game that has not been won as a re-play combination → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Display stop of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the third reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed. → The max bet lamp is turned on.
With such a configuration, in the game that is won for the re-play, when the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play is not stopped and displayed. Also, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play is stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp does not light up, so that the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is not effective. Also, in a game that has not been won in a replay, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the game is not stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp is turned on, so that the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is effective.

<Action 24>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel is started as a game that is won as a predetermined re-play combination → The reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Operate the first reel stop display → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Power off occurs and play Stop supplying power to the machine → Operate the third stop button as a third reel stop operation (accept operation of the third stop button) → Update reel drive status to reel deceleration status → Detect power failure → Power off Time processing is executed → The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-play combination is not stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp is not turned on It was,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel is started as a game that has not been won as a replay combination → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Operate the first reel stop display → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Power off occurs and play Stop supplying power to the machine → Operate the third stop button as a third reel stop operation (accept operation of the third stop button) → Update reel drive status to reel deceleration status → Detect power failure → Power off The time processing is executed → The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-play combination is displayed as a stop → The max bet lamp is turned on It may be configured to act on. In addition, when the power is not turned off, the operation is as follows.
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel is started as a game that has been won as a predetermined re-play combination → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Display stop of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the third reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay Symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped display → Max bet lamp does not light up
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel is started as a game that has not been won as a re-play combination → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Display stop of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the third reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed. → The max bet lamp is turned on.
With this configuration, in the game won in the re-game, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed. Also, similarly to the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max bet button is not valid, because the max bet lamp is not turned on. Also, in a game that has not been won in the replay, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed. As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped, the max bet lamp is turned on, so that the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is effective.

<Action 25>
This is a game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, thereby satisfying the bonus ending condition. Rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → Stops first reel Display → Operation of second stop button as stop operation of second reel → Display of stop of second reel → Operation of third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accepts operation of third stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stops Do not show → bonus is completed, may be configured to act as described above that bonus at the end of the freeze is executed. Also, when no reel rotation failure occurs, the operation is as follows.
This is a game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, thereby satisfying the bonus ending condition. Rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → Stops first reel Display → Operation of second stop button as stop operation of second reel → Display of stop of second reel → Operation of third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accepts operation of third stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel decelerating state → The third reel moves to the expected stop position (rotation) as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the bo It may be configured to act as described above to scan end freeze is performed.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final game of the bonus, and a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed. In the case where the bonus combination ends, the bonus ends and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can detect and does not give a sense of discomfort to the progress of the game.

<Action 26>
This is a game during the execution of a bonus, and has been won as a winning combination, and a game medal corresponding to the winning of the winning combination is given to a player, so that a bonus ending condition is satisfied. Rotation starts → Updates reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → Stops first reel Display → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Display the stop of the second reel → Stop power supply and stop supplying power to the gaming machine → Third stop button as the stop operation of the third reel (Accepts the operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power-off → Executes power-off processing → Moves the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player Rotation) can not → symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed → bonus is completed, may be configured to act as described above to the end of the bonus freezes is executed. In addition, when the power is not turned off, the operation is as follows.
This is a game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, thereby satisfying the bonus ending condition. Rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → Stops first reel Display → Operation of second stop button as stop operation of second reel → Display of stop of second reel → Operation of third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accepts operation of third stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel decelerating state → The third reel moves to the expected stop position (rotation) as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the bo It may be configured to act as described above to scan end freeze is performed.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final game of the bonus, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. In the case where there is no bonus, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus, so that the player is notified that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can promptly detect a game and does not give a sense of discomfort to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the configuration relating to the reel acceleration process in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the above-described example,
Execution period of reel acceleration processing when no rotational drum rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = A
When a spinning drum rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration processing, an execution period of the reel acceleration processing until the spinning drum rotation failure occurs = B
Execution period of reel acceleration processing after occurrence of rotation failure of the cylinder = C, when rotation failure of the rotation cylinder occurs during execution of the reel acceleration processing = C
Then,
A = B + C
It is configured so that
Also,
The number of interrupt processing executions of the reel acceleration processing when the spinning drum rotation failure does not occur during the execution of the reel acceleration processing = D
When a spinning cylinder rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration processing, the number of interrupt processing executions of the reel acceleration processing until the spinning cylinder rotation failure occurs = E
When the rotation failure of the rotating drum occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the number of times of execution of the interrupt processing of the reel acceleration processing after the occurrence of the defective rotation of the rotating drum = F
Then,
D = E + F
It is configured so that

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPU C100 of the main control board M stores a stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processing completed flag (for example, updates the power-off processed flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1906, the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and detects error detection information based on the calculated checksum (for example, The lower one byte of the obtained checksum or its complement is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPU C100 of the main control board M prohibits writing into the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

  Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of a push order display of the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. The table on the drawing shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information regarding the push order, in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S). It is a table showing correspondence with. For example, it is indicated that the instruction number for informing "middle → right → left" as the pressing order is "A5". Next, on the left side of the drawing, when the pressing order is “left → middle → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A1”), the pressing order display device D270, the advantageous zone display YH, and the effect display device S40. The image displayed in FIG. Here, the pressing order display device D270 of this example is a 7-segment display system, and also serves as a payout amount display device. Further, when the payout of medals is executed, the number of paid-out medals is displayed as a two-digit number on the push-order display device D270. Here, even when executing the push order navigation, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed with a two-digit numerical value, the display on the push order display device D270 indicates whether the payout number of medals or the push order is displayed. It becomes difficult to determine whether it is a navigation display. Therefore, in order to distinguish whether it is the payout number of medals or the push order navigation display, the push order display device D270 displays "=" in the left digit like "= 1". According to the configuration, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit numerical value, it is the display of the number of medals to be paid out. As the display of the push order display device D270, the left side is “=” and the right side is a number. If there is, it is configured to be able to determine that the display is a push-order navigation display, and is configured to prevent the player from misidentifying. Furthermore, in the advantageous section display YH provided in the lower right part of the push-order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is the "advantageous section" is lit. At the same time, a display of "remaining 40 games" showing the number of remaining games of the "advantageous section" (or "AT in progress") is displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, the right side of the drawing illustrates an image displayed on the press order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the press order is “middle → left → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A3”). There is. In addition, since the current game section is the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on and the "remaining 25 games" indicating the number of games remaining in the "advantageous section" is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that the winning combination with a pushing order (of the conditional devices whose winning combination is stopped and displayed depending on the reel stopping order is a condition device involving payout of medals, for example, a bell) and the re-playing combination with a pushing order (depending on the reel stopping order Of the condition devices having different combinations displayed in a stopped state, the segment number display of the instruction number of the condition device relating to the re-play combination may be different, and the display system of the push-order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. Instead of this, for example, an LED indicator may be used to give instructions by lighting a plurality of LEDs in accordance with a lighting pattern corresponding to the instruction number. Note that the advantageous section display YH may be provided at the lower right of the credit amount display device D200. In this case, it is preferable that the advantageous section display YH is turned on until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player quits the game, he or she visually checks the credit amount display device D200 to check whether or not there are any medals remaining. If the medal remains, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, by turning on the adjustment button D60 until it becomes effective, the user-friendly gaming machine can prevent accidentally quitting the game even though it is in the "advantageous zone" from the next game. be able to.

  In addition, the mode of notifying the game section on the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this example, and the same section indicator as the advantageous section indicator YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two 7 segments (the section indicator is It may be configured to include two). In such a configuration, when the left section display is lit, the fact that the current game section is the “normal section” is notified, while the right section is displayed. When the section indicator lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is the “advantageous section”. Further, the “normal section” and the “advantageous section” are distinguished by the color and lighting mode at the time of lighting of the section indicator (for example, “green” in the “normal section” and “red” in the “advantage section”). Alternatively, the lighting may be performed in a “normal section”, and “blinking” in an “advantaged section”. Further, the display mode of the section indicator is configured to be changed according to "AT inside BB inside game", "AT BB state", "AT precursor state", "AT during state", etc. in "advantageous zone". May be. Furthermore, the present game section may be configured to be able to recognize that the current game section is a “standby section” separately from the “normal section” and the “advantage section”. However, the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" are distinguished by using a different section indicator, for example, so that the player can recognize whether or not the current game section is the "advantage section". It is preferable to make it easier.

  Also, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation in progress", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. A configuration may be adopted (in which the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section” is subtracted in a state where the profit is relatively low for the player, the disadvantage for the player is not notified). However, even in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the section display be turned on to notify the player that the "advantageous section" is being performed. At the same time, it is preferable that the section indicator is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and that the section indicator is installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

  Next, control processing executed on the sub-control board S side will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Sub-side program start processing>
First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing a sub-side program start process. This sub-program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

  First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S prohibits interruption. Next, in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processing such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, calculation of a checksum, and the like.

  Next, in step 2008, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off. If Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination processing in step 2008 that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one-command processing described below. It is determined whether or not the state has been restored from the state in which the power supply has been interrupted, that is, whether or not the state has been completely restored.

  In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, when it is determined that the recovery is complete, in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub control board S permits the interrupt and executes it when the power is cut off. Return processing to 1 command processing.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination processing in step 2008 that both checksum values do not match, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. Execute After executing the processing in step 2014 or in the case of No in step 2010, the processing is shifted to the sub main loop processing.

<Sub main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing a sub main loop process. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

  First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits the interruption. Next, in step 2108, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a command receiving process. This command receiving process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

  Next, in step 2250, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes one-command processing described later. This one-command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms, has elapsed, and when it is determined that the time has not elapsed, returns the process to step 2108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be appropriately changed according to processing.

<Sub-side power-off processing>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing a sub-side power-off process executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects the power-off.

  First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start processing is being executed. If Yes in step 2204, the process moves to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates the checksum. Next, in step 2208, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

  Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off processing is ended. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power supply is restored. If Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S updates the number of times of instantaneous interruption. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer and returns to the processing that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power is not restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one-command processing called and executed in the processing of step 2250 in FIG.

  Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the operation timing of the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of a start lever operation effect-related determination process described later. I do. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a start lever operation process described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, when it is not the operation timing of the start lever, in step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether it is the first reel stop reception timing. If No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the first reel stop reception timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a first-time cylinder stop reception processing subroutine described later. Then, control goes to a step 7100.

  Next, if Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop reception timing, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the second reel stop reception timing. . If No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the second reel stop reception timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of a second body stop reception process described later. Then, control goes to a step 7100.

  Next, if Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2262 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing. . If No in step 2262, in other words, if it is the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls a subroutine of a third-body-stop-state effect-related determination process described later. Run. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a third-time cylinder stop acceptance time process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether it is the stop display symbol stop timing. . If Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the stop display symbol time process (not shown), and step 7100. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop display symbol stop timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in step 7100, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a menu screen display control process described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a standby screen display control process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation effect related determination process which is called and executed in the process of step 3000 of FIG. 41. First, in step 3002, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the AT-related state of the game is a “high probability state”. If Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the number of remaining high-secure obstacle games (high probability state) based on the high-secure obstacle counter value command received from the main control board M. Check how many more games are guaranteed). Next, in step 3050, the CPU SC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of battle effect execution availability determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is determined that the battle effect is executed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the game, the AT-related state of the next game, and the current high securing obstacle game count. Based on the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), the stay stage transition lottery (lottery of whether to change the stay stage) is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Even if No in step 3006, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the game is the “low probability state”. If Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the stay stage determination table (FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the game, and the AT-related state of the next game. Refer to the above), the stay stage transition lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the AT-related state of the game is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine for AT effect production determination processing to be described later, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the AT-related state of the game is the “resurrection possible / prohibited production state”. If Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of revival possibility effect determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets the notice effect and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the game, and the AT-related state of the next game. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). The stay stage is an effect mainly including the background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and is configured such that one of the stay stages is always set. Note that if the staying stage is different, the tendency of various effects such as background effect, notice effect, and the like will be different.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a battle effect execution availability determination process which is called and executed in the process of step 3050 of FIG. First, in step 3052, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of high security obstacle games is four or more. If Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. If Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S wins a battle effect with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example) whether or not to execute the battle effect execution lottery (battle effect (win)). The lottery of) is executed. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the battle effect execution availability lottery executed in step 3056 is won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the battle effect (win), and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). Here, the battle effect is a continuous effect that is executed over a plurality of games, and the battle effect is won, that is, the battle effect (victory) is executed to win the BB role and to win the AT lottery. It is structured that the winning is deterministic. The configuration relating to the battle effect is not limited to this, and if the BB combination is won even if the AT lottery is not won (after the BB, the state shifts to the “low probability state” or the “high probability state”). ) May be configured to execute a battle effect (win).

  Further, in the case of No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device relating to the game is a rare combination. Here, in this example, the rare roles are winning-C (cherry), winning-D (watermelon A) and winning-E (watermelon B), and the winning roles can be duplicated with the BB role. Has become. That is, the player has an expectation that he or she is simultaneously winning the BB combination because the rare combination is stopped and displayed. If Yes in step 3064, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays in step 3066. , A predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3, which is lower than the predetermined probability in step 3056), a lottery for selecting whether or not to execute a gasse battle effect (a lottery on whether or not to execute a battle effect (defeat)) ) Is executed. Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the winning combination lottery execution availability lottery executed in step 3066 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the battle effect (defeat), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). Further, in the case of No in step 3052, step 3064 or step 3068, in step 3072 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and performs the next process (the process of step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured to be executed even in the “normal section”.

  As described above, when the number of games with high security failure is equal to or more than a predetermined number, for example, when the number of games with high security failure is four or more, a continuous effect such as a battle effect can be executed over a plurality of games, When the number is less than the number, for example, when the number is less than 4, the continuous effect such as the battle effect is configured not to be executed. (The "normal section" is set), it is possible to prevent the advantageous section indicator YH from being turned off, and to perform the battle effect only when the lighting of the advantageous section indicator YH until the end of the battle effect can be ensured. By executing this, a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided without impairing the player's expectation of winning the BB.

  In addition, when the role of rare is elected, it is configured to be able to execute continuous production such as battle production (defeat), so that it is possible to guarantee the execution frequency of battle production and to always proceed with the game with expectation Can be.

  Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is an excerpt of only a part. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is used when the game is in the "low probability state" and is used when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of high securing obstacle games is four or more. The table includes three types: a table and a table used when the game is in a “high probability state” and the number of games with high securing obstacle is three or less.

  In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the “low probability state”, the relationship between the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the real game, and the corresponding number is shown. Stipulated. In the case of the “low probability state”, the current stay stage is composed of two types of staging stages, a desert stage and a town stage, and the transition stage is a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. It consists of four types of production stages. As states relating to the AT of the next game, there are three states: a "low probability state", a "normal BB inside medium game", and a "high probability state".

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game is transitioned to the “low probability state” or the “normal BB inside middle game” in the next game, 0 to 979 is allocated as the number of registers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. Further, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” or the “normal BB inside middle game” in the next game, the number of characters 980 to 980 when the desert stage shifts to the town stage in the game. 999 have been assigned.

  Furthermore, when the current stay stage is a town stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” or the “normal BB inside middle game” in the next game, 0 to 0 is set as a number when the town stage shifts to the desert stage in the game. 19 are assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, 20 to 999 are assigned as the number of characters when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  In addition, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game when the game is transitioned to the “high probability state” in the next game, 0 to 249 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the desert stage, and when the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 250 to 499 are allocated as the number of characters to shift from the desert stage to the town stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

  When the current stay stage is the town stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the town stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a town stage and the town stage is maintained in the next game when the town stage is maintained in the high probability state in the next game, 250 to 499 are allocated. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the numbers when the game is shifted from the town stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the city stage to the cave stage in the game.

  In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of highly secured games is four or more, the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the real game, and the number of sets is defined. Have been. As the current stay stage and the stage to be shifted, there are four types of performance stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage.

  In the case where the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 are assigned as the numerical values. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 880 to 929 are assigned as the number of characters when the desert stage shifts to the town stage in the game. The current stay stage is a desert stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as numbers when the game shifts from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. The current staying stage is the desert stage, and 960 to 999 are assigned as the number of characters when the desert stage shifts to the cave stage in the game.

  The current stay stage is a town stage, and 0 to 879 is assigned as a number when the town stage shifts to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is a town stage, and when the town stage is maintained in the game, 880 to 929 are assigned. The current stay stage is a town stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the number of characters when the town stage shifts to the conference room stage in the game. The current stay stage is a town stage, and 960 to 999 are assigned as the number of characters when the town stage shifts to the cave stage in the game.

  The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as numbers when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of positions when the game is shifted from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 are assigned as the numbers. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 950 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when the game is shifted from the conference room stage to the cave stage in the game.

  The current staying stage is a cave stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. The current staying stage is a cave stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the numbers when the game is shifted from the cave stage to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 100 to 199 are assigned as the number of positions when the game is shifted from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, 200 to 999 are assigned as the numbers.

  In the staying stage determination table used when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of highly secure failure games is 3 or less, the current staying stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the staying stage of the real game, , And the relationship with the number. As the current stay stage and the stage to be shifted, there are four types of performance stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. As states relating to the AT of the next game, there are three states: a "high probability state", a "game inside the advantageous BB", and a "low probability state".

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0 to 979 are assigned as the numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 980 to 999 are set as the numbers when the game shifts from the desert stage to the city stage. Have been assigned.

  When the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game shifts to “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0 to 19 are set as the numbers when the game shifts from the town stage to the desert stage. Have been assigned. When the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 20 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the town stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  When the current staying stage is the conference room stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB inside game" in the next game, 0 to 0 is set as the number when the conference room stage shifts to the desert stage in the game. 29 are assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of units to be changed from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game is 30 to 59 are assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 60 to 999 are set as the numbers when the conference room stage is maintained in the game. Have been assigned.

  If the current staying stage is a cave stage and the game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB inside game" in the next game, 0 to 29 is set as the number of units when shifting from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. It is assigned. If the current staying stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB inside game", 30 to 59 is set as the number of units when shifting from the cave stage to the town stage in the game. It is assigned. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the game shifts to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB inside game" in the next game, the number of units when moving from the cave stage to the conference room stage is 60 to 99. Has been assigned. When the current stay stage is the cave stage and the next game moves to the “high probability state” or the “advantageous BB inside game”, 100 to 999 is allocated as the number of characters when the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “low-probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game.

  When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a town stage and the town stage is maintained in the next game when the town stage is maintained in the low probability state in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned.

  When the current staying stage is the conference room stage, and when the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 is allocated as the number of units to shift from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game.

  When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current staying stage is a cave stage and a low probability state is entered in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the number of characters to enter from the cave stage to the town stage in the game.

  As described above, when the state is the “low probability state”, two stages of the desert stage or the city stage can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when the state is the “high probability state”, four stages of the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, four stay stages can be selected in the “advantageous section”, while two stay stages can be selected in the “normal section”, and can be selected in the “normal section”. The second stay stage can also be selected in the “advantage section”. With this configuration, even in the “normal section” where there is no expectation of winning the AT lottery, by selecting a staying stage that can be a staying stage in the “advantageous section”, the “normal section” is not tired. The game machine can proceed. In addition, when transitioning from the “high-probability state” to the “low-probability state”, that is, when changing from the “advantageous section” to the “normal section”, the “normal section” is selected in the “advantageous section” stage. By selecting the effect stage, it is difficult for the player to determine that the transition from the “advantageous section” to the “normal section” is made, and the game can be continued with a sense of expectation.

  In addition, a part of the production stage selected in the “normal section” overlaps with the production stage selected in the “advantage section” (the production stage that can be selected in the “normal section” but is not selected in the “advantage section”). May be included).

  Further, the stay stage determination table used when the number of high securement obstacle games is 4 or more and the stay stage determination table used when the number of high securement obstacle games is 3 or less are made different from each other. If there is less (3 games or less), do not shift to a stay stage with a higher degree of expectation, which is an “advantageous section” than the current stay stage (for example, desert stage → conference room stage) With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the "normal section" is reached with a small number of games despite the transition to the stay stage with higher expectations. The stay stages are in the order of "desirable section" with a low degree of expectation (hard to be selected in "advantageous section") to "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage".

  Note that the configuration of the stay stage is not limited to that of the present example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is that the expected degree of the “advantageous section”, the expected degree that has been won in the AT lottery, and the BB have been won. It may be configured to indicate a certain degree of expectation. As an example, it is configured so that the stay stage can be changed in a game in which a BB role or a rare role is won (when the AT lottery is won by the BB role and when the AT lottery is won by the single rare role. , And the expected degree of winning the AT lottery differs depending on the stay stage that has been moved, and the order is "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, meeting room stage" It is also possible to configure so that the expectation level of winning the BB role varies depending on the transitioned stay stage, and it is configured in the order of "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, meeting room stage" in order of low expectation level. Good (for example, when moving to the meeting room stage, it becomes definite that the BB internal winning or the AT lottery has been won).

  Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing an during-AT effect determination process called and executed in the process of step 3100 in FIG. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is three or less. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game is the AT final game. If Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery is won. If Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S produces an effect related to the game by continuously continuing AT effect (success) (AT continues and the AT counter M60 is set to an initial value. Then, an effect of notifying that the AT-related state of the next game will be the “AT in progress”) or an AT continuous agitation effect (failure) (AT continues to be set to an initial value in the AT counter M60 is definite. However, it is decided that the state relating to the AT of the next game is the “state during AT” or the “state for producing reproducibility”, and the process proceeds to step 3126. Here, when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fueling effect (success) to the AT continuous fueling effect (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4: 1. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the player has won the continuous lottery, the AT continuous agitation effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, it corresponds to the first game of the next set. In the next game, the revival effect (success) will be executed, and the player will feel as if he / she has won the revival lottery (actually, he has won the continuous lottery, and the main control board M). The control on the side is the same as when the AT continuation-inspiring effect (success) is executed). With such a configuration, it is rare to win the resurrection lottery in the “state of resurrection feasibility effect”, but {wins the lottery of 2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) in one game} and wins the continuous production By configuring so that the resurrection effect (success) can be executed even when the resurrection effect is executed, the rate at which the resurrection effect (success) is executed when the resurrection effect is executed can be increased, and the player expects the resurrection effect. The feeling can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the case of No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the AT-continuation-inspired effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. Further, in the case of No in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the AT end game effect, and proceeds to step 3126. In addition, in the case of No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the next game in which the AT continuation insulting effect (failure) is executed. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S restores the effect related to the game (success) (similar to the effect (success) effect executed in the "recoverability effect state"). Which is the effect mode of the above, and in this process, the effect relating to the fact that the “AT in progress” has continued) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, if No in step 3114, the process moves to step 3126.

  Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds an effect related to the game (an effect to notify that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, “+50 GET” or the like). ), And proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3126, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the AT effect (the effect executed during AT such as “AT in progress”), and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing the resurrection feasibility effect determination process called and executed in the process of step 3150 in FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the resurrection lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revives the effect related to the game (success) (this is an effect mode similar to the effect performed in step 3116 described above; This is an effect of notifying that the player has won the resurrection lottery in the “resurrection availability state”. The state shifts to the “AT state” in the next game, and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60.) After the determination, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 3152, at Step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not win the resurrection lottery in the resurrection effect (failure) in the effect relating to the game (“resurrection feasibility effect state”). This is an effect that informs the user that the game is going to go to the “low-probability state” in the next game), and goes to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  As described above, the “state of resurrection availability” is also an advantageous section, that is, a continuous lottery is won in the AT final game (the last game in the “AT state”) which is the “advantageous section”. Even if there is no, the "advantageous section" is configured to be extended even in the next game "revival state", so the player checks whether or not the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. It is difficult to determine whether the resurrection effect is successful only by doing so, and the result of the resurrection effect will be noted. Further, as described above, the execution mode of the lottery regarding the AT is different between the “during the AT state” and the “state of the resurrection possibility effect”. In other words, the execution mode of the lottery regarding the AT differs between the next game that has won the continuous lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed and the game that has won the resurrection lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the next game after the AT state is finished, the game is shifted to the “revival possibility production state” of one game, and the restoration lottery is executed in the “revival possibility production state”. By doing so, both the execution game of the revival effect (success) and the execution game of the revival effect (failure) are set as "advantageous sections", that is, by configuring the advantageous section display YH to be turned on. Although it is prevented that it is possible to determine whether or not the AT ends without checking the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows.
(1) In one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, the state relating to the AT is set to the "AT state", the resurrection flag is turned on in the one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, and the resurrection is performed in the game before the game in which the resurrection lottery is executed. Turning off the flag sets a different lottery mode for the AT.
(2) It is configured not to execute the resurrection lottery, and the control of the main control board M is configured to determine whether or not the “AT-in-progress state” ends based on whether or not the continuous lottery is won, and The execution timing of the continuous lottery is set to a game before the AT final game (one game before the AT final game, the first game in the set being executed, and the like). With such a configuration, a resurrection effect (success) and a resurrection effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub control board S side in the AT final game. As an example of the effect, "Previous game of AT final game: AT continuous fanning effect (success) → AT final game: Effect of starting AT of next set", "Previous game of AT final game: AT continuous fanning" Production (continue to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuation fan production (success) "," Previous game of AT final game: AT continuation fan production (failure) → AT final game: resurrection production (success) "," AT The game before the final game: AT continuation-induced production (failure) → AT final game: revival production (failure) ”may be executed. That is, the main control board M determines whether or not the “AT state” is continued (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won. It may be configured to execute an AT continuation production effect and a resurrection effect.
(3) In the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, the effect is executed in the same manner as the revival effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the revival effect (success) starts from the predetermined timing. May be informed, that is, the player may be informed that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In such a case, as the predetermined timing,
(1) It is the bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and can be executed when the continuous lottery is won.
(2) It is the start lever operation timing related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, an effect in the same effect mode as the resurrection effect (defeat) is not executed.
(3) A timing at which a stop button serving as a first stop according to a game in which a resurrection effect (success) is executed (a timing at which a first stop is turned on);
(4) Timing of releasing the stop button after pressing the stop button that becomes the first stop according to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (the timing of the first stop on → off);
(5) A timing at which a stop button serving as a second stop according to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (a timing at which the second stop is turned on);
(6) Timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button that is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (second stop ON → OFF timing),
(7) The timing at which the stop button for the third stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed is pressed (the timing when the third stop is turned on),
(8) Timing of releasing the stop button after depressing the stop button which is the third stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (timing when the third stop is turned on → off),
And so on,
(9) Bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the game following the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed;
(10) Start lever operation timing relating to the game following the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed;
And so on. In addition, in a case where a lottery is used to determine which of the various timings (1) to (10) as described above, the timing after the timing when the stop button for the first stop is pressed is determined. Since the advantageous section indicator YH is continuously lit even when neither the continuous lottery nor the resurrection lottery is won, the player presses the stop button for the third stop, and then presses the stop button. Can be played with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing when the player releases the button or until the start lever operation timing relating to the game following the game in which the resurrection effect is executed.

<Start lever operation processing>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing a process at the time of start lever operation called and executed in the process of step 2300 in FIG.

  Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is the AT-in-progress state. If Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to AT is the AT in progress state, in step 2350, the CPU SC of the sub control substrate S reads out and executes the during-AT process during start lever operation described later. , And shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, when the state related to the AT is not the AT in-progress state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is the special precursor state. Is determined. If Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is the special indication state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the start lever specialization processing when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not the “specialization precursor state”, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the state related to the AT to the “additional specialization state”. Is determined. If Yes in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is “additional specialization state”, in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs additional addition specialization processing at the time of start lever operation described later. The process is read out and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state relating to the AT is not the "add-on specialized state", in step 2307 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the state relating to the AT is "advantageous BB inside It is determined whether or not it is a "game". If Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is “advantageous BB inside middle game”, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a start lever operation middle BB inside middle processing subroutine. Is called and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  If No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not “advantageous BB inside game”, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the RT state is “RT1”. Is determined. If Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is “RT1”, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the AT-related state to no push order navigation (push order navigation It is determined whether or not the state is related to an AT that does not occur, such as “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, and the like. If Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state related to the AT is no push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. As described above, the reverse control instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command are received by the sub-control board S side, so that it is not a configuration capable of executing the push order navigation effect. When the main control board M sends the AT addition lottery and the command relating to the number of AT addition games is sent to the sub control board S when the AT addition lottery is won, and the sub control board S receives the command. Alternatively, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to the pushing order navigation.

  In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding the establishment as the push order navigation display in the first number display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of games has passed from the state of “RT1” and “AT in progress”, and the AT counter value becomes 0, whereby the state shifts to “RT1” and “low probability state”. In this case (before the replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if you win the reverse push white 7 set replay or the forward push black 7 set replay, there is no additional AT game number, so white seven or black seven It is configured so that the pushing order that is not in a straight line can be navigated. In addition, when the number of games has passed from the state of “RT1” and “AT in progress” and the AT counter value becomes 0, the state is shifted to “RT1” and “low probability state”. In addition, the push order navigation can occur in the game that wins the push order bell, but the push order navigation may not occur in the game that wins the push order replay.

  If No in Step 2308, No in Step 2310, or No in Step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an effect image and a background image based on the state related to the AT in Step 2316. (Step 2110).

<Processing during AT at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing a process during AT during start lever operation which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 in FIG. 47.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information on the condition device related to the game in Step 2352, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in Step 2354, and indicates the instruction number in Step 2356. Check the command related to. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as an “AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to the AT where the pushing order navigation is not executed, such as the “probability state” (the game section is also a “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and sends the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) is won and the pressing order of the correct answer can be grasped. For example, the same display mode group for the push order navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display for the push order replay (for example, the push order is informed by numbers and the display color related to the numbers is the same). ) It is applicable when it is configured to display in. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the effect display device S40 is configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the press order navigation display when executing the press order navigation, and the press order bell is displayed. It may be configured to display different effect images during execution of the push-order navigation and execution of the push-order navigation related to the push-order replay.

  Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  If Yes in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the push order bell as six push order navigation displays. An image that suggests the correct pressing order of the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button corresponds to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A1 which is the push order bell, circle the numbers that suggest the push order corresponding to the push order “Left → Middle → Right” that can get the maximum payout number. It is displayed in the display mode.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the pushing order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is Is determined. Here, the push order replay is one of replays-D1 to D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as the push order navigation display. The effect display device S40 displays an image that suggests the correct pressing order among the three selecting pressing orders. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, the pressing order is information for associating the first stop button with one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the numeral 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

  If No in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay game, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively called an avoidance command. If Yes in step 2366, in other words, if the avoidance command has been received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to be avoided in the first numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described processing of step 2360, 2364 or 2368, and then displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

  Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is three or less. If Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is three or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in display mode B (display mode described later). (A display mode that is less conspicuous than A).

  Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a forward push instruction command has been received. If Yes in step 2376, in other words, if the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to be avoided as the push order navigation display in the first order. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the number display mode group.

  If No in step 2376, or if the process in step 2378 has been executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a reverse push instruction command has been received. In step 2380, in the case of Yes, in other words, in the case where the reverse push command has been received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image to be avoided as the push order navigation display in the first order. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the number display mode group.

  If No in Step 2380 or if the process of Step 2382 has been performed, the CPUSC of the sub control board S proceeds to the next process (Process of Step 2110).

  In the case of No in step 2372, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is four or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in the display mode A (the display mode described above). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode more conspicuous than B. Here, in the case of four or more games, the display mode A is displayed, and in the case of three or less games, the display mode B is displayed.

  Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward push instruction command has been received. In step 2386, if Yes, in other words, if the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S responds to “left → center → right” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order to be performed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  If No in step 2386 or if the process of step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. In step 2390, if Yes, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub control board S responds to “right → middle → left” as a push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order to be performed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  If No in Step 2390 or if the processing in Step 2392 has been performed in Step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub control board S proceeds to the next processing (Processing in Step 2110). As described above, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that is more prominent than the display mode A, the forward push instruction command or the reverse Even if the push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim at 7!" Together with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the middle reel in the pushing order in which the white seven and the black seven are not stopped and displayed on the invalid line is the first stop reel. It was configured to execute the push order navigation. With this configuration, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games is small, the number of remaining AT games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player to know that the number of remaining AT games is small. Can be configured so that the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B is not hindered by the image of the arrow or the display of “Aim at 7!”. Similarly, in the situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small, a continuous effect (for example, a continuous effect that stimulates whether or not the “AT-in-progress state” (a state related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed) continues ” , Battle effect), the image of the arrow and “Aim at 7!” Are not displayed during the execution of the battle effect, so that the visibility of the battle effect is not hindered. be able to. Further, with this configuration, even when the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and it is displayed that the battle effect is defeated and the "AT in progress" is ended, the battle effect is being performed. When the forward push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command is received, the forward push instruction command or the reverse push is performed at the operation timing or the like of the bet button D220 after the display that the "AT in progress" is finished is displayed. Notify the number of AT-added games based on the command (based on the winning of forward-pressed black 7 replay or reverse-pressed white 7 replay). Instead, it can be configured to notify that the AT game number has been added at the subsequent timing, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

<Special precursor processing at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation special indication process called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG. 47.

  Next, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information relating to the condition device relating to the game, in step 2404, checks the winning / replaying winning information relating to the game, and in step 2406, the instruction number. Check the command related to. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as an “AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to the AT where the pushing order navigation is not executed, such as the “probability state” (the game section is also a “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and sends the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) is won and the pressing order of the correct answer can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  If Yes in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. Are displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numeric display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button corresponds to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case where the winning order-winning-A2, which is the pushing order bell, is won, the number indicating the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order “left → right → middle” that can obtain the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. Display in display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may include a number. May be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the pushing order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2412 that the condition device of the game is the pushing order replaying game. Is determined. Here, the push order replay is one of replays-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as the push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three-selection pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, the pressing order is information for associating the first stop button with one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, a numeral “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 is displayed. The numeral "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the pressing order information is displayed at a position near the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. Judge. If Yes in step 2416, in other words, if a forward push instruction command is received, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “left → center → right” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in Step 2416, in other words, in the case where the forward push instruction command has not been received, in Step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. If Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as a push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2424 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as avoidance commands. If Yes in step 2424, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to be avoided in the second numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, 2426, or in the case of No in step 2424, in step 2428, the CPU displays a background image during AT. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step S2430, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Special processing to add when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing an additional specialization process at the time of start lever operation which is called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG. 47.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in Step 2452, confirms winning / replay winning information related to the game in Step 2454, and indicates the instruction number in Step 2456. Check the command related to. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as an “AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to the AT where the pushing order navigation is not executed, such as the “probability state” (the game section is also a “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and sends the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) is won and the pressing order of the correct answer can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell or the common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

  If Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order bell or the common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct pressing order among the 6 selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button corresponds to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning the prize-A4, which is a pressing order bell, a number indicating a pressing order corresponding to the pressing order “right → left → middle” in which the maximum payout number can be obtained is surrounded by an asterisk. Is displayed in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may include a number. May be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither the pushing order bell nor the common bell, in step 2462 the CPUSC of the sub control board S The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is one of replays-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2462, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, the pressing order is information in which the first stop button corresponds to one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, a numeral “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 is displayed. The numeral "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the pressing order is displayed at a position near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the forward push instruction command It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, in the case where the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “left → center → right” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pushing order is forward pushing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 in order, from left to right. The pushing order can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, in the case where the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the reverse push instruction command has been received. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2472, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as a push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are a right stop button D43, a middle stop button D42, and a left stop button D41, respectively, in order from right to left. The direction of the push can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the first number display mode as the push-order navigation display. The groups are displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the avoidance command is a generic name for both the forward-push avoidance command and the reverse-push avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether the forward press avoidance command is received or the reverse press avoidance command is received. For example, when the forward push avoidance command is received, in order to avoid the forward push “left → middle → right”, the number “1” is displayed on the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40, and Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

  Next, when the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described processing of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476, or in the case of No in 2474, in step 2480, the AT intermediate background image is displayed. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step 2482, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Advantageous BB internal processing during start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation advantageous BB inside middle process called and executed in the process of step 2700 of FIG. 47.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in Step 2702, confirms winning / replay winning information related to the game in Step 2704, and indicates the instruction number in Step 2706. Check the command related to. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as an “AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to the AT where the pushing order navigation is not executed, such as the “probability state” (the game section is also a “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and sends the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) is won and the pressing order of the correct answer can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (five games) has elapsed since the shift to the advantageous BB inside middle game. If Yes in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (five games) has not elapsed since the shift to the advantageous BB internal middle game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S The condition device of (1) determines whether or not it is a pushing order bell or a common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

  If Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order bell or the common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct pressing order among the 6 selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button corresponds to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning the prize-A4, which is a pressing order bell, a number indicating a pressing order corresponding to the pressing order “right → left → middle” in which the maximum payout number can be obtained is surrounded by an asterisk. Is displayed in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may include a number. May be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

  Next, in the case of No at step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither the pushing order bell nor the common bell, at step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub control board S The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is one of replays-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as the push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, the pressing order is information in which the first stop button corresponds to one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, a numeral “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 is displayed. The numeral "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the pressing order is displayed at a position near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the command related to 7 replays It is determined whether or not. Here, the forward push instruction command, the reverse push instruction command, the forward push avoidance command, and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. If Yes in step 2718, in other words, if a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image whose avoidance is to be performed as the first number in the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of the above-described steps 2712, 2716, 2720, or in the case of No in step 2718, in step 2722, displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2722. Then, in step S2724, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on display device S40 in display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

  In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (five games) has elapsed since the shift to the advantageous BB inside middle game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the effect display device S40. Then, the fact that the BB has been won is notified (in this process, the pressing order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing when the first torso stop is received>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing a first trunk stop accepting time process called and executed in the process of step 2500 in FIG. 41.

  Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2502, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S operates the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. Or not.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays in the pressing order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S presses forward navigation or reverse. It is determined whether or not the pressing order navigation related to the pressing navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replay is a general term for a forward-pressed black 7 set replay and a reverse-pressed white 7 set replay. If Yes in step 2508, in step 2510, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the push-order navigation in the dark state (the dark state is continuously displayed in the game), and the next process (the process in step 2110) is performed. Move.

  If No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S deletes all the push order navigation displays, and the push order fails. The effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Process at the time of accepting the second torso stop>
Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing a second-body-stop-accepting-time process called and executed in the process of step 2550 in FIG. 41.

  Next, in step 2552, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push-order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the pressing order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop. It is determined whether or not there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the second button in the pressing order navigation display is displayed. 2 The display related to the stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S Erase, a push order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, or in the case of No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<The 3rd stop effect rendering-related processing>
Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing the third trunk stoppage effect-related determination process called and executed in the process of step 3200 in FIG. 41.

  Next, in step 3202, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in other words, when the BB combination is won, in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has won during the non-AT ("low probability state" or "high probability state") It is determined whether or not it is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in other words, in the case of the winning BB combination during the non-AT, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the non-AT BB start effect determination table to determine the AT of the game. Based on the status and the BB combination, the BB start effect (the effect executed when the BB combination is won) is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  Next, in the case of No at step 3204, in other words, the BB role which has been won during the AT ("AT state", "additional specialization state", "specialization preparation state", or "state for resurrection performance") If there is, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during AT, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the state of the AT regarding the game and the BB combination, and executes The processing shifts to processing (processing of step 2600).

  Next, in the case of No in Step 3202, in other words, when the BB combination does not win, in Step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes an effect based on the effect performed in the game, The process moves to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  The non-AT during BB start effect determination table shown in the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of the BB in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of the BB combination, the state related to the AT, the type of the BB start effect, and the probability (allocation). There are two types of BB combination, BB with setting difference (one type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C). There are two types of states relating to the AT: “Normal BB inside game” and “Advantageous BB inside game”. The BB start effects are of three types: normal effects, high expectation effects, and premium effects. It should be noted that the degree of expectation of shifting to the “AT state” after the end of the BB is configured to be different depending on the type of the BB start effect in the BB that has been won during the non-AT, and from the low expectation to the “normal effect” → High-Expectation Direction → Premier Direction ”.

  When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one kind of BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is a normal BB inside game, the probability that the BB start effect is a normal effect is 179/256. . When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type of BB-B) and the state of the game related to the AT is “normal BB internal middle game”, the probability that the BB start effect becomes a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB combination is a BB with difference in setting (1 type BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside medium game”, the probability that the BB start effect is the premier effect is 0/256. Is.

  When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB inside game", the probability that the BB start effect becomes the normal effect is 179/256. Is. If the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type BB-B) and the state of the game related to the AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. If the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside middle game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a premier effect is 0/256. It is.

  When the BB combination is BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) and the state of the game related to AT is “normal BB inside middle game”, the BB start effect becomes a normal effect. The probability is 179/256. When the BB combination is a BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a high expectation effect Is 77/256. If the BB combination is BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) and the state of AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a premium effect. The probability is 0/256.

  When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB inside game", the BB start effect becomes the normal effect. The probability is 67/256. When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB inside game", the BB start effect is a high-expectation effect. The probability of becoming is 157/256. If the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB inside game", the BB start effect becomes the premium effect. The probability is 32/256.

  When it is a “normal section”, even if a BB without a setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) is won or a BB with a setting difference (one type BB-B) is won, a premium effect Is determined so that the possibility of selecting the normal effect is higher than that of the high-expected effect effect.

  Even if it is an advantageous section, if a BB (one type BB-B) with a setting difference is won, a premium effect is not selected and a normal effect may be selected rather than a high expectation effect. It is set to be high.

  In the case of the “advantageous section”, when a BB without a setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) is won, there is a possibility that a premium effect is selected. With such a configuration, it is determined that the premium effect is selected, and that the BB with no setting difference is won, and that the state shifts to the “AT in progress” after the BB without setting difference is completed. Can be shown to the player. In the case of the “advantageous section” and the BB without the setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) is won, the possibility that the high expectation effect is selected more than the normal effect is increased. (It is unlikely that a normal effect will be selected.) By doing so, the player can guess whether or not the AT will be started after the end of the BB by confirming the BB start effect, and can have a sense of expectation for winning the AT. It should be noted that there is a difference in the setting that wins in the "normal BB inside middle game" and distribution of BB start effects related to BB (1st class BB-B), and there is no setting difference that wins in the "normal BB inside middle game" The allocation is the same as the allocation of the BB start effect regarding Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a setting difference that has been won in “Normal BB inside game” and the distribution of the BB start effect related to BB (1 type BB-B) and “Normal BB inside game” The distribution of the BB start effect related to the winning BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) may be made different from each other. The distribution can be configured to differ depending on whether the effect is an effect or a BB start effect for a BB with no setting difference.

  The BB start effect determination table during AT shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining an effect at the start of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (allocation). There are two types of BB combination, BB with setting difference (one type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C). The state relating to the AT is one type of “advantageous BB inside middle game”. There are two types of BB start effects, that is, effects that can be added and effects that cannot be added. The addition possible effect is an effect indicating that the AT addition lottery can be executed during the execution of the BB, and the addition impossible effect is an effect indicating that the AT addition lottery is not executed during the execution of the BB. The BB won during the AT has no element as to whether or not to win the AT lottery, and depending on the type of the BB, whether or not the lottery at the AT is executed may be different. In addition, during the AT, even if there is a setting difference in which the AT addition lottery is not executed in the BB, the BB to be executed can be added to the AT addition lottery due to the fact that a game medal can be obtained and the AT becomes advantageous to the player after the BB ends. Is configured to clearly notify whether or not is executed. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described in detail.

  If the BB combination is a BB with setting difference (1st class BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect can be added is 0 / Since it is 256, the effect that can be added is not executed. When the BB combination is BB with setting difference (1st class BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is non-addable effect is 256 / 256, and the addition-prohibition effect is always executed. When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB inside game", the BB start effect can be added. The probability of becoming is 256/256, and the additionable production is always executed. If the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB inside game", the BB start effect is a non-addable effect. The probability of becoming is 0/256, and no addition-prohibition effect is executed.

<Process at the time of accepting the third torso stop>
Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing a third torso stop acceptance process executed by being called and executed in the process of step 2600 in FIG. 41.

  Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. It is determined whether or not there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces an effect as a successful pressing order. “GET!” Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, if No in step 2606, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "GET" Is not displayed.

  In the case of No in step 2602 described above, in other words, when the push-order navigation is not being displayed, in the case of No in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is not the push-order bell, or step 2608 or 2610. When the processing of step S12 is executed, in step 2612, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a command relating to the number of AT-added games (command set in step 1517) is received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates a difference from the previously received command indicating the number of remaining AT games. It may be configured to determine whether the number of AT-added games has been executed and the number of AT-added games, and display the number of AT-added games.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when the command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S uses the effect display device S40 to add AT games. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, when the command related to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, in step 2616, the CPU SC of the sub control board S adds the AT to the effect display device S40. Without displaying the number of games, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). Further, as a method of informing the number of additional games to be AT, (1) notifying all of the number of additional games in the game, (2) notifying a part of the number of additional games in the game, and the remaining number of games after the game. (3) The number of games to be added is not notified in the game (3) The game after the game (for example, when 7 replays are won, when the common bell is won (when a role that is not originally added is won), and multiple games are played. After executing the game (continuous production), the game in which the number of remaining games on the production display device S40 becomes "0", or the bet button D220 of the next game of the game that becomes "0", the operation of the start lever D50. ) Can be notified.

  In addition, when the common bell is won in the "additional specialization state", the display regarding the number of AT added games is not displayed even when the game is stopped according to the pushing order navigation (the common bell performs the AT added lottery). Absent).

  With the above-described configuration, according to the turning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the gaming machine configured such that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on in the “advantageous section”, the period that is advantageous for the player Can be appropriately notified. In addition, by providing a "recovery possibility production state", when the continuous production is won and the revival production (success) is executed thereafter, the state regarding the AT of the game in which the revival production (success) is executed is Since the advantageous section display YH is lit because it is in the “AT in progress”, on the other hand, even when the continuous production is not won and the restoration production (failure) is executed thereafter, the restoration production (failure) is executed. The advantageous section indicator YH is turned on by setting the state related to the AT of the game to be “recoverable / prohibited production state” and the state related to the AT to the “advantageous section”. With such a configuration, by visually recognizing the advantageous section display YH in the game in which the revival effect is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the revival effect is successful or unsuccessful. In the gaming machine configured to be able to appropriately notify the period that is advantageous for the gaming machine, it is possible to secure the gaming machine with high interest.

  In this example, when the player wins the BB role in the “high probability state”, the player is configured to be able to win the AT lottery, and is configured to be able to shift to the “AT-in-progress state” after the end of the BB. The configuration relating to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, the player may be configured to be able to win the AT lottery with a rare role such as cherry (can also be won even if it is not the BB role) and to win the AT lottery. The state relating to the AT may be shifted to the “AT precursor state”, and the game may be shifted to the “AT in-state” by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the “AT precursor state”.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7100 in FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu screen is not displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG by pressing the sub input button SB or the like, and the player selects from a plurality of items to confirm various settings and information regarding the gaming machine. It is a screen that can be. As an example of a method of selecting and determining an item, a cross key SB2 (having four buttons of an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button) is operated to move a cursor to a desired item, and By operating the sub input button SB, the currently selected (cursored) item is determined, and a screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed by determining the selected item are menu screens. The menu screen may have a plurality of display modes, for example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may be different depending on the game state, or the design of the background image may be different. Even if there is a difference, the menu screen is referred to as a menu screen.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen>
An example of items that can be selected on the menu screen is listed below.
(1) Volume adjustment: The volume output from the gaming machine may be adjusted by the player. For example, when the screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed and the right button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the volume is output. The volume may be increased and the output volume may be decreased by operating the left button of the cross key SB2.
(2) Light amount adjustment: The light amount (brightness) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50) may be configured so that the player can adjust the light amount. For example, after the screen corresponding to the light amount adjustment is displayed, the light amount (brightness) is increased (brightened) by operating the up button of the cross key SB2, and the light amount (brightness) is weakened by operating the down button of the cross key SB2. (Dark).
(3) Character customization: Characters appearing during the game (such as the main character, the voice of the push order navigation, the battle character, and the character that supports the game progress that is always displayed on the staging display device S40) can be selected and changed. After displaying the screen corresponding to the character customization, the cursor may be moved to the character to be selected with the cross key SB2, and the sub input button SB may be operated.
(4) Reel array table: The reel array may be displayed on the screen corresponding to the reel array table.
(5) Payout Table: A payout table (a list of symbol combinations that constitute replays or winning combinations by being stopped and displayed) may be displayed on a screen corresponding to the payout table. When the payout table is divided and displayed on a plurality of screens, for example, the screen of the payout table may be switched with the left button and the right button of the cross key SB2.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, if Yes in step 7102, in step 7104 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen can be displayed. Here, the menu screen displayable state means that the menu screen is displayed when an operation that can display the menu screen (may be configured to be able to be displayed over time) such as an operation of the sub input button SB is performed. The state may be as follows, and a specific example may be configured as follows.
(1) Game end timing (timing when the third stop button is turned on → off, display determination timing, payout completion timing based on winning, and a command related to the game end set or transmitted to the sub-control board S as game end processing The game does not proceed from the timing, the timing at which the command relating to the end of the game is received by the sub-control board S side, etc. (there is no new bet operation, no automatic bet operation based on the new game stop display, a new start) If a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed with no operation of the lever, no new rotation of the reel, etc., the menu screen displayable state may be set (until the sub input button SB is operated until then). Menu screen is not displayed.) The bet operation includes both a case where a bet is made by operating the bet button D220 and a case where a game medal is inserted into the medal slot D170 and a bet is made (the automatic bet based on the re-game stop display). May be included in the betting operation).
(2-1) The menu screen may not be displayed during execution of a game (betting of a game medal, during a wait period until the start of reel rotation, and during reel rotation).
(2-2) A menu screen may be displayed during execution of a game (eg, a game medal is bet).
(3) During the execution of a predetermined effect (during the execution of the effect that informs whether or not a bonus has been won, during the execution of a continuous effect that is executed over a plurality of games, during the execution of the effect, it is an effect that informs whether or not the lottery has been won by adding the number of AT games) , Etc.) may be configured so that the menu screen display is not enabled.
(4) A configuration may be made so that the menu screen display is not enabled while the replay is stopped.
In order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, when the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (an LED provided inside the sub input button SB) is set. You may comprise so that it may blink.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7104, in step 7106, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. In this example, the operation of displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub input button SB, but the operation of displaying the menu screen may be changed or the operation of displaying the menu screen may be provided in plural. . If Yes in step 7106, in step 7108, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays a menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer (timer for measuring the time to transition to the standby screen described later from the game end timing) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer is timing). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time required to shift from the menu screen to a standby screen described later). Is set) to a predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example, which is longer than a predetermined time A described later), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the menu standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the menu standby timer is timing), and the next processing (processing of step 7200). Move to.

In step 7114, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether the menu screen end condition is satisfied. The menu screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the menu screen, in other words, a condition for switching the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image), and a specific example that is satisfied May be configured as follows.
(1) It may be configured to be satisfied when a new bet operation is performed, a start lever is newly operated, or a reel is newly started to rotate.
(2) In a situation where the menu screen is continuously displayed, the condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time (300 seconds, which is the predetermined time B, in this example) has elapsed from the start of the display of the menu screen.
(3) It may be configured such that a predetermined item on the menu screen is selected and determined, and a predetermined operation is performed on the screen corresponding to the predetermined item so as to be satisfied. And the sub input button SB is operated to display a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment. After operating the cross key SB2 to adjust the volume to a desired volume, the sub input button SB is operated again to select. The volume is set to a medium level, the display of the menu screen ends, and the screen before the menu screen is displayed (may be referred to as a normal screen) is displayed.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7114, in step 7116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed on the effect display device S40 before the menu screen is displayed. As an example, when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB in a situation where the screen where the hero is walking in the forest is displayed, when the display of the menu screen ends, The screen where the hero is walking in the forest will be displayed. Next, in step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 7200).

  If No in step 7114, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines in step 7122 whether the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. If Yes in step 7122, in step 7124 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets a predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example) to the menu standby timer, and shifts to the next process (process of step 7200). To do. Even if No in step 7104, step 7106, or step 7122, the process moves to the next process (process in step 7200). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer is set to the predetermined time B (300 in this example). Second) is reset, in other words, the measurement of the time until the standby screen is displayed is restarted from the beginning. In this example, two timers, that is, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers for displaying the standby screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one timer for displaying the standby screen is used. It may be configured for use. Specifically, only the standby timer is used as a timer for displaying the standby screen, and the predetermined standby time A (180 seconds) set in the standby timer and the preset time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer are waited for. The timer may be set. As a specific example, the third stop button is turned from ON to OFF and the standby timer is set to the predetermined time A (180 seconds), and then the sub input button SB is operated under the condition that the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds. When the menu screen is displayed and the display is started, the standby timer may be set to a predetermined time B (300 seconds).

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7200 in FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether the standby screen is not displayed. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined time (the game has not progressed). A moving image related to a story is repeatedly played back, a display of "power saving" is displayed, or a logo mark related to a game machine maker is displayed. In this example, the operation of the player is required as a condition for displaying the above-described menu screen, while the operation of the player is not required as the condition for displaying the standby screen.

  In the case of Yes in step 7202, in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when a standby timer described later is counting) is off. I do. If Yes in step 7204, in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this processing, the timing at which the third stop button is turned on → off is set as the game end timing. If Yes in step 7206, in step 7208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S measures a standby timer (a timer for measuring a time required to shift to a standby screen from the end of the game, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends). Is set to a predetermined time A (180 seconds in this example, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the standby timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 7212. In the present embodiment, the condition for executing the processing of step 7208 and step 7210 is that the game end timing is reached, but in addition to this, operating the sub input button SB on the menu screen Thus, the condition may be that the image displayed before the display of the menu screen is displayed (the display of the menu screen is completed).

  Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby timer has become 0. If Yes in step 7212, in step 7214 the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the waiting timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 7224. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 7206, the processing shifts to step 7224.

  Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu waiting timer counting flag is on. If Yes in step 7224, in step 7226, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the menu standby timer has become 0. If Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer clocking flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). Even if No in step 7224 or step 7226, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

  If No in step 7204, in other words, if the standby timer timing flag is on, in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby timer timing end condition is not satisfied. I do. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition for terminating the timing of the standby timer and clearing the timer value of the standby timer to zero, and there is a new bet operation and a new start lever operation. In addition, a new start of the rotation of the reel and the like are the conditions for terminating the counting of the standby timer. If Yes in step 7238, the process moves to step 7212, while if No in step 7238, the process moves to step 7216.

  If No in Step 7202, in Step 7240, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby screen end condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the standby screen, and in this example, there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, and a new reel rotation. "Started" is the standby screen end condition. It should be noted that a configuration is possible in which a transition from the standby screen to the menu screen is possible (display of the menu screen). For example, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub input button SB in a state where the standby screen is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Next, in step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed before the display of the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). As an example, in a situation where a screen in which the hero is walking in the forest is displayed, if the standby screen is displayed because the A game has not progressed for a predetermined time, the bet operation is executed to execute the bet operation again. Will be displayed on the screen while walking in the forest.

  Next, FIG. 58 is an image diagram of transition to a standby screen according to the present embodiment. First, in the case of (a), the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB in the menu screen display enabled state. Thereafter, under the condition that the menu screen is displayed, five minutes (the predetermined time B and 300 seconds) elapse without operating the sub input button SB or the bet button D220, and the standby screen is displayed. Next, in the case of (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, and all the reels are stopped by performing a stop operation of the third stop button, and the player presses the third stop button. Three minutes (180 seconds, which is the predetermined time A) have elapsed since the release, and the standby screen is displayed because the sub input button SB and the bet button D220 have not been operated during that time. As described above, in this example, a case where a predetermined time B has elapsed since the menu screen was displayed, and a case where the predetermined time A has elapsed since the game was ended (after the third stop button was turned on → off). , The standby screen can be displayed, and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<< Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example >>
Here, a configuration regarding a menu screen and a standby screen applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail below, including the configuration of the present embodiment. It should be noted that the configurations listed below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, and that one or a plurality of them are appropriately combined without any problem.

<Timing start timing of standby timer>
The initial value is set in the standby timer that measures the time until the standby screen is displayed, and the timing for starting the time measurement is as follows: (1) The third stop button (the stop corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) Button) is turned on and then turned off, timing is started, (2) timing is started from execution timing of display determination, (3) timing is started from payout completion timing based on winning, (4) game. Timing is started from the timing at which a command related to the game end is set or transmitted to the sub-control board S as the end processing. May be. Alternatively, a predetermined time A (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as an initial value.

<Timing start timing of the menu standby timer>
The timing is started from the timing when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB as the timing for setting the initial value to the menu standby timer for measuring the time until the menu screen is displayed and for starting the timing. May be. Further, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu waiting timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. The predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A set in the standby timer described above (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds).

<Configuration of sub input button>
In a situation where the menu standby timer is counting, the menu standby timer may be configured so that the initial value can be reset. For example, operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 while the menu screen is displayed Thus, a predetermined time B which is an initial value (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set in the menu standby timer. As an example, when the menu screen is started to be displayed, the timer is set to 300 seconds in the menu standby timer, and time measurement is started. After 100 seconds, the timer key of the menu standby timer is 200 seconds. The operation may be configured so that 300 seconds is reset in the menu standby timer by the operation. In addition, the menu screen can be started to be displayed by operating the sub input button SB, and while the menu screen is being displayed (the screen is started by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after the menu screen is displayed). By operating the cross key SB at the transition destination screen where the transition has occurred, the initial value may be reset to the menu standby timer, or the menu screen may be displayed (menu By operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB on the transition destination screen to which the screen has transitioned by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after the screen is started) A configuration may be made so that an initial value can be reset in the menu waiting timer.

<Configuration of stop button>
While the standby timer is counting, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then off, and then the bet operation is not executed. Depending on the situation, even if the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, and right stop button) is operated, the standby timer may not be reset to its initial value. As an example, as a final stop operation, a third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, 180 seconds is set in the standby timer, and the timer starts counting. After that, in a situation where the bet operation is not executed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, the timer value of the standby timer is not reset again even if the stop button is operated, and the timer value is 100 seconds. It may be configured to remain as it is.

<Configuration related to betting operation>
When the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off as a final stop operation in a situation where the standby timer is counting, and then a bet operation is performed ( When the bet is operated by operating the bet button D220 or when a game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 and the bet is placed), the timer of the standby timer is stopped and the timer value is cleared to zero. That is, in the situation where the standby timer is counting, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the bet operation is executed. If no other operation is performed, the standby screen may not be displayed due to the passage of time. In such a configuration, the standby screen is not displayed due to the lapse of time since the bet operation, but the volume of the sound being output is output when a specific time (for example, 100 seconds) has elapsed since the bet operation. May be set to 0 or smaller. With such a configuration, the number of remaining game medals is less than a specified number (for example, three) (for example, one), and the remaining one game medal is bet (for example, a bet button is operated). When a game is finished, or when a player finishes the game with no game medals remaining in the credits less than the specified number (the bet has not been placed), the clerk at the game hall cleans the game machine by using the bet button. , The sound will not be output at an unintended volume.

<Display condition of standby screen>
The standby screen may be displayed on condition that the timer value of the decrement timer (in this example, the standby timer and the menu standby timer) relating to the display of the standby screen has changed from “1 → 0”. With this configuration, the timer value reaches “0” without going through “1”, such as “20 → 0”, when a bet operation is performed or some abnormality occurs in timer measurement. In this case, the standby screen is not displayed even when the timer is cleared to zero, and the display of the unintended standby screen can be prevented (the timer value is reset again to “1 → 0”). In such a case, a standby screen may be displayed. A flag for displaying the standby screen may be provided, and the standby screen may be displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Structure related to checkout button>
In a situation where the standby timer is counting, as a final stop operation, a third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then one or more credits are present. In the situation, when the payment of the credit is executed by operating the payment button, the predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the operation timing of the payment button or the timing at which the payment of the credit is completed (the last game medal is executed). The standby screen may be displayed at the timing of returning to the discharge port D240).

<Configuration of setting key switch>
As a final stop operation, a third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off to on when the power is on. The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing. In addition, as the final stop operation, after turning on the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end) and then turning it off, open the front door while the power is on. The setting key switch may be turned off → on, and the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the front door was closed.

<Structure regarding occurrence of predetermined error>
As the final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then a predetermined error regarding the main control board M side (for example, a game medal is a medal selector DS). It is possible to display the standby screen when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing at which the predetermined error was released.

<Configuration of front door>
As a final stop operation, a third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, so that the standby timer starts timing, and then the front door is opened, and the open state is opened. May be configured to continue counting the time of the standby timer even when the time is maintained. Further, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, so that the standby timer starts timing, and then the front door is opened, Thereafter, even when the front door is closed, the timing of the standby timer may be continued.

<Structure 1 regarding AT>
In a non-AT state (for example, the state relating to the AT is a “normal game state”), the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on as a final stop operation and then turned off. When a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing at which the AT has been set, the standby screen can be displayed, while the final stop operation is performed in a situation where the AT is being performed (e.g., the state relating to the AT is "AT in progress"). The standby screen is not displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off. May be. Similarly, even during the execution of the continuous effect, the execution of the bonus, and the ART, the standby screen may not be displayed even if the predetermined time A has elapsed after the end of the final stop operation. Further, in a situation where the AT is being performed (for example, the state relating to the AT is “the AT state”), a third stop button (corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is determined as the final stop operation in the game in which the push order navigation is executed. When a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the stop button (which has been turned on) is turned on after turning on, the standby screen is not displayed, and the AT is being displayed (for example, the status relating to the AT is "AT status"). In this situation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on as a final stop operation in the game in which the push order navigation has not been executed, and a predetermined time has elapsed since the turn off. When A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed, a standby screen may be displayed.

<Configuration 2 during AT>
When a menu screen is displayed by operating a sub input button or the like in a situation where an AT is being performed (for example, the state relating to the AT is an “AT being performed”), (1) a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed. To display a standby screen, and (2) return to the normal screen during AT (the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed) after a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed. You may.

<Configuration 3 during AT>
In a non-AT state (for example, the state relating to the AT is a “normal game state”), the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on as a final stop operation and then turned off. When a predetermined time A (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the timing set in the above, a standby screen can be displayed, and in a situation where a non-AT is being performed (for example, a state relating to the AT is a “normal game state”), A menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time B (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display of the menu screen, a standby screen can be displayed. ), The menu screen is displayed, and if a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the menu screen display, the normal screen during AT (display before the menu screen is displayed) May be configured to return to that have been screen) it is. That is, when the time values are compared, it may be configured such that “predetermined time A = predetermined time B <predetermined time C”. Note that the time values of the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B do not have to be the same, and the predetermined time C may be the longest.

<Other Configuration 1>
A menu screen may be displayed by inserting game medals from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is being displayed. Note that the menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 during the display of the standby screen includes (1) the same screen as the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button; A) a screen displayed by executing a predetermined operation from the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button (selecting and determining a predetermined item); (3) operating the sub input button It may be configured as a screen different from the displayed menu screen. Further, even if a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 while the menu screen is displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal slot D170 during the display of the standby screen, the menu screen continues to be displayed. When a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by operating the input button is displayed, the screen may return to the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed. In addition, when a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 and a bet is made during the display of the standby screen, a menu screen is displayed. (A normal screen displayed during a game when the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) may be displayed. When a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is being displayed and a bet is placed, a menu screen is displayed, the standby screen is displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is the specified number. In the above situation, if a bet is made by operating the bet button (for example, a max bet button that allows three bets by one operation), the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed (the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) Is displayed, the normal screen displayed during the game) is displayed, the standby screen is being displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the specified number of three, and the bet button is displayed. A menu screen may be displayed when a bet is made by operating (for example, a max bet button that allows three bets by one operation).

<Other configuration 2>
It has a plurality of display modes of the standby screen, and satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, by entering a password on the menu screen, it may be set as a predetermined condition that a game is taken over from the previous game history up to the previous time). If not, a moving image for introducing a story is displayed as a standby screen, but if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a moving image for introducing a character may be displayed as a standby screen. . In addition, the story introduction and the character introduction can be displayed as a standby screen both when the predetermined condition is not satisfied and when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Depending on whether or not the story introduction or the character introduction is displayed, the frequency may be different.

<Other changes>
In the present example, a first BB role in which the first BB is executed by winning a prize, and a second BB role in which the second BB that is less profitable for the player than the first BB is executed by winning the prize. It may be configured such that the first BB combination and the second BB combination can be elected and won (a combination of “1 BB + 2 BB” is provided). With such a configuration, when the “1st BB + 2nd BB” is won, the symbol combination (1st BB role) corresponding to the execution of the high profit 1BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the 1st BB, The symbol combination (second BB combination) corresponding to 2BB may be stopped and displayed (while the first BB is being executed, the fact that the second BB has been won is carried over). When the first BB + second BB is won, by executing the high profit first BB first, for example, in a situation where the closing time of the game hall is approaching, the first BB + second BB is won. In this case, the low profit second BB is executed first, and the game hall is closed during the execution of the second BB, and the game must be terminated without executing the high profit first BB. Can be prevented.

  After the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning of the second BB may be immediately notified, or may be notified after the concealment (after a predetermined game has elapsed without notifying), and the concealment configuration is adopted. In such a case, during the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning probability of the replay may be increased. When hiding, an effect indicating the possibility of winning the second BB may be configured to be executed (for example, “BB consecutive villa chance time !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40). . In such a configuration, unless the case where the second BB is not won after the end of the first BB is not provided, it is definite that the effect is generated = the second BB is won, so that only the first BB is won. However, it is preferable that an effect indicating the possibility of winning the second BB is executed even after the operation of the first BB is completed (the effect after the end of the first BB is the same as that described above). For example, "BB consecutive villa chance time !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40). In addition, even if the first BB is won and the first BB is won again after the operation of the first BB is completed, the execution of the effect indicating the possibility of winning the second BB is not stopped. You may. Further, it may be configured such that the winning of the second BB is once notified, and then the winning of the first BB is notified (for example, the display of "BB condominium chance time!" → The display of "sorry" → "The second". (1BB is being won!) Etc.). Further, when the second BB is hidden after the operation of the first BB is completed after the winning in the AT and the operation of the first BB is completed, the effect display device S40 returns the AT to the AT after the AT is being prepared. The number of remaining games may be reduced, but the internal number of remaining games may be continuously interrupted. In the case where the first BB and the second BB are won in duplicate, the payout number from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example,
(1) When the first BB and the small winning combination A win, the stop control is performed with priority given to the first BB.
(2) When the first BB and the small win B are won twice, stop control is performed with priority given to the small win B.
That is, it is possible to provide a small winning combination whose stop control is prioritized over the BB winning combination and a small winning combination whose stop control is prioritized for the BB winning combination.
(3) When the first BB and the small win A are won twice, when the small win A wins, or a part of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small win A (for example, at the time of the first stop, If the second stop is stopped, a notification corresponding to the small combination A (a notification that the small combination A can win) is made.
In other words, the notification of the first BB combination that should normally be controlled to stop before the small combination A is reported as a result of the first stop or the second stop (a stop mode after the execution of the first stop or the second stop). Accordingly, when the first BB combination cannot be won (regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped), the notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. In addition, if the small win A wins as a result of the game, a notification corresponding to the small win A is issued. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the most advantageous notification to the player according to various game situations that change in the middle of the game, and at the same time as the content notified by the effect display device S40 or the like. It is possible to prevent inconsistent winning roles.
(4) When the first BB and the small win B are won twice, a notification corresponding to the small win B is made during rotation of all reels.

  Further, the main control board M may be configured to have a display device (7-segment, etc.) for displaying the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) stopped and displayed. In the case of such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs an inconsistent effect that does not correspond to the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed. For example, when the symbol combination of replay-replay-replay is stopped on the activated line, an effect (for example, lighting a lamp in green) that is likely to be output when the watermelon is won is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack that can output (cannot input) from the sub-control board S side may be provided, and may have the following features.
(1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of stages by the sub input button of the gaming machine.
(2) Even when playing a game using the earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, output from a speaker provided in the gaming machine). ).
(3) When playing a game using the earphone jack, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume other than the maximum volume even when the maximum volume is selected.

  Further, during the AT state or during BB execution, even when a game is played using the earphone jack, the effect sound may be output from the gaming machine. Further, the volume for when the earphone jack is not used and the volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be separately stored. Even when the earphone is unplugged, the sound volume for when the earphone jack is used may not be cleared (to the initial value) immediately. For example, when there is no operation for 10 minutes, any volume may be cleared (to the initial value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, the volume for use of the earphone jack does not have to be cleared (to the initial value). The earphone jack is preferably provided at a place where it does not interfere with the game (for example, when the earphone is inserted into the earphone jack, the earphone cord is not entangled with the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever) ).

In this example,
(1) The winning probability of the replaying game can be changed between after the BB ends when the number of the specified number or more is obtained during the execution of the BB and after the BB ends when the number of the obtained number or less is obtained. You may comprise.
(2) There may be a plurality of RT states to which a transition is made when an RT state (for example, RT1) with a relatively high probability of winning a re-gaming role ends. For example, it may be configured to shift to “RT0” after “RT1” ends, or to shift to “RT3” (a newly provided RT state).
(3) When a predetermined combination is won, the state is shifted to the RT state. In other words, the transition of the RT state is not made to correspond one-to-one with the winning, and the transition is made with a certain probability regardless of the condition device and the winning (for example, the RT transition lottery is executed with a certain probability for each game).
(4) It is possible to install the 0th RT transition, the double winning of the 0th winning combination, and the double winning of the 0th winning combination. In other words, no matter which pressing order, even if the stop operation is performed at any position, a zero role is provided in which one or more roles do not win, and the RT state shifts by the winning of the zero role. It is also possible to configure so that it is possible to obtain a winning combination of zero-copies and seven-copies, or a double-prize winning of zero-copies A and B. In addition, at the time of the winning of the zero-prize combination, any of the zero-prize combination that shifts to RT and the zero-prize combination that does not transition to the RT may be configured to win according to the pressing order. It is also possible to win a winning combination of the zero-copies and the BB-copies, giving priority to the zero-copies.

  As in this example, the pressing order bell has 6 pressing orders (“left → middle → right”, “left → right → middle”, “middle → left → right”, “middle → right → left”, "Right-> Left-Middle", "Right-Middle-Left" 6 choices), and the push-order re-game push order is 3 choices (first stop is left, middle, right 3 choices) In this case, the push order display on the push order display device D270 is different between the push order navigation display relating to the push order bell and the push order navigation display relating to the push order replay. The display and the three-order push-order navigation display may be different. As an example, as a push-order display according to 6 options, “= 1” in the case of “left → middle → right”, “= 2” in the case of “left → right → middle”, and “middle → left →” “Right” is “= 3”, “middle → right → left” is “= 4”, “right → left → middle” is “= 5”, “right → middle → left” When the first stop is left, it is displayed as "= 6", and when the first stop is left, "= 8" is displayed as "= 6". , "= 9" when the first stop is on the right may be displayed.

In addition, in this example, you may comprise as follows.
(1) The number of AT digested games, which is the number of games continuously digested in the “AT-in-state”, “specialized precursor state”, or “additional specialized state”, can be displayed on the effect display device. If the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the game shifts from the "AT state" to the "normal game state" and then wins the AT lottery again within the specified game and shifts to the "AT state", the previous AT While the number of digested games is inherited and added, the “advantage section” continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), so that the game shifts from the “AT-in-game state” to the “normal game state” and then is re-entered within a specific game. When the player wins the AT lottery and shifts to the “AT-in-progress state”, the number of AT digestion games is counted from 0 game again without inheriting the previous AT digestion game number.
(2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts rotating, a display prompting the user to stop the reel on the effect display device S40 (for example, “Reel If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time after the reel starts rotating in the game in which the push order navigation has occurred, (2-1) production The display area of the push order navigation display on the display device S40 does not overlap with the display for urging the reel to stop, and the display for urging the reel to stop (2-2) is not displayed.
(3) When the power is changed from “on → off → on” in a game in which the push order navigation is generated, the rotation speed of the reels becomes constant, and the operation of the stop button becomes effective before the stop button becomes effective. At the timing of, the push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and / or display on the effect display device S40) is displayed again.
(4) The state related to a certain AT differs from the state related to another AT in the frequency in which the push order navigation occurs in the game in which the common bell is won, or the AT related state in which the push order navigation can occur. The frequency related to a certain AT differs from the frequency related to another AT which is a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can occur in the game in which the common bell is won, in the frequency of occurrence of the push order navigation.
(5) In the RT state (“RT1” in this example) in which the probability of winning the replay is the highest, the proportion of games in which push-order navigation occurs is greater than the proportion of games in which push-order navigation does not occur. high. For example, the total winning rate of the bell role and the re-game role is 1/2 or more. With such a configuration, the player can proceed with the game without getting tired during AT.
It may be configured as described above.

  Here, the characteristic points of the above-described game section will be described in detail below.

≪Normal section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The pressing order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) The command (signal) relating to the condition device in which the profit rate of the player varies depending on the pushing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) It is possible to execute the transfer lottery to the “advantageous section” except during the internal winning of the BB and during the execution of the BB.

≪Standby section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The pressing order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) The command (signal) relating to the condition device in which the profit rate of the player varies depending on the pushing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The transfer lottery to the “advantageous section” is not executed.
(5) After the BB has won in the "standby state", the "advantageous section" starts from the next game.

≪Advantaged section≫
(1) Push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The pressing order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) relating to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) A lottery in which the performance of the “advantageous section” is changed (for example, a transition from a “high probability state” to an “in-AT state” as an AT-related state), an AT game number added lottery, and the like can be executed.
(5) During the “advantageous section”, the advantageous section indicator YH is constantly lit.
(6) When the counter value of the remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, the BB or the push order navigation is not executed at least once in the “advantageous section”, the “advantageous section” is basically used. However, as an exception, when the “advantageous section” continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 in this example), the BB and the push order navigation are performed once in the “advantageous section”. Is configured so that the "advantageous section" can end even if the execution is not performed.
(7) The advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is measured in all the games in the "advantageous section" (for example, the game counter value is added even during the BB execution).

Here, the characteristic points related to the setting lottery for the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The presence or absence of the setting for the “advantage section” is determined based on the result of the role lottery, and the presence or absence of the setting for the “advantage section” is not determined when the number of games elapses.
(2) When a condition device having different lottery probabilities is established depending on the set value, the setting lottery for the “advantage section” is not executed when the condition device is established.
(3) When a certain condition device is established and the set lottery for the “advantageous section” is executed, the lottery probability is the same even if the set values are different.
(4) The performance of the “advantageous section” does not differ depending on the set value (for example, when the strong cherry is established, the setting 1 shifts to the “high-probability state” and the setting 6 shifts to the “AT-in-progress state”. Etc. does not differ depending on the set value).
(5) Setting to "Advantageous section" When you win the lottery, basically it becomes "Advantageous section" from the next game (Setting to "Advantageous section" in the BB combination established in "Normal section" If you win the lottery, it can be a "standby section" in the next game).

Here, the characteristic points related to the change in the performance of the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” with reference to the set value is not executed (the condition common to all the set values may be that a predetermined number of games have passed and a predetermined condition device is satisfied). .
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantage section” is not executed when the condition device is established. The number of AT games and the lottery are not executed.
(3) When the BB has been internally won, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed. The number of AT games and the lottery are not executed.
(4) During the BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed differs depending on the set value, the lottery that changes the performance of the “advantageous section” during the BB execution Is not executed. The number of AT games and the lottery are not executed.
(5) During the BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value, the lottery that changes the performance of the “advantage section” during the BB execution Can be performed. A lottery or the like with the number of AT games added can also be executed.

  Further, the following configuration may be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example. Further, the following configuration may be applied alone, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1) It is configured so as to have a “gase high probability state” as a state relating to an AT that is in the “advantageous section” but is more difficult to win the AT lottery than the “high probability state”.
(2) The continuous effect is composed of at least a predetermined number of consecutive games of G or more.
(3) It has a normal role that does not win 100% in the AT lottery and a special role that wins 100% in the AT lottery. If a continuous production is executed with the normal role as an opportunity and the AT lottery is not won. In this case, if the special role is won during the continuous production, a production to notify that the player has won the AT lottery is executed even during the continuous production (replace the continuous production).
(4) The higher the number of remaining games with high securing obstacles, the higher the probability of selecting continuous production with high expectation (expected degree of bonus winning, expectation of AT lottery winning). The smaller the number, the higher the probability of selecting continuous productions with low expectations.
(5) The smaller the number of remaining games in the number of games with high security failure, the higher the probability of selecting an effect that completes one game with a higher expectation (expectation of bonus winning, expectation of AT lottery).
(6) When the number of remaining games of the number of games with high security failure is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the continuous production that causes a loss is not executed, but the continuous production that becomes a win (bonus win, AT lottery win) Can be performed. In other words, when the number of remaining games of the number of high security failure games is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, four games), the effect of completing one game can be executed in the case of a loss or a hit, but the continuous effect is performed in the case of a hit. It can only be performed if.
(7) If the number of ceilings G (1500 games) in the advantageous section is equal to or less than the predetermined value (4 games), the continuous effect is not executed.
(8) The selection tendency of effects differs depending on whether the number of ceiling Gs in the advantageous section is less than or equal to a predetermined value and when the number of ceilings G is more than the predetermined value (the frequency of continuous effects, the expected jackpot of a certain effect, etc.).
(9) In the case where a new transition is made to the “advantageous section” in the middle of a continuous production of losses (for example, a defeat effect) in the “normal section”,
(9-1) Rewrite the continuous production (stage change production in the “advantageous section” transition game, such as “When you turn around, there is a character and Stechen suggests words”). The rate at which effects are rewritten during continuous production (defeat) is higher than the rate at which effects are rewritten during continuous production (victory).
(9-2) Change the stay stage after executing the continuous production to the end. The ratio of notifying that the transition has been made on the sub-control board S side in the game when the transition to the “advantageous section” during the execution of the continuous production The rate at which the control board S side notifies that the shift has occurred is different.

<< Point 2 >>
(1) The stay stage (stage A group) that can be set in the “normal section” is configured to be selectable by the player. For example, selection can be made by operating a sub input button.
(2) 1: A lottery result of whether or not to be in the “advantageous section” of the stay stage A group is notified in advance when the start lever is turned on in the game,
2: The lottery result of the stay stage A group 2: whether or not to be in the "advantageous section" is notified later at the end of the game (or at the time of the next game bet (at the time of operating the start lever when the re-game stop is displayed)).
(3) When the "normal section" is entered from the state where the stay stage is other than the "advantageous section" and the stay stage A group, the stay stage is selected from the stay stage A group. When the state becomes the “normal section” from the state of the staying stage other than the “advantageous section” and the effect A group, the staying stage is maintained.
(4) The AT expectation level when the advantageous section indicator is off and in the stay stage A group is different from the AT expectation degree when the advantage section indicator is off and other than the stay stage A group. For example, since the AT expectation is low, “the advantageous section indicator is turned off and the staying stage A group → the advantageous section indicator is turned on and the staying stage A group → the advantageous section indicator is turned on and other than the staying stage A group”
(5) The transition of the stay stage (stay stage group A → stay stage group B) is triggered by the production (including the 1G-completed production and the continuous production) in the game from the “normal section” to the “advantageous section”. The rate of occurrence differs from the rate of occurrence of transition of the stay stage triggered by the effect in the game in which the “favorable section” is changed to the “normal section”.

<< Point 3 >>
(1) The greater the number of guaranteed games in the “advantageous section” (the number of remaining games of the number of games with high security failure), the higher the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of winning the AT lottery and the degree of expectation of winning the bonus). The higher the probability of selecting the staying stage and the smaller the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of games remaining with the number of games with a high level of difficulty), the higher the expected degree (the expected degree and the bonus that has been won in the AT lottery). Probability of selecting a stay stage with a high degree of expectation).
(2) When the number of remaining guaranteed games in the “advantage section” is equal to or less than a predetermined value (four games or less), the smaller the number of remaining guaranteed games, the lower the probability of selecting an effect in which the stay stage shifts.
(3) If a production with high expectations is selected without staying at a stay stage with high expectations (expectations of winning the AT lottery, expectations of winning the bonus), the expectations are high. (Expectation of winning the AT lottery, expectation of winning the bonus) Expectation level (winning in the AT lottery) is higher than when a production with high expectation is selected while staying in a stay stage The degree of expectation that they are doing, and the degree of expectation that they are winning the bonus) are high.

<< Point 4 >>
(1) In the case of winning in BB in "Resurrection possibility production state",
(1-1) The lottery with the AT added during the BB may or may not be executed.
(1-2) After the BB ends, the "AT in progress" state may be set or may not be set.
(1-3) The lottery with the AT added during the BB may or may not be executed.
(1-4) When the state shifts to the “AT-in-progress state” after the end of BB, the number of remaining AT games may or may not be reduced by one game in the “resurrection feasibility effect state”.
(2) In the “resurrection availability state”, an AT-added lottery may or may not be executed. If you run a lottery with AT,
(3) In the “state of resurrection availability stage”, if the player wins the replay of seven reverse push whites or seven forward push blacks, an avoidance navigation occurs, and at the timing after the resurrection effect (success) is executed. Notify the number of additional games.
(4) If a winning combination that can shift to the "advantageous section" is won in the "resurrection possibility effect state", the advantageous section indicator turns off at the start timing of the next game, while the "resurrection possibility effect state" In the case where a winning combination that can shift to the "advantageous section" is won in the next game when the resurrection lottery is not won, the advantageous section indicator may be turned on at the start timing of the next game.
(5) In the case of a specification where the lottery is not added to the AT although it is an advantageous section in the “revival state”,
(5-1) Although the number of AT games is not increased even if the winning role (for example, watermelon A) that can execute the AT addition lottery in the "recovery possibility production state" is not added, 1G that executes the recovery production (success) If the winning combination (eg, watermelon A) is won in (“AT in progress”), the number of AT games can be increased.
(6) When "Battle production 3G + Resurrection production (failure) 1G" is scheduled to be executed as the production in the final stage of AT, a bonus when the recovery production (success) is executed by winning a bonus in the reproduction production execution game While the number of AT games does not increase, the number of AT games increases during the bonus when the bonus effect is won and the revival effect (success) is executed in the battle effect execution game (one of 3G). You can Also, the production tendency during the bonus may be different.

<< Point 5 >>
(1) When the game state A and the game state B are included as states relating to the AT which is an “advantage section”,
(1-1) The expectation of winning the AT addition lottery is “gaming state A> advantageous state B” (the gaming state A is more likely to be added to the AT game number than the gaming state B or is the AT addition game) a lot).
(1-2) The additional number that can be added when the player X is won in the gaming state A is different from the additional number that can be added when the player Y is won in the gaming state A.
(1-3) The additional number that can be added when winning the role X in the gaming state B is the same as the additional number that can be added when winning the role Y in the gaming state B.

<< Point 6 >>
(1) The display modes of the fall prevention suggestion display are as follows: when the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), and after the second stop to before the third stop (C). To make a difference.
(1-1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is in the order of “A <B <C” from the one that is inconspicuous for the player.
(2) When the state of "AT in progress" and "RT1" is changed to "Low probability state" and "RT1" when AT is finished, when the push order combination is won, the push order display device pushes. The order navigation is displayed, but the push order navigation is not displayed (displayed as "???") on the effect display device.
(3) When the winning 18 (falling hand) is won at the third stop in the game in which the fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed, the display is maintained in the same display manner as that after the second stop. .
(4) If the start lever is operated in a situation where the power is turned off and the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is not completed, the start process is completed more than the completion of the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device. At the previous timing, the push order navigation is executed by the sound from the speaker (for example, “Left!”).
(5) Even if the player is in a state related to an AT that is highly profitable for the player, such as “additional specialization state”, if the player has won the fall role, the fall avoidance suggestion effect is displayed with priority.
(6) Even if the falling role wins in the “advantage section”, the “advantage section” is maintained.
(7) In the case where the falling hand is configured to be a pushing role (determining whether or not to stop and display according to the pushing sequence), a winning role (a pushing sequence bell or the like) which is not a falling role is won, and the pushing sequence is performed. When the navigation is executed and stopped in the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation, the display of the staging display device may be darkened, while if the fall role is won, the display is stopped in the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation. In this case, the display of the effect display device does not darken (or does not darken to the display of the effect of suggesting fall prevention).

<< Point 7 >>
(1) A case in which it is configured to shift to “RT3” and “AT preparation state” after BB related to BB with setting difference (similar to the first modification from the present embodiment).
(1-1) By winning a winning combination with a high probability in "RT3", an AT-added lottery is won (may be 100% winning or a predetermined probability may be won).
(1-2) The RT state to be shifted to after the end of the BB is made different depending on the type of BB combination, and the AT addition lottery execution mode (additional lottery execution, addition) The lottery winning probability and the number of AT added games) are made different.
(1-3) Bonus A → RT1 → Promotion Replay A → RT3 (High Replay Probability), Bonus B → RT2 → Promotion Replay B → RT3 The winning rate or the number of added games is different.
(1-4) When the bonus A → RT1, the bonus B → RT2, and the promotion replay A and the promotion replay B are included, the winning probability of the promotion replay A and the promotion replay B at RT1 and RT2 is Different.
(1-5) Bonus A → RT1 and Bonus B → RT2 are configured so that the promotion replay and the fall replay can be won respectively. The winning probabilities of the promotion replay and the fall replay are different between RT1 and RT2.
(1-6) After completion of BB with setting difference, the state shifts to the dedicated RT state ("RT3" and "AT preparation state"), and then shifts to the "additional specialization state" triggered by the promotion replay.

<< Point 8 >>
(1) It has one type BB-B1 and one type BB-B2, and shifts to “RT3” after one type BB-B1 ends, and shifts to “RT4” after one type BB-B2 ends. If configured.
(1-1) "RT3" and "RT4" are different in the AT addition lottery execution mode (the role of executing the addition lottery, the addition lottery winning probability, the number of AT addition games).
(1-2) The production tendency differs between the BB start production according to the first type BB-B1 and the BB start production according to the first type BB-B2 (the selection rate of the BB start production with a high degree of expectation is different).
(2) When the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed before the replay game 06 in the “AT preparation state” and the “RT3”, the process shifts to “RT4” and the treasure box lost effect is not executed. In “RT4”, the replaying player promoted to “RT3” wins. Also, in the case where "RT4" is changed to "RT3", the treasure chest opening addition effect is not executed even if re-games-E1 to E3 are subsequently won.
(3) A plurality of types of BB roles are provided, and it is configured that it is difficult for a player to visually recognize which BB role has won even if the BB role is won, and that after the BB ends depending on the type of BB And the execution state of the AT addition lottery at the time of winning the promotion re-game combination differs depending on the RT state. In such a configuration, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect executed during the BB is made different depending on the type of the BB (the acquisition of the gold treasure chest, the acquisition of the silver treasure chest, the acquisition of the copper treasure chest, etc.). Number distribution is different).

<< Point 9 >>
(1) There is a setting difference that has been won during AT. There is no setting difference between the BB start effect for BB and the start effect for BB that has the same effect. There is a difference between the BB start effect related to BB and the ratio of the same effect mode in the start effect related to BB without setting difference winning during non-AT.

<< Point 10 >>
(1) The setting value is suggested when the BB without the setting difference is won in the “normal section”, rather than the probability that the effect indicating the setting value is selected when the BB with the setting difference is won in the “advantage section”. There is a higher probability that an effect will be selected.
(2) A different BB start effect is selected according to the setting difference for a BB that has been won during non-AT, but the same BB start effect is selected for a BB that has been won during AT regardless of the set difference.
(3) The ratio in which the BB start effect is the same effect mode between the BB with the setting difference won during AT and the BB without the setting difference won during AT, and the BB with the setting difference won during non-AT and the non-AT The ratio of the BB start effect being the same effect mode is different between the BB with no setting difference and the BB that has been won.

<< Point 11 >>
(1) At the time of the winning combination of “No difference in setting (winning ratio that does not differ depending on the set value) + BB” + BB, select “Advantaged section display lighting + production B”, which can be executed when the winning of “No difference in setting” wins The probability of selecting “Advantage section indicator off + effect A”, which can be executed at the time of winning the “role with setting difference (the winning rate differs depending on the set value)”, is higher than the probability of performing The “role + BB time” is a production (for example, a battle production) that stimulates the BB winning, rather than a production that promotes the transition to the high-probability state (for example, a production transition to a stay stage where the user can stay in the high-probability state). Is easier to implement.
(2) When a predetermined winning combination (for example, cherry) is won, it is configured to shift to a high probability state at 100%, and the distribution of the number of highly secure obstacle games is “50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10%. → 50G ”, the battle is defeated when 3G is selected, and the battle is won otherwise. Further, the degree of expectation of the length of the number of highly accurate games (whether it is 20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who has won the battle. Also, in the case of the above example, an effect that stimulates the continuity at the 20th high accuracy (the effect that stimulates whether the game is a 20 game or a 50 game, and if it succeeds, the game is definitely determined to be 50 games) is executed. .

<< Point 12 >>
(1) There is a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the “normal section”, and the occurrence probability of the freeze effect differs depending on the set value.
(1-1) In the “advantageous section”, a predetermined freeze effect is not executed.
(1-2) The predetermined freeze effect is more easily performed in the “normal section” than in the “advantage section”.
(1-3) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-4) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-5) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed at the time of loss.

<<< Configuration applicable to this example >>>
The configuration applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Note that any of the configurations described below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, and the configuration 1 described below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations described below may be applied. Supplement what you may do.

<< Memory map configuration >>
First, with reference to FIG. 59, a configuration of a part of a memory map in a RAM (sometimes referred to as a first RAM) of a main control board M applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In the area shown in the figure, from the upper address, (1) "set value data": an area for data relating to the number for managing the setting stage, (2) "external signal system data": external signal output Area for storing related information, (3) “RAM checksum data”: data used in checksum calculation processing executed at power-on, calculated from data stored in RAM at power-off Area for storing the stored data and storing information for calculating a specific value (for example, "0") in the checksum calculation process executed at power-on, (4) "control command buffer": sub Area for storing command information to be sent to the control board side, (5) "Stack pointer temporary save buffer": information used when power is restored and is the current stack when power is shut off. An area for storing the data stored in the pointer and for storing the information to be stored in the stack pointer when the power is restored, (6) "unused area": an area for storing an area not used for the game, ( 7) “Saved data 1 to saved data 8”: Areas are used in the order of RAM in which saved data may be written to the maximum by design by CALL instruction, PUSH instruction, and the like. In such a configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is “7FF8H” by design. However, when an unexpected failure (unexpected power interruption, etc.) occurs, it is higher than “7FF8H”. May be indicated by the stack pointer. In that case, the saved data may be stored beyond the area of “saved data 1 to saved data 8” secured as the area of the data to be saved in advance. In consideration of such a situation, an address (an address close to “7FF8H”) that may be indicated by the stack pointer when the unexpected failure occurs is data that does not affect the progress of the game (a small effect). Data) is preferably stored. Specifically, by providing an address for storing “set value data” at an address at least one address apart from “save data 1 to save data 8” previously secured as an area for data to be saved, It is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause a disadvantage not only to the game player but also to the game arcade. In the figure, (5) "stack pointer temporary save buffer" is data that is not used in the situation where the game is progressing after the power is restored, and (4) "control command buffer" Is less likely to affect the progress of the game even if the command cannot be transmitted to the sub control board S side, and (3) "RAM checksum data" is used in the situation where the game is progressing after the power is restored. Since the data (2) "external signal system data" is data to be transmitted to the hall computer, it is data that has little influence on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) “set value data” is data relating to set values that affect the outcome of the game, and for example, if the set value is changed to a low set value, a significant disadvantage occurs to the player. there is a possibility. Furthermore, for example, if the setting value is changed to a high setting value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage occurs in the game arcade. As described above, (1) “set value data” is important data for a normal progress of a game. For these reasons, in (1) to (7) in FIG. 7, (1) “set value data” is the highest data (data stored in the higher address). In other words, the addresses between (1) "set value data" and (7) "save data 1 to save data 8" include (2) "external signal system data" and (3) "RAM checksum data". , (4) "control command buffer", (5) "stack pointer temporary save buffer", and (6) "unused area" are stored. With such a configuration, even if a problem occurs in the gaming machine and the number of data saved from the stack pointer to the RAM exceeds the design, a RAM not used for the game is provided. Thus, the gaming machine can be configured so that an abnormal state is unlikely to occur. (2) "External signal system data", (3) "RAM checksum data", (4) "Control command buffer", (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer", (6) "Unused area" There is no problem even if the order of the addresses for storing the five data is changed, and for example, the order of “(3) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (6)” is stored from the higher order address. Alternatively, the data may be stored in the order of “(6) → (5) → (3) → (2) → (4)” from the higher address. In addition, (6) the “unused area” may not be provided. Note that the data stored in the RAM area (2) to (5) does not make it impossible to insert a game medal even if the data stored in the RAM area is changed (game medal). No error that makes it impossible to input).

The area for storing the “set value data” shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to store the following data.
(A) Total score data: an area for storing data relating to the game value number that plays the same role as the total number of game medals that can be inserted in an enclosed spinning-type gaming machine that does not use actual game medals (total When storing the score data in the area (1) in FIG. 59, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to have 2 bytes.
(B) Minimum game time: data for counting one minimum game time (subtracting a counter value for each interrupt processing) (a minimum game time is 4.1 seconds).
(C) Obtained number counter at the time of BB operation: a counter for determining whether or not a condition (payout number) for ending BB is satisfied (a counter corresponding to a value obtained by adding a game value to a player) Value is subtracted)
(D) Obtained number counter at the time of MB operation: a counter for determining whether or not a condition (payout number) for ending MB is satisfied (a counter corresponding to a value obtained by adding a game value to a player) Value is subtracted)
It should be noted that the above (A) to (D) and the “setting value data” may be stored in plural (stored at different addresses), or only one of them may be stored. Good. Further, in the case of a configuration in which a plurality of data can be stored, each of the plurality of data is stored at an address higher than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (an area for storing is provided). It is preferable to configure so that With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disadvantage a player or a game arcade. Furthermore, if the address is at least higher than the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is “7FF8H” by design, but an unexpected failure (unexpected power interruption, etc.) has occurred. In such a case, there is a possibility that the stack pointer indicates an address higher than “7FF8H”, but it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disadvantage a player or a game arcade.

<< Actions at the time of replay stop display >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the action in the won game of the replay applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. The configuration exemplified below illustrates a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even during the stop display of the re-game.

  First, in the game that is won for the re-play (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and a 1-bet ramp D211, a 2-bet ramp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the automatic bet operation related to the replay that is stopped and displayed (when the replay is stopped and displayed, a bet is made without inserting a game medal or operating the bet button), the 2-bet lamp is displayed. D212 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and as an automatic bet operation related to the replay that has been stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. At about the same time, the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on (the turn-on lamp D300 may be configured to blink).

  Here, the characteristic points of the operation in the figure will be described in detail below.

<Structure 1>
The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the re-game is stopped are lit at substantially the same timing. When the insertable lamp D300 is turned on after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert a game medal, the player recognizes that the game medal cannot be inserted by visually recognizing that the start lamp D180 is turned on first. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the turn-on lamp D300, it may be recognized that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by turning on the insertable lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 almost at the same time as described above, it is possible to smoothly determine the player's insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever D50, and to determine the wrong game medal. The closing and the operation of the start lever D50 can be prevented.

<Structure 2>
The 1-bet lamp D211 is always on from the betting operation timing for the game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed until the end of the game in the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by the replay winning, and it is possible to notify the player that the replay has been won, so that the progress of the game can be improved. It can be smooth.

<Structure 3>
The lighting of the re-playing lamp D290 based on the display of the re-playing being stopped is prior to the lighting of the start lamp D180. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is first notified that the re-game has been won, and thereafter, the start lamp D180 is turned on and the start lever D50 can be operated by the re-game win. By notifying the player of the fact, the player can smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Structure 4>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the insertable lamp D300. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, the fact that the re-game has been won is notified first, and then the turn-on lamp D300 is turned on to notify that the game medal can be inserted. This makes it easy to grasp the game situation.

<Structure 5>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the 3-bet lamp D213. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified in advance that the re-game has been won, so that the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game win has been performed. Since the player can be notified that the replay has been won, the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<Structure 6>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified in advance that the re-game has been won, so that the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game win has been performed. Since the player can be notified that the replay has been won, the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<Structure 7>
The 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 relating to the next game when the replay is stopped and displayed are turned on, and then the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on (the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 are turned on. They do not light at about the same time). With this configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by the replay winning, and the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

<Structure 8>
The turn-off timings of the two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 after the replay is stopped and displayed are substantially the same. When a plurality of lamps (2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213) are turned on, it is difficult to grasp the game state. You will be able to quickly grasp the gaming state.

<Structure 9>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is earlier than the turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the re-game. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified in advance that the re-game has been won, so that the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game win has been performed. Since the player can be notified that the replay has been won, the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<Structure 10>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is earlier than the turn-off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the re-game. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified in advance that the re-game has been won, so that the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game win has been performed. Since the player can be notified that the replay has been won, the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<Structure 11>
The lighting timings of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped are substantially simultaneous. With this configuration, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective, so that the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

<< Other actions 1 >>
Here, an operation different from the configuration in FIG. 60 in the won game of the replay applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail below as the other operation 1.

<Structure 12>
The 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 may be constantly lit from the bet operation timing relating to the game in which the replay is stopped and displayed to the end of the game of the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation has been performed by the replay winning, and can be notified that the replay has been won, so that the progress of the game can be improved. Can be smoothed.

<Structure 13>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially simultaneously. The player wants to be notified that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the betting lamp (the two-bet lamp D212) is kept on, it becomes difficult to grasp the game state. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and furthermore, the lighting timing of the two-bet lamp D212 relating to the next game in which the re-gaming lamp D290 is displayed with the re-game stopped (the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300 may be used). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal by turning on the light earlier than this.

<Configuration 14>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the turn-off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially simultaneously. We want to inform the player that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the betting lamp (three-betting lamp D213) continues to be turned on, it will be difficult to grasp the gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and furthermore, the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the re-gaming lamp D290 is displayed in which the re-gaming is stopped (the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300 may be used). It can be notified in advance that the game medals do not need to be inserted by turning on the light before turning on.

<Structure 15>
If the player wins a re-game in a certain game and also wins a re-game in the next game of the certain game, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on based on the stop display of the re-game related to the certain game. Thus, the re-game lamp D290 may continue to be turned on until the end of the game after the certain game. In this way, by continuing to light the replay lamp D290, it is possible to promptly notify the player of the winning of the replay, and the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 16>
Various lamps such as a re-game lamp D290, a 3-bet lamp D213, a 2-bet lamp D212, a 1-bet lamp D211, a start lamp D180, a throwable lamp D300, etc., triggered by a third stop operation (or a re-game symbol stop display). Control may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a notification by a ramp according to the timing of the progress of the game, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the progress of the game.

<Structure 17>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the turn-on lamp D300 may be configured to be substantially simultaneous. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the lamp is turned on based on the stop display of the replay.

<Configuration 18>
Based on the replay being stopped and displayed, the 3 bet lamp D213, the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 1 bet lamp D211 are turned off substantially at the same time, and then the 3 bet lamp D213, the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 1 bet lamp D211 are turned on. You may comprise so that it may light simultaneously. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet when the player has won the re-game is three.

<Structure 19>
Based on the stop display of the replay, the three-bet lamp D213, the two-bet lamp D212, and the one-bet lamp D211 are almost simultaneously turned off, and thereafter, the three-bet lamp D213, the two-bet lamp D212, the one-bet lamp D211 and the second bet lamp D211. The game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 may be configured to be turned on substantially simultaneously. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet in the case of winning the re-game is three, and to clearly indicate that the lamp is turned on based on the stop display of the re-game. Can be notified.

<< Other actions 2 >>
Here, further, an operation different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the re-play winning game applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail below as another operation 2 with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. I will describe.

<Operation diagram 2 when replay stop is displayed>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, an operation applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail.

  First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. At substantially the same time, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same timing. Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the closing lamp are turned on. The possible lamps D300 are turned on almost simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Functional diagram 3 regarding re-game stop display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Functional diagram 4 when replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the start lamp D180 and the start lamp D180 are almost simultaneously turned on at the same time as the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. The enabling lamp D300 is turned on. Thereafter, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing (4) in the figure. The 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operational diagram 5 when replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Then, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are switched. Turns off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the re-game lamp D290 are turned on substantially simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously.

<Functional diagram 6 regarding replay stop display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp is almost simultaneously turned on at the re-game lamp D290. D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. Then, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on at the timing (4) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Functional diagram 7 regarding replay stop display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and thereafter, at the timing (3) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the re-game lamp D290 and The start lamp D180 and the enabling lamp D300 are turned on almost simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operation figure 8 when replay stop display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Then, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are switched. Turns off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the re-game lamp D290, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300. And light up almost simultaneously.

<Functional diagram 9 regarding replay stop display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (6) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Operation Figure 10 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

  In addition, among the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 61 to 63, the same configuration as the above-described configuration 1 to configuration 19 can produce the same effect as the above-described configuration 1 to configuration 19.

  In addition, the stop display timing of the re-gaming symbol, the operation timing of the stop button, the turning-on / off timing of the re-gaming lamp D290, the turning-on / off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213, the turning-on / off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212, 1 It should be added that any configuration (timing) can be used for any combination of the lighting timing of the betting lamp D211, the lighting timing of the start lamp D180, and the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300.

  In the above description, the configuration in which the game medal can be inserted even during the stop display of the re-game is exemplified. However, the configuration is not limited to this. It may be configured (applicable to all the configurations described above). In the case of such a configuration, the insertable lamp D300 remains turned off while the replay is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned substantially simultaneous may be recognized as being simultaneously apparent when the player visually recognizes it. For example, a process (lighting / light-off timing) executed within a period of executing interrupt processing ten times may be used. If they are almost the same, there is no problem.

<< Configuration of Bet Button Lamp >>
The configuration related to the bet button lamp S50 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured as follows.

  The processing of turning the bet button D220 from invalid to valid is executed by the processing of the main control board M, and thereafter, the main control board M transmits a command for turning on the bet button lamp S50 to the sub-control board S side (main control board S). The board M may be configured to transmit a command to the sub-control board S to the effect that the bet button D220 has become effective.) Then, the sub-control board S receives the bet button lamp S50 transmitted from the main control board M. May be configured to execute a process for turning on the bet button lamp S50 in response to receiving a command for turning on the button. With this configuration, the bet button lamp S50 manages lighting and extinguishing on the sub-control board S side, but in a situation where the bet button D220 is effective according to the game situation on the main control board M side. The bet button lamp S50 can be reliably turned on, and even if the player visually recognizes the turn-on of the bet button lamp S50 and determines whether or not the bet (the bet button D220) is valid, the bet button lamp S50 can be turned off. It can be configured so as not to cause inconsistency with the game situation.

<< Configuration of stop button lamp >>
The configuration related to the stop button lamp S60 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured as follows.

  By the processing of the main control board M, a processing for making the stop button D40 (any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) from invalid to valid is executed, and then the main control board M becomes the sub-control board. A command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 (the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button on which the enabling process is executed) is transmitted to the S side (the main control board M sends the stop button lamp to the sub control board S side). D40 (any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) may be configured to be transmitted to the effect that the command is activated}, and then the sub control board S is the main control board. By receiving the command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 transmitted from M, the processing for turning on the stop button lamp S60 is executed. It may be so that configuration. With this configuration, the stop button lamp S60 manages turning on / off on the sub control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 is effective according to the game situation on the main control board M side. The stop button lamp S60 can be reliably turned on by the player, and the player visually recognizes the stop button lamp S60 being turned on to stop the button D40 (either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43). Even if it is determined whether or not is valid, it can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation on the main control board M side.

<< Configuration of reel unit RU applicable to this example >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example is provided with each of the reels M50 (M51, M52, and M53) rotatably via a reel unit RU. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the spinning body type gaming machine according to the present example is an integral unit that rotatably accommodates all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape, and has an opening RU10. The three reels M51, M52 and M53 are provided on the reel unit RU so that the symbols of the three reels M51, M52 and M53 can be visually recognized through the opening RU10. Although the details will be described later, each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel band MO to a reel frame MW.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top part RU20 and a bottom part RU30 across the opening RU10. By mounting the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of the pedestal portion BU described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the pedestal portion BU.

<Through hole RU40>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three through holes RU40 are formed in the front end of the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. I have. The three through holes RU40 are formed so as to correspond to, for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53.

<< Pedestal BU >>
The pedestal BU is made of a metal plate or the like and has a substantially plate shape. The end of the pedestal part BU is attached to the left side surface, the right side surface, the back surface, etc. of the back box with screws or the like (not shown), and the pedestal part BU is fixed to the back box. The pedestal BU is attached to the back box so as to extend in the horizontal direction. As described above, the reel unit RU is placed on the base BU.

<Screw hole BU10>
At the front end of the base BU, a plurality of, for example, three screw holes BU10 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed so as to correspond to each of the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the pedestal BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed so as to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

  The numbers and positions of the through-holes RU40 and the screw holes BU10 may correspond to each other and may be arranged along the horizontal direction, as long as the reel unit RU can be stably mounted on the base BU. Further, only the reel unit RU may be attached to the pedestal portion BU by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU, or the reel unit may be mounted by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU. Both the RU and one reel (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53) may be configured to be attached to the base BU.

<< How to fix the reel unit RU >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU, and each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU communicates with the corresponding screw hole BU10 of the pedestal portion BU. By positioning the unit RU and screwing the screw BS into the screw hole BU10 through the through hole RU40 of the reel unit RU, the reel unit RU can be attached and held at a fixed position of the base BU. By doing so, the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the base BU.

  The reel unit RU may be removably attached using a detachable rivet, for example, a member such as a push rivet, in addition to the screw BS and the screwing member such as a bolt. It is only necessary that the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by an engaging member, a locking member, or the like.

  In this example, the configuration in which the reel unit RU is mounted on the pedestal portion BU has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The reel unit RU may be configured to be fixed (fixed so as to hang down), or a through hole RU40 may be provided on both side surfaces of the reel unit RU, and the reel unit RU may be configured to be fixed inside the housing by a screw BS. In addition, even in such a configuration, the configuration relating to the position of the screw BS and the falling position of the screw BS described in detail below (for example, the configuration related to the screw BS disposed at the position closest to the position where the front door DU opens and closes). ) Is applicable.

<< Hopper H40 and medal auxiliary tank HS >>
FIG. 66A is a perspective view from the rear right side of the hopper H40, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view from the rear left side of the hopper H40. 66 (a) and 66 (b) also show arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS described later. The arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B for both the positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

  The hopper H40 (may be referred to as a main tank member) is a funnel-shaped tank molded of ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged so as to go around, and an opening H30 is formed by the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48. You. The opening H30 is formed so as to open upward. The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 described above is introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30. Note that the hopper H40 may be composed of a plurality of members, and the plurality of members may be collectively referred to as a hopper H40, a main tank member, a main tank unit, and the like.

  Further, the hopper H40 has a hopper bottom H52, a right slope H54, and a left slope H56. The right inclined portion H54 is arranged on the right side of the hopper H40, and the game medal introduced on the right side of the hopper H40 is guided by its own weight toward the hopper bottom portion H52 described later. The left inclined portion H56 is disposed on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides medals introduced to the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom H52 by its own weight. Further, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is disposed so as to cover an upper portion of a substantially left half of a disk H50 described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game medals from being continuously linked to the hopper bottom H52 so that the game medals cannot be dropped, and the game medals can be smoothly guided toward the hopper bottom H52.

  By providing the right side inclined portion H54, the left side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57, any game medal introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom portion H52. The medals guided by the right side inclined portion H54, the left side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 are accumulated in the hopper bottom portion H52. In this way, the right-side inclined portion H54, the left-side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion that stores the game medals inside the hopper H40.

  At the hopper bottom H52, a disk H50 as a rotating body is arranged. The disk H50 is driven to rotate by the hopper motor H80 described above, and the game medal is discharged from the game medal exit H60 by the rotation of the disk H50. In this way, the medals stored in the hopper H40 can be discharged one by one from the game medal exit H60.

<Discharge guide part H62>
A discharge guide H62 is formed inside the front side wall H42 along the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has an elongated shape and has an inclined surface H64 that is formed to be inclined. When the hopper H40 is placed in the back box, the right side of the inclined surface H64 is located lower than the left side of the inclined surface H64. Although the width of the inclined surface H64 is formed to be substantially constant, the inclined surface H64 is formed to be slightly wider as it goes downward (from the left side to the right side).

  The discharge guide section H62 guides the game medals on the upper portion of the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS before the game medals overflow from the hopper H40, and stores the game medals in the hopper H40. It is a member for reducing the number of medals being played. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the inclined surface H64, and the game medals guided by the inclined surface H64 are discharged to the medal auxiliary tank HS via the discharge port H66. As described above, the discharge guide portion H62 functions as a discharge inclined portion that discharges game medals to the outside of the hopper H40. As described above, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion that stores game medals inside the hopper H40, whereas the discharge guide portion H62 performs the game medals. It functions as a discharge inclined portion for discharging to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to the right inclined portion H54 and the left inclined portion H56.

  The left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medal from the left to the right. That is, each of the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 has a rightward downward inclination. The final target of the left inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 is the hopper bottom portion H52, and the final target of the discharge guide portion H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS. The movement of the game medals can be aligned from left to right.

  In the vicinity of the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62, a protruding wall H58 protruding upward is provided along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64. The protruding wall H58 can prevent the medal placed on the inclined surface H64 from dropping to the hopper bottom H52.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS>
The medal auxiliary tank HS has a substantially rectangular columnar shape and has a bottom surface and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 in the upper part, and the medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<< Removal of screw BS of reel unit RU >>
In a spinning-type gaming machine, a front door DU is attached to the back box so as to be openable and closable (the front door DU and the back box may be collectively referred to as a housing). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box with the left side of the front door DU (left side as viewed from the player) as the center of rotation. For this reason, the right side of the front door DU (the right side as viewed from the player) has the longest moving distance, and when the front door DU is closed, an impact due to contact with or collision with the back box occurs and propagates to the back box. Since an impact is generated on the right side of the spinning-type gaming machine, the impact on the right side of the spinning-type gaming machine is the largest, and the impact tends to gradually decrease on the left side of the rotating-type gaming machine.

  As described above, the reel unit RU is detachably attached to the base BU by the screw BS. The screw BS is screwed into the screw hole BU10 of the pedestal portion BU at three places on the left, center, and right. The right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 receives the largest impact. For this reason, the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is most easily loosened by an impact, and when the screwing is released, the right screw BS drops and falls. The central screw BS screwed into the central screw hole BU10 is also subjected to an impact, and may loosen and fall off due to the impact. The left screw BS screwed into the left screw hole BU10 is assumed to have a small impact to some extent. However, there is a possibility that the left screw BS will loosen and fall off depending on the degree of propagation of the impact and the usage time.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (1) >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal payout device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are arranged below the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located at least below the right-side screw BS among the above-described three screws BS.

  When the right screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The dropped right-side screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64 and rolls along the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 by the own weight of the right-side screw BS and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 1B). When the right screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  As described above, even when the right screw BS is dropped due to an impact, the right screw BS can be discharged from the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is prevented from entering the hopper H40. It is possible to prevent the rotation operation of the disk H50 from being hindered or to damage the disk H50, and to operate the hopper H40 stably.

  In the above-described example, only the right screw BS is targeted. And the reel unit RU may be positioned. Whichever screw BS is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. Further, in this example, the screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU on the pedestal portion BU is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front door DU is apt to generate impact due to contact or collision with the back box. Members such as screws attached to the right side (right side when viewed from the player) of the above may be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when dropped.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (2) >>
FIG. 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in FIG. 67, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the central screw BS among the above-described three screws BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located below the right side screw BS. In FIG. 67, the same components as those in FIG. 64 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  When the right screw BS falls off due to impact, it falls freely downward as it is (arrow 2A), and as it is (without contacting the inclined surface H64), it is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  When the central screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The dropped central screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 by the weight of the central screw BS, and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the outlet H66, it falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  The dropped right-hand screw BS and the central screw BS are prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is prevented from hindering the rotation operation of the disk H50 or damaging the disk H50. It can be operated stably.

  In the example described above, the right-side screw BS and the central screw BS are targeted, but the left-side screw BS is also positioned so that the hopper H40 and the reel unit RU are positioned above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. Good. Whichever screw BS is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  As described above, it is preferable to form the protruding wall H58 that protrudes upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS falling off and resting on the inclined surface H64 from dropping to the hopper bottom H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is equal to or higher than the height at which the screw BS rebounds when the screw BS falls on the inclined surface H64. The screw BS can be prevented from dropping to the hopper bottom H52, and the screw BS can be prevented from hindering or causing the disk H50 to operate.

  As described above, even when the screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU is detached due to vibration or the like due to opening and closing of the front door DU, the detached screw BS does not enter the hopper H40, and the medal assisting device does not. By configuring to fall into the tank HS, the administrator of the game arcade can easily collect the detached screw BS.

<< Hopper H400 >>
In the example shown in FIG. 67, when the right screw BS falls, it passes through the outside of the hopper H40 (the right side of the right side wall H48 when viewed from the player) (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The configuration is such that the dropped right screw BS is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing through the inside of the hopper H40, so that it can be shared with the hopper H40 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 67, a hopper H400 having a structure in which the right side wall H48 extends rightward (right side wall H480) may be used. In the hopper H400, a bottom opening H410 is formed at the bottom near the right side wall H480. When the right screw BS falls, it passes through the inside of the hopper H400, and further through the bottom opening H410, the medal auxiliary tank. Stored in HS. In this way, through the bottom opening H410, the dropped right screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without entering the hopper H40.

<< extension part RU50 >>
In the above-mentioned example, when the screw BS is dropped, it is free to drop toward the medal auxiliary tank HS below. On the other hand, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 65, an extension part EN may be provided below the reel unit RU or the pedestal part BU. By providing the extension portion EN, even if the screw BS drops, the screw BS does not immediately fall, but can be once guided by the extension portion EN and then dropped into the medal auxiliary tank HS. In this manner, the extension portion EN can match the position where the screw BS is attached with the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, and can increase the degree of freedom of the position where the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged.

<< Configuration of medal auxiliary tank HS >>
<Through hole HS20 for full detection electrode>
As shown in FIG. 68, at least two through holes HS20 for full detection electrodes are formed on the inner surface of the medal auxiliary tank HS. Further, two full detection electrodes DE and a continuity detection board CC (see FIG. 65) are provided in a lower portion of the back surface of the back box. The two full detection electrodes DE have a long shape, extend parallel to each other and horizontally, and are arranged so as to protrude forward. The two full detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed corresponding to the two full detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is disposed at the bottom of the back box, the two full detection electrodes DB pass through the corresponding full detection electrode through holes HS20 and protrude toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  As the medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the uppermost portion UL of the stored game medals (see FIG. 69 (c)) gradually rises and approaches the two full detection electrodes DE. FIG. 69 (c) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which game medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the uppermost portion UL shown in FIG. 69 (c) is a line (for example, an envelope or the like) connecting the contours of the game medals located in the uppermost portion UL among the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. (For convenience, the uppermost portion UL is shown by a smooth curve). When the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come into contact with the two full detection electrodes DE and the two full detection electrodes DE are conducted through a plurality of medals, the two full detection electrodes DE are connected to each other. An electric circuit is formed. Due to the formation of the electric circuit, the conduction detection substrate CC outputs a signal indicating that conduction has occurred between the two full detection electrodes DE. In this way, when game medals are stored up to the position of the two full detection electrodes DE, a medal full error can be detected.

  The number of full detection electrodes DE is not limited to two and may be three or more. For example, when three electrodes are provided, one full detection electrode is newly provided below the two full detection electrodes in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, and the newly provided one electrode is provided. A medal full error can be detected by conducting the full state detecting electrode and one of the two full state detecting electrodes described above, so that the medal assisting operation can be performed. Even when game medals are not stored evenly in the tank HS (for example, when game medals are stored on the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS), a medal full error can be detected.

<< Materials for BisBS and medals >>
The material of the screw BS is magnetizable and conductive. For example, it is formed of a steel material. Further, the material of the medal is non-magnetizable and conductive. For example, it is formed by plating brass or stainless steel. With this configuration, even when the screw BS falls into the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS can be easily taken out of the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<< Relationship between total length BL of screw BS and distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE >>
The above-described left screw BS, center screw BS, and right screw BS are used for attaching the reel unit RU to the base BU. FIG. 69 (b) is a front view showing the entire screw BS. As the screw BS, one having a total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 69 (b)) shorter than the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE (see FIG. 69 (a)) is used. Total length BL <distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS (for example, the right screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it is shorter than the space between the full detection electrodes DE. Does not conduct with the full detection electrode DE (the screw BS does not catch on the two full detection electrodes DE). The total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. FIG. 69 (a) is a plan view of the inner part of the medal auxiliary tank HS showing a state where the full detection electrode DE protrudes into the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<< Relationship Between Seat Length HR of Screw BS and Diameter ED of Full Detection Electrode DE >>
The radial length HR of the bearing surface of the screw BS (see FIG. 69 (b)) is shorter than the diameter ED (see FIG. 69 (a)) of the fullness detection electrode DE (see FIG. 69 (a)). Length HR <diameter ED of full detection electrode DE). In this way, even when the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS is not hooked on the one full detection electrode DE, and Even when the BS comes in contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be immediately separated, and the bis BS alone does not accidentally conduct.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), one of the two full detection electrodes DE is full (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the right side in FIG. 69 (c)). When in contact with the medal (uppermost portion UL), the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the left full detection electrode DE in FIG. 69 (c)) and the screw BS are in temporary contact. Even if such a case occurs, the screw BS is not hooked on the full detection electrode DE, and the screw BS can be immediately separated from the full detection electrode DE (see the arrow F in FIG. 69 (c)). , No conductive circuit is formed via the screw BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS is not erroneously determined.

  In this example, the case where the reel unit RU is an integrated unit that accommodates all three reels has been described. However, even when the reel unit RU is a separate unit that accommodates each of the three reels separately, the screw BS may be used. Thus, the screw BS can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU, and the possibility of the screw BS coming off similarly arises. For this reason, a configuration such as the medal auxiliary tank HS and the screw BS can be similarly employed.

<< Reel band configuration >>
FIG. 70 (a) is a front view showing the entire reel strip MO. FIG. 70 (b) is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel strip MO is curved. FIG. 70C is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the break M59 of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. FIG. 70 (d) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the “white seven” symbol in an enlarged manner. The “white seven” symbol is a bonus symbol, and BB is started when “white seven / white seven / white seven” is stopped and displayed on the activated line. The reel band MO has an elongated shape (a band shape) having a thin plate shape. As described above, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the reel band MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO has flexibility and can be curved. In addition, it has translucency, and it is possible to illuminate the design from the back with light emitted from the torso backlight.

  The reel strip MO has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction. The first end M55 and the second end M57 are curved so as to face each other, and are attached to the reel frame MW to form an annular (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW is mainly composed of two annular frames of the same size, and the two frames are made of resin such as plastic to reduce the weight. The two frames are arranged parallel to each other and their centers are located on the same rotation axis. The interval between the two frames is arranged to be substantially the same as the width of the reel band MO. By attaching the reel band MO between the two frames along the outer periphery of the two frames, the reel M50 can be formed.

<Overlapping part M58 and break M59>
The length of the reel band MO in the longitudinal direction is slightly longer than the length of the entire circumference of the reel frame MW. Therefore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion where the reel band MO partially overlaps near the first end M55 and the second end M57 (overlapping portion M58) occurs. By doing so, the reel band MO can be attached over the entire periphery of the reel frame MW without a gap being generated along the circumferential direction (the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). Further, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a part of the reel band MO overlaps, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (c), the reel strip MO is attached to the upper side of the second end M57, and the first end M55 forms a break M59. When the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW as described above, first, when the reel band MO is started to be attached, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the reel frame MW is reeled. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of M50, the reel strip MO is pasted along the circumference of the reel frame MW from the second end M57 to the first end M55, and finally, the The reel strip MO is attached to the upper side of the second end M57, and the attachment up to the first end M55 is completed. When the reel band MO is pasted in such an order, the first end M55 ends in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the first end M55 is placed on the reel band MO. The portions M55 are in an overlapping state.

  On the other hand, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then, while the reel frame MW is gradually rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, the reel band MO is moved to the first end. Along the circumference of the reel frame MW from M55 to the second end M57, finally, a reel band MO is applied above the first end M55, and is applied up to the second end M57. Ends. When the reel strip MO is pasted in this order, the second end portion M57 ends pasting in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the second end portion M57 is placed on the reel strip MO. M57 will be in a state of overlapping.

  Here, the reel strip MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end portion M55, and then the second end portion M57 is finished to be attached in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50. In the case where the two end portions M57 overlap, when the game is executed and the reel M50 rotates, the air comes into contact with the cross section of the second end portion M57 (air resistance is large). The air easily enters between the second end M57 and the reel band MO below the second end M57, and the reel band MO in the vicinity of the second end M57 is gradually peeled off.

  On the other hand, the reel strip MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end portion M57, and then the first end portion M55 is finished to be attached in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50. In the case where the first end M55 overlaps the upper part, when the game is executed and the reel M50 rotates, the second end part M57 overlaps the reel band MO described above. Compared with, it is difficult for air to contact the cross section of the first end M55 (small air resistance), and it is difficult for air to enter between the first end M55 and the reel band MO below it. The reel strip MO in the vicinity of the first end portion M55 is in a state of being hard to peel off.

  As described above, when attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is rotated in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the reel M50. It is preferable that the first end portion M55 be overlaid on the reel band MO so that the first end portion M55 is overlaid on the reel band MO.

<Various errors>
As described above, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the overlapping portion M58 is formed between the first end M55 and the second end M57, and the first end M55 or the second end M55 is formed. A cut M59 is formed by any one of the ends M57. Since the above-described reel frame MW is formed of a resin such as plastic, an error may occur during molding. In addition, when the reel frame MW is assembled, it may be deformed to cause an error. Further, since the reel strip MO has flexibility, when the reel strip MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel strip MO is attached in a state where the reel strip MO is distorted or the size of the reel frame MW ( The outer circumference) may be attached in a state slightly different from the design value. When a large symbol (for example, “white seven”) is positioned on the reel band MO below the superimposed portion M58, the mounting position of the reel band MO is not desired because of these various errors. In the case where the large symbol is shifted from the position where the large symbol overlaps with the large symbol, the large symbol may be covered by the upper reel band MO.

  In addition, the player may aim at the bonus symbol depending on the playing state, and when the bonus symbol is arranged near the cut M59, the player may aim at the bonus symbol at the time of pushing. For example, when the bonus symbol is stopped, the cut M59 may be visually recognized when the bonus symbol is visually recognized. When the various errors as described above have occurred, it is assumed that the player may visually recognize not only the design but also the shift of the cut M59 and the shift of the position of the design. When the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol combination, it is a symbol combination that is highly profitable to the player, so the player pays attention to the bonus symbol with joy, but in that case, the gap of the break M59 and the symbol If the position shift of the symbol is visually recognized, the joy that the symbol combination which is the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed may be reduced.

<In case of bonus design>
In order to prevent such a situation, a symbol smaller than the largest symbol such as a bonus symbol is arranged at a position closest to the cut M59. Specifically, when the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (eg, the bonus symbol) having the longest length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LL, the length in the longitudinal direction is larger than LL. The shorter symbol (the length SL in the longitudinal direction) is arranged at a position closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

  Thus, even if various errors occur by arranging the symbol whose length in the longitudinal direction is short at the position closest to the first end M55 and the second end M57, these symbols can be used. The symbol can be arranged at a position separated from the overlapping portion M58 (cut M59), and the symbol can be prevented from being covered by the reel band MO. Furthermore, even when the above-described various errors occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the shift of the cut M59, the shift of the position of the symbol, and the like. In the figure, the length in the longitudinal direction of a bell symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to a bell) and the longitudinal length of a cherry symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to a cherry) are shown. Although shown as the same SL, if the length is shorter than LL which is the length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the length direction, the length of the bell symbol and the length of the cherry symbol in the length direction are made different. No problem. Further, the symbols arranged near the cut M59 are not limited to the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, but may be a bonus symbol. For example, a re-game symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to the re-game) Or, a watermelon symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon) may be arranged near the cut M59. Further, in this example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bonus symbol (white seven) and the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (for example, a bell symbol) located near the cut M59 are compared, but the present invention is not limited to this. The length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the width direction may be longer than the length of the symbol (for example, a bell symbol) located near the cut M59 in the width direction.

  In the above-mentioned example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (the bonus symbol etc.) having the longest length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol is LL, and the length SL in the longitudinal direction of the symbol whose longitudinal length is shorter than LL. Although the arrangement of the symbols is determined by comparison of, the length in the lateral direction (direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel strip MO) is LT, and the lateral length of the symbol is shorter than LT. The arrangement of the symbols may be determined by comparison with the length ST in the direction.

  The above-mentioned lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction are the lengths of the difference between the uppermost projecting symbol portion and the lowermost projecting symbol portion along the longitudinal direction. Similarly, the lengths LT and ST in the short direction are the lengths of the differences between the uppermost and lowermost design portions along the short direction.

<In case of small winning design>
Furthermore, in addition to the bonus symbol, a symbol such as a watermelon symbol or a cherry symbol which is not stopped and displayed on the activated line depending on the operation timing of the stop button even if it is won, in other words, is arranged at a distance more than the maximum number of slip frames. A symbol having at least one location (a symbol corresponding to a rare role, a symbol that may be missed, etc.) is also a symbol to be pushed, and is a symbol that the player is trying to visually recognize. It is. Also, in a game that has won the rare role, the player may not be notified of the rare role before operating the stop button.In such a case, the player wants to win the rare role. In many cases, the stop button is operated at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button in which it is easy to acquire a role (which is most profitable for the player). Some gaming machines have a large number of winning combinations, such as one when the player wins a prize, and in such a case, the operation timing of the stop button (the operation timing of the stop button, which is the most profitable for the player). In many cases, the stop button is operated. Note that operating the stop button at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button that is most profitable for the player may be referred to as an optimal game method.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when executing the game with the optimal game method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the activated lines are the upper left reel, the upper middle reel, the upper right reel (upper straight line), the left reel middle stage, the middle reel middle stage, and the right reel middle stage (middle straight line). Left reel lower, middle reel lower, right reel lower (straight lower straight), left reel upper, middle reel middle, right reel lower (right lower straight), left reel lower, middle reel middle, right reel upper (right rising straight) ), And the specified number is three. In addition, when there is a watermelon role and a cherry role as rare roles, when the watermelon role wins, when "watermelon watermelon watermelon" is displayed in a straight line on the activated line and the cherry role wins Is configured to stop and display "Cherry, any, any" (any indicates that any symbol may be displayed) on the activated line in a straight line. Further, since both the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol have a rare role, there are at least one or more places arranged apart from each other by at least the maximum number of sliding pieces.

  FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged part of the reel strip MO. In the figure, only the left reel is illustrated. In the example shown in FIG. 71, on the reel band MO, watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, and cherry are arranged in this order, and these symbols are located away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. It is located in. When a rare role is won, the player often operates the stop button aiming at a position on the reel that makes it easy to recognize the winning of the rare role and makes it easy to win the rare role. When a certain watermelon role or cherry role is won, the rare role can be won by playing the game in the optimal game method described above. Specifically, as the operation timing of the stop button that can win the rare combination, stop during three frames from the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the upper row to the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the lower row. By operating the buttons, it is possible to win the prize regardless of whether the winning role is watermelon or cherry. When the stop button is operated at such an operation timing (optimal game method), the range of 9 frames from the upper portion of the cherry symbol to the lower portion of the watermelon symbol is the range in which the stop display is possible, and is shown in the same figure. As described above, even when any of the nine frames is stopped and displayed (in any of the nine stop display modes), the position away from the first end M55 or the second end M57 is displayed. (There is no break M59 in the vicinity of the pattern placed on the two watermelon frames, and there is no break M59 in the vicinity of the symbol placed two frames below the cherry). It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the positions of the symbols and the like.

  As shown in the drawing, a symbol which can be stopped and displayed when the stop button is operated aiming at a position on the reel where the rare role is easy to win is displayed near the first end M55 or the second end M57. The first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57 can be configured so as not to be located at positions where the reel is frequently stopped and displayed, so that the gap M59 is displaced and the position of the symbol is not provided. Even when a gap or the like occurs, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the gap of the cut M59 or the shift of the position of the symbol.

  In this example, the number of steps for one round of the reel is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, since 336 ÷ 20 = 16, which is surplus 16, there are 16 17-step frames (symbols) and 4 16-step frames (symbols) as 20 frames (symbols). The reel is configured. In addition, it is preferable that the break M59 be configured so as not to be visually recognized by the player as much as possible. Therefore, the frame (symbol) adjacent to the break M59 should be 16 steps having a relatively small number of steps. Is preferred.

  In addition, as a configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine in this example, there is no need to insert and pay out substantial game medals used in a general spinning-type gaming machine, and a pseudo-medium of data is used. The game may be configured to be able to proceed. Further, when configured in this way, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the rotating body type gaming machine can be improved because there is no need to insert or withdraw a substantial game medal (for example, a game medal insertion opening). It does not have a payout opening, the front door and the back box are integrated, etc. to close the gap into which foreign matter is inserted), and reduce the risk of illegal game medals being used, Can be configured to improve security against fraudulent acts (so-called go-to acts) (sometimes referred to as an enclosed spinning machine). Note that the configuration of the enclosed spinning-type gaming machine is applicable to any of the above-described embodiments (or configurations). The credit and the credit number display device D200 may not be provided. For example, the credit and the total score (total score) are collected as one total score, and the main control board M and payout control are performed. Substrate H (may also be referred to as a game value control substrate or game value control means) or another substrate may execute the total score increase / decrease process and the display process.

Also, it is equivalent to a substantive game medal used in a general rotating body type gaming machine, and has a "score" as a pseudo game medium used for playing a game in an enclosed type rotating body type gaming machine. You may comprise. The "score" may be referred to as "score information", "score", "score information", "game value", and "game value information". A physically existing physical game medal can be directly handled by the player. On the other hand, in the enclosed rotating type gaming machine, the player can proceed with the game without directly handling the actual game medals. The score is not a real game medal, but a pseudo game medium that is dataized so that a CPU such as a main control board can perform arithmetic processing. Further, the “credit” is a score for temporarily accumulating in a bettable state or a payable state among the points, and is mainly data managed by the main control board M. Further, the "total score" is all the scores that can be thrown into the enclosed rotating body type gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The “total score” corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general spinning-type gaming machine that uses substantial game medals. In addition, when applying the configuration of the enclosed rotating type gaming machine to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as a "game medal" in the present specification is "score", "score information", " There is no problem to handle as "points", "point information", "game value", "game value information", etc., and "point", "point information", "point", "point information" as appropriate. , "Gaming value", "gaming value information", there is no problem. Incidentally, it is not necessary to have the “credit”. Also, there is no problem in replacing the credit amount display device with a total score display device.

(Second embodiment)
In the present embodiment, a state in which the player is in an advantageous state with respect to the AT is configured to include an in-AT state and the like. Is provided and the interest of the game is improved, but the configuration of the gaming machine capable of executing the AT is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, a configuration of a spinning-type gaming machine capable of executing an AT different from the configuration of the present embodiment is referred to as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment in the figure is step 4100 (second) and step 4200 (second). That is, after executing the above-described condition device number management processing in step 1450, step 4100 (second) In 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a rotation start freeze execution determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

  Further, after executing the above-described during-AT state start control processing in step 1750, in step 4200 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a freeze stop execution determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 3500. Transition. As will be described later in detail, in the second embodiment, the freeze is performed at the start of rotation of the reel (when the start lever D50 is operated) and when the reel is stopped (when the final reel is stopped, when the third reel is stopped). (The reels do not start rotating for a predetermined time, the bet operation relating to the next game for a predetermined time cannot be executed) may occur.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the rotation start freeze execution determination process according to the subroutine of step 4100 (second) of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the state regarding AT from the game is newly set to “AT in progress”. Here, "newly in the AT state" means that the state regarding the AT becomes the "AT in-state" for the first time after winning the AT lottery (sometimes referred to as AT first hit), As an example, (1) win the BB in the "high probability state" → shift to the "advantageous BB internal state" → stop and display the BB symbol (bonus symbol) and shift to the "advantageous BB state" → BB When it is finished, the state newly shifts to the “AT in progress”, and (2) if the cherry is won in the “high probability state”, the AT lottery is won by 1/2, and the omen state after winning the AT lottery { It is a state related to the AT for making the player have an expectation regarding whether or not the player has won the AT lottery, and even when the player does not win the AT lottery which is associated with winning the cherry, the same as the “predictive state” The production mode (background production, etc.), "Gasses omen state" If it is configured to shift to “there may be configured to have”, the cherry tree is won in the “high probability state” and the AT lottery based on the winning of the cherry tree is won. Since a predetermined number of games, which are the end conditions of the "prediction state", have been executed, the game state transition such as newly shifting to "AT in progress" corresponds to "new AT transition". . On the other hand, as an example of a case that does not correspond to "newly in AT state", (1) staying in "AT state" → AT counter value becomes 0, so "AT continuous battle state" { Transition to a state in which there is a possibility of transitioning to the "AT state" (resort) again → Transition to the "AT state" again, (2) Winning a BB in the "AT state" → " "Benefit BB internal state" → BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, "Benefit BB state" transition → BB is completed, the game state transition such as "AT in progress" again, "new Has entered the AT status ".

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4102, in step 4104, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an AT start freeze execution flag (a flag that turns on to execute a freeze at the start of reel rotation). ) Is turned on. Next, in step 4106, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues an AT start freeze execution command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and when the sub-control board S side receives the command, , An AT start effect will be executed), and then the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 4102, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1550). It should be noted that the freeze illustrated in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if it is configured to have freezes of various types (execution conditions and execution times).

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are steps 1568 (second) to step 1574 (second), that is, in step 1568 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the AT start freeze execution flag to ON. Is determined. If Yes in step 1568 (second), in step 1570 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the AT start freeze execution flag. Next, in step 1572 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a freeze execution timer (a decrement timer, and a freeze execution time to be executed when a new “in AT state”) and an “AT The timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed when the "middle state" ends and the freeze execution time at the start (in this example, 5 seconds, and the new "AT state") The execution time of the freeze executed in this case is set, the timer is started, and the flow shifts to step 1574 (second). Next, in step 1574 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer has become 0. If Yes in step 1574 (second), the process moves to step 1552. On the other hand, if No in step 1574 (second), the process of step 1574 (second) is repeatedly performed until the freeze execution time at the start of the “AT state” has elapsed. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1568 (second), the processing shifts to step 1552.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, a freeze (which may be referred to as a freeze at the time of starting the AT) is executed when a new “AT-in-progress state” is started, and details thereof will be described later. However, during the execution of the freeze, the AT start effect is executed on the sub-control board S side. In this example, the freeze execution time at the start of the AT is set to 5 seconds. However, the execution time may be changed without any problem, and it is preferable to set the execution time according to the execution time of the AT start effect. In this example, the freeze execution time at the end of the AT described later is 3 seconds, and the freeze execution time at the start of the AT is longer than the freeze execution time at the end of the AT. Have been. In this way, by setting the freeze execution time at the start of AT, which will be advantageous to the player in the future, to be relatively longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. It can be an expensive gaming machine.

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the freeze-at-execution determination processing according to the subroutine of step 4200 (second) of FIG. 75 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value has newly become 0 in the game. “The AT counter value has newly become 0” means that the AT counter value becomes “1 → 0” in a situation where the AT counter value is being subtracted such as “AT in progress”. It does not include the case where the AT counter value is always 0, such as the situation where the state related to the AT is the "normal game state".

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4202, the process proceeds to step 4206. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4202, in step 4204, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the advantageous period remaining game number counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "The advantageous section remaining game number counter value has newly become 0" means that the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is decreased in the situation where the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is decremented such as "AT state". This does not include a case where the counter value of the number of remaining advantageous-zone games is always 0, which is the case where “1 → 0” is reached and the AT-related state is the “normal gaming state”. In the case of Yes in step 4204, the process moves to step 4206. Next, at step 4206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the freeze execution timer (decrement timer, which is a decrement timer, is executed when the new "AT in progress" and the "AT in progress" are executed. A timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed at the time of termination and the freeze execution time at the time of termination (in this example, 3 seconds, the freeze executed when the “AT in progress” ends). Execution time) and start the timer. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the AT end freeze execution command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and when the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side Then, the AT end effect will be executed), and the process proceeds to step 4210. Next, in step 4210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer is 0. If Yes in step 4210, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3500). On the other hand, if No in step 4210, the process in step 4210 is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the end of the “AT-in-state” elapses. If the answer is No in Step 4204, the process moves to the next process (the process in Step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 76 is an image diagram of execution of an AT start effect in the second embodiment. In the same figure, an example of the case where the power interruption does not occur during the execution of the AT start effect and the case where the power interruption occurs will be described in detail.

  First, in (a) of the figure, a case in which the power is not cut off during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail. First, when the start lever D50 relating to the game in which the state relating to the AT is newly changed to the "AT state" is operated (the start condition of the game is satisfied), the AT start effect is started, and the freeze is executed. Is done. Further, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, “Warp execution!” Is displayed for one second on the effect display device S40 (while the AT start effect is being executed, a background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is always executed). . In this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and freeze is 5 seconds. Then, one second has elapsed from the start of the freeze, and the display of "warp execution!" Is erased on the effect display device S40. The state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for three seconds. Then, when 4 seconds elapse from the start of execution of the freeze, "AT50G START !!" is displayed for 1 second on the effect display device S40 as the effect mode of the AT start effect. Then, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of execution of the freeze, the execution of the freeze ends, the execution of the AT start effect ends, and the rotation of the reel starts. When the execution of the AT start effect is completed, the display of "AT50G START !!" on the effect display device S40 is erased, and the AT effect is displayed from the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect. It will be switched to a possible background production. In addition, in the first game in the AT state, when the above-described push-order navigation is executed, (1) freeze starts to be executed → freeze ends after 5 seconds elapse → reel starts to rotate and staging The pressing order navigation is displayed on the display device S40. (2) Freezing starts execution → Freezing ends after 5 seconds elapses → Reel starts rotating → Reel drive state becomes reel constant speed state and effect display device S40 It may be configured such that the push order navigation is displayed by pressing. With this configuration, even if the rotation start timing of the reel becomes later than the conventional timing due to the execution of the freeze, the player mistakenly operates the stop button corresponding to the pressing order different from the correct pressing order. It is possible to prevent such a situation.

  Next, a case where the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail in FIG. First, when the start lever D50 relating to the game in which the state relating to the AT is newly changed to the "AT state" is operated (the start condition of the game is satisfied), the AT start effect is started, and the freeze is executed. Is done. Further, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, “Warp execution!” Is displayed for one second on the effect display device S40 (while the AT start effect is being executed, a background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is always executed). . In this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and the freeze is 5 seconds (excluding the time when the power is off). Then, one second has elapsed from the start of the freeze, and the display of "warp execution!" Is erased on the effect display device S40. The state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for three seconds. Thereafter, when two seconds have elapsed from the start of the execution of the freeze, the power is cut off (for example, the power supply of the game hall is cut off). After that, when the power is restored, “AT50G START !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 3 seconds, and the freeze is kept executed. Thereafter, when the total time from the start of execution of the freeze except during the power-off is 5 seconds, the execution of the freeze is finished, the execution of the AT start effect is finished, and the rotation of the reels is started. It will be. As described above, in this example, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the freeze (during the execution of the AT start effect) and thereafter the power returns to the normal state, the execution time of the freeze is changed from the state before the occurrence of the power interruption. It will be executed continuously. As an example, when the freeze execution time is 5 seconds and the power is cut off 1 second after the start of the freeze execution, the freeze is executed for 4 seconds after the power is restored, and the freeze execution is executed. When the power is cut off 3 seconds after the start, the freeze is executed for 2 seconds after the power is restored.

  Similarly to the freeze execution time, if the power is cut off during execution of the AT start effect and then the power is restored from the power off, the AT start effect execution time is cut off. It will be executed continuously from the state before the occurrence. On the other hand, the effect mode of the AT start effect differs depending on whether the power is cut off during execution of the AT start effect or not. Specifically, during the execution of the AT start effect. When the power is not cut off, "AT50G START !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 at a timing 4 seconds after the execution of the AT start effect is being executed, while the AT start effect is being executed. When the power is cut off, the effect display device S40 displays "AT50G START !!" after the power is cut off, regardless of the timing of the power cut. The display "AT50G START !!" may be referred to as the AT start game number display. Further, in the same figure, as the AT start game number display, it is illustrated so as to notify that the number of remaining AT games at the start of AT (at the time of starting the AT state) is 50 games. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the AT game number addition lottery can be executed in the “advantageous BB state” executed immediately before the transition to the AT state, the AT in the “advantageous BB state” is executed. It is configured to display the AT remaining game number obtained by winning the AT remaining game number obtained by winning the lottery in addition to the AT initial game number of 50 games on the effect display device S40 as the AT start game number display. Good. As an example, when the number of remaining AT games of 30 games is obtained by the lottery for adding the number of AT games in the “advantageous BB state”, “AT80G START !!” is displayed as the AT starting game number display. May be. In the figure, only the AT start effect is illustrated, but similarly for the AT end effect, the effect mode of the AT end effect is that the power is cut off during the execution of the AT end effect and the power is cut off. It is configured to be different from the case where there is not (for example, when the power is not cut off during the execution of the AT end effect, 2 seconds after the start of the AT end effect, “AT end GET 〇〇” is displayed. On the other hand, when the power is cut off during execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET XX" is displayed after returning from the power cut, regardless of the timing of the power cut.) Further, it is an effect that is displayed during execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, and if the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, an effect that is immediately displayed after the power is restored. In that case, it is not limited to the display of the number of games at the start of AT, and there is no problem as long as it is a display that can be visually recognized by the player and the game progresses smoothly.

  With the configuration described above, according to the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed when the state is newly shifted to the AT state and when the AT state is terminated, and Then, an AT start effect is executed during the freeze execution when newly shifting to the AT in-state, and an AT end effect is executed during the freeze execution when the AT in-state is ended. In the case of such a configuration, in the case where the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, after the power is turned off, the display is scheduled to be displayed from a predetermined timing in the AT start effect or the AT end effect. By configuring the display to be displayed immediately after returning from the power-off, even if an unintended power-off (for example, a power outage at the amusement arcade) occurs during execution of the freeze, the game, such as the number of remaining AT games, can be performed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot grasp the state of the game by immediately displaying information necessary for the player to grasp the state of the game.

  In the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed when the state is newly shifted to the AT state and when the AT state is ended. However, the freeze execution mode is not limited to this. , BB start, BB end, or the like, or may be configured to be executed based on a winning condition device or a staying game state.

In addition, from the configuration related to the freeze in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment described above,
Freezing execution period when power failure does not occur during execution of freezing = A
When a power failure occurs during execution of a freeze, a freeze execution period until the power failure occurs = B
When a power failure occurs during execution of a freeze, a freeze execution period after the power failure occurs = C
Then,
A = B + C
It is configured so that

  When the freeze related to the AT start effect is completed, the above-described reel acceleration processing is performed.

<<<<< Configuration 2 applicable to this example >>>>>
The configuration applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Note that any of the configurations described below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, and the configuration 1 described below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations described below may be applied. Supplement what you may do.

<<<< Lamp unit configuration >>>>
First, with reference to FIG. 77 and FIG. 78, a configuration regarding lighting of a lamp unit (a generic term for the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10) applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail.

  FIG. 77 shows a lamp unit lighting configuration image. In the figure, a configuration relating to lighting of a lamp unit applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. Note that each item illustrated in the figure is a partial excerpt, and for example, the items illustrated in the column of element 1 are not limited to only eight items of “red” to “no color”. First, as shown in FIG. 77, there are six types of elements 1 to 6 as elements for lighting the lamp unit.

<Element 1>
Element 1 is a lighting color, and there are 8 of "red", "blue", "green", "white", "red + green", "blue + green", "blue + white", and "no color". The element 1 has different types of lighting colors. Note that the lamp unit according to the present example is configured by a plurality of LEDs, and when the lighting color is “red”, it indicates that all the LEDs are lit in red, and the lighting color is “red + blue”. "Indicates that out of N LEDs, which is the total number of LEDs, M LEDs are lit in red and L LEDs are lit in blue (N = M + L). . In addition, the combination of the order of the LED which lights up in red and the LED which lights up in blue may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds. A plurality of lighting colors such as “red + blue 1” and “red + blue 2” may be provided). “No color” indicates light-off (non-lighting), which is a lighting color selected when light is always turned off. Note that, as described above, the number of items constituting elements 1 to 6 in the drawing is only an excerpt, and in element 1, three or more colors such as “red + blue + green” are used. There is no problem even if it is configured to have a combined lighting color.

<Element 2>
Element 2 is the lighting time. The element 2 has seven types of lighting times. Note that “always” is the lighting time selected when the lighting is always on, and “no lighting” is the lighting time selected when the lighting is always off.

<Element 3>
Element 3 is the light-off time, and includes “0.1 seconds”, “0.2 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “1 second”, “3 seconds”, “always”, and “no light off”. Element 3 has seven types of light-off time. Note that “always” is the lighting time selected when the light is always turned off, and “no light” is the light-off time selected when the light is always turned on.

<Element 4>
The element 4 is a lighting time pattern, and the lighting time pattern is configured by combining the lighting time of the element 2 and the light-off time of the element 3; "Lights off", "Lights on for 0.1 seconds → Lights off for 0.3 seconds", "Lights for 0.2 seconds → Lights off for 0.3 seconds", "Lights for 1 second → Lights off for 0.1 second", "Lights for 3 seconds → Lights for 0. Element 4 has seven types of lighting time patterns of “3 seconds off”, “always on”, and “always off”. As an example of the lighting time pattern, in the case of “lighting on for 0.1 second → lighting off for 0.1 second”, the lighting time of “0.1 second” which is element 2 and the lighting out of “0.1 second” which is element 3 It is configured by combining time. Note that “always on” is a lighting time pattern selected when the lighting is always on, and is configured by combining the lighting time of “always” which is the element 2 and the lighting time of “no light off” which is the element 3 Have been. Further, "always off" is a lighting time pattern selected when it is always off, and is configured by combining the lighting time of "no lighting" which is element 2 and the lighting time of "always" which is element 3. Has been done.

<Element 5>
The element 5 is a lighting element, and the lighting element is configured by combining a lighting color as the element 1 and a lighting time pattern as the element 4. In other words, the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color which is the element 1, the lighting time which is the element 2 and the extinguishing time which is the element 3. In the figure, for the sake of explanation, the specific contents of the lighting elements are shown as lighting element contents, and the identification elements assigned to the respective lighting element contents are shown as lighting element types. As lighting elements,
Lighting element type a: “Red for 0.1 seconds, then turned off for 0.1 seconds”
Lighting element type b: “blue light on for 0.1 second → light off for 0.1 second”
Lighting element type c: "0.1 second red on → 0.3 second off"
Lighting element type d: "0.1 seconds red + blue light → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type e: "red for 0.2 seconds + blue light → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type f: "blue + green light for 0.2 seconds → light off for 0.3 seconds"
Lighting element type g: "1 second white on → 0.1 second off"
Lighting element type h: "1s blue + white lighting → 0.1s off"
Lighting element type i: "Green for 3 seconds → Turn off for 0.3 seconds"
Lighting element type j: "3 seconds blue + green light → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type k: "Always red light"
Lighting element type l: "Always lit in blue"
Lighting element type m: "Always green light"
Lighting element type n: "Always white lighting"
Lighting element type o: "Always red + green light"
Lighting element type p: "always blue + green lighting"
Lighting element type q: "Always blue + white lighting"
Lighting element type r: "Always off (no color)"
18 as the element 5. As an example of the lighting element, in the case of “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off”, element 1 “red” and element 4 “0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second off” The lighting time pattern (the lighting time pattern is a combination of the lighting time and the light-off time as described above) is combined. “Always on red + green” is configured by combining “red + green” which is element 1 and “always on” which is element 4. “Always off (no color)” is configured by combining element 1 “no color” and element 4 “always off”.

<Element 6>
The element 6 has a lighting pattern, and is configured by combining one or a plurality of lighting elements as the element 5. In the figure, for the sake of explanation, the specific contents of the lighting pattern are shown as the lighting pattern contents, and the identification elements assigned to the respective lighting pattern contents are shown as the lighting pattern types. As the lighting pattern,
Pattern 1: “a → a → a → a”
Pattern 2: “b → b → b → b”
Pattern 3: “a → b → a → b”
Pattern 4: “a → a → g → g”
Pattern 5: “g → f → j”
Pattern 6: “i → h → b”
Pattern 7: “g → f → b”
Pattern 8: “i → j → g”
Pattern 9: “g → g → g”
Pattern 10: "k"
Pattern 11: "l"
Pattern 12: "m"
Pattern 13: "n"
Pattern 14: "o"
Pattern 15: "p"
Pattern 16: "q"
Pattern 17: "r"
17 as the element 6. As an example of a lighting pattern, in the case of pattern 1: “a → a → a → a”, the element 5 “red lighting for 0.1 seconds → lighting off for 0.1 seconds” is repeated four times. In the case of pattern 8 “i → j → g”, the lighting element type i is “3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off”, and then the lighting element type j is “3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0”. .3 seconds off "and the lighting element type g:" 1 second white on → 0.1 seconds off ". Incidentally, the lighting patterns may be further combined to turn on the lamp unit as in pattern 1 → pattern 4, or as in pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → ... The pattern 1 → pattern 4 ”may be repeatedly lit until the lighting end condition is satisfied. The lighting end condition may be configured to be satisfied when a game situation such as a predetermined error release is changed, or to be satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  As described above, the lamp unit in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured to be lit by a combination of the lighting patterns, and the lighting pattern of the element 6 is configured by the combination of the lighting elements of the element 5; Are configured by a combination of the lighting color of the element 1 and the lighting time pattern of the element 4, and the lighting time pattern of the element 4 is configured by a combination of the lighting time of the element 2 and the lighting time of the element 3. Have been.

  In addition, although the structure related to the lighting of the lamp unit has been described in detail as including the elements 1 to 6, the invention is not limited thereto, and the number of elements may be increased or decreased, or the elements 1 to 6 may be increased. May be changed (for example, the element 1 is set to the lighting luminance).

  Next, FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-based notification mode. In the same drawing, a lighting pattern of a lamp unit (sometimes referred to as a lamp unit lighting pattern) and a lighting mode of a turning drum back lamp S30 (also referred to as a back lamp lighting mode) applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. ), And an example of the configuration of the sound output from the speaker S20 (sometimes referred to as a speaker sound) for each game situation. Note that each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt. For example, the lighting pattern executed during the execution of BB is not limited to only one type of the pattern 7, but the type of BB (conditions related to BB) The lighting pattern may be made different depending on the type of device) or the gaming state where the BB has been won. In one BB, a lighting mode (lighting cycle) in which a plurality of lighting patterns are combined is repeatedly executed until the BB ends. It should be added that the configuration may be such that As for the error, a medal empty error is illustrated as an example, but the lighting pattern of the lamp unit may be different depending on the type of the error. In addition, in all of the configurations 1 to 6, during the normal game (the error is not occurring, immediately after the power is turned on, the standby screen is not displayed, the setting confirmation mode is not set, and the setting change mode is not set, The lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected in a situation where the bonus is not being executed) is any of pattern 2, pattern 5, pattern 6, pattern 7, pattern 8, pattern 9, pattern 11, pattern 15, pattern 16, and pattern 17. It is configured to be one or a combination of a plurality of them. In addition, since it is comprised so that it may have various game states, such as a low probability state and an AT state, as a normal game, the lighting pattern of the lamp unit which can be selected according to a game state may be made different. In other words, it may be configured to have a lighting pattern that is not selected in a specific gaming state or a lighting pattern that can be selected only in a specific gaming state. Note that the time when the power is turned on is a state (immediately after the power is turned on) until a predetermined time (for example, one second) elapses after the power is turned on.

<< Configuration 1 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with a relatively small light quantity (light quantity smaller than the normal light quantity)
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Turns off speaker sound: Outputs a dedicated sound for a predetermined time when the power is turned on. <During standby screen display>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 12 (always lit green)
Back lamp lighting mode: Light off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting check mode <Setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 9 (“White lighting for 1 second → Light off for 0.1 seconds” is repeated 3 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: Sound exclusively for setting change mode <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 second lighting” → “0.2 second blue + green lighting → 0.3 second lighting” → “0.1 second blue lighting → 0.1 second” Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: Looping (repeatedly playing) a dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above. It should be noted that the effect performed when the power is turned on may be different depending on the effect executed before the power-off occurs or the game state before the power-off occurs.

  As in configuration 1, it is configured such that only different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit during the error occurrence such as when a medal empty error occurs and during the normal game, and as a lighting color forming the lighting pattern. , Red color is used when a medal empty error occurs, while red color is not used during normal play (configuring that a predetermined lighting color is selected only when an error occurs) , It is possible to easily discriminate between the case where an error has occurred and the case where no error has occurred, and it is possible to smooth the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game. Further, by configuring different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit immediately after power-on and during normal game, the player or the administrator can easily distinguish immediately after power-on and during normal game. Therefore, it is possible to smooth the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game. In addition, the player can proceed with the game without stress without erroneously recognizing that an error has occurred even during the normal game, and the manager can clearly identify the game machine in which the error has occurred. Becomes In addition, by configuring different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit depending on whether the standby screen is displayed or the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily perform the standby screen display and the normal game. It is possible to make a distinction, and it is possible to smooth the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game. Further, during the display of the standby screen, it is possible to suppress the power consumption due to the use of the flashing lighting pattern even though the player is not playing the game. Also, by configuring different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit in the setting confirmation mode and in the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily perform the setting confirmation mode and the normal game. It is possible to make a distinction, and it is possible to smooth the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game. In addition, the administrator can immediately determine the unintended setting confirmation mode, can quickly determine the unintended setting confirmation mode, and even if he forgets to turn off the setting key switch can do. In addition, by configuring different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit in the setting change mode and in the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily switch between the setting change mode and the normal game. It is possible to make a distinction, and it is possible to smooth the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game. Further, the administrator can immediately determine the unintended setting change mode, and can quickly determine the unintended setting change mode. In addition, by configuring different lighting patterns as the lighting patterns of the lamp units depending on whether the BB is being executed and the normal game is being executed (the state where the BB is not being executed), the player or the administrator can perform the BB and the normal game It is possible to easily discriminate between the middle state (the state where the BB is not being executed), and the player or the manager can clearly discriminate the situation of the game.

  Incidentally, as described above, the difference between when the error relating to the lamp unit occurs and the normal game, the difference between immediately after turning on the power and the normal game, the difference between the display of the standby screen and the normal game, and the setting As the difference between the confirmation mode and the normal game, the difference between the setting change mode and the normal game, and the difference between the BB execution and the normal game, a lighting color that is not used during the normal game (element 1), may be configured to have a lighting time (element 2) that is not used during a normal game, or may be configured to have a turn-off time (element 3) that is not used during a normal game. It may be configured to have a lighting time pattern (element 4) that is not used during a normal game, or may be configured to have a lighting element (element 5) that is not used during a normal game. And it may be configured to have unused lighting patterns (element 6) during normal game.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) for exclusive sound during medal empty error until error is cleared
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no color))
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: No output <While standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights (blinks) in a special pattern during standby screen display
Speaker sound: no output <during setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light volume Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light amount Speaker sound: No output <BB is being executed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 second lighting” → “0.2 second blue + green lighting → 0.3 second lighting” → “0.1 second blue lighting → 0.1 second” Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: Looping (repeatedly playing) a dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above.

<< Configuration 3 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (repeat "0.1 second red on → 0.1 second off" four times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) for exclusive sound during medal empty error until error is cleared
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light volume Speaker sound: No output <During standby screen display>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 second lighting” → “0.2 second blue + green lighting → 0.3 second lighting” → “3 second green lighting → 0.3 second lighting” )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light volume Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light amount Speaker sound: No output <BB is being executed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 (“3 seconds green on → 0.3 seconds off” → “1 second blue + white on → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.1 second blue on → 0.1 seconds off” )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: Looping (repeatedly playing) a dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above.

<< Configuration 4 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 14 (always red + green lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) for exclusive sound during medal empty error until error is cleared
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: No output <While standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: No output <during setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 (“0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second light off” → “0.1 second blue light → 0.1 second light off” → “0.1 second red light → 0.1 second” "Off" → "Blue for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds")
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 (“0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second light off” → “0.1 second blue light → 0.1 second light off” → “0.1 second red light → 0.1 second” "Off" → "Blue for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds")
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: No output <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 (“3 seconds green on → 0.3 seconds off” → “1 second blue + white on → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.1 second blue on → 0.1 seconds off” )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: Looping (repeatedly playing) a dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above. Note that the warning sound output from the speaker during the medal empty error and the warning sound output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode are the same warning sound. During the setting, a voice saying "Medal empty error is occurring" is output from the speaker, during the setting check mode, "Setting is being checked" is output from the speaker, and during the setting change mode, "During the setting change mode" Yes "is output from the speaker. Note that, for an error different from the medal empty error, a warning sound and a voice "In error." May be output from the speaker in the same manner.

<< Configuration 5 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) for exclusive sound during medal empty error until error is cleared
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting → Lighting off (Lights up when playing normal game)
Speaker sound: no output <while the standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: No output <during setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: Sound dedicated to setting confirmation mode <Setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for setting change mode <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white on → 0.1 second off” → “0.2 second blue + green on → 0.3 second off” → “3 second blue + green on → 0.3 second” Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: Looping (repeatedly playing) a dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above.

<< Configuration 6 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (repeat "0.1 second red on → 0.1 second off" four times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) for exclusive sound during medal empty error until error is cleared
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: No output <While standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: No output <during setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second light off" → "0.1 second red light → 0.1 second light off" → "1 second white light → 0.1 second light off" → "White for 1 second, then off for 0.1 second"
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: Sound dedicated to setting confirmation mode <Setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second light off" → "0.1 second red light → 0.1 second light off" → "1 second white light → 0.1 second light off" → "White for 1 second, then off for 0.1 second"
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for setting change mode <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white on → 0.1 second off” → “0.2 second blue + green on → 0.3 second off” → “3 second blue + green on → 0.3 second” Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: Looping (repeatedly playing) a dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above.

  In the figure, six types of configurations, Configuration 1 to Configuration 6, are illustrated, but the configuration is merely an example, and the lamp unit lighting pattern, the back lamp lighting mode, and the sound output from the speaker for each game situation are shown. May be combined from each configuration, or may be changed in any way. Also, regarding the lighting pattern of the lamp unit, the difference between the error occurrence and during the normal game, the difference between immediately after the power is turned on and during the normal game, and the difference between the display of the standby screen and the normal game concerning the lamp unit. The above-described elements 1 to 6 include the differences, the differences between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, the differences between the setting change mode and the normal game, and the differences between the BB execution and the normal game. It is preferable that any one of (see FIG. 77) is selected so as not to be selected during the normal game.

  Further, in the figure, only the medal empty error is illustrated as the error, but the invention is not limited to this, and the display determination error and the door opening error are also related to the lamp unit at the time of the error occurrence and during the normal game. , The difference between immediately after turning on the power and the normal game, the difference between displaying the standby screen and the normal game, the difference between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, the setting change mode and the normal game As the difference between the inside and the difference between the BB execution and the normal game, any one of the elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) described above is selected that is not selected during the normal game. Depending on the type of error that has occurred, for example, the medal empty error and the display determination error may be different from one of the above-described elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit. Lamp unit The elements described above 1 elements 6 according to the may be different from any of the (see FIG. 77).

  In addition, when the replay combination is stopped and displayed, the player may be notified of the stop display of the symbol combination relating to the replay combination by the lighting mode of the lamp unit. In the game executed in the gaming state of (1), the lamp unit is configured to be turned on when the symbol combination related to the replaying game is stopped and the replaying game is won, and any one of the elements 1 to 6 is performed. Is included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit, and is not included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit when a symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to the replaying game is stopped and displayed without winning the replaying game. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the player can clearly recognize that the re-game combination has been won.

<<< Configuration related to opening and paying out front door >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a configuration relating to payout of game medals applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. In the figure, "normal" means, for example, that the winning combination -B (common bell) is won in the "low probability state", and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, winning 04) is stopped and displayed. In this case, 11 game medals are paid out. In the case of "Payout occurs before door is opened" or "Payout occurs after door is opened", winning -B (common bell) is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, winning 04) is stopped and displayed. Is exemplified. It should be noted that FIG. 14 illustrates a case where the credit (the number of credits displayed on the credit amount display device D200) is the upper limit value (50 in this example).

<< Configuration 1 >>
<In the case of normal payment>
The case where the normal payout in the configuration 1 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is spinning, the third stop button is pressed (when the third stop button is pressed, the third stop button is pressed). (It may be referred to as being turned on), and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button becomes non-pressed (the state of the third stop button changes from being pressed to non-pressed, for example, when the player releases his / her finger from the third stop button. In addition, from when the third stop button is pressed) When the button is not pressed, the third stop button may be referred to as being changed from ON to OFF), a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (the same). A sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<Payment is executed before the door is opened>
Next, a case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation in which two reels out of the three reels are stopped and the other one reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button is changed from on to off, a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. Thereafter, in a situation where the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is open from the speaker S20 (see FIG. Sound A) is output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output simultaneously. Thereafter, the output of the payout sound ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the output of the payout sound, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Note that the front door DU is kept open, that is, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened, and is output even after the front door DU remains open. The output is terminated when a specific time has elapsed from the opening. With this configuration, in a case where the administrator opens the front door DU to perform setting confirmation or setting change, the front door opening notification sound is continuously output until the setting confirmation or the setting change is completed. Without being prevented, setting confirmation and setting change can be performed without stress. Although the output of the front door opening sound is ended at the same time as the output of the payout sound in the same figure, the present invention is not limited to this. There is no problem even if the end timing is different from the end timing.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation in which two reels out of the three reels are stopped and the other one reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, in a situation where the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door opening notification sound (sound A in the same figure) for notifying that the front door DU is open is output from the speaker S20. You. That is, regardless of the ON / OFF state of the third stop button, the front door DU is opened to output a front door opening notification sound. Thereafter, in a situation where the front door DU is open and the front door opening notification sound is being output, the third stop button is turned off from on, and a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and the speaker S20 is used. The output of the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output simultaneously. Thereafter, a specific time has elapsed since the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. After that, the output of the payout sound ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the output of the payout sound.

  As in the configuration 1, the game medals can be paid out regardless of the opening of the front door DU, so that the front door DU is forgotten to be closed when the manager of the game hall supplies the game machine with the game medals. Even in the case where the game medals are closed (they are not closed tightly), the game medals can be normally paid out, and the player can be configured so as not to be disadvantageous. Further, by configuring so that the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound can be simultaneously output, the situation of the gaming machine can be grasped in real time. In addition, in the case of the above-described configuration 1, it is preferable to set an output mode (tone, pitch, tempo, etc.) so that the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound can be easily distinguished.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<In the case of normal payment>
The case where the normal payout in the configuration 2 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is spinning, the third stop button is pressed (when the third stop button is pressed, the third stop button is pressed). (It may be referred to as being turned on), and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button becomes non-pressed (the state of the third stop button changes from being pressed to non-pressed, for example, when the player releases his / her finger from the third stop button. In addition, from when the third stop button is pressed) When the button is not pressed, the third stop button may be referred to as being changed from ON to OFF), a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (the same). A sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<Payment is executed before the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation in which two reels out of the three reels are stopped and the other one reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button is changed from on to off, a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. Thereafter, in a situation where the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is open from the speaker S20 (see FIG. The sound A) is output, and the output of the payout sound ends. Thereafter, a specific time has elapsed since the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. The predetermined period of time, which is the output period of the payout sound, ends during the output of the front door opening notification sound.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation in which two reels out of the three reels are stopped and the other one reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, in a situation where the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door opening notification sound (sound A in the same figure) for notifying that the front door DU is open is output from the speaker S20. You. That is, regardless of the ON / OFF state of the third stop button, the front door DU is opened to output a front door opening notification sound. Thereafter, in a situation where the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned off from on, and a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out. The corresponding payout sound is not output. Thereafter, in a situation where the payout of the game medals is being executed, a specific time has elapsed since the opening of the front door DU, the output of the front door opening notification sound ends, and the payout sound corresponding to the prize 04 is output. After that, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the payout of the game medals corresponding to the prize 04, and the output of the payout sound ends.

  By configuring the game medal payout to be executable irrespective of the opening of the front door DU as in the configuration 2, the administrator of the game hall forgets to close the front door DU when refilling the gaming machine with the game medal. Even in the case where the game medal is closed (they are not closed tightly), the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player can be configured so as not to be disadvantaged. Also, by preventing the front door opening notification sound and payout sound from being output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the situation of the gaming machine from being difficult to judge due to the mixture of the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound. can do. Note that, in the configuration 2, the payout sound is output even during the output of the front door opening notification sound, and the volume of the payout sound is relatively small compared to the volume of the front door opening notification sound (the volume 0 is also set). Included).

<< Other configurations >>
When the configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 is applied, even when the front door DU is open, the insertion of a game medal, the operation of the max bet button (the bet button D220 in this example), and the bet button lamp S50 (both the max bet lamp) are performed. ) Or a bet lamp (1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp). That is, when a game medal is inserted while the front door DU is open, the insertion of the game medal can be detected (the blocker is on) and the insertion is valid (the credit increases or the game medal is Bet). In such a configuration, a bet sound (or a medal insertion sound) corresponding to insertion of a game medal or operation of a bet button (max bet button) may be output from the speaker S20 (front door DU). Even when is not open, the betting sound corresponding to the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output), and the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) is supported. The betting sound may not be output.

<<<< Power off and payout configuration >>>>
The following is an example of the operation that can be applied to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment when the power is turned off while the third stop is being pressed at the time of winning the small role. It should be noted that any of the configurations exemplified below can be applied to all the embodiments according to the present example. Note that the configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a game medal is paid out to the medal receiving tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. Further, the effect produced by blinking the back drum backlight S30 may be referred to as a back lamp effect.

<Structure 1>
In a game that wins a small role (for example, the common bell of winning 04), press the 3rd stop button (turn it on) to win the small role → Power is cut off while pressing the 3rd stop button (A power failure occurs in the game hall, etc.) → The power is restored while the third stop button is pressed down → The power is restored and the game medal corresponding to the small win is paid out. May be.

  Further, when the game proceeds in a situation where the power supply is not interrupted and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small role is executed, a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role can be executed, In addition, the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, while the power is restored while pressing the third stop button as in the configuration 1 described above, and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small role is executed. In such a case, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small role may not be output. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the payout sound after the power is restored.

  With such a configuration, even if the power is turned off when the player presses the third stop and the power is immediately restored, the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small role is executed. And no disadvantage is caused to the player. In addition, even if any one of the predetermined operating members (for example, the start lever, all the stop buttons, the bet button (max bet button), the settlement button, etc.) controlled by the main control board M is operated, the other predetermined members are operated. If the operation member is not operated, payout of game medals based on winning may be executed. For example, when returning from the power-off, if both the third stop button and the start lever are operated (turned on), the payout of the game medal based on the winning is not executed. Is also good. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, (1) after that, by releasing the third stop button or releasing the start lever (one of the operating members controlled by the main control board M side that is turned on becomes one). Payout of game medals based on winning may be executed. (2) After that, by releasing the third stop button and the start lever (the main control board M side The payout of the game medals based on the winning may be performed by turning off all the operation members to be controlled).

  Incidentally, when the above-mentioned power interruption occurs, for example, a power switch is turned on from off, a power supply cable is disconnected, a power outage occurs in an amusement arc, a power supply cable comes out of an insertion slot, In any case, the present invention can be applied to the above-described configuration.

<Structure 2>
In the game that has won a small role (for example, a common bell of winning 04), the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small role → the front door DU is opened while the third stop button is pressed. (A door opening error occurs when the front door DU is opened), and the power is cut off (turn off the power switch, etc.) → The power is restored while the third stop button is pressed (the power switch is turned on). Etc.) → The front door DU is closed and the door opening error is released while the third stop button is pressed (for example, the door key is inserted into the keyhole D260 and twisted in a predetermined direction) → The door opening error is released and Alternatively, the above-described operation in which the payout of the game medals corresponding to the small combination is executed may be performed.

  Also, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. Also, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination can be output, the door opening error is released while the third stop button is pressed down as in the configuration 2 described above, and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is released. When is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be output. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by suddenly executing the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after releasing the door opening error.

<Structure 3>
In a game that has won a small role (for example, a common bell of winning 04), the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small role → Power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed. (A power failure occurs at the amusement arcade, etc.) → Release the third stop button (turn off the third stop button from ON to OFF) → Return to power → Return to power and pay out game medals corresponding to the small role May be executed as described above.

  Also, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. Moreover, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination can be output, the power is cut off while the third stop button is being held down, and the power is restored after the third stop button is released, as in the configuration 3 described above. When the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination is not executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination is not output. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored.

  In the case of the above-described configuration 1, configuration 2 or configuration 3, it is determined whether or not the third stop button is pressed (whether or not the third stop button is on) as a process after the power is restored. Before executing the process (the process executed in the game progress control process), the payout of the game medals based on the winning (the process executed in the game progress control process) may be executed. In addition, as described above, in the situation where the symbol combination in which the small winning combination is a prize is stopped and displayed, the power is cut off while the third stop button is being pressed, and then the power is restored while the third stop button is being pressed. The game token may be paid out based on the winning by releasing the third stop button after that. In such a case, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect corresponding to the payout are performed. May be configured not to be executed (when the payout of the game medal based on the winning is executed without the power interruption, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect are executed).

<<<< Configuration Confirmation Mode and Payout Configuration >>>>
The following is an example of the operation that can be applied to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment when the setting key switch is turned on while the third stop is being pressed at the time of the small win. It should be noted that any of the configurations exemplified below can be applied to all the embodiments according to the present example. Note that the configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a game medal is paid out to the medal receiving tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. The configuration described in detail below is a state in which the reel is stopped and the power is turned on, and the main control board side such as a start lever, all stop buttons, a bet button (max bet button), a settlement button, and the like. When the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned on from off in the situation where the various operating members controlled by are not operated (not on), it is possible to shift to the setting check mode. This is an example. In the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to notify that the setting confirmation mode is being performed, or may not be configured to be notified.

<Structure 1>
In the game that has won a small role (for example, a common bell of winning 04), the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small role → the front door DU is opened while the third stop button is pressed. (A door opening error occurs by opening the front door DU) and turn on the setting key switch (do not shift to the setting confirmation mode) → Close the front door DU while holding down the third stop button Releasing the door opening error (for example, inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 and twisting it in a predetermined direction) → The setting may not be shifted to the setting confirmation mode even if the third stop button is released.

  In addition, in the case of such a configuration, a bet can be made while the setting key switch is turned on thereafter, and a reel can be started to rotate by operating a start lever in a betting situation, and a stop button is provided. , The reels can be stopped (the game can proceed). Further, if the setting key switch is kept on thereafter, betting may not be possible (game medal may not be inserted), or betting is possible but the reel does not start rotating even if the start lever is operated. May be. In other words, the game may not be executed while the setting key switch remains on. In the case of such a configuration, it is added that the effect display device S40 does not display a display indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being performed. If the front door DU is opened in a state where the replay symbol is not stopped and the setting key switch is kept on (after the operation as in the above configuration 1), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode. It may be configured so as to obtain, or not to shift to the setting confirmation mode when the front door DU is opened in a state where the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, when the front door DU is opened to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may display that the mode is the setting confirmation mode.

<<<< Max bet lamp lighting configuration >>>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, an operation related to lighting of a max bet lamp (also referred to as a bet button lamp S50) applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. The configuration exemplified below illustrates a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even during the stop display of the re-game. The max bet lamp is controlled by the sub control board S side or the main control board M side which is provided inside or near the max bet button and notifies that the operation of the max bet button is effective. It is a lamp. In the figure, ON indicates that the max bet lamp is lit (or blinks), OFF indicates that the max bet lamp is off, ON indicates that the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, and 1 bet OFF when the lamp D211 is off, ON when the 2-betting lamp D212 is on, OFF when off the 2-betting lamp D212, ON when on the 3-betting lamp D213, OFF indicates that the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off, ON indicates that the start lamp D180 is turned on (or blinks), and OFF indicates that the start lamp D180 is turned off. In the figure, when game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 (detection of game medals inserted into the medal insertion port D170 such as the insertion receiving sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s). (A case in which the game sensor detects each game medal one by one), but it is possible to bet one game medal by one operation (off → on) different from the max bet button as a bet button. One bet button or a two-bet button that can bet two game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided. In such a configuration, one bet is inserted into the medal slot D170. Same as game medal insertion (detection of one game medal by insertion reception sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, or second insertion sensor D30s) The use, there is no problem even when applied to a single press of the 1 bet button.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where a gaming medal is not bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off. The three-bet lamp D213 is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, and the max bet lamp is turned off. After that, the max bet lamp is turned on and the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is turned on and the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, the three bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

  By configuring the Max Bet lamp to “turn off → turn on” each time one game medal is inserted as in Configuration 1, during the period in which the game medal is guided from the medal insertion slot D170 into the inside of the gaming machine, Since the operation of the bet button is invalid, the period during which the max bet button is valid can be accurately notified by turning off the max bet lamp during the guided period. Further, by accurately notifying the period during which the max bet button is valid, the player can grasp the period during which the max bet button is invalid, in other words, the insertion of the game medal is invalid, It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is thrown in during the invalid period and the game medal is not normally thrown, and it is possible to realize a game progress with a good tempo.

  Also, as in the configuration 1, by configuring the 3-bet lamp D213 to be turned on after the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off, when the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Since the max bet lamp is turned off, the player can clearly recognize that the predetermined number of game medals has been bet.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where a gaming medal is not bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off. The three-bet lamp D213 is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the first bet lamp D211 is lit. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the second bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the three-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

  As in the configuration 2, the max bet lamp is turned off after the third game medal is inserted and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, the player presses the max bet button with the 3 bet lamp D213. By configuring to light as soon as possible after the operation, the three-bet lamp D213 can be lighted seamlessly in accordance with the operation of the player, so that the progress of the game can be made smooth and the player is It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is thrown into the game machine or the performance or behavior of the gaming machine is distrusted due to a slow operation.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where a gaming medal is not bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off. The three-bet lamp D213 is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the first bet lamp D211 is lit. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the second bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on.

  Like the configuration 3, when the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp before the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned off is turned off, the start lamp D180 is turned on substantially at the same time, so that the next game can be performed. The player can be notified as soon as it can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothed, the player can insert extra game medals, and the performance of the game machine due to slow operation can be improved. It is possible to prevent a situation where the user feels distrustful of the behavior.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where a gaming medal is not bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off. The three-bet lamp D213 is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, and the max bet lamp is turned off. After that, the max bet lamp is turned on and the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is turned on and the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. After that, the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up and the start lamp D180 lights up.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, the configuration 5 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where a gaming medal is not bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is blinking, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the second game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the three-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. After that, before the timing when the max bet lamp blinks, the max bet lamp is turned off before (in the middle of turning on) the timing of turning on and off. Note that FIG. 3 illustrates a case where the third game medal is inserted in a state where the max bet lamp is turned on in a blinking state where the max bet lamp is repeatedly turned on and then turned off. The max bet lamp is turned on and off at the timing of the first game medal being inserted, but the third game medal is inserted when the max bet lamp is blinking and turned off , The max bet lamp remains off after the timing at which the third game medal is inserted.

  Even in the case where all the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned on in a situation where no bet is made as in the configuration 5, the number of inserted game medals (first, By changing the combination of turning on / off the start lamp D180, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 depending on the second and third sheets, the player can determine the current game situation (how many game medals). Is bet).

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where a gaming medal is not bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off. The three-bet lamp D213 is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the first bet lamp D211 is lit. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the second bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, a third game medal is inserted, and the start lamp D180 is turned on at a timing when the insertion of the game medal is detected (a timing earlier than the lighting timing of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 in the configuration 2). The 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

  As in Configuration 6, the max bet lamp is turned off after the third game medal is inserted and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, the player presses the max-bet button with the 3-bet lamp D213. By configuring to light as soon as possible after the operation, the three-bet lamp D213 can be lighted seamlessly in accordance with the operation of the player, so that the progress of the game can be made smooth and the player is It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is thrown into the game machine or a player is distrusted with the performance or behavior of the gaming machine due to the slow operation.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. In a situation where a gaming medal is not bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off. The three-bet lamp D213 is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the first bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the start lamp D180 is turned on (starts blinking). Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the second bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on.

  As in the configuration 6, after the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on substantially at the same time. In other words, the player can set the 3 bet lamp D213 to the max. By operating the bet button so that it lights up as soon as possible, the 3 bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly turned on in accordance with the operation of the player, and the progress of the game can be smoothed and the game can be played smoothly. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a person inserts an extra game medal or feels distrust of the performance or behavior of the gaming machine due to the slowness of operation.

  In the above-described configurations 1 to 4, configuration 6, and configuration 7, the max bet lamp is turned on = the max bet lamp is lit. Just as in the configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be turned on and the max bet lamp may blink. Further, also in the configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be turned on = the max bet lamp may be turned on. Similarly, in the configuration 1 to the configuration 6, the start lamp D180 is turned on and the start lamp D180 is lit. Similarly to the configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on and the start lamp D180 may blink. Further, also in the configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on = the start lamp D180 is turned on. The max bet lamp may be configured to be controlled on the sub-control board S side, or may be configured to be controlled on the main control board M side.

<<<< Configuration at the time of operating the payment button >>>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84 to FIG. 87, an operation at the time of operating the settlement button D60 applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. The following configuration illustrates a case where three gaming medals are bet on a gaming machine and the number of credits displayed on the credit amount display device D200 is four. In the figure, ON indicates that the max bet lamp is lit (or blinking), OFF indicates that the max bet lamp is off, ON indicates that a new operation of the adjustment button has been detected, and the adjustment button Is not detected, or the operation of the settlement button is not newly detected. OFF, 1 BET lamp D211 is ON, 1 BET lamp D211 is OFF, OFF. ON when the 2-bet lamp D212 is on, OFF when the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, ON when the 3-bet lamp D213 is on, and when the 3-bet lamp D213 is off. OFF, ON when the start lamp D180 is on (or blinking), OFF, when the start lamp D180 is off, throw ON when the possible lamp D300 is turned on (or blinking), OFF when the available lamp D300 is turned off, and subtract 1 from OFF → ON → OFF to subtract 1 from the credit number display device D200. , Is illustrated. In the drawing, the case where game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 is illustrated. However, as a bet button, a single operation (off → on) different from the max bet button is performed by one operation. A one-bet button for betting game medals or a two-bet button for betting two game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided. In such a case, a medal slot is provided. There is no problem if the same operation as that of inserting one game medal into D170 is applied to one press of the 1 bet button. The configuration exemplified below may be configured so that the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled even during the stop display of the re-game, or stored in the game machine during the stop display of the re-game. It may be configured such that a game medal that is present cannot be settled. In addition, by operating the payment button D60, the payment button is changed from “on” to “off” as a condition for paying out the game medals bet from the discharge port D40 (as a condition for determining that the payment button has been operated). , Or may be “on”, or may be “on for 0.5 seconds or more”.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from off to on), the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off and a bet is made. Three game medals are paid out from the discharge port D40 (payout is started), and thereafter, four game medals as credits stored in the game machine displayed on the credit amount display device D200 are released. It is paid out from exit D40. At the timing when the last game medal to be paid out (game medals whose display on the credit amount display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 is turned on.

  By configuring (paying) the betted game medal before the credit as in the configuration 1, it is confirmed that the credit becomes 0 when the player finishes the game. Even if the player immediately leaves the seat, it is possible to prevent forgetting to settle the betting game medal. In particular, when the game is finished in a situation where the number of credits is a small amount such as 1-2, the player is relatively likely to finish the game without obtaining sufficient game medals, so the game is relatively high. The attention of the person may be distracted. Even in such a case, in order to prevent unintended disadvantages for the player, the betted game medals are settled (paid out) before the credits. Since it is configured, in the configuration 1, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, and the start lamp D180 are set before the credit number displayed on the credit number display device D200 is subtracted. , And the throwable lamp D300 are turned off.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from off to on), the max bet lamp is turned on, and the three game medals bet are paid out from the discharge port D40 (payout is started). Thereafter, the start lamp D180 is turned off and the turn-on lamp D300 is turned off. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 turns off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. In the configuration 2, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betting game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out. The credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

  When it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once as in the configuration 2, the game medal bet is paid out, but no credit is paid out, and when the settlement button D60 is operated, By configuring the max bet lamp to be turned on at a timing before turning off the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300, the player may erroneously settle the settlement button. Is operated, only the game medals that have been betted will be paid out, and the player wants to operate the max bet button again to bet credits, so that the max bet button can be operated quickly. By configuring to notify, the progress of the game is smooth It can be.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from off to on), and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned off. The three game medals bet are paid out from the discharge port D40 (payout is started), and thereafter, the four credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit amount display device D200 are displayed. A game medal will be paid out from the outlet D40. After the timing when the finger is released from the settlement button D60, the lights are turned off in the order of the 3-bet lamp D213 → the 2-bet lamp D212 → the 1-bet lamp D211. At the timing when the last game medal to be paid out (game medals whose display on the credit amount display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 is turned on.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from off to on), the start lamp D180 and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off, and the three game medals bet are paid out from the discharge port D40 (payment starts). Is done). Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 turns off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is turned on. Note that, in the configuration 4, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the betting game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out. The credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

  As in the configuration 4, by paying out the gaming medals bet, but not paying out the credits, and by illuminating the max bet lamp at a timing later than the illumination of the insertable lamp D300. In the case where the player desires to change to one bet after betting three coins, the settlement button D60 is operated once to settle the three game medals bet, and then to set one game medal. Since the player inserts or operates the 1-bet button, in such a case, by turning on the insertable lamp D300 earlier than the max bet lamp, the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, the configuration 5 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from off to on), the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off and a bet is made. Three game medals are paid out from the discharge port D40 (payout is started). Then, the throwable lamp D300 is turned on. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is turned on. Note that, in the configuration 5, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the betting game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out. The credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. After that, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed (off → on timing), the throwable lamp D300 is turned off. Thereafter, the start lamp D180 turns off. The three game medals bet are paid out from the discharge port D40 (payout is started), and thereafter, the four credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit amount display device D200 are displayed. A game medal will be paid out from the outlet D40. Further, after the timing at which the settlement button D60 is operated, the lights are turned off in the order of the 3-bet lamp D213 → 2-bet lamp D212 → 1-bet lamp D211. Also, after the game medal finally paid out (the game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 becomes 1 → 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 lights up. Note that the max bet lamp remains off.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 87 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. Thereafter, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed (the timing when the payment button D60 is turned on), the max bet lamp starts blinking, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the insertable lamp D180 is turned off, and the three game medals bet are paid out from the outlet D40 (payout is started). Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 turns off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off. Then, the throwable lamp D300 is turned on. Note that the max bet lamp remains off. In configuration 7, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. The credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

<<<< Differences in operation depending on power-off timing >>>>
FIG. 88 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the main control board M and the sub control board S at the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power off. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing a first mode of the timing of power supply to the game machine and the power-off, and FIG. 88 (b) is the timing chart of the timing of power supply to the game machine and the power-off. 6 is a timing chart illustrating an aspect 2.

  The first mode is a mode in which the power is cut off after the execution of the main program of the main control board M and the subprogram of the sub-control board S is started. On the other hand, the second mode is a mode in which the power is cut off before the execution of the main program of the main control board or the subprogram of the sub-control board is started.

  In this example, the power interruption is a state in which power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.The power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the power cable is disconnected, the power cable is disconnected, or the power failure occurs. May be. This also includes the case where the power supply is unintentionally stopped at the game hall. The timing when the power is cut off is the timing when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing when the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the timing when the power cable is disconnected, and the timing when the power cable is disconnected. This is the timing when the power failure occurs.

  In FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), ΔT1 is from the start of power feeding until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches a low level (which may be referred to as an off level) after the power is cut off. ΔT2 is the time from the start of power feeding to the time when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level, and ΔT3 is the time when the supply voltage to the main control board M from the timing when the power is cut off. ΔT4 is the time until the low level is reached, ΔT4 is the time from when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level until the sub program of the sub control board S is activated, and ΔT5 is the main control board. This is the time from when the supply voltage to M reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is activated. Here, the following relationships hold: ΔT5 <ΔT1, ΔT2 <ΔT3, ΔT5> ΔT3, ΔT4 <ΔT5.

<<< first embodiment >>>>
<< Change in power supply status >>
Power supply to the gaming machine is started at time t1, power is cut off at time t3, and power supply to the game machine is stopped.

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
As described above, power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2) and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2. Although FIG. 3 illustrates a case where the time from when power is supplied to the main control board to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured so that the time from when the power supply is started to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may vary (become random). Further, although the case where the time from the start of power supply to the sub control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant is illustrated, the power supply voltage to the sub control board is not limited to this. The time from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may vary (randomly). Even in such a configuration, the minimum value (minimum time) from the start of power supply to the main control board to the point at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is determined by starting the power supply to the sub-control board. It is preferable that the power supply voltage be longer than the maximum value (maximum time) until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level.

  Thereafter, the power is turned off at time t3. Due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4), and substantially decreases from the time t4 to the maintenance level. It will be constant. The power supply unit E has a backup power supply composed of a capacitor. Even when a power failure occurs, the power supply unit E maintains a substantially constant power supply voltage for a predetermined time (time t4 to time t5). (Maintenance level) can be output (the power-off process is executed in a state where the voltage of the maintenance level is supplied). In this example, the time during which the maintenance level is maintained (time from the time t3 to the time t5) from the start of execution of the power-off processing (detection of the power-off) is at least as long as the timer interrupt processing can be executed 20 times. (Time during which the timer interruption process (FIG. 32) can be called and executed 20 times) is ensured.

  Thereafter, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t5, and goes to the off level at time t6.

<Starting the main program>
The main program executed by the main control board is started from time ta when ΔT5 has elapsed from time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing the main program, the above-described main control board START (power-on) processing shown in FIG. 13 is executed.

  As described above, if the setting key switch is turned off in the determination processing in step 1014 in FIG. 13, the processing in steps 1016 to 1022, 1036 to 1046 and 1300 is executed, and the processing in step 1040 causes the timer interruption. Is started.

  If the setting key switch is ON in the judgment processing of step 1014 in FIG. 13, the processing of steps 1028 to 1034 and 1100 is executed.

<Activation of timer interrupt>
When the setting key switch is off, a timer interrupt is started by the processing of step 1040 in FIG. 13, and when the setting key switch is on, a timer interrupt is started by the processing of step 1104 of FIG. . After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is called and executed at every predetermined period T. The cycle T at which the timer interrupt is executed is 1.8 msec.

<Detection of power failure>
When a power failure occurs, the power supply unit E outputs a power failure detection signal. The main control board M has an input port to which a power-off detection signal is input. The power-off detection signal is a high-level signal when power-off has not occurred, and is a low-level signal when power-off has occurred. The main control board M can determine whether or not the power has been cut off, based on whether the data read from the input port is a high-level signal or a low-level signal.

  In this example, the main control board M detects a power-off in the determination processing of step 1604 in FIG. Specifically, the main control board M determines that the power is cut off when the data read from the input port is a low level signal in both of the two consecutive timer interrupt processes.

  Thus, in this example, the occurrence of power interruption is detected by two consecutive timer interrupt processes. Therefore, when the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the processing of step 1040 of FIG. 13 or the processing of step 1104 of FIG. 14, the occurrence of the power interruption can be detected. On the other hand, if the power interruption occurs before the timer interrupt is activated, the occurrence of the power interruption cannot be detected.

  As described above, when the power is turned off after the execution of the main program is started and the power is turned off after the timer interrupt is activated by the processing of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the processing of step 1104 in FIG. In addition, it is possible to detect that power interruption has occurred due to the interrupt processing. When it is detected that the power interruption has occurred, the power interruption processing shown in FIG. 36 can be executed.

<<< Operation of sub control board >>>
<Starting subprogram>
The sub-program executed by the sub-control board S starts at a time tb when ΔT4 has elapsed from a time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing this subprogram, the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed. Note that ΔT4 is shorter than ΔT5 described above, and the sub-control board S is activated before the main control board M, so that the sub-control board S does not drop the command transmitted from the main control board M. Can be received. In the figure, the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after the power supply to the main control board M is started, and the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after the power supply to the sub control board S is started. Is shown as the same time tb, but the time from when the power supply to the main control board M is started to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level and when the power supply voltage is started after the power supply to the sub control board S is started. The time until reaching the supply level may be configured to be different. Even in such a case, the power supply to the main control board M is started until the main program of the main control board M is started. Is preferably longer than the time from when power is supplied to the sub-control board S to when the sub-program of the sub-control board S is started. Supply level reached From the start of the main program of the main control board M to the start of the sub program of the sub control board S after the power supply voltage on the side of the sub control board S reaches the supply level. It is preferable to configure.

<<< second aspect >>>
FIG. 88 (b) is a timing chart showing a second mode of the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power. The second mode is a mode in which the power supply is cut off before the execution of the main program executed on the main control board M is started. That is, this is a mode in which the power supply is cut off before the time from the time t2 when the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the sub-control board S reaches the supply level to ΔT5.

  As described above, in the second mode, the power supply is cut off before the execution of the main program is started (before the timer interrupt is activated). 36 cannot be detected, and the gaming machine is stopped by the power cutoff (the supply voltage reaches a low level) without executing the power-off processing shown in FIG.

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
Power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2) and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2.

  After that, the power is cut off at time t13. Due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14), and is substantially reduced from the time t14 to the maintenance level. It will be constant. Thereafter, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t15, and goes to the off level at time t16.

  As described above, in the second mode, the main program starts to be executed after the power failure occurs, but the timer interrupt is activated by the processing of step 1040 of FIG. 13 or the processing of step 1104 of FIG. Prior to this, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is set to the off level.

In addition, although the first mode and the second mode are illustrated in the figure, the configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example is as follows.
(1) Immediately after the power supply to the main control board M is started (for example, after a lapse of the time for executing the timer interrupt process once after the power supply to the main control board M is started), the power is cut off → the main program is executed. Before the start, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes the off level (the execution of the main program is not started).
(2) Power supply to the main control board M is started → immediately after the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M reaches the supply level (for example, the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M becomes the supply level). (After a lapse of the time for executing the timer interrupt process one time after the time reaches), the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is turned off before the execution of the main program is started. Level (the execution of the main program will not start)
You may comprise as mentioned above.

<<< Relationship between setting key switch status and power supply status >>
FIG. 89A is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89B is the state of the setting key switch in the second mode. 6 is a table showing the relationship between the power supply state and the state.

<< Relationship Between Setting Key Switch State and Power Supply State in First Aspect >>
<State 1>
First, in state 1 of FIG. 89 (a), the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which a game is executed or a state in which the game can be executed, and the setting key switch is turned off. The “power supply state” is “on”.

<State 2>
In state 2, power is cut off while the setting key switch is kept "off", and the "power supply state" is turned "off". At this time, the power-off process in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state is stored in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
Next, in state 4, when the power is supplied in a state where the setting key switch is “on”, the “power supply state” is switched to “on”. When the “power supply state” is turned “on”, the main control board START (power-on) processing of FIG. 13 is executed. As described above, in the first mode, the power is turned off after the execution of the main program is started. Before the power is turned off (next state 5), the main mode in FIG. Control board START (power-on) processing can be executed.

  In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13 described above, it is determined that the setting key switch is ON, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 are executed, and the setting change device control process is called and executed in step 1100. Then, the mode shifts from the normal state to the setting change mode. In this setting change device control process, the storage area is initialized by the process of step 1102 shown in FIG. As described above, when the setting key switch is “ON” and the “power supply state” is “ON”, the setting change mode is entered, and then the setting change switch and the start lever are operated. This allows the setting value to be changed. In addition, by transmitting the setting change start command to the sub-control board S by the processing of step 1622 in FIG. 32, it is possible to notify that the sub-control board S is in the setting change mode.

<State 5>
Next, in the setting change mode, when the power is cut off while the setting change device control process is being executed, the “power supply state” changes to “off”. When the power is cut off, the process at the time of power cut off in FIG. 36 is called and executed, and the process of step 1902 sets the address of the process to be executed next in the setting change device control process (setting change mode) to the return address. Is stored in the storage area.

<State 6>
In state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to "off" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7>
In state 7, the power is supplied while the setting key switch is "off", and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the “power supply state” is turned “on”, the main control board START (power-on) processing of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination processing of step 1014 in FIG. 13, the setting key switch is determined to be “OFF”, and the processing of step 1022 is executed. By the processing in step 1022, the process returns to the return address stored in the storage area in state 5, and execution is started from the processing of the return address. As described above, the return address stored in the storage area in the state 5 is the address of the process to be executed next in the setting change device control process, and by returning, the process of the setting change device control process is immediately executed. Is done. As described above, in the first mode, the power supply is turned off in the normal state, and when the power supply is off, the setting key switch is turned on and the power supply is turned on to shift to the setting change mode. This is the basic operation when shifting to the setting change mode, but even if you turn off the power supply in the setting change mode, turn off the setting key switch, and then turn on the power supply, Since the setting change mode is stored as the return address, the setting change mode is set. With such a configuration, even when a power failure occurs during the setting change mode (for example, when a power failure occurs in a game arcade or the like), it is possible to return to the state before the power failure occurred, and to perform an abnormality of the gaming machine. It is possible to make it difficult to generate an unnecessary operation.

<< Relationship Between Setting Key Switch State and Power Supply State in Second Aspect >>
<State 1>
In state 1 of FIG. 89 (b), as in the first mode, the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the game is being executed or a state in which the game can be executed, and the setting key switch is “ "Off" and "power supply state" is "on".

<State 2>
In the state 2, similarly to the first mode, the power is cut off while the setting key switch is kept “off”, and the “power supply state” is turned “off”. At this time, the power-off process in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state is stored in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
In state 4, the power is supplied while the setting key switch is "on", and the "power supply state" is switched to "on".

<State 5>
In state 5, with the setting key switch being "on", power is cut off and the "power supply state" is switched to "off". As described above, in the second mode, the power is cut off before the execution of the main program executed by the main control board M is started. Therefore, in the second mode, the “power supply state” is temporarily turned “on” (state 4), but immediately after the “power supply state” related to the state 4 is turned “on” (for example, the timer interrupt processing is performed). After a lapse of one execution time), the “power supply state” is switched to “off”. In other words, before the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed (or before the timer interrupt is activated), the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is off level. (State 5). Therefore, the setting change device control process is not executed, the return address stored in the storage area is not changed, and the return address stored in the state 2 is stored in the storage area as it is.

<State 6>
Next, in state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to "off" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7>
In state 7, the power is supplied while the setting key switch is "off", and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the “power supply state” is turned “on”, the main control board START (power-on) processing of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination processing of step 1014 in FIG. 13, the setting key switch is determined to be off, and the processing of step 1022 is executed. By the process of step 1022, the return address stored in the storage area in the state 2 is restored, and the execution is started from the return address. As described above, the return address stored in the storage area in the state 2 is the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state, and the process to be executed next is executed in the normal state. As described above, in the second mode, even when the “power supply state” is turned “on” in a state where the setting key switch is turned “on”, before the main program of the main control board M is executed. When the power supply is turned off, the setting key switch is turned off and then the power supply is turned on. . With the configuration as in the second aspect, when the power is turned off immediately after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, if the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, an unintended malfunction may occur in the gaming machine. Even if the setting key switch is turned on, it is possible to configure so as not to shift to the setting change mode, and it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which trouble is less likely to occur.

<<< Control of medal assignment and output of payout sound >>>
As described above, when the small winning combination is won (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed), the payout number of medals corresponding to the winning small winning combination is awarded to the player.

<< Medal award processing >>
The process of giving medals includes a process of adding and giving as a credit number, and a process of actually paying out game medals outside the gaming machine and giving them.

<Credit number addition process>
When the current number of credits is less than the maximum number of savings (for example, less than 50), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of savings. This credit number adding process is executed by the arithmetic process of the CPU C100 of the main control board M.

<Payout process for game medals>
When the current credit number exceeds the maximum accumulated number, the CPU C100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out medals from the medal payout device H, thereby giving medals. The payout process from the medal payout device H is executed by outputting a drive signal from the main control board M to the hopper H40.

<< Awarding of medals >>
In accordance with the current number of credits and the number of medals to be awarded, the mode is shifted to the mode for only adding credits, the mode for only paying out game medals, and the processing for paying out game medals from the process for adding credits ( Both the process of adding the number of credits and the process of paying out medals are executed).

<Aspect of only credit number addition process>
If the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum number of credits, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of credits. If the maximum number of stored coins is not reached even after the number of coins to be paid out is added, only the process of adding the number of credits is performed, and the process of giving medals is completed.

<Mode of shifting from credit number addition processing to game medal payout processing>
When the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum number of credits, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of credits. When the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits, the CPU C100 of the main control board M switches from credit number addition processing to game medal payout processing. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M pays out the remaining number of game medals obtained by subtracting the credit addition amount from the payout number from the medal payout apparatus H by driving the hopper H40. The sum of the credit addition and the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is the payout number corresponding to the winning small combination.

  As described above, when shifting from the credit number adding process to the game medal payout process, the CPU C100 of the main control board M switches from the credit adding process to the game medal payout process.

<Aspect of paying out game medals only>
If the current number of credits has already reached the maximum number of deposits, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 and pays out the number of game medals from the medal payout device H from the medal payout device H.

<< Specific example >>
For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the current credit amount is 47 and the medals of 5 payout numbers are to be awarded to the player, first, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the credit amount to 1 Add one by one. Specifically, the CPU C100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits to 48, 49, and 50. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the number of credits displayed on the credit display device is 47 → 48 (first sheet (time t1)) → 49 (second sheet (time t2)) → 50 (third sheet (time t1)). t3)). When the number of credits reaches 50, the maximum number of stored credits (50) is reached, and the number of credits cannot be increased any more.

  Next, the CPU C100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition processing to the game medal payout processing, outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40, and subtracts three credits for the credit addition from the five payouts. Are paid out from the medal payout device H.

  In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 at time t4 to start the payout process. From time t4 to time t5, the fourth game medal is paid out, and from time t6 to time t7, the fifth game medal is paid out. The CPU C100 of the main control board M counts the number of medals paid out from the medal payout device H, detects that the fifth game medal has been paid out at time t7, and ends the payout process. .

<< Various Times >>
<Unit processing time of credit addition processing and unit processing time of game medal payout processing>
In the credit addition processing by the CPU C100 of the main control board M, it takes a unit processing time a to increase the number of credits from m to m + 1. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, time t2−time t1 = a is required to increase the number of credits from 48 (first) to 49 (second), and the number of credits is 49 (second). From time t3 to time t2 = a, it is necessary to increase the number of credits from 50 to the third (the third). In the credit addition processing, the unit processing time a is substantially constant.

  In the process of paying out game medals from the medal payout device H, a unit processing time c is required from the payout of the nth game medal to the payout of the (n + 1) th game medal. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, time t6 to time t4 = c is required from the payout of the fourth game medal to the payout of the fifth game medal. In the processing for paying out game medals, the unit processing time c is substantially constant.

  One unit processing time a can be defined by the difference in timing between two consecutive addition processes. For example, the unit processing time a is the difference between the timing of the (first sheet) addition process from 47 to 48 (time t1) and the timing of the (second sheet) addition process from 48 to 49 (time t2). Or the difference between the timing of the (second sheet) addition processing from 48 to 49 (time t2) and the timing of the (third sheet) addition processing from 49 to 50 (time t3).

  Further, one unit processing time c can be defined by the difference between the start timings of two consecutive payout processes. For example, the unit processing time c is the difference between the start timing of the fifth sheet processing (time t6) and the start timing of the fourth sheet addition processing (time t4). Thus, the unit processing times a and c may be defined so as to have a constant cycle.

<Switching time e from credit amount addition processing to game medal payout processing e>
As described above, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number, and if all the payout numbers have not been provided, the processing is switched to a game medal payout process. The switching time e is required for the CPU C100 of the main control board M to switch from the credit number adding process to the game medal payout process.

<< Comparison of time >>

<Unit processing time a and unit processing time c>
The unit processing time a described above is different from the unit processing time c. The unit processing time a is a time determined by the arithmetic processing of the CPU C100 of the main control board M, and the unit processing time c is a time required for the arithmetic processing of the CPU C100 of the main control board M and a time required for driving the medal payout device H. And both. The unit processing time c can be longer than the unit processing time a. By doing so, it is possible to control the payout accurately including the driving time of the medal payout device H.

  As described above, by adjusting the time required for driving the medal payout device H, the unit processing time c can be made equal to the unit processing time a. By doing so, the payout process can be speeded up.

<Switching time e>
The switching time e is different from the unit processing time a. The switching time e can be longer than the unit processing time a. By increasing the switching time e, it is possible to stably switch from the process of adding the number of credits to the process of paying out game medals, and to smoothly switch from the arithmetic process of the CPU C100 of the main control board M to the driving of the hopper H40. .

  Further, the switching time e can be shorter than the unit processing time a. By shortening the switching time e, it is possible to quickly switch from the processing of adding the number of credits to the processing of paying out game medals. In addition, it is possible to increase the consumption of the game medals, increase the profit of the game arcade, and increase the operating efficiency of the game machine.

  In this way, by changing the switching time e from the unit processing time a, when switching to the game medal payout process, the payout is different from the fixed cycle, and the payout of the game medal to the medal tray starts, so Expectation can be given to the game.

  The switching time e can be matched with the unit processing time a. When the switching time e is matched with the unit processing time a, medals can be awarded to the player at a constant cycle, and the addition process of the number of credits and the payout process of the game medals are equivalent medals. It is possible to give the player a sense of security by showing the fact to the player.

<< Output of game medium addition sound >>
When starting the credit addition process (time t1), the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a payout start command to the sub control board S. Upon receiving the payout start command, the sub-control board S starts outputting the game medium providing sound from the speaker S20.

  When the payout of the game medals ends (time t7), the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a payout end command to the sub control board S. Upon receiving the payout end command, the sub-control board S ends the output of the game medium providing sound from the speaker S20. As described above, the CPU C100 of the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and provides all the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning small combination to the player. It is determined whether or not it has been granted. When the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that all the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning small combination have been given, the CPU C100 terminates the output of the payout end command to the sub control board S, and outputs the command from the speaker S20. The output of the game medium imparting sound ends. In a case where the game medium-applied sound is repeatedly reproduced (output) at a fixed cycle, the game medium-applied sound is immediately output at the timing when the sub-control board S receives the payout end command. The output may be ended, or the output of the game medium application sound ends at the timing when the cycle of the game medium application sound output at the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the payout end command ends. May be configured.

  The game medium addition sound is a sound output from the speaker S20 by reproducing the unit addition sound data at least once. The unit addition sound data is stored in advance in the RAM of the sub control board S. As shown in FIG. 90, the reproduction time of the unit addition sound data for one time is d, and the CPU SC of the sub-control board S reads the unit addition sound data from the RAM, and when the payout start command is received, the payout end command is issued. By repeatedly reproducing the unit-added sound data a plurality of times until it receives, the game medium-added sound is output from the speaker S20.

<First mode>
The first mode of the game medium providing sound shown in FIG. 90 is a mode in which the unit providing sound data is repeatedly reproduced every reproduction time d from when the payout start command is received. By playing back in this way, a game medium imparting sound is output at a constant cycle. As described above, even in the case of switching from the process of adding the number of credits to the process of paying out game medals, the game medium imparting sound is output at a fixed cycle, so that the player does not feel discomfort with the payout, It is possible to give a sense of security to the player by indicating to the player that both the number adding process and the game medal payout process give the same value.

<Second mode>
In the second mode of the game medium providing sound shown in FIG. 90, the unit providing sound data is reproduced for each reproduction time d from when the payout start command is received, and only after time f after the credit number adding process is completed. In this mode, the unit-added sound data is reproduced, and thereafter, at time t4, the payout processing of the game medals is started, and the reproduction of the unit-added sound data is started again. When switching to the game medal payout process, the game medium imparting sound is output at a timing different from the predetermined cycle, so that a sense of excitement or a sense of expectation that the payout of the game medal to the medal tray starts can be given to the game. .

  In the meantime, when the game medals of the hopper H40 are exhausted during the payout of the game medals from the medal payout device H, and a hopper error occurs (for example, when it is determined Yes in the process of step 1279), The control board S stops outputting the game medium addition sound and outputs a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When the game medals are supplied to the hopper H40 and the payout becomes possible, the main control board M again sends a payout start command to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S starts outputting the game medium addition sound. . Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even if a hopper error occurs, the game medium addition sound is continuously output, but the volume of the game medium addition sound is changed to a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. The output is made at a volume lower than the volume (volume may be 0), and the hopper error is canceled, so that the output of the voice indicating that the hopper error has occurred is terminated and the game medium addition sound is output. The volume may be restored.

<<< Arrangement of integrated circuit on substrate >>
FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of the electronic components mounted on main control board M.

  The main control board M has a substantially plate-shaped and rectangular printed board MP. On the front side of the printed board MP, a CPUC 100, an IC, a resistor, a connector, and the like are mainly mounted, and on the back side of the printed board MP, a circuit pattern mainly made of a conductor is formed. The main control board M (printed board MP) includes two long ends ML1 and ML2 parallel to each other and along the longitudinal direction, and two short ends MS1 and MS2 parallel to each other and along the short direction. It has a rectangular shape.

  In this example, the main control board M is attached so as to stand upright in the housing of the gaming machine. When the main control board M is mounted upright, the long ends ML1 and ML2 are arranged along the horizontal direction, and the short ends MS1 and MS2 are arranged along the vertical direction. The long end ML1 is located on the upper side, and the long end ML2 is located on the lower side. When viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP, the short end portion MS1 is located on the left side of the short end portion MS2, and the short end portion MS2 is located on the right side of the short end portion MS1.

  In the following, the longitudinal end portion ML1 side is referred to as the upper side, the longitudinal end portion ML2 side is referred to as the lower side, the lateral end portion MS1 side is referred to as the left side, and the lateral end portion MS2 side is referred to as the right side.

<CPUC100>
The CPUC 100 has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is CLL, and the length in the short direction is CSL. CPUC100 has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the CPUC 100 is mounted on the printed circuit board MP, an electrical connection is formed by a plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. For this reason, in the operation of attaching the CPUC100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the CPUC100 in an appropriate direction so that the CPUC100 performs a desired operation. The first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the CPU C100 is used as a reference pin for arranging the CPU C100. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed in the main body of the CPUC100, and a cutout (not shown) for visually recognizing the direction of the CPUC100 is formed.

  In this example, the CPU C100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the CPU C100 coincides with (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. In this example, as shown in FIG. 91, by arranging the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC100 is arranged in alignment with the direction of an IC described later. When mounting the CPUC100 on the printed circuit board MP, mistakes in mounting the CPUC100 in the wrong direction can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in general, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a maker name is printed on the main body of the CPUC 100. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the CPU C100. It is preferable that the character information such as the model number and the manufacturer name can be easily visually recognized in the state where the CPU C100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC100 can be arranged so that the printed model number, maker name, and the like are easily visible.

  When the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the CPUC100 sequentially increase in the counterclockwise direction starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. .

<IC>
Various ICs (integrated circuits) are also mounted on the front side of the printed board MP. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is ILL, and the length in the short direction is ISL. Like the CPUC100, the IC also has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the IC is mounted on the printed circuit board MP, an electrical connection is formed by a plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, even in the work of mounting the IC on the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to mount the IC in an appropriate direction so that the IC performs a desired operation. Therefore, the first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the IC is also used as a reference pin for arranging the IC. In the main body of the IC, a mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed, or a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the direction of the IC is formed.

  In this example, the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP such that the longitudinal direction of the IC matches (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the CPU C100 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. Further, the IC is arranged on the printed circuit board MP such that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side. In this manner, by arranging the IC such that the first pin of the IC is always located on the lower left side, all the ICs are arranged in the same direction, and the operation of attaching the IC to the printed circuit board MP is performed. In this case, mistakes such as mounting the IC in the wrong direction can be reduced.

  Further, generally, various types of character information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer name are printed on the main body of the IC. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the IC. It is preferable that character information such as a model number and a manufacturer name of the IC can be easily visually recognized while the IC is mounted on the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the IC such that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side, the IC is arranged so that the model number, manufacturer name, or the like that is printed is easily viewed. Can also.

  When the IC is mounted on the printed circuit board MP, the numbers of the pins of the IC sequentially increase in a counterclockwise direction starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. .

<Resistance>
Various resistors are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connections with other electronic components are formed. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is RLL, and the length in the short direction is RSL.

<Connector>
A connector is also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connection with other electronic components is formed. The main control board M is connected to the sub-control board S via a connector, and can transmit and receive various signals.

<Interval between CPUC100 and IC>
As shown by a broken line in FIG. 91, only a resistor is arranged inside a predetermined range CSR1 around the CPU C100, and no IC is arranged. The predetermined range CSR1 is a range in which the length from the outer periphery COR of the CPU C100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length CSL in the widthwise direction of the CPU C100. Various currents (currents that change with time, for example, high-frequency signals) flow through the IC, and the IC may be a source of noise, which may affect the operation of the CPU C100. As described above, by not arranging the IC inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the IC is arranged at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length CSL), and the noise emitted from the IC is reduced. , The operation of the CPU C100 can be prevented.

  Further, the predetermined length from the outer circumference COR of the CPU C100 may be at least the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor. Since a current flows through the resistor, the resistor can serve as a heat source, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. Therefore, by not disposing the resistor inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the resistor is disposed at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length RLL) and emitted from the resistor. The heat generated can be prevented from affecting the operation of the CPU C100.

<Relationship between height of CPUC100, height of IC, and height of other components>
FIG. 92 is a side view showing the heights of the various electronic components shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 92, the height CHT of the CPU C100 is the highest, the IC height IHT is the second highest, and the resistance height RHT is the lowest. As shown in FIG. 91, only the components that are less than the height CHT of the CPU C100 are arranged inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPU C100. The predetermined range CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer periphery COR of the CPU C100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction.

  In the operation of attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, an attaching tool (not shown) is used. The mounting tool is a tool that clamps the CPUC 100 at the tip of the mounting tool and mounts the CPUC 100 close to the printed circuit board MP. Since the CPUC 100 is held by the distal end of the mounting tool, the distal end of the mounting tool is arranged around the CPUC 100 when the CPUC 100 is being held. For this reason, when attaching the CPUC 100, the tip of the attachment must be close to the printed circuit board MP, and the space for the tip of the attachment is set so that the tip of the attachment does not interfere with other electronic components. Need to secure.

  Therefore, in the area CSR2 around the position where the CPU C100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, only the components that are less than the height CHT of the CPU C100 are arranged. By doing so, even when the tip of the mounting tool is closest to the printed circuit board MP, the tip of the mounting tool does not interfere with other components. The area CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer circumference COR of the CPU C100 is equal to or shorter than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction.

  It should be noted that only parts having a height less than the height CHT of the CPUC100 are arranged only in the peripheral area of the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, and in the peripheral area of the position where the CPUC100 of the printed circuit board MP is attached to the printed circuit board MP. It may be configured such that components outside the height CHT of the CPUC100 are attached to the outside, or all components attached to the printed circuit board MP are components below the height CHT of the CPUC100.

  Thus, by arranging only electronic components lower than the height CHT of the CPU C100 inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPU C100, it is possible to secure a space in which the tip of the mounting tool can be approached, Even with the use of the mounting tool, the CPUC 100 can be mounted on the printed circuit board MP without damaging other electronic components.

  Although the main control board M has been described as an example in the above-described example, all of the boards on which electronic components such as CPU and IC are mounted, such as the sub-control board S, the door board D, the rotating board K, and the power supply board E. Can be applied to.

<<<< AT Lottery Configuration >>>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a detailed description will be given of a configuration of an AT state transition control process applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Note that the configuration illustrated in the drawing is applicable to all the above-described configurations when configured to have an AT.

  First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a state in which the AT lottery is possible. It should be noted that in the figure, there is no plurality of gaming states having different probabilities of winning the AT lottery such as a low probability state and a high probability state, and for example, one gaming state such as a high probability state in the present embodiment. Is configured to be able to execute the AT lottery. Also, as a difference from the present embodiment, an AT lottery is not executed based on the winning of BB.

  If Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1401-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets “2” as the AT lottery type and temporarily stores it in a predetermined RAM area. Here, the AT lottery type is a type provided to reduce the data capacity required for executing the AT lottery, and for identifying a winning probability when executing the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game has no setting difference (condition device having no setting difference in the lottery probability). In the modification example shown in the drawing, the condition devices that do not have a setting difference are watermelon B, cherry, watermelon A, replay (all replays may be performed, or some replays may be performed), In the present processing, it is determined whether or not a condition device having no setting difference has been won. Note that a setting difference is provided in the lottery probability between the loss and the common bell (there is a setting difference). However, in the present process, it is configured not to determine whether the loss or the common bell has been won. ing. It is preferable that the predetermined RAM area for storing the AT lottery type is different from the RAM area for storing the winning numbers and the effect group numbers. With such a configuration, an area for storing a winning number, which is an area in which information on a condition device having a setting difference in the winning probability and information on a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability are stored, and an effect group. An area for storing an AT lottery type, which is an area for storing information about condition devices having a setting difference in the winning probabilities and information about condition devices having no setting difference in the winning probabilities; Can be configured not to be confused.

  If Yes in step 1401-3, in step 1401-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the AT lottery type table and sets the AT lottery type to set the predetermined RAM area (in step 1401-2). It is temporarily stored in the same RAM area as the predetermined RAM area (will be overwritten), and the process proceeds to step 1401-5. Even if No in step 1401-3, the process proceeds to step 1401-5. Here, the AT lottery table in the middle right part of the figure will be described in detail. In this modified example, when a condition device that does not cause a setting difference in a situation where AT lottery can be executed is won, when watermelon B is won, "0" is selected as AT lottery type, and when cherry is won Is "0" as the AT lottery type, "1" as the AT lottery type if you win the watermelon A, "2" as the AT lottery type if you win the re-game, and if you win the push order bell “2” is set as the AT lottery type.

  Next, in step 1401-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes AT lottery based on the set AT lottery type. Here, as shown in the lower right part of the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is 56/256 when the AT lottery type is "0", and 18 / when the AT lottery type is "1". In the case where the AT lottery type is "2", the number is 256 and the number is "0 → 1 → 2" in order from the one that is easy to win the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 has been won. If Yes in step 1401-6, in step 1401-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 50) as an AT initial game number in an AT counter. Note that, unlike the present embodiment, the present modification is configured to set the AT initial game number in the AT counter in the AT state transition control process, and set the AT initial game number in the AT state start control process. It is configured not to do so (when winning in addition to the AT game number, the AT game number may be added). Next, in step 1401-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “AT-in-progress state”, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1430). Even if No in step 1401-1 or step 1401-6, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1430).

  In a conventional gaming machine, as an AT lottery, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination and a lottery process (lottery process that refers to the winning combination) executed when a condition device having no setting difference is won are selected. In the case of having the configuration, the AT lottery has to be executed at least twice, but by providing the AT lottery type as shown in FIG. And the lottery process executed in the case where the condition device with no setting difference is won (the process of step 1401-4 corresponds in the figure). Can be executed in one lottery process (the process in step 1401-6 corresponds in the drawing).

  As described above, the configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine has been exemplified as the gaming machine. it can.

  Incidentally, among the above-mentioned configurations, the configuration relating to the setting of the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, the setting key switch, the setting / reset button and the like (for example, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 59) is applicable to the pachinko game machine having the set value. Applicable.

<<<< Configuration related to push order navigation applicable to gaming machine according to this example >>>>
The gaming machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute the push-order navigation. Here, the execution mode of the push order navigation applicable to this example will be described in detail below. Note that the configuration described in detail below is applicable to all embodiments.

As for the push order navigation in this example, the following configuration is referred to as a push order navigation.
(1) Display of the operation mode of the stop button advantageous to the player on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying “= 3”, it is possible to instruct the pressing order of “middle → left → right”. In addition, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction and an instruction display, and the game for executing the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction game.
(2) The display of an operation mode (an image indicating a stop button) advantageous to the player on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S is referred to as a push order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying “123”, it is possible to instruct (suggest) the pressing order of “left → middle → right”.
(3) Outputting a sound suggesting an operation mode of the stop button advantageous to the player from the speaker S20 controlled by the sub control board S is referred to as a push order navigation. As a specific example, by outputting "left" when the start lever is operated, it is possible to instruct (indicate) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button.
(4) Turning on (flashing) the reel window frame lamp D310 controlled by the sub-control board S so as to indicate an operation mode of the stop button which is advantageous to the player is referred to as a push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the reel window frame lamp D310 corresponding to the left reel and the left stop button is turned on, thereby indicating (suggesting) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button. It is possible.
(5) The stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) controlled by the main control board M or the sub control board S is a player. Lighting (flashing) to indicate an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the user is referred to as a push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the left stop button D41 corresponding to the left reel is turned on, so that it is possible to instruct (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button.

  In the following, the push order navigation is displayed on the game in which the push order (the role in which the number of payouts or the transition state of the RT state may be different depending on the push order such as the push order bell and the push order replaying role) is determined as the winning combination. Will be described with reference to FIG. By determining the pressing role as the winning combination in the state during the AT, the pressing order navigation for notifying the operation mode of the stop button (the reel stop order and the operation timing of the stop button) that is most advantageous to the player can be executed. It is configured as follows.

<< Configuration for starting display of push order navigation >>
<Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>
First, if there is no weight, in other words, if the minimum game time has elapsed (the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 is 0), the push order when the game is executed by operating the start lever. The navigation execution mode will be described below.

<Structure 1>
First, the configuration of FIG. 94 will be described. The state related to the AT is an AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the player has won the push order), and the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the torso when the minimum game time has elapsed. The process is executed to start the rotation of the reel (executed in step 1260 in FIG. 18). In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, "When winning" Award-A3 ").

Then, immediately after the rotation of the torso, “= 3” is displayed on the pressing order display device D270 as the pressing order navigation. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the push order display device D270,
"= 1": indicates the pressing order of "left → center → right""=2": indicates the pressing order of "left → right → center""=3": indicates the pressing order of "center → left → right" Instruction "= 4": Indicate the pressing order of "middle → right → left""=5": Indicate the pressing order of "right → left → middle""=6": Push order of "right → middle → left" It is configured as instructed.

  The display mode when the push order navigation is executed on the push order display device D270 is not limited to the above-described display mode. For example, the right digit (lower digit) without displaying “=” A number may be displayed only on the right side, or a display mode other than the number corresponding to the stop button (or reel) may be displayed only on the right digit (lower digit). The right digit (lower digit) is a display corresponding to the stop button (or reel) to be stopped next time, and the left digit (upper digit) is a display indicating the pressing order of the entire game. Is also good. In such a configuration, the right digit (lower digit) can change the display mode every time the stop button is stopped, while the left digit (upper digit) is the same regardless of the stop button stop operation. It becomes a display mode.

After “= 3” is displayed as the pressing order navigation on the pressing order display device D270, “123” is displayed as the pressing order navigation on the effect display device S40. Here, as an example of the pressing order navigation in the effect display device S40,
“123”: Indicates the pressing order of “left → middle → right” “132”: Indicates the pressing order of “left → right → middle” “213”: Indicates the pressing order of “middle → left → right” “312” ": Instruct the push order of" middle → right → left "" 231 ": Instruct the push order of" right → left → middle "" 321 ": Instruct the push order of" right → middle → left " Have been.

  It should be noted that the display mode when performing the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to the above-described display mode, and may be a display mode other than the arithmetic numerals, for example, Chinese numerals. The image may be an image of a character that is not a number, an image of a symbol, or the like. Further, in addition to the display modes corresponding to all the stop buttons, for example, "1--" (only in the pushing order navigation that notifies that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop) that instructs only the first stop is displayed. You may perform such push order navigation.

  Note that “display” may mean that all the elements to be displayed have been displayed, or that the elements to be displayed have started displaying. For example, displaying “123” on the effect display device S40 may mean that display of all “123” is completed on the effect display device S40, or the display of “123” is started on the effect display device S40 ( For example, an effect at the start of display may occur). Similarly, “display end” may mean that all elements whose display should be terminated are not displayed, or that a display transition to stop displaying elements whose display should be terminated may be started. For example, terminating the display of “123” on the effect display device S40 may mean that all of “123” is no longer displayed on the effect display device S40. It may be determined that the part has begun to be erased (for example, an effect at the end of display has occurred). Similarly, “clear display” may mean that all the elements whose display should be deleted are not displayed, or that the display transition to start not displaying the elements whose display should be deleted is started. . For example, erasing the display of “123” on the effect display device S40 may mean that all of “123” is not displayed on the effect display device S40, or one of the display of “123” on the effect display device S40. It may be determined that the unit has begun to be erased (for example, an effect at the time of display erasure has occurred). Similarly, erasing the display of "1" on the effect display device S40 means that the left stop button is operated in the situation where all "123" are displayed on the effect display device S40, and then the effect display device. It may be that “1” is not displayed in S40, or that part of the display of “1” on the effect display device S40 has begun to be erased (such as an effect when the display is erased).

  After the push-order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40, the operation of the stop button becomes effective. After the reel starts to rotate, the reel drive state changes from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state, so that the operation of the stop button becomes effective. In the instruction game, the player operates the stop button after confirming the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 or the effect display device S40. Therefore, as shown in FIG. By enabling the push order navigation to be displayed in front, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the push order (a situation in which the push order is wrong).

  In FIG. 94, the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 is displayed (display is started) before the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. Here, the display of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 will be described. When “winning-A3” is determined as the winning combination, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a timer interrupt process, in step 1622, to send a command related to winning / replay winning information as a control command in the sub-control board. Send to S side. The CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command processing of step 2250 based on the command relating to the winning / replay winning information received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M (as the command processing, the pushing order navigation such as step 2360 is performed. Execute push order navigation display process to display).

  Here, the process in the case of displaying the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S will be described in detail. First, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the command related to the winning / replay winning information from the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, the command data is stored, the command is analyzed, and the sub-main board (in the sub-control board S) The process of transmitting the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation from the board) to the effect control board (the board in the sub control board S) is sequentially performed, and the display of the push order navigation is performed from the reception of the command related to the winning / replay winning information. It takes about 16 ms to transmit the command according to the mode. Further, the effect control board receives the command related to the display mode of the push-order navigation, executes the drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. Note that, as an example, the command transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S is a command related to winning / re-game winning information. However, this is merely an example, and other commands such as a command related to a staging group number may be used. What is necessary is just to design suitably according to the execution timing of a desired effect.

  Further, when the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M displays the push order navigation, the push order display device D270 is configured to be lit by dynamic lighting. Assuming that the cycle is 2 ms, the five 7-segment LED units are sequentially turned on each time the timer interrupt process is performed, so it takes a maximum of about 10 ms until the lighting is completed. With such a configuration, the display of the push order navigation is performed after a trigger (for example, operation of the start lever) for displaying the push order navigation is generated on the push order display device D270 controlled on the main control board M side. An opportunity to display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S rather than the time until completion (for example, reception of a command related to winning / re-game winning information from the main control board M) ) Is generated so that the time from the occurrence of) to the completion of the display of the push order navigation is longer.

  Here, the period in which the display of the push-order navigation in this example can be started will be described in detail using the process executed by the CPU C100 of the main control board M. The gaming machine is designed so that the CPU C100 of the main control board M controls peripheral devices and the like to progress the game. It should be noted that the processing executed by the CPU C100 of the main control board M in the present example will be described only in specific steps for simplifying the description, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines in step 1251 that the start lever D50 is operated, the reel rotation start preparation process is executed in step 1550. Then, by determining that the reel rotation start standby state start timing of step 6102 has been reached, it is determined whether the reel acceleration state start timing of step 6106 has been reached. Then, in steps 6108 and 6110, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state, and the reel starts rotating. Here, the period from step 6102 to step 6108 is a period corresponding to the wait period until the reel rotation starts, for example, from the game start timing (reel rotation start timing) by the game interval minimum time timer M70 as a predetermined condition. This is a period that occurs because the time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured by the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing) is not satisfied, and may also be referred to as the minimum game time. Next, in step 6114, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel acceleration state end timing of step 6114 has been reached. Then, the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state in steps 6116 and 6118, performs processing to maintain the constant speed state of the reel, and then enables the operation of the stop button. The process of setting is executed. In this example, any timing within the period in which the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the above-described processing, in other words, any time from when the operation of the start lever is executed until when the operation of the stop button becomes effective. It suffices that the push-order navigation is displayed (display is started) at the timing of.

  As described above, the period from the timing of operating the start lever D50 to the activation of the stop button is described according to the process executed by the CPU C100 of the main control board M, but in the present example, the main control board M is used. According to the processing executed by the CPU C100, the start lever operation → the minimum game time elapses → the reel rotation start → the reel acceleration state → the reel constant speed state → the operation of the stop button is valid (the operation of the reel stop button is also called valid), We will specify the period separately. For example, FIG. 94 illustrates a case where the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is performed immediately after executing the rotation of the torso, and the case where the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is performed during the reel acceleration state. I have.

In FIG. 94, the case where the pressing order navigation by the effect display device S40 is executed in the reel accelerating state is illustrated, but the main control board M transmits a command to the sub control board S side, and then the sub control board S transmits the command. S means that the push order navigation is displayed during the reel acceleration state by executing the drawing process. The configuration related to the display of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side is configured as follows. Is also good.
(1) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → Main control board M executes spinning cylinder rotation start processing to start reel rotation → Update reel drive state to accelerated state → Main control board M push order display device D270 Press to display the navigation sequence with dynamic lighting → Main control board M sends a command related to prize / replay win information to sub control board S side → Sub control board S receives a command related to prize / replay win information → The sub-control board S side executes the drawing process triggered by the command and displays the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state (2) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → The main control board M executes the reel rotation start processing to start reel rotation → updates the reel drive state to the acceleration state → the main control board M uses the push order display device D270 to change the push order navigation to a dynamic point. Displayed → The main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S side receives a command related to winning / replay winning information → Main control board M is a sub-control A predetermined command is transmitted to the board S side → the sub-control board S side receives the predetermined command → The sub-control board S side executes a drawing process triggered by the predetermined command, and a press order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40. → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state (3) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → Main control board M executes reel rotation start processing and reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to acceleration state → The main control board M displays the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 by dynamic lighting → The main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side enters・ Reception of command relating to re-game winning information → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Sub-control board S side executes drawing process triggered by the command and displays push order navigation on effect display device S40 (4) Start lever operation-> minimum game time elapses-> main control board M executes spinning cylinder rotation start processing to start reel rotation-> reel drive state is updated to accelerated state-> main control board M is pushed by pressing order display device D270 Forward navigation is displayed by dynamic lighting → The main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S side receives a command related to winning / replay winning information → main control Substrate M transmits a predetermined command to the sub-control substrate S side → Sub-control substrate S side receives the predetermined command → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Sub-control triggered by the predetermined command The substrate S side may perform the drawing process and display the pressing order navigation on the effect display device S40. That is, the sub-control board S side receives a predetermined command from the main control board M side to design a time value from when the drawing processing is executed to determine the display timing of the pushing order navigation on the sub-control board S side. Alternatively, the timing at which the main control board M transmits a predetermined command to the sub-control board S may be designed to determine the display timing of the pushing order navigation on the sub-control board S.

<Structure 2>
Next, the configuration of FIG. 95 will be described. The state related to the AT is an AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the player has won the push order), and the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the torso when the minimum game time has elapsed. The processing is executed, and the reel starts rotating. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, "When winning" Award-A3 ").

  After that, the operation of the stop button becomes effective, a command is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S, and “213” is displayed as a pressing order navigation on the effect display device S40. After "213" is displayed as the pressing order navigation on the effect display device S40, "= 3" is displayed as dynamic pressing on the pressing order display device D270 as the pressing order navigation. In FIG. 95, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed earlier than the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. For example, in FIG. 95, the push-order navigation by the effect display device S40 is at the timing after executing the barrel rotation start process, and the push-order navigation by the push-order display device D270 is at the timing immediately before the operation of the reel stop button is enabled. To be executed.

<Effect 1>
By configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or FIG. 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 can be changed for a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum game time elapses → reel). (Start of rotation → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop button becomes valid)), for example, the push order navigation starts on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. To provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reliably prevent a situation in which the player cannot recognize the push order navigation when viewing either display device due to a delay in the timing, and does not give a disadvantage to the player. Can be.

<Effect 2>
Further, by configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or FIG. 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is different from the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. This can avoid a situation in which two display devices must be visually recognized at the same time, and reduce the player's gaming burden that the player can visually recognize the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. A user-friendly gaming machine that can be reduced can be provided.

<Structure 3>
In the AT state, when a push order combination (push order bell, push order replay combination, etc.) is determined as a winning combination, not only the effect display device S40 but also, for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 98, the pressing order is notified by a lamp (hereinafter referred to as a reel window frame lamp D310) provided on the middle panel (medium decoration panel) or a sound output from the speaker S20. Various configurations are also possible. In the configuration 3, when the instructed game is executed, the pressing order navigation can be executed by the reel window frame lamp D310. The reel window frame lamp D310 is provided at a position (near the reel) corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and is configured by, for example, an LED like the start lamp D180. The lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310, the sound output from the speaker S20, and the like are controlled and managed by the sub-control board S similarly to the effect display device S40. In other words, when the push order navigation is executed by these effect means, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the step based on the command received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, as in the case of the effect display device S40. By executing command processing (herein, referred to as reel window frame lamp lighting processing and audio output processing) in step 2108 and step 2250, it is possible to execute the pressing order navigation. Note that since the reel window frame lamp D310 is preferably provided at a position that is as easy as possible for the player to visually recognize, for example, above or below the reel window D160 (a reel from which the reel can be visually recognized by the player). It is preferable to provide a space above (or below) the window D160 so as to correspond to each reel.

  Configuration 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The state relating to the AT is an AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the player wins the pushing order), and the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the bobbin while the minimum game time has elapsed. The processing is executed, and the reel starts rotating. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, "When winning" Award-A3 ").

  After that, immediately after executing the rotation start processing, “= 3” is dynamically displayed (start of display) as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. After “= 3” is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) is turned on (starts lighting) as the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. . After that, “213” is displayed (display starts) as a pressing order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 97, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device”, and the display of the push order navigation by turning on the reel window frame lamp D310 starts. The timing at which it is performed is later than the pressing order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

  Here, when displaying the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S relates to the winning / re-game winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After receiving the command, after sequentially storing the command data and performing the command analysis process, the sub-main board (the board in the sub-control board S) is pressed to the effect control board (the board in the sub-control board S) in the navigation order. A process of transmitting a command related to the display mode and a process of transmitting a command related to the lighting mode of the push-order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the lamp control board (board in the sub-control board S). It takes about 16 ms from the reception of the command related to the winning / replay winning information to the transmission of the command related to the display mode of the push-order navigation and the command related to the lighting mode of the push-order navigation. . Further, the effect control board receives the command related to the display mode of the push-order navigation, executes the drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. On the other hand, the lamp control board receives the command related to the lighting mode of the push-order navigation, and immediately executes the lighting process when there is no problem in the content of the command (the lighting process can be executed in a shorter time than the drawing process). Therefore, the main control board M transmits a command relating to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side triggers the reception of the command to produce the effect display device S40 and the reel window frame lamp D310. In the case of executing the pressing order navigation by, the displaying (lighting display) of the pressing order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is performed before the display of the pressing order navigation by the effect display device S40. In addition, the command transmitted from the main control board M is not limited to the command related to the winning / replay winning information, but may be the command related to the effect group number.

  As described above, by displaying the push order navigation (lighting display) by the reel window frame lamp D310 prior to the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40, simple notification is provided to the player. This can be executed earlier, and a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (a situation in which the pressing order is mistaken) can be prevented.

  The order in which the push order navigation is displayed may be configured as “press order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp”. In the case of such a configuration, the sub main board may transmit a command related to the push order navigation to the effect control board, and then the sub main board may transmit a command related to the push order navigation to the lamp board. Then, a command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and a command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310. May be different commands.

As described above, as the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), the description has been made in the case of “push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device”. The order of display start) is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), “reel window frame lamp → press order display device → effect display device”, “effect display device → press order display device → reel window frame lamp”, The configuration may be such that “reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device” or “effect display device → reel window frame lamp → push order display device”. In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to the push order navigation to the lamp board and the effect control board, the main control board M dynamically controls the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. It may be configured to display (start display) by turning on the light, or a command from the main control board M side and a pressing order navigation in the reel window frame lamp D310 that trigger the pressing order navigation in the effect display device S40 to be displayed. May be different from the command from the main control board M that triggers the display of. In this manner, according to the timing at which a command is sent from the sub-main board and the timing at which the main control board M displays the push order navigation with dynamic lighting (display start),
(1) The push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 is executed first. (2) The push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed first. (3) The push order by the effect display device S40. The order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) can be changed, such as executing the navigation first.

<Effect>
In this way, in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start timing of the pushing order navigation with the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state). By determining the time period until the operation of the stop button becomes effective, for example, even in a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the pressing order navigation is turned on by a lamp ( In this example, it can be executed using the reel window frame lamp D310) and the like, and a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the pressing order navigation (the advantageous operation mode of the stop button) is unlikely to occur. Can be provided.

<Structure 4>
Next, a description will be given of a configuration for executing notification of the push order navigation by voice output from the speaker S20 as a configuration 4. Configuration 4 is configured to notify the pressing order by voice in the instruction game. For example, a dialogue such as “Left”, “Medium”, “Right” is output from the speaker as voice, and the stop is performed. A push order navigation corresponding to a reel to be operated (a stop button to be operated) is executed.

  Configuration 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The state relating to the AT is an AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the player wins the pushing order), and the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the bobbin while the minimum game time has elapsed. The processing is executed, and the reel starts rotating. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, "When winning" Award-A3 ").

  After that, immediately after executing the rotation start processing, “= 3” is dynamically displayed (start of display) as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. After "= 3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, "middle" (the first stop operation is performed by operating the middle stop button as the first stop operation) Sound is output. After that, “213” is displayed (display starts) as a pressing order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 98, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “press order display device → voice → effect display device”, and the timing at which the notification of the push order navigation by voice output is started is based on the reel window frame. Like the lamp D310, the timing is later than the pressing order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

  Here, when the pressing order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is related to the winning / replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After the command is received, the command data is stored, and the command analysis process is sequentially performed. Then, the sub-main board (the board in the sub-control board S) is pushed to the effect control board (the board in the sub-control board S). The process of transmitting the command related to the display mode and the process of transmitting the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation from the sub main board (the board in the sub control board S) to the voice control board (the board in the sub control board S) It takes about 16 ms from the reception of the command related to the winning / replay winning information to the transmission of the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and the transmission of the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation.Further, the effect control board receives the command related to the display mode of the push-order navigation, executes the drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. On the other hand, the voice control board receives the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation, and immediately executes the voice output process if there is no problem in the content of the command (the voice output process is performed in a shorter time than the drawing process). Therefore, a command related to winning / replay winning information is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command to trigger the effect display device S40 and the speaker S20. When the push order navigation is executed, the output (voice output) of the push order navigation by the speaker S20 is executed before the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40. In addition, the command transmitted from the main control board M is not limited to the command related to the winning / replay winning information, but may be the command related to the effect group number.

  As described above, by outputting the push order navigation (sound output) by the speaker S20 before the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40, a simple notification to the player is executed more quickly. Can be performed, and the player can recognize the pressing order by voice without looking at the staging display device S40, and operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (incorrect pressing order). Situation) can be prevented.

  As described above, as the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), the explanation is made in the case of “push order display device → sound → effect display device”, but the push order navigation is displayed (display start). The order in which they are done is not limited to this. For example, as a modification of the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed (display is started), “push-order display device → effect display device → voice” may be configured. In such a configuration, even if the sub-main board transmits a command related to push-order navigation to the effect control board, the sub-main board transmits a command related to push-order navigation to the voice control board. The command from the main control board M that triggers the pressing order navigation in the effect display device S40 and the main control board M that triggers the pressing order navigation in the sound from the speaker S20 are displayed. The command may be different from the command.

Furthermore, as the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), "voice → push order display device → effect display device", "voice → effect display device → push order display device", "effect display device → voice → push" Order display device ”,“ effect display device → push order display device → voice ”, and the like. In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to the push order navigation to the voice control board and the effect control board, the main control board M performs the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. A display (start of display) may be performed by dynamic lighting, or a command from the main control board M side and a pressing order in the sound from the speaker S20 may be a trigger for displaying the pressing order navigation in the effect display device S40. A command different from the command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the navigation may be used. In this manner, according to the timing at which a command is sent from the sub-main board and the timing at which the main control board M displays the push order navigation with dynamic lighting (display start),
(1) The push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 is executed first. (2) The push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 is executed first. (3) The push order by the effect display device S40. The order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) can be changed, such as executing the navigation first.

<Effect>
As described above, in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button By defining the operation order in a period until the operation becomes effective, for example, even in a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is performed by voice (in this example, from the speaker S20). It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the pressing order navigation.

<< Execution mode of push-order navigation when there is weight >>
First, when there is a weight, in other words, the start lever is operated in a situation in which the minimum game time has not elapsed (the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a value greater than 0), and then the game is executed. The manner of execution of the push order navigation when it is performed will be described below.

<Structure 1>
First, the configuration 1 of FIG. 99 will be described. The start lever is operated in a state in which the state relating to the AT is an AT in-state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the winning combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, "When winning" Award-A3 ").

  First, in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M detects the operation of the start lever D50 by the timer interrupt process, so that "=" is displayed on the push order display device D270. A process of displaying (starting display) the push-order navigation of "3" with dynamic lighting is executed. After that, during the period before the minimum game time elapses, "213" is displayed (display starts) as a push-order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 99, the pressing order navigation of the pressing order display device D270 is displayed before the pressing order navigation of the effect display device S40.

<Structure 2>
Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 100 will be described. The start lever is operated in a state in which the state relating to the AT is an AT in-state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the winning combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, "When winning" Award-A3 ").

  By operating the start lever D50, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub-control board S side in a timer interrupt process. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control substrate M, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting display) “213” as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 (the above-described drawing). Perform processing). Thereafter, the minimum game time elapses, the spinning drum rotation start process is executed, and the reels start rotating, and the main control board M moves the reel drive state to a constant speed state and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Before (immediately before the operation of the stop button becomes effective), a process of dynamically displaying (= starting display) “= 3” as a pressing order navigation in the pressing order display device D270 is executed. In FIG. 100, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed earlier than the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. Note that, here, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting display) “213” as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 based on receiving the command related to the effect group number. The command that triggers execution of the process of displaying (starting display) the pressing order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to this. A command transmitted from the main control board M to be a trigger may be determined accordingly.

<Structure 3>
Next, the configuration 2 of FIG. 101 will be described. The start lever is operated in a state in which the state relating to the AT is an AT in-state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the winning combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, "When winning" Award-A3 ").

  In a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M sends a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control substrate M, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting display) “213” as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 (the above-described drawing). Perform processing). After that, the main control board M dynamically sets “= 3” as the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 at the timing when the minimum game time has elapsed and the reel rotation start processing is executed to start the rotation of the reels. A process of displaying (starting display) when lit is executed. In FIG. 101, when the start lever is operated in a situation in which it takes a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is a time value for five timer interrupt processes) until the minimum game time elapses, the effect display device is displayed. The push order navigation of S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. Further, when the start lever is operated in a situation in which only a time less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms which is a time value for five timer interrupt processes) remains before the minimum game time elapses, or the minimum game time When the start lever is operated in a state where is already passed, as described above, the trigger for displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side (for example, the start lever). Operation) occurs and the display of the push-order navigation is completed more than the time from the occurrence of the push-order navigation to the completion display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S (for example, the main control board M). It is configured that the time from the receipt of the command related to the winning / replay win information from the side) to the completion of the push order navigation display is longer, so the push order display If the push order navigation location D270 is displayed earlier than the push order Navi effect display unit S40.

  As described above, an example of the timing at which the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is displayed (display start) has been described, but the push order navigation is displayed (display start). Timing is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example of the timing at which the push order navigation in FIG. 99 is displayed (display start), during the period before the minimum game time elapses, the effect display device S40 prior to the push order display device D270. During the period before the minimum game time elapses when the push order navigation is displayed (display start), the push order navigation is simultaneously displayed (display start) on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. Alternatively, the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270 during the period before the minimum game time elapses (display start), and the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 after the minimum game time elapses (display). Start), and during the period before the minimum game time elapses, the push order navigation is displayed (display start) on the effect display device S40, and after the minimum game time elapses, the push order display device D270. Such as the forward navigation and displays (display start), the smallest game display of elapsed push order Navi across the front and back of the time (display start) may be configured to divide the timing.

<Effect>
As described above, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → a period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration). State → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop button becomes valid). With this configuration, it is possible to make the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (starts display) different between the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. As an effect of making the timing of displaying the push order navigation (start of display) different between the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40,
(1) When the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 is displayed earlier than the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40: The start lever is operated, and the main control board M wins the winning combination (here, the push-order). Since it is possible to display (start display) the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 by the timer interrupt process (for example, about 2 ms) immediately after the effect group number is determined based on the determination of the bell role). It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that promptly informs the player of information related to push-order navigation.
(2) When the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, Since the information related to the current game state or the winning combination is often configured to be suggested on the effect display device S40, the player advances the game while visually recognizing the effect display device S40. Will go. The effect display device S40 has a size (display area) larger than that of the push order display device D270, and is configured so that the information related to the push order navigation can be promptly notified to the player by the effect display device S40 that is easy for the player to visually recognize. Even when the push order navigation is newly executed while viewing the device S40, the push order navigation can be confirmed while visually recognizing the effect display device S40. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of reducing a game burden on a player without turning the display device.
In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the timing of starting the push order navigation is delayed in both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, and the player cannot recognize the push order navigation even when viewing either display device. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player.

  Furthermore, by making the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, the two display devices must be visually recognized simultaneously. A user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that can reduce the game burden on the player that the player can visually recognize the pushing order navigation on each display device at the timing when the pushing order navigation occurs. .

<Structure 4>
Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 102 will be described. Configuration 4 includes a reel window frame lamp D310. The start lever is operated in a state in which the state relating to the AT is an AT in-state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the winning combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, "When winning" Award-A3 ").

  The start lever D50 is operated in a state where the minimum game time has not elapsed, and the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S turns on the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) as the pressing order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 (starts lighting). Execute the processing to be performed. After that, a process of displaying (213) as a pressing order navigation on the effect display device S40 (display start) is executed. The timing at which the display of the push-order navigation by the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310 is started is the timing before the effect display device S40. This is because, as described above, when the sub-control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the reel window frame lamp lighting process of the reel window frame lamp D310 is performed in the pushing order navigation. Can be executed earlier than the process of drawing on the effect display device S40. After that, the minimum game time elapses, the reel rotation start process is executed, and the reels start rotating. After that, before the operation of the stop button becomes effective, the push order display device D270 displays the push order navigation as “push order navigation”. = 3 ”is displayed by dynamic lighting (display start). In FIG. 102, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device”, and the display of the push order navigation by turning on the reel window frame lamp D310 starts. This timing is earlier than the pressing order display device D270 and is earlier than the effect display device S40.

  Even in the case of the configuration illustrated in FIG. 102, the start lever is operated immediately before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses) ( In the case where the main control board M has transmitted the command related to the effect group number to the sub-control board S), the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “press order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device” or There may be a case where "reel window frame lamp → pressing order display device → effect display device" Here, in the case of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub-control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control substrate M, the effect is displayed on the effect display device S40. Since it takes about 32 ms as a time (until the drawing process is executed) until “213” is displayed (display start) as the push order navigation, just before the period before the minimum game time elapses ( For example, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M has transmitted the command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side) until the minimum game time elapses (about 10 ms remaining), the pressing order display device The push order navigation by the effect display device S40 may be displayed (display start) later than the display of the push order navigation by the D270 or the reel window lamp D310.

Also, in the reel window frame lamp D310, the start lever was operated immediately before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses). When the command related to the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S side), it takes time until the sub-control board S side receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side. The push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp may be displayed (display start) after the push order navigation display by the order display device D270.
As described above, the timing of starting the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 and the reel window frame lamp D310 is as follows: start lever operation → minimum game time elapse → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → As long as the operation of the stop button is valid, the timing for displaying the pressing order navigation can be appropriately determined.

<Effect>
As described above, by displaying the push order navigation (lighting display) by the reel window frame lamp D310 prior to the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40, simple notification is provided to the player. This can be executed earlier, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pushing order (a situation in which the pushing order is mistaken).

  Further, even in a gaming machine having no liquid crystal unit, such as the effect display device S40, the pressing order navigation can be executed using the lighting of the lamp (in this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310). It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the pressing order navigation.

<Structure 5>
Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 103 will be described. The configuration 5 is configured to execute the push-order navigation with the voice output from the speaker S20 in the instruction game. The start lever is operated in a state in which the state relating to the AT is an AT in-state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the winning combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, "When winning" Award-A3 ").

  When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S by timer interrupt processing during the period when the minimum game time has not elapsed. The sub-control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, and then outputs “Sound” through the speaker S20 as “middle!” (For the first stop operation, the middle stop button is pressed. (A voice suggesting to operate). After that, a process of displaying (213) as a pressing order navigation on the effect display device S40 (display start) is executed. The timing at which the display of the push-order navigation by the sound from the speaker S20 is started is earlier than that at the effect display device S40. This is a process in which when the sub control board S receives a command relating to the effect group number from the main control board M, the voice output process from the speaker S20 draws the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40. This is because it is executed sooner than. Thereafter, after the minimum game time has elapsed, the reels start rotating, the operation of the stop button is enabled, and the main control board M sets the rotation speed of the reel to a constant speed and the operation of the stop button becomes more effective. Previously, the push order display device D270 executes a process of dynamically displaying (= starting display) "= 3" as a push order navigation. In FIG. 103, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “voice → effect display device → press order display device”, and the timing at which the notification of the push order navigation by voice output is started is indicated by the push order display. The timing is earlier than the device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

  Even in the case of the configuration illustrated in FIG. 103, the start lever is operated immediately before the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses). When the main control board M sends a command relating to the effect group number to the sub control board S), the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed is “push-order display device → voice → effect display device” or “voice → There is a case where it is "press order display device → effect display device". Here, in the case of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the effect display device S40 displays. Just before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses, since it takes about 32 ms to display (start display) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed). For example, when the start lever is operated (the remaining 10 ms or so until the minimum game time elapses) (the main control board M transmits a command relating to the effect group number to the sub control board S side), the push order display device The push order navigation by the effect display device S40 may be displayed (display start) after the push order navigation by D270 or the notification of the push order navigation by voice.

  Also, in the speaker S20, the start lever was operated immediately before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses) (the main control board M is When the command related to the effect group number is transmitted to the S side), it takes time until the sub control board S side receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side. There is a case where the push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 is notified after the display of the push order navigation by D270.

  The timing at which the display of the push order navigation is started on the push order display device D270 is, as described above, a start lever operation → a period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed → a reel rotation → a reel acceleration state → a reel constant speed state → As long as the operation of the stop button is valid, the timing for displaying the pressing order navigation can be appropriately determined.

<Effect>
In this way, when the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum game time elapsed → reel rotation start → Reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → the period until the operation of the stop button becomes valid), for example, even in a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, The push-order navigation can be executed in a simple notification mode of voice (voice output from the speaker S20 in this example), and in a situation where the production display device S40 is not focused on the reel or the stop button. Even if the push-order navigation is executed, the player recognizes the push-order navigation by voice while paying attention to the reel or the stop button. Can be for, it is possible to provide a occurs hardly user-friendly gaming machine that such a player can not recognize the push order Navi.

  An example of the timing of displaying the pressing order navigation on the pressing order display device D270, and the example of the timing of displaying the pressing order navigation on the effect display device S40 has been described with a weight and without weight. The timing of displaying the push-order navigation on each display device is not limited to these. From the start of the operation of the start lever D50 described above, the operation of the start lever → the minimum game time elapses → the reel rotation start → the reel acceleration state → the reel constant speed state → the operation of the stop button is valid until the operation sequence is properly pressed. You can set the timing to display the navigation. Further, the display timing of the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 is preferably set to be narrower than the above-mentioned period. This is because it takes a predetermined time (for example, 32 ms or more) from when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a predetermined command from the CPUC100 of the main control board M until the pressing order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is. Furthermore, if the number of drawing frames displayed on the effect display device S40 is large, the additional time is required accordingly. The winning combination is determined after the start lever D50 is operated. Considering the time required from the determination of the winning combination to the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 as described above, As the timing at which the display of the push-order navigation is started on the effect display device S40, as an example, a period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed (with weight) → reel rotation start (without weight) → reel acceleration It is preferable to set the period → reel constant speed state → the period until the operation of the stop button is valid. By defining in this way, the period until the display of the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 is started differs from the period until the display of the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 is started. You can During these periods, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing to start displaying the push-order navigation on each display device.

For example, during a period from a start lever operation → a minimum game time elapses → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation is valid, a push order display device D270 and an effect display device S40, sound, reel An example of the order in which the push order navigation is notified by the window frame lamp D310 will be described.
(1) Push order display device → effect display device → sound → reel window frame lamp (2) Push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp → sound (3) Push order display device → sound → effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) pressing order display device → sound → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (5) pressing order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → sound (6) pressing order display device → reel window Frame lamp → sound → effect display device (7) effect display device → push order display device → sound → reel window frame lamp (8) effect display device → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → sound (9) effect display device → Voice → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (10) effect display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (11) Effect display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → Audio (12) ) Direction display device → Re (13) Voice → Pushing order display device → Effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (14) Sound → Pushing order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device (15) Sound → production display device → pressing order display device → reel window frame lamp (16) sound → production display device → reel window frame lamp → pressing sequence display device (17) voice → reel window frame lamp → pressing sequence display device → production display Device (18) sound → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → press order display device (19) reel window frame lamp → press order display device → effect display device → sound (20) reel window frame lamp → press order display device → Sound → effect display device (21) reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device → sound (22) reel window frame lamp → effect display device → sound → push order display device (23) reel window frame lamp → sound Push order display device → Effect display device (24) Reel window frame lamp → Sound → Effect display device → Start lever operation like push order display device → Minimum game time elapsed → Reel rotation start → Reel acceleration state → Reel fixed During the period from the speed state to the time when the operation of the stop button is effective, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing at which the pressing order navigation is displayed (display start).

Further, as one of the production means controlled by the sub-control board S, the control is performed by the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). With the stop button lamp S60 performed, it is also possible to add a pressing order navigation that lights (flashes) to indicate an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player. By operating the start lever D50, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub-control board S side in a timer interrupt process. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S turns on (or blinks) the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button to perform the first stop operation. Execute the processing to be performed. Described below is an example of the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) with the push-button navigation added by the stop button D40.
(25) Pushing order display device → sound → reel window frame lamp → stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (flashing)) → effect display device (26) Pushing order display device → sound → stop button lamp (first stop) Only the button is lit (flashing)) → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device (27) Push order display device → Audio → Stop button lamp (Only the first stop button is lit (flashing)) and reel window frame lamp are almost simultaneously → Directing Although the display device can be configured as a display device or the like, the order here is an example and is not limited thereto. For example, in the above (27), the timing of turning on (flashing) the reel window frame lamp D310 and the stop button lamp S60 is simultaneous. However, it is also possible to output the sound from the speaker S20 simultaneously. Execution timing (push order display device D270) of the timer interrupt process related to the display (start of display) of the push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order display device D270), or sub control board S (effect display device S40, reel) The order in which the pressing order navigation is displayed (display start) may be determined in any manner depending on the window frame lamp D310, the sound from the speaker S20, and the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the pressing order navigation of the stop button D40). When executing the push-order navigation by the stop button lamp S60, the stop button lamps corresponding to all reels are not turned on (blinking) but only the stop button lamps corresponding to the reels on which the stop operation is to be performed. It is preferable to control to turn on (blink). For example, when executing the pressing order navigation of "213": "middle → left → right" by the stop button lamp S60, the stop button lamp (lighting) corresponding to the middle stop button D42 → the middle stop button D42 is operated → middle stop Stop button lamp (light off) corresponding to button D42 → Stop button lamp (light) corresponding to left stop button D41 → Operate left stop button D41 → Stop button lamp (light off) corresponding to left stop button D41 → Right stop button Based on the progress of the game, the stop button lamp corresponding to D43 (lights up) → the right stop button D43 is operated → the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button D43 (lights off) lights up corresponding to the reel. It is configured to blink (blink) and turn off.

  Further, the case where the control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43) is executed by the sub control board S has been described above. The control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43) may be executed by the main control board M. Hereinafter, the start timing of the push order navigation under the control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) on the main control board M will be described.

When the stop button lamp S60 is controlled on the main control board M, the start lever is operated, and the timer interrupt after determining the effect group number based on the determination of the winning combination (here, the pressing order bell combination) is determined. The process of turning on (or blinking) the stop button lamp S60 is performed by a process (for example, in the first cycle from the determination of the effect group number, the time required for the lighting process of the stop button lamp S60 is about 2 ms). It is possible to do. With such a configuration, an example of the order of displaying (starting display) of the push-order navigation having a configuration including the push-order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 will be described.
(28) Pushing order display device → stop button lamp (only first stop button is lit (flashing)) → sound → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (29) stop button lamp (only first stop button is lit (flashing)) → Pressing order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Rendering display device (30) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (flashing)) and the pressing order display device are almost simultaneously → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Direction Although the display device can be configured as a display device or the like, the order here is an example and is not limited thereto. For example, in the above (28) to (30), the pressing order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 controlling on the main control board M side is performed by the effect display device S40 controlling on the sub control board S side and the sound from the speaker S20. The start is started before the navigation in the order of pushing by the reel window frame lamp D310, but the timing of executing the timer interrupt processing for lighting (flashing) the stop button lamp S60 on the main control board M side is changed. The push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 may be started after the push order navigation by the sub-control board S side (for example, the effect display device S40, the sound from the speaker, the reel window frame lamp D310) is started. Execution timing of timer interrupt processing related to display (display start) of the push-order navigation on the main control board M side (push-order display device D270, stop button lamp S60), or sub-control board S (effect display device S40, reel window frame) The order in which the pressing order navigation is displayed (display start) may be determined according to the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the pressing order navigation of the lamp D310 and the sound from the speaker S20.

<<< Configuration related to the end of the display of the push order navigation >>>
Next, the end timing of the push-order navigation of the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 will be described. The timing at which the push order navigation ends, and the like, can be designed to some extent freely according to the period during which the player ends the game, similarly to the timing at which the push order navigation starts. An example of a period in which the player ends the game is a timing at which the player operates the third stop button. When the third stop button is operated and all reels are completely stopped and a prize is won, the payout of the game medals based on the prize is completed, and the game ends.

  The period in which the display of the push order navigation is ended is a period of “operation of the third stop button (pressed) → non-pressed of the third stop button → winning judgment → payout completion based on winning” starting from the operation timing of the third stop button. It is possible to specify any timing. In this example, as the timing at which the push order navigation ends, the push order navigation end timing is different for each push order combination (push order bell, push order re-gaming combination). For example, the timing of ending the display of the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 differs depending on whether the determined winning combination is the pushing order bell or the pushing order replaying role.

  In Configurations 1 to 5 described below, the first stop button and the second stop button are in a state where the first stop button and the second stop button are already pressed, and the effect display device. It should be supplemented that the pressing order navigation corresponding to the first stop button and the second stop button in S40 has also been completed.

<Structure 1>
First, configuration 1 in FIG. 104 will be described. The instruction game is executed in the AT-related state (the game state in which the push-order navigation is executed when the push-order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In the situation where the push order navigation related to 3 stops is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, the display of the pressing order navigation on the pressing order display device D270 ends, and the pressing order navigation disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display start). Is done. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, "When winning" Award-A3 ").

  Here, the push-order navigation disappearing effect is displayed for a predetermined time as an effect display related to the end when the display of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device is finished. In the figure, in the situation where "3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, the right stop button is operated, and the sensor that detects the operation of the right stop button is turned on from off. Is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, a command related to the detection is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command related to the detection. By executing the process of erasing the display of "3", the push-order navi disappearance effect which is erased after the display of "3" is transmitted is displayed.

  Thereafter, in a situation where the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 has ended, the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect ends (the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). Here, as a trigger for ending the pressing order navigation of the pressing order display device D270 and the pressing order navigation of the effect display device S40, both "press the third stop button" (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off). It is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side) that the push-order navigation of the push-order display device D270 precedes the push-order navigation of the effect display device S40 in FIG. The display disappears. This is the same as when the pressing order navigation is started, and even when the ending timing of the pressing order navigation is "when the third stop button is pressed", the CPUSC of the sub-control board S draws a plurality of frames. It can be said that the end of the push-order navigation of the effect display device S40 is delayed because the process of displaying is displayed.

  To describe the end of the push-order navigation in detail, in the push-order display device D270, the push-order navigation ends when the push-order display device D270 is turned on, then turned off, and then turned off. Display of forward navigation → Start of display of push-down navigation disappearance effect → End of display of push-down navigation disappearance effect (completion of deletion) ends push-down navigation. In this example, the timing at which the push order display device D270 starts to turn off is referred to as turning off the push order display device, and the start of the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect is referred to as the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect (display start). The turning off of the push order display device may be replaced with the timing when the turning off of the push order display device D270 is completed, or the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect may be replaced with the timing of terminating the display of the pushing order navigation disappearing effect. The timing of the turning off of the push order display device and the display of the push order navigating effect (start of display) may be the turning off of the push order display device → the display of the push order navigating effect (start of display), or the display of the push order negating effect. (Start of display) → The pressing order display device may be turned off, or the turning off of the pressing order display device and the display of the pressing order navigation disappearing effect (display start) may be performed simultaneously.

Also, the configuration in which the display of the pressing order navigation ends when the third stop button is operated has been described above. However, when the third stop button is operated, the timing at which the third stop button is pressed (the operation of the third stop button is detected) This is a timing at which the sensor for turning on is turned on from off, which is detected by interrupt processing on the main control board M side, and may be hereinafter also referred to as “when the third stop button is pressed”) and the third stop. The state in which the third stop button is released after the button is pressed (after detecting that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from the off state by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side) , The timing at which it is detected that the state has been changed from on to off, which may be hereinafter also referred to as “when the third stop button is not pressed”). There can be also be configured to define the timing of completion. For example, in the order of the timing at which the push-order navigation ends in the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, more detail will be given.
(When push order navigation ends at the same time)
(1) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the pressing order display device is turned off → sub-control from the main control board M side A command related to the detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the board S side → the sub control board S side receives the command → display of the push order navigating disappearing effect (display start).
(2) The interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from off → push order display device off → interrupt processing on the main control board M side Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is switched from off to on → Sends a command related to detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The control board S side receives the command, and displays the push-order navigation disappearance effect (display start).
(3) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned off from on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the pressing order display device is turned off → sub-control from the main control board M side A command related to the detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the board S side → the sub control board S side receives the command → display of the push order navigating disappearing effect (display start).
(4) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from the off state by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the third control button is shifted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. The command relating to the detection of the stop button is transmitted → the sub control board S receives the command → display of the pressing order disappearing effect (display start) → the pressing order display device is turned off. (3) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button has been turned on from off → the main control board M transmits a command relating to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → the sub control board S Side receives the command → displays the pressing order disappearing effect (display starts) → by interrupt processing on the main control board M side, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off from on. → Turn off the push order display device (6) Detect that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned off from on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → From the main control board M side A command relating to the detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the sub control board S side → the sub control board S side receives the command → display of the pressing order disappearing effect (display start) → turn off of the pressing order display device (end of the pressing order navigation) Are simultaneous)
(7) By the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off → the third control button is shifted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. The command relating to the detection of the stop button is transmitted → the sub-control board S receives the command → the display of the pressing order disappearing effect (start of display) and at the same time the pressing order display device is turned off. It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been changed from ON to OFF → a command relating to the detection of the third stop button is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S → the sub control board It is possible that the S side receives the command and displays the pressing order disappearing effect (display start) and at the same time the pressing order display device is turned off.

In addition, not only when the third stop button is pressed but also, for example, when the first stop button is pressed and when the second stop button is pressed, the display mode of the pressing order navigation is additionally described. First, in the push order display device D270, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off (or off from on) by interrupt processing on the main control board M side after the lighting is started. Until the light is detected and turned off, the lit state continues. On the other hand, in the effect display device S40, for example, the first stop button is pressed (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is switched from off to on (or from on to off) by an interrupt process on the main control board M side). The command relating to the detection of the first stop button is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → the sub control board S side receives the command → the pressing order corresponding to the first stop button disappears. The display mode of the display of the effect (start of display) and the pressing order navigation (for example, the display of “2”) corresponding to the reels to be stopped next are started to be changed (hereinafter, “display mode of the second reel pressing order navigation”). Change start). The order in which these are executed is
(9) Display of the pressing order disappearing effect corresponding to the first stop button (display start) → Start of changing the display mode of the second reel pressing order navigation (10) Start of changing of the display mode of the second reel pressing order navigation → Display of pressing order disappearing effect corresponding to 1 stop button (display start)
And may be configured as either of the above. In addition, similarly when the second stop button is operated,
(11) Display of the pressing order disappearing effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the second stop button (display start) → Start of changing the display mode of the third reel pressing order navigation (12) Third reel pressing order Start changing the display mode of the navigation → display the pressing order disappearing effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the second stop button (display start)
It can be configured as follows.

<Structure 2>
Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 105 will be described. The instruction game is executed in the AT-related state (the game state in which the push-order navigation is executed when the push-order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In the situation where the push order navigation related to 3 stops is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, the pressing order navigation disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (display start) on the effect display device S40. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, "When winning" Award-A3 ").

  After that, while the right stop button is kept depressed, the display of the pressing order navigating effect disappears (the pressing order navigating in the effect display device S40 ends). Thereafter, when the right stop button is released, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends.

<Structure 3>
Next, the configuration 3 of FIG. 106 will be described. In FIG. 106, the pressing order navigation displayed on the pressing order display device D270 is set to “3” instead of “= 3”. That is, a numerical value is displayed as a push order navigation on the right digit of the push order display device D270, and the left digit is not displayed. In addition, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display the push order navigation display and the display of the acquired number.

  The instruction game is executed in a state in which the AT is in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and The right stop button is operated as the third stop in a situation where the pressing order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the pressing order navigation related to the game is displayed on the pressing order display device D270. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from the off state by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the sub control from the main control board M side A command related to detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the board S side → the sub-control board S side receives the command → A push-order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display start) To be done. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, "When winning" Award-A3 ").

  After that, while the right stop button is being pressed, the symbol combination related to the push-order bell (the symbol combination that pays out 11 sheets) is stopped and displayed, and "0" is displayed on the push-order display device D270. After that, when the right stop button is released, payout for the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is started, and "1" → "2" → "3" → ... "10" → "11" on the push order display device D270. The acquired number is displayed. After "11" is displayed on the push-order display device D270 (after the acquired number is displayed), the display on the push-order display device D270 is terminated (not displayed). As described above, the push-order display device D270 is configured to be able to display both the push-order navigation and the acquired number display, and the display mode of the push-order navigation display is a numerical value only in the lower digit of the push-order display device D270. In the case where the display combination is displayed, both the push order navigation and the acquired number display are displayed on the push order display device D270 when the symbol combination in which the game medals are paid out in the instruction game is stopped and displayed. There is a possibility that a person may misunderstand the pushing order navigation or the number of acquired sheets. Therefore, by arranging to display "0" while ending the display of the push order navigation and starting the display of the acquired number, regardless of the payout number related to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed (for example, 1 The player can recognize that the display of the acquired number is started (whether the number is 11 or 11). The value of “0” may be changed, and it is preferable that the display mode is different from the display mode that can be displayed as the push-order navigation.

  The end timing of the display of the push-order navigation of the push-order display device D270 is "3rd stop button not pressed (after release)", that is, "3" (the function of the push-order display device) is displayed as "0". Although it is assumed that the display is switched to (the function of the payout amount display device), the timing of “completion of payout based on winning” may be set, for example, when the display of the push order display device D270 disappears completely. By setting the end timing of the pressing order navigation of the effect display device S40 to “when the third stop button is pressed”, the pressing order navigation of the effect displaying device S40 is performed earlier than the pressing order navigation of the pressing order display device D270. It turns out that it ends.

  As another example, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is configured as “13”, “23”, “33” instead of “= 3”. The displayed push order navigation will be described in detail. The left digits “1”, “2”, and “3” are respectively associated with the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and indicate the position of the reel at which the stop operation is to be performed. There is (for example, "1" indicates that the reel to be stopped is the left reel M51, and "2" indicates that the reel to be stopped is the middle reel M52). The right-hand digit “3” corresponds to the pressing order “middle → left → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A3”) displayed on the effect display device S40, as in the above-described configuration. It is a thing. With this configuration, the pressing order navigation is displayed in the order of “23” → “13” → “33”, and the stop button is operated in accordance with the pressing order. At the timing, the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is performed disappears, and the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next reel stop operation should be performed is displayed. Then, when the final stop operation is performed, the display of the push order navigation (“33” in this example) corresponding to the final stop operation disappears, and the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 ends.

<Effect>
In this way, the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (third stop button operation (press)) → third stop button non-press → win determination → win Period until the completion of the payout based on), for example, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different. Thus, it is possible to avoid the situation where the two display devices must be viewed at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push-order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push-order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the number of users.

  Further, when the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 (the push order navigation display on the effect display device S40) ends, the sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button is turned on by the interrupt process on the main control board M side. If it is specified to be off (release the stop button), even if the player holds the final stop button (third stop button) with a sense of expectation for the result of the game, the player will stop It can be configured so that the push-order navigation does not end until the button turns from on to off. Here, if the push order navigation is erased immediately after the stop button is turned from on to off, there is no expectation that the result of the game may not be advantageous to the player. Since there is a possibility that the event will come off, it is possible that the result of the game will not be an advantageous result for the player by configuring so that the push order navigation does not end until the stop button turns from on to off It is possible to reduce the occurrence of events that reduce the expectation of the heel.

<Structure 4>
Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 107 will be described. The instruction game is executed in the AT-related state (the game state in which the push-order navigation is executed when the push-order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In the situation where the push order navigation related to 3 stops is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from the off state by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the sub control from the main control board M side A command related to detection of the third stop button is sent to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display of the push-order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) on the effect display device S40 (display start) At the same time, the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends. In this game, the player has won the predetermined push order replay, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the RT state where the replay win probability is high). Can be maintained) (for example, a case where the player wins “re-game-D2”, which is a three-select push-re-game in which the middle first stop has the highest profit).

  After that, while the right stop button is kept depressed, the display of the pressing order navigating effect disappears (the pressing order navigating in the effect display device S40 ends). After that, the right stop button is released (by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is switched from on to off) and a symbol combination relating to the re-game. Is displayed, the automatic bet is executed, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned on. Will be lit).

<Structure 5>
Next, the configuration 5 of FIG. 108 will be described. The instruction game is executed in the AT-related state (the game state in which the push-order navigation is executed when the push-order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In the situation where the push order navigation related to 3 stops is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). When the stop button is pressed, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from an off state by an interrupt process on the main control board M side → sub-control from the main control board M side A command related to the detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the board S side → the sub-control board S receives the command → the push display navigation disappearing effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display start). ) Is done. In this game, the player has won the predetermined push order replay, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the RT state where the replay win probability is high). Can be maintained) (for example, a case where the player wins “re-game-D2”, which is a three-select push-re-game in which the middle first stop has the highest profit).

  After that, while the right stop button is kept depressed, the display of the pressing order navigating effect disappears (the pressing order navigating in the effect display device S40 ends). After that, the right stop button is released (by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is switched from on to off) and a symbol combination relating to the re-game. Is displayed in a stopped state, an automatic bet is executed, the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, and after the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 ends.

  In this way, for example, in the case of having the configuration 1 in FIG. 104 and the configuration 5 in FIG. 108, in the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed, it is distinguished between the pushing order bell role and the pushing order replaying role. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can determine which small winning combination has been won by a difference in the end timing of the push order navigation even if the player does not have the mark.

  As described above, the push order bell as the push order combination or the ending timing of the push order navigation in the case of the push order re-play combination has been described. In the effect display device S40, as the timing for ending the push-order navigation, only the case of "when the third stop button is pressed" has been described as an example, but the timing is not limited to this. When the game is over, the timing of ending the push order navigation is optional if the operation is the third stop button operation (pressed) → the third stop button is not pressed → the winning determination → the payout is completed based on the winning. Is possible. In addition, in the push order display device D270, as a timing at which the push order navigation ends, the period in which the push order navigation ends when the winning combination is the push order bell and when the winning combination is the push order replay combination is made different. ing. As an example of a case where the winning combination is the pressing order replaying game, the timing at which the pressing order navigation ends is “when the 1-bet lamp is turned on”, and the pressing order is displayed by arbitrarily setting the lighting timing of the 1-bet lamp D211. The end timing of the pressing order navigation of the device D270 greatly changes. As an example, if the lighting timing of the 1-bet lamp D211 is at the start of the next game, the end period of the push-order navigation when the winning combination is the push-order bell is "3rd stop button operation (press)-> 3rd". It is a timing later than "Stop button not pressed-> Win determination-> Completion of payout based on winning", "3rd stop button operation (press)-> Not press third stop button-> Win determination-Completion of payout based on winning-> 1 bet lamp When the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on and the third stop button is not pressed, the "3rd stop button operation (press) → the 3rd stop button is not pressed → 1 bet lamp is turned on → win prize Judgment → Completion of payout based on winning ”will be included, and the winning combination will be included in the ending period of the pushing order navigation when the pushing order bell is pressed.

Similar to the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), the order of the timing at which the push order navigation ends is based on the third stop button operation (press) → the third stop button not pressed → winning determination → winning. In the period of the payout completion, an example of the order in which the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, the sound, and the reel window frame lamp D310 ends is described as
(1) Push order display device → effect display device → sound → reel window frame lamp (2) Push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp → sound (3) Push order display device → sound → effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) pressing order display device → sound → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (5) pressing order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → sound (6) pressing order display device → reel window Frame lamp → sound → effect display device (7) effect display device → push order display device → sound → reel window frame lamp (8) effect display device → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → sound (9) effect display device → Voice → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (10) effect display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (11) Effect display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → Audio (12) ) Direction display device → Re (13) Voice → Pushing order display device → Effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (14) Sound → Pushing order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device (15) Sound → production display device → pressing order display device → reel window frame lamp (16) sound → production display device → reel window frame lamp → pressing sequence display device (17) voice → reel window frame lamp → pressing sequence display device → production display Device (18) sound → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → press order display device (19) reel window frame lamp → press order display device → effect display device → sound (20) reel window frame lamp → press order display device → Sound → effect display device (21) reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device → sound (22) reel window frame lamp → effect display device → sound → push order display device (23) reel window frame lamp → sound Push order display device → effect display device (24) reel window frame lamp → voice → effect display device → push order display device In this way, the third stop button operation (press) → the third stop button is not pressed → winning judgment → winning In the period of the payout completion based on the navigation, it is possible to appropriately configure the timing at which the push order navigation ends.

Further, as one of the production means controlled by the sub-control board S, the control is performed by the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). The following describes an example of the order in which the push order navigation in the configuration in which the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 is performed is ended. In addition, as processing until the end of the pressing order navigation by the stop button lamp S60, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned off from on → the main control board M Sends a command related to the operation of the third stop button to the sub-control board S side in the timer interrupt processing → the sub-control board S receives the command → the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the third stop button Turns off (starts turning off). Further, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button is switched from ON to OFF. → The main control board M performs the first interrupt on the sub control board S side by the timer interrupt process. A command related to button operation is transmitted → the sub-control board S receives the command → the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button is turned off (starts to turn off) and provided inside the second stop button The stop button lamp S60 is turned on (starting lighting).
(25) Press order display device → production display device → sound → reel window frame lamp → stop button (3rd stop button lamp is off)
(26) Pressing order display device → production display device → reel window frame lamp → sound → stop button (third stop button lamp is off)
It is possible to configure such as. As for the timing of the end of the push order navigation by the stop button D40, the push order display device D270, the effect display device S40, the sound, the reel, and the like, like the reel window frame lamp D310 that executes the push order navigation by turning on or off the lamp. It may be before or after the window frame lamp D310. Further, at the time of operating the third stop button, the light may be turned off when the third stop button is pressed, or may be turned off when the third stop button is not pressed.

As described above, in the present example, one game progresses based on << the configuration related to the display start of the push order navigation >> and << the configuration related to the end of the display of the push order navigation >>. . A specific example of the flow of one game from when the push order navigation is displayed (display start) to when the push order navigation ends is specifically described.
1. Display of push order navigation (display start)
Start lever operation → Display of push order navigation (display start) (push order display device D270) → Display of push order navigation (display start) (effect display device S40)
2. From 1st stop button operation to 2nd stop button operation 2-1. Performance display device S40
Display of the pressing order disappearing effect corresponding to the operation of the first stop button (display start) → End of display of the pressing order disappearing effect corresponding to the operation of the first stop button → Change of the display mode of the second reel pressing order navigation → Display (start of display) of the pressing order disappearing effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the operation of the second stop button → End of display of the pressing order disappearing effect corresponding to the operation of the second stop button → Third reel Change of display mode of push order navigation 2-2. Push order display device D270
The pressing order display device D270 is in a lit state.
3. 3rd stop button operation-end of display of push order navigation 3rd stop button operation → push order display device off → display of push order navigation disappearance effect (display start) corresponding to operation of 3rd stop button → 3rd stop button End of display of push-order disappearance effect corresponding to operation In this way, the flow of one game proceeds. The example described above is only one example. The display of the push-order navigation (start of display) may be configured to include the sound output from the reel window frame lamp D310 and the speaker S20. The timing of the display of the push-order navigation (start of display) and the push order The order of displaying (starting displaying) the navigation is not limited to this. Also, 2. In the first stop button operation and the second stop button operation, in the effect display device S40, the display of the pressing order disappearing effect corresponding to each stop button is started (display start), and the display mode of the pressing order navigation corresponding to the next reel is changed. The order in which they are performed is not limited to this. Also, 3. In the third stop button operation to the end of the display of the push order navigation, the order of the display end of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, and the timing of the end of the push order navigation is further detailed. It may be stipulated (it can be further classified by pressing the third stop button, not pressing the third stop button, etc.).

  With the configuration as in the present example, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different from each other. It is possible to avoid a state in which the display device must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, thereby reducing the game burden of the player, The end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set to a predetermined period (the third stop button operation (press) → the third stop button not pressed → the winning determination → the payout based on the winning). For example, by determining the period, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the push displayed on the effect display device S40 By differentiating the end timing of the navigation, it is possible to avoid a situation in which two display devices must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can end the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce a game burden on a player who can view the game.

<Display mode when pushing order is incorrect>
Here, in a game in which the push order navigation is executed, an example of a configuration of a display mode of the push order navigation when a game is executed in a different push order (or a different operation timing) from the push order navigation Will be described. Here, an example is shown in which a game in which the pressing order bell has been won and the correct pressing order is “left → middle → right” is executed.

In the situation where “123” is displayed as the pressing order navigation on the effect display device S40 and “= 1” is displayed as the pressing order navigation on the pressing order display device D270, the middle stop button is used as the first stop operation. (The pressing order of the correct answer corresponds to the left stop button) is operated, and it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button has been turned on from off to on as the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → main control The command relating to the detection of the first stop button is transmitted from the board M to the sub-control board S side → the sub-control board S side receives the command → the sub-control board S side displays all the “123” on the effect display device S40. Execute the process to delete.
It may be configured as described above. As described above, in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, when the stop button which is not in the correct push order is operated, all the reels (or the stop buttons) are displayed on the sub control board S side. Is deleted, while the main control board M is configured to maintain the display of the push order navigation. The push order navigation on the main control board M side (the push order navigation by the push order display device D270) is performed at the time of the third stop operation (for detecting the operation of the third stop button as an interrupt process on the main control board M side). (When the sensor detects that the sensor has been turned off from on).

<< Configuration related to reel control and push-order navigation >>
Next, a configuration relating to the reel stop control and the display control of the push order navigation (effect display device S40) will be described. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, "When winning" Award-A3 ").

<Structure 1>
First, in the upper left diagram of FIG. 109, the instruction game related to the pushing order bell is executed in the AT state, and “213” is displayed as the pushing order navigation on the effect display device S40. The middle stop button is pressed at the timing when the replay symbol of the middle reel of the middle reel is located at No. 11, and the display corresponding to the pushing order navigation "1" of the middle reel changes to the pushing order navigation disappearing effect. The middle reel stop button remains pressed. In addition, the middle reel is controlled so as to stop the symbols constituting the symbol combination which is the payout of the maximum number of obtained elevens, by performing the stop operation of the middle reel in the correct order of pushing. In this example, the 15th bell stops at the middle stage (effective line) of the middle reel. That is, when the middle stop button is operated at this timing, sliding of the maximum number of frames (4 frames in this example) is generated from the 11th replay A and the 15th bell is stopped and displayed on the winning line. The control is performed so that

  Here, the operation control of the stepping motor until the reel stops after the stop operation is performed will be described with reference to FIG. For example, at the timing when the reel stop operation is performed, a transition is made from the reel constant speed state (4) in FIG. 35 <reel rotation speed image> to the reel deceleration standby state (5). In this reel deceleration standby state, the distance between the position where the stop operation is performed and the position that constitutes the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game is calculated, and a predetermined period (for example, within 190 ms) is calculated. By determining that it is possible to stop and display the symbols constituting the symbol combination relating to the condition device won in the game on the pay line, the symbol combination relating to the condition device won in the game is constituted The rotation is continued so that the symbol is stopped and displayed. At the timing when the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game have reached the winning line, the control is shifted to the reel deceleration state of (6) and to the reel stop state of (7). I do.

  Thereafter, as shown in the upper right of FIG. 109, in the effect display device S40, the pressing order navigating disappearance effect of the middle reel is deleted (the display ends), and the 15th bell is stopped and displayed on the winning line in the middle reel. Sliding control is continued in order to perform this. The middle stop button is being pressed. Next, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 109, the effect display device S40 changes the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed. As the display mode that changes at this time, any mode may be used as long as the player can recognize the stop button to be stopped (a number is largely changed, a number is moved, a number is lit, etc.). ). On the other hand, the middle reel continues sliding control to stop and display the 15th bell on the pay line. The middle reel stop button is being pressed. Note that the timing for changing the display order to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed may be before the push order navigation disappearing effect is erased (display end), or the push order navigation may be stopped. This may be performed after the navigation disappearing effect is deleted (display end) or at the same time as the pressing order of the navigation disappearing effect is deleted (display end).

  After that, after the depressed state of the middle stop button continues for a predetermined time, the 15th bell of the middle reel is stopped and displayed on the pay line. The predetermined time here is a time (for example, 190 ms) during which the maximum slip control of the middle reel is performed. As described above, in this example, when the stop operation is performed according to the push-order navigation, the stop operation is performed before the reel on which the stop operation is performed is stopped and displayed (before the next stop button operation becomes effective). It is configured such that the push-order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the action is performed can be erased and the display mode of the push-order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next can be changed.

  Here, as an example that can be implemented in this example, the case where the stop operation is performed at the position where the maximum number of slides occurs is described, but for example, it is possible to stop the symbol that constitutes the pushing forward combination with 0 slide. When the stop operation is performed at the position, the timing for changing the display mode in which the push-order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next is highlighted is after the reel is stopped and displayed. Even in the case of 0 frame check, the display order is such that the push-order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation should be performed is highlighted before the timing when the operation of the next stop button becomes effective. It is configured to change. With this configuration, even in the case of zero-crossing, the stop button is operated after recognizing the reel to be stopped next, and the player performs the stop operation by mistake in the pressing order. Can be prevented. In addition, it is more preferable that the timing to change the display order to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next is earlier, and the timing is to be as early as possible even in the case of zero commerce. Is preferred.

  In this example, the push order bell is described as an example. However, the present invention is applicable not only to the push order bell but also to any condition apparatus that generates the push order navigation. Further, as the effect means for notifying the pressing order, lighting by the reel window frame lamp D310 or sound output from the speaker S20 may be used. For example, when the push order navigation using the sound output from the reel window frame lamp D310 or the speaker S20 is included, the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel is changed on the effect display device S40. Then, the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel is executed (if the reel window frame lamp D310, the lamp corresponding to the next reel is turned on, and if it is audio, the dialogue corresponding to the next reel is output as audio). It is possible to configure.

  In addition, as a configuration according to <<<< Configuration relating to reel control and push order navigation >>>>, a description has been given by taking as an example the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 as an effect means for executing the push order navigation. For example, it may be configured to include a pressing order navigation by a stop button lamp S60 provided inside the reel window frame lamp D310, sound, and the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). Good. The pushing order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed by turning on (flashing) and turning off the reel window frame lamp, and the pushing order navigation by voice is “left”, “right”, “middle” from the speaker S20. The navigation of the pressing order by the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43) is performed by outputting the left stop button corresponding to the reel. This is executed by turning on (flashing) and turning off D41.

For example, in the configuration according to <<<< Configuration relating to reel control and push order navigation >>>>, a reel window frame lamp D310, a sound, a stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) ),
(1) Reel window frame lamp D310
(1-1) Turning off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (1-2) Turning on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed (2) Audio (2-1) Next Output of sound corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed (3) Stop button D40
(3-1) Turning off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is performed (3-2) Turning on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next (4) Effect display device S40
(4-1) Display the pressing order disappearing effect corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation has been performed (display end)
(4-2) Change in Display Mode for Highlighting Pushing Order Navigation Corresponding to Reel to Be Stopped Next, a configuration relating to the pushing order navigation for each effect means as described above can be defined. Any order may be set as the order of executing these configurations (1-1) to (4-2). For example, the order of execution may be determined for each effect means (for example, the process is performed in the order of a reel window frame lamp → sound → stop button → effect display device), or the order of execution for each reel may be determined. Alternatively, as an example, the processing may be performed in the order of the processing on the reel on which the stop operation has been performed → the processing on the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed, or a combination of these.

  In this example, << Configuration of Reel Control and Push Order Navigation >> is described with reference to FIG. 109, and in FIG. 109, the case where the first stop operation is performed is described as an example. However, the configuration to which this example can be applied is not limited to the first stop operation. For example, the present invention is applicable even when the second stop operation is performed or when the third stop operation is performed. At the time of the third stop operation, a process corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed (for example, a change to the “display mode for highlighting the push order navigation” in the effect display device S40, a reel window frame lamp) The process of “lighting of the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed” in D310 is not executed.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even when the stop button is operated in accordance with the pressing order navigation and the reel corresponding to the stop button executes the stop control with the slip of the maximum number of frames, the effect display device S40 does not operate. The end of the push order navigation display corresponding to the stop button (from the start to the end of the disappearance effect display), and the change in the display mode of the push order navigation display corresponding to the stop button to be stopped next (start of highlighting) Can be executed before the operation of the next stop button becomes valid, so that it is possible to prevent the player from operating the stop button by mistake before recognizing the stop button to be operated next. .

<<<<<< Third Embodiment: Medal Addition Processing by Insertion Sensor >>>>
Next, as a third embodiment, a timing of a process of adding a game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 as a credit will be described (see FIG. 113). The game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 pass through the insertion reception sensor D10s in the medal selector DS, which is the path of the game medals, and pass through a predetermined pass condition (the passed game medals satisfy the standard. In the case where the error is not determined, the game medal flows downward through the medal channel DR in the medal selector DS without generating an error. Further, a first insertion sensor D20s and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided further behind the insertion reception sensor D10s, and the game medals that are received by satisfying the dimensional standard are replaced by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. At the time of passing, when it is determined that the game medal is normally inserted, the inserted game medal is detected as a betted medal, and credit addition can be performed. When the game medal passes, the insertion of the game medal is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and a signal thereof (information on the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on; (Information on the time from turning on to turning off, information on the timing when the second input sensor D20s is turned on, information on the time from when the second input sensor D20s is turned on until turning off, etc.) The power is supplied to the main control board M. Here, the timing at which credits can be added can be determined by the on / off state of each of the first loading sensor D20s and the second loading sensor D30s.

<<< 3rd Embodiment Timing chart of game medal detection by insertion sensor >>>
FIG. 110 is a timing chart when the game medals pass through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. For example, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s detects passage of a game medal (off → on) at a timing 1 in the drawing. Subsequently, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passing of the game medal (off → on) at the timing 2 in FIG. Time information and the like related to these timings are supplied to the main control board M as the aforementioned signals. Subsequently, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s ends the detection of the game medal (from ON to OFF) at timing 3 in the drawing. Here, the time A from the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s to the end of the detection of the game medal is calculated by the main control board M, and A is within a predetermined range (in the third embodiment, If 4 ms ≦ A <183 ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. Further, a time B from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects a game medal to when the first insertion sensor D20s ends detection is calculated by the main control board M, and B is within a predetermined range (2 ms ≦ B < If it is 115 ms), it is determined that the passing of the game medal is normally detected. Thereafter, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s ends the detection of the game medal (ON → OFF) at the timing of 4 in the figure. The time C from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects a game medal to when the second insertion sensor D20s completes detection is calculated by the main control board M, and C is within a predetermined range (4 ms ≦ C <183 ms). If so, it is determined that the passing of the game medal is normally detected. In this manner, it is determined whether or not the game medal normally passes through the medal selector DS at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off. A game medal inserted at any of the timings when the D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off is detected as a betted medal, and credit addition is performed.

<<< 3rd Embodiment Example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor >>>
<< Configuration 1 >>
Next, in the third embodiment, an example of a timing at which a inserted game medal is detected as a betted medal and credit addition is performed will be described in detail. FIG. 111 to FIG. 112 are flowcharts that reflect processing at the credit addition timing in the third embodiment in the game progress control processing according to the subroutine of step 1200. FIG. 113 is an image diagram of the timing at which credit addition is performed when the insertion process is normally performed on the inserted game medals. In the flowchart of FIG. 111, the description of the same contents as in FIG. 17 will be omitted (steps 1220 to 1225, and step 1232 and thereafter). First, in FIG. 111, in step 1226-1 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. If Yes at step 1226-1 (fourth), at step 1224-2 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first closing sensor D20s is on and the second closing sensor D30s is off. It is determined (the image diagram in the upper middle of FIG. 113: the first insertion sensor D20s is turned off → on at the timing when the game medal approaches the first insertion sensor D20s). If Yes in step 1226-2 (fourth), in step 1226-3 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first closing sensor D20s is on and the second closing sensor D30s is on. Judgment (image diagram in the upper right part of FIG. 113: the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on at the timing when the game medal approaches the second insertion sensor D30s). If Yes in step 1226-3 (fourth), in step 1226-6 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on. The determination is made (the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on → off at the timing when the game medal exceeds the detection range of the first insertion sensor D20s). If Yes in step 1226-6 (fourth), in step 1226-8 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been accepted, and the credit addition process is executed. Done. Further, in step 1226-9 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is off (the image diagram in the middle and lower stages of FIG. 113). The second insertion sensor D30s is turned on → off at the timing when the medal exceeds the detection range of the second insertion sensor D30s). In the case of Yes in step 1226-9 (fourth), it is determined that the insertion of one normal game medal is completed. For example, when the bet number satisfies the specified number, the operation of the start lever D50 is enabled. Then, the process proceeds to step 1232.

<Effect 1>
In the third embodiment, an example in which the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first charging sensor D20s is off and the second charging sensor D30s is on has been described. Conventionally, the credit addition process has been executed at the timing when “the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on → the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is off”. However, by configuring as in the third embodiment, for example, in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition processing is not yet performed, but an error occurs at this timing. In the event that the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and returning the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is performed. Game medals enter the gaming machine even though the credit addition process has not been executed in time It is possible to prevent that the resulting Nde a (swallowing).

<Effect 2>
Further, since the credit addition process is not executed at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s remains off and only the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on, a position closer to the medal slot 170 than the second insertion sensor D30s is not executed. It is also possible to prevent a goto action (for example, Clemangoto) from being performed by the first input sensor D20s provided in the game machine, provide an illegally strong game machine, and eventually provide a user-friendly game machine.

<<< 3rd embodiment Subroutine by input sensor error >>>
Also, if No in Steps 1226-3 (fourth), Step 1226-6 (fourth), and Step 1226-9 (fourth), Steps 1226-4 (fourth), Step 1226-7 (fourth) In step 1226-10 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined medal insertion error occurrence condition is satisfied. The medal insertion error here includes, for example, an inserted medal backflow error, an inserted number error, an inserted medal retention error, and the like, and the ON / OFF state (including time) of sensors such as the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor. It is determined whether any error has occurred or not (the conditions for occurrence differ depending on the type of error). These errors are detected, for example, based on the detection of ON / OFF of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s in FIG. If Yes in any of Step 1226-4 (fourth), Step 1226-7 (fourth), and Step 1226-10 (fourth), medal insertion error processing is executed in Step 1226-5 (fourth). To be done. FIG. 112 is a flowchart related to a subroutine when a medal insertion error occurs. First, in step 1226-12 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M detects which error flag is ON, and in step 12226-13 (fourth), the error detection command (to the sub side) Command (a command relating to the fact that an error is detected) (for example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1226-14 (fourth). In the 1226-13 (fourth), information on an error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the ON error flag is transmitted to the sub-control board side. The error undetected command may be set only when the error is released from the state where the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag has been turned off). It is not necessary to execute the information setting process. Error processing is performed according to the type of error that has occurred.However, the error detection command may execute the set processing only when any error occurs from the state where no error has occurred. Even if the type of error is changed from a state in which a first error (for example, inserted medal retention error) has occurred to a second error (for example, payout medal retention error), the setting process is executed. Good. In step 1226-14 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the currently occurring error has been cleared. If it is determined that the error has been cleared, the error flag that is currently occurring is turned off in step 1226-15, and the subroutine ends. As described above, an example of the error detection based on the game medal detection by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s has been described. In the error detection, for example, the medal insertion port D170 in the medal selector DS. It is also possible to detect an error based on the detection of a game medal by the insertion reception sensor D10s provided in the vicinity, and an example of error detection based on the detection of a game medal by the insertion reception sensor D10s will be described below. .

<<< Third Embodiment Error Detection Based on Input Monitoring Counter >>>
<< Configuration 2 >>
An insertion receiving sensor D10s is provided as a first sensor through which game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 pass. The insertion receiving sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on dimensions and accepting only game medals that conform to standard dimensions, and determines that the game medals are not adapted by this function. The medal (or other foreign matter) that has been given is configured to be refunded to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. At this time, when it is determined that a suitable game medal has passed, the insertion receiving sensor D10s changes from off to on, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M. When the main control board M receives a signal indicating that the insertion reception sensor D10s has been turned on, the counter that counts the passing of game medals (hereinafter, referred to as an insertion monitoring counter) performs an addition process from 0 to 1. Then, the main control board M monitors the insertion of the game medals along the path in the medal selector DS, for example, at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s is turned off from on (corresponding to the timing 4 in FIG. 110). The counter performs subtraction processing of 1 → 0. At this time, for example, if there is any problem regarding the insertion of game medals in the period from 1 to 4 in the timing chart of FIG. 110, the game monitoring medal counting process of the insertion monitoring counter will not be performed normally. . For example, when the second insertion sensor D30s is not turned from ON to OFF, the insertion monitoring counter is not decremented, and the insertion monitoring counter continues to be incremented, the inserted medal retention error can be detected. Further, when the second input sensor D30s is turned off from on before the input receiving sensor D10s, and the input monitoring counter becomes negative due to the subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter being performed first, The inserted medal backflow error can be detected.

<Effect>
As described above, the configuration is made such that the error determination can be performed based on the detection of the game medal by the three sensors of the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the insertion acceptance sensor D10s. It is possible to reliably detect various errors, provide an illegally strong gaming machine, and thus provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<<< Third Embodiment Output of Medal Insertion Sound >>>>
In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound output after detecting the inserted game medal as the bet medal will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, an example in which the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first charging sensor D20s is off and the second charging sensor D30s is on has been described, but the first charging sensor D20s is off and the second charging is performed. An error may occur while the sensor D30s is turned on (for example, an inserted medal retention error due to an abnormally long time of the second insertion sensor D30s being on). In the third embodiment, since the credit addition processing is executed at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, for example, it is assumed that an error occurs after executing the credit addition processing. It In the third embodiment, particularly, the output timing of the medal insertion sound output after the credit addition processing and the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s will be described.

<< Configuration 3 >>
First, at timing A, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. More specifically, according to the timing chart of FIG. 110, it becomes 68 ms when the upper limit value of B, 115 ms, is subtracted from the upper limit value of 183 ms for the period C. In other words, during this period, the CPU C100 of the main control board M "medal insertion acceptance → set command related to medal insertion acceptance → send command to sub-control board side → set error detection command (when there is error)" By performing the processing as described above, it is possible to output the medal insertion sound before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s.

<< Configuration 4 >>
As a modification of the timing A, the timing of the credit addition processing may be made different. That is, the CPU C100 of the main control board M processes "set a command relating to medal insertion acceptance → execute credit addition processing → transmit a command to the sub control board side → set an error detection command (when there is an error)". You may go.

<Effect>
With this configuration, it is possible to receive a medal insertion at the timing when “the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on → the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on”. Such processing is executed, and a command related to medal insertion acceptance is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side by the subsequent timer interrupt processing, and a medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. . On the other hand, in the case where the above-mentioned “the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on” continues and an inserted medal retention error occurs, the inserted medal is output after the medal insertion sound has already been output. To determine that a stay error has occurred (since the state where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or more), the player outputs an error sound related to the insertion medal retention error. It is possible to check the medal insertion sound beforehand, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the player is not sure that the game medals are normally inserted due to a medal insertion error and loses the game.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, as timing B, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It is determined that there is at least 67 ms or more from when the credit addition process is performed until an error is detected in the second input sensor D30s. In this period, the CPU C100 of the main control board M is intentionally deactivated. In this configuration, the command related to the medal insertion acceptance is not transmitted to the sub-control board side. After that, after setting an error detection command based on error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s, a command related to medal insertion acceptance is transmitted to the sub-control board side. That is, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes “credit addition processing → detects an error flag → sets an error detection command → transmits an error detection command to the sub-control board side → sets a command related to medal insertion acceptance → sub-control By transmitting the command related to the medal insertion acceptance to the board side ", the medal insertion sound is output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 by the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It becomes possible to output. At this time, it is preferable that the command relating to the medal insertion acceptance is transmitted to the sub side by a timer interruption process different from that for transmitting the error detection command.

<< Configuration 6 >>
As a modification of the timing B, the timing of the credit addition process may be different. In other words, the CPU C100 of the main control board M “detects an error flag → sets an error detection command → transmits an error detection command to the sub control board side → sets a command related to medal insertion acceptance → executes credit addition processing → sub control Transmission of command related to medal insertion acceptance to substrate side "may be performed.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the inserted medal is first set at a timing when “the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is on → the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on”. It is determined that a stay error has occurred (since the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or more), and an error detection command is sent from the main control board M to the sub control board S. Is transmitted, and an error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is output. After that, after the process related to the medal insertion acceptance is executed, the command related to the medal insertion acceptance is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. Becomes When the inserted medal staying error occurs while the situation of “the first inserting sensor D20s is off and the second inserting sensor D30s is on” continues, the inserted medal staying error occurs before the medal inserting sound is output. Since it is determined that the medal insertion sound has been turned off (since the situation where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or more), the player has an error related to the inserted medal retention error before the medal insertion sound is output. The sound can be confirmed, and the player can immediately recognize that the game medal is not normally inserted.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, at timing C, the medal insertion sound is output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s and after the error is released. It is determined that there is at least 67 ms or more from when the credit addition process is performed until an error is detected in the second input sensor D30s. In this period, the CPU C100 of the main control board M is intentionally deactivated. The command relating to the reception of the medal insertion is not transmitted to the sub-control board side in the same manner as the second timing. However, after the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the insertion error flag in step 1226--15. Then, a command relating to the medal insertion acceptance is transmitted to the sub-control board side. That is, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes “Credit addition processing → detects an error flag → sets an error detection command → sends an error detection command to the sub control board side →...・ ・ → Set an error non-detection command → Send an error non-detection command to the sub-control board side → Set a command related to medal insertion reception → Send a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board side ”. By performing the execution, it is possible to output the medal shooting sound after the error is canceled.

<< Configuration 8 >>
As a modification of the timing C, the timing of the credit addition process may be different. That is, the CPU C100 of the main control board M “detects an error flag → sets an error detection command → sends an error detection command to the sub control board side →... (Error release processing during this period). Set the command → Send the error undetected command to the sub-control board side → Set the command related to the medal insertion acceptance → Execute the credit addition processing → Send the command related to the medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board side '' Is also good.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the inserted medal is first set at a timing when “the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is on → the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on”. It is determined that a stay error has occurred (since the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or more), and an error detection command is sent from the main control board M to the sub control board S. Is transmitted, and an error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is output. After the error is eliminated, an error undetected command is transmitted to the sub side, and the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is ended. After the process related to the medal insertion acceptance is executed, the command related to the medal insertion acceptance is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. Becomes When the inserted medal staying error occurs while the situation of “the first inserting sensor D20s is off and the second inserting sensor D30s is on” continues, the inserted medal staying error occurs before the medal inserting sound is output. (Since the situation in which the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or more) and the error is further eliminated and the output of the error sound ends, the player Before outputting the medal insertion sound, it is possible to check the error sound related to the insertion medal staying error and to check the medal insertion sound after the error is eliminated, so that the player can normally operate after the error is eliminated. It can be recognized that a game medal has been inserted.

<<< Third Embodiment: Medal Error Detection by Shooting Sensor >>>
Next, as a third embodiment, detection of an error using the shoot sensor D40s will be described in detail. FIG. 114 shows a flow path member (referred to as a chute body in the third embodiment) of the medal after passing through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s in the path of the game medal in the medal selector DS. It is a figure. In FIG. 114, a chute sensor D40s is provided below the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the chute sensor D40s has a normal medal insertion similarly to the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. In particular, the third embodiment is configured to detect an error (for example, an inserted medal retention error, an inserted medal backflow error, etc.) after the credit addition process has been executed. ing.

  The error detection by the shoot sensor D40s will be described in detail. For example, consider a case where game medals are accumulated further downstream of the shoot sensor D40s in the chute body communicating with the hopper H40. The width of the path of the game medals in the chute main body is approximately the width of one game medal. If one game medal stays on the path of the game medals in the chute main body, then the game medals passing through the path one after another. , And the inserted medal stays in an error state. In the third embodiment, a position where three game medals are detected by the shoot sensor D40s from the position where the game medals have stayed is a position detected by the shoot sensor D40s, but the position where the shoot sensor D40s is provided is not limited thereto.

  The detection of the game medal by the shoot sensor D40s is detected by the shoot sensor D40s when the game medal passes, similarly to the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. Is turned on, information on the time from when the shoot sensor D40s is turned on to when the shoot sensor D40s is turned off, etc.) is supplied to the main control board M. On the main control board M, the game medals are normally inserted based on the information related to the signals detected by the shoot sensor D40s and the information related to the signals detected by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. To determine. Specifically, a period from the timing when the main control board M starts the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s to the timing when the shoot sensor D40s starts the detection of the game medal, and in advance. A predetermined period (hereinafter, also referred to as a theoretical period, which is a time to be detected by the shoot sensor D40s) is compared. For example, in the case of detecting the fourth game medal in FIG. 114, the fourth game medal from the timing when the fourth game medal is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s. Is detected by the shoot sensor D40s and the theoretical period are compared, and when the difference between the periods exceeds a range in which an error is not detected, an error (shoot sensor medal in the third embodiment) is detected. Retention error) will be detected. The timing when the first insertion sensor D20s detects the game medal, the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s starts the detection of the game medal, or the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s finishes the detection of the game medal, the second insertion sensor Any of the timings when the D30s finishes detecting the game medal may be set as the theoretical timing start timing.

<< Third Embodiment Timing Chart of Game Medal Detection by Shooting Sensor >>
FIG. 115 is a timing chart when the game medals pass through the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the shoot sensor D40s. For example, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s detects passage of a game medal (off → on) at a timing 1 in the drawing. Subsequently, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passing of the game medal (off → on) at the timing 2 in FIG. Time information and the like related to these timings are supplied to the main control board M as the aforementioned signals. Thereafter, it is assumed that the shoot sensor D40s detects the passing of the game medal (from OFF to ON) at the timing 3 in FIG. A period D from when the first insertion sensor D20s detects a game medal to when the shoot sensor D40s starts detection, and a period from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects the game medal to when the shoot sensor D40s starts detection. E is calculated by the main control board M, and using these periods as theoretical periods, it is determined whether or not the game medals based on the detection of the shoot sensor D40s have normally passed through the shoot body. Further, an error that can occur after it is determined that the game medal has passed normally through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s can be detected by providing the shoot sensor D40s.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, any error (shoot sensor medal retention error) related to the passing of the game medal near the shoot sensor D40s is detected, and the player is notified that an error has occurred. Becomes possible. Further, the normal passage of the game medal by the shoot sensor D40s is determined based on the information relating to the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s start detecting the game medal, and thus the first insertion. Although the passage of the game medal is not detected by the sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, when the passage of the game medal is detected by the shoot sensor D40s, that is, the error related to the insertion medal backflow can be surely detected. This makes it possible to provide an illegally strong game machine, which in turn can provide a user-friendly game machine.

<<<<< 4th Embodiment Medal Returning Member >>>>>
Next, as a fourth embodiment, an example of a mechanism of a medal return member D340 through which game medals pass when payout of game medals to the medal tray D230 or return to the medal tray D230 will be described. .

  First, FIGS. 116 to 119 for describing the medal return member D340 according to the fourth embodiment in detail will be described. FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal returning member D340 as seen from the direction in which the medal receiving port D341 (described later) is provided. FIG. 118 is a locus diagram of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passing through the medal receiving slot D341 (described later), and flowing down toward the medal receiving tray D230. FIG. 119 shows the trajectory of the game medal inside the side view of FIG. 117.

<<< Fourth Embodiment Front View of Medal Returning Member >>>
FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340 in the fourth embodiment. As an example of the medal return member D340, a game medal (the blocker is in an off state) in which the medal selector DS that detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and performs the simple authentication is not added to the bet or the credit. When returning the game medal that has reached the blocker to the medal tray D230, the game medal passes through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter, referred to as a first flow path) and is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. The game medals pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter, referred to as a second flow path), and are finally paid out to a medal tray D230.

  The medal return member D340 passes a first flow path through which an inappropriate game medal detected by the medal selector DS is returned to the medal tray D230, and a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. The game medals that pass through the two flow paths pass through the medal return member D340 and merge when flowing down toward the medal tray D230. It is configured.

  The second flow path in the medal return member D340 has at least a medal receiving port D341 for receiving a game medal paid out from the hopper H40 and a medal falling surface D342 on which the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 falls. It is comprised so that it may have. Further, a medal non-falling surface D343 located opposite to the medal falling surface D342, a wall surface provided with a medal receiving port, and a medal falling surface D342 on which game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall. , And the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 pass through this space.

  The medal receiving slot D341 is configured to communicate with the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. Further, since the medal receiving port D341 is opened, the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 can surely pass through the medal receiving port D341. In particular, in the fourth embodiment, the periphery of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341 is referred to as an edge (for example, in the fourth embodiment, the outer peripheral portion in the shape of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341 is referred to as an edge. ). In defining the length and distance of the medal receiving opening D341, any position corresponding to the edge of the medal receiving opening D341 is set as a starting point.

  In the fourth embodiment, the shape of the medal falling surface D342 is formed in a substantially square shape, and the medal non-falling surface D343 located opposite to the medal falling surface D342 is also formed in a substantially square shape. However, the shapes of the medal falling surface D342 and the medal non-falling surface D343 are not limited thereto.

  In the fourth embodiment, the medal receiving slot D341 is provided to be inclined in the downward right direction, and a game medal that has collided with a collision portion (not shown) provided in the front view direction in FIG. 116 falls. It is configured to incline substantially in parallel with the medal falling surface D342. With this configuration, the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and dropped on the medal falling surface D342 slide down from the medal falling surface D342 due to gravity, and reliably guide the game medals to the medal tray D230. It is possible to do. Note that the direction in which the medal slot D341 and the medal falling surface D342 are inclined is not limited to this direction, and the medal slot D341 and the medal falling surface D342 may be configured so as not to incline. In addition, an inappropriate medal detected by the medal selector DS is configured to fall in the direction of the medal tray D230 from above when viewed from a player in a direction perpendicular to the above-described tilt direction of the medal receiving slot D341. .

<<< 4th embodiment Side view of medal returning member Locus diagram of game medal flow down (perspective view) >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, a description will be given of the dimension definition in the configuration of the medal receiving member of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 viewed from the direction in which the medal receiving slot D341 is provided. First, in the game medal, the thickness and the diameter are defined as a and b, respectively (see FIG. 116). The thickness a of the game medal is preferably about 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm, and the diameter b of the game medal is preferably about 24.5 mm to 25.5 mm. is there.

Next, the distance from the medal dropping surface D342 where the game medals fall after being paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 to the edge of the medal receiving port D341 is c, and the distance is perpendicular to the medal non-falling surface D343. In the direction, the longest distance from the medal non-falling surface D342 to the edge of the medal slot is d, and at the edge of the opening of the medal slot D341, at least one of the bottom or the height direction (for example, In the fourth embodiment, the length is e, which is the height direction of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341 which is substantially rectangular, and the maximum length of the medal falling surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving opening D341. The length is defined as f. In the fourth embodiment, predetermined conditions are provided for the dimensions defined as above. For example, the medal return member D340 is configured based on the following conditions.
c ≧ a (1)
b> d Expression (2)
f ≧ 2b ... Equation (3)
b> e ... Formula (4)
In the fourth embodiment, the game medal can be applied in both 25Φ size and 30Φ size.

  First, by satisfying Expressions (1) and (3), it is possible to configure so as to prevent the first game medal from colliding with the second game medal. The distance from the medal falling surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving port 341 is configured to be larger than the thickness a of the gaming medal, and the gaming medal paid out from the medal payout device H is transferred from the medal receiving port D341 to the collision portion. Since the game medal has a sufficient distance before the collision, the game medal falls freely by the weight of the game medal, and the game medal that collides with the collision part falls on the medal falling surface D342 (the game medal is sleeping). State), the collision can be prevented because the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 are out of the area through which the game medals pass.

  Next, by satisfying Expression (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 (the game medal is sleeping or standing), and thereafter, Can be configured so that the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 does not block the medal receiving slot D341. It is.

  Next, by satisfying Expression (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 in the inward direction of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and one piece that has collided with the collision portion It is possible to configure so as to prevent a situation in which the eye game medal bounces back to the medal entrance D341.

  By stipulating the dimensions in the configuration of the medal returning member D340 as in the formulas (1) to (4), smooth payout of game medals from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and smooth medal of game medals. It is possible to guide to the saucer D230. FIG. 118 is a locus diagram of game medals that are paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, pass through the medal receiving port D341, and flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230. For example, as an effect of performing the size regulation of the formulas (1) to (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and the second game paid out after that. It is possible to configure so that the medals do not collide with each other, and the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 do not block the medal receiving port D341.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 117, in this example, a protruding edge is provided on the entire outer circumference of the medal receiving port D341 on the outer side of the medal returning member D340. It may be configured to provide a protruding edge portion on the entire outer periphery of the medal receiving opening D341. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a possibility that a medal paid out from the medal payout device H collides with the collision portion and then flows back to the medal receiving slot D341.

<<< fourth embodiment Locus diagram (side view) of game medal flow down >>>
118, the trajectory of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passing through the medal receiving slot D341, and flowing down toward the medal tray D230 will be described in further detail with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 illustrates the locus of the game medals in the side view of FIG. 117. First, as shown in the upper left diagram, the first game medal is discharged from the medal receiving slot D341. Next, as shown in the upper right diagram, the second game medal is released from the medal receiving slot D341 in the same manner as the first game medal, and the first game medal is prepared in the front view direction of FIG. (Not shown). Note that the interval between the release of the first game medal from the medal receiving slot D341 and the release of the second game medal can be determined by the rotation speed of the disk H50 of the medal payout device H. Although the rotation speed can be arbitrarily determined, as shown in the upper right diagram of the fourth embodiment, after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, the second game medal is replaced with a medal. The payout device H is paid out, but the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is (1) substantially simultaneously with the timing at which the first game medal collides with the collision portion, ( 2) The timing before (immediately before) the first game medal collides with the collision portion, and (3) the timing after the first game medal collides with the collision portion, may be two. Play in the eyes Medals may adjust the distance together the f (see FIG. 117) to the timing to be paid out from the medal payout device H. In the above (2), after the first game medal has been paid out from the medal payout device H and has passed through the medal receiving port D341, the game medal has progressed in the horizontal direction by a diameter equal to or larger than the diameter of the game medal (the aforementioned b) ( Preferably, the timing is after (firing). Also, the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is the timing at which the time has elapsed since the first game medal was paid out from the medal payout device H, the more the number of one-time game medals has been paid out. The possibility that the second game medal collides with the second game medal can be reduced. On the other hand, if the time after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is too long, the payout time interval of the game medals becomes too long, and the tempo for paying out the game medals becomes too long. It gets worse. Since the size (depth) inside the housing of the gaming machine is limited, the f (the maximum length of the medal falling surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving opening D341) is also predetermined. It is difficult to secure over distance. For the above reasons, it is most preferable that the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H be the timing immediately after the first game medal collides with the collision portion. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the first game medal from colliding with the second game medal after colliding with the collision portion. It is desirable that the game medals to be paid out after the third card are configured so that the game medals do not collide with each other. At least the payout number up to the maximum payout number (for example, 15) in the gaming machine is designed. It is preferable that the game medals are configured not to collide with each other. Further, in the collision portion, in order to increase the durability of the medal returning member D340 due to the collision of the game medals, the medal returning member D340 may be configured to be protected by, for example, metal.

  Next, as shown in the lower left, after the first game medal collides with the collision portion, it falls on the medal falling surface D342. The second game medal passes above the first game medal, and heads toward the collision portion in the same manner as the first game medal. At this time, by being configured as in Expression (1), it is possible to prevent the first game medal from colliding with the second game medal. Next, as shown in the lower right section, the first game medal that has fallen on the medal falling surface D342 is inclined in the direction of inclination of the medal falling surface D342 by gravity, and falls from the medal falling surface D342 to the medal tray D230. Is induced. The second game medal falls on the medal falling surface D342 in the same manner as the first game medal after colliding with the collision portion. At this time, since the first game medal is configured to be inclined by gravity in the direction of inclination of the medal falling surface D342, the first game medal collides with the second game medal. It is possible to prevent a medal that has collided with the collision part and bounced back into the opening of the medal receiving slot D341.

<< Effect 1 >>
The second game medal is released toward the collision portion from the medal receiving port D341, and the first game medal falls on the medal falling surface D342 after colliding with the collision portion. At this time, the formulas (1) and (3) are configured to be satisfied, in other words, the distance from the medal falling surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving opening 341 is configured to be larger than the thickness a of the game medal. Since the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H have a sufficient distance from the medal receiving port D341 to collide with the collision portion, the game medals fall freely by the weight of the game medals. When the game medal that collides with the collision portion falls on the medal falling surface D342 (in a state where the game medal is sleeping), the game medal to be paid out next from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 falls out of the area where the game medal passes. Therefore, collision can be prevented.

<< Effect 2 >>
For example, by being configured as in Expressions (2) and (4), it is possible to prevent a backflow in which medals that have collided with the collision portion and bounced into the opening of the medal receiving slot D341. Can be provided.

<< Effect 3 >>
For example, by being configured as in Expression (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 in the inward direction of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the collision 1 It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a situation where the second game medal bounces back to the medal reception slot D341.

<< Effect 4 >>
The first game medal that has fallen on the medal fall surface D342 falls from the medal fall surface D342 and flows down toward the medal tray D230, and the second game medal is a lower left diagram in FIG. 119. As described above, the first game medal falls on the medal falling surface D342 at substantially the same position as the position where the first game medal has fallen. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 are not paid out to the medal tray D230 due to staying near the medal receiving slot D341. A gaming machine can be provided.

<< Effect 5 >>
A gaming machine is provided which has a cushioning material for cushioning an impact portion at which a game medal paid out with a speed from the medal payout device H collides, thereby preventing damage and deterioration of the medal return member D340. can do.

<< Effect 6 >>
The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 once collide with the collision portion and lose the momentum at the time of the payout, so that the game medals collide (the game medals returned from the medal selector DS and the hopper H40). A collision with a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H or a collision between game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40) occurs, and the game medal flows down to the non-rhythmic medal tray D230. Can be prevented, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

<<<< Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Payout Device >>>>
<<< 5th Embodiment Timing chart of drive control of medal payout device >>>
Next, drive control of the medal payout device H will be described as a fifth embodiment. First, the operation control of the medal payout apparatus H will be described with reference to FIG. 120 is a timing chart relating to the detection of the hopper motor H80, which is driven when the game medals are paid out from the medal payout device H, and the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s. First, in the hopper motor H80, it is assumed that the hopper drive flag is on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven. When game medals are paid out by the medal payout device H, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 about the disk rotation axis H50a. Is displaced and flows down from the game medal exit H60 toward the discharge port D240, whereby the game medal is paid out. In the fifth embodiment, the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are detected to be on or off based on, for example, the displacement of the discharge urging means H70. Specifically, at the timing 1 in the drawing, the first payout sensor H10s is turned on in a state where the discharge urging means H70 has not been displaced to the position where the game medal is paid out (referred to as an initial position in the fifth embodiment). Is transmitted to the main control board M. Then, the displacement is started to a position where the discharge urging means H70 pays out the game medals, and the signal indicating that the first payout sensor H10s is in an off state when the discharge urging means H70 starts moving from the initial position is main controlled. Transmit to the substrate M. A signal indicating that the second payout sensor H10s is in the ON state when the discharge biasing means H70 is displaced to the position for paying out the game medal (referred to as the payout position in the fifth embodiment) at the timing 2 in the figure. To the main control board M. At the timing 3 in the drawing, the payout of the game medal is completed, and the signal indicating that the second payout sensor H10s is in the off state by the discharge urging means H70 starting to move to the initial position again is mainly controlled. Transmit to the substrate M. Then, at the timing 4 in the figure, the signal indicating that the first dispensing sensor H10s is on is transmitted to the main control board M by the discharge urging means H70 being displaced to the initial position again. In the fifth embodiment, for example, the period from the timing 1 to the timing 2 is a predetermined range A (A <26 ms), and the period from the timing 2 to the timing 3 is a predetermined range B (9 ms ≦ B <60 ms), and by detecting that the period from the timing 3 to the timing 4 is within the predetermined range C (9 ms ≦ C <60), the medal payout device H functions normally, It is determined that a special game medal will be paid out.

<<< Fifth Embodiment Medal Payout of Medal Payout Apparatus to Stop of Medal Payout Apparatus >>>>
<< Configuration >>
Next, a series of flows from the start of the medal payout by the medal payout device H of the fifth embodiment to the stop of the medal payout device H will be described with reference to FIG. First, referring to FIG. 121, in the fifth embodiment, in order to simplify the description of the series of steps from the payout of game medals to the stop of the medal payout device H, medals unnecessary for the configuration of the fifth embodiment. The configuration related to the dispensing device H is eliminated as much as possible. FIG. 121 is a front view of a disk H50 that is driven to rotate when paying out game medals.

  In the fifth embodiment, the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is five. The disc H50 has a plurality of circular cavities having a size larger than that of the game medal, and the disc H50 is configured to cover and overlap the game medal. The game medal is placed under the disc H50 by the rotation of the disc H50. By moving, the game medals are paid out from the outlet D240. First, in the upper left diagram, the hopper motor H80 is not driven and the first payout sensor H10s is on. This state is the initial position in the discharge biasing means H70 in the fifth embodiment, and for the sake of clarity of explanation, the initial position before rotation of the disk H50 (disk H50) is provided on the outer periphery of the disk H50. To do. This initial position (disc H50) is displaced in the rotation direction of the disc H50 each time a game medal is paid out. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, and further description will be given from the timing of paying out the fourth game medal.

  In the upper diagram of FIG. 121, the driving of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed rotation, and the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fourth game medal. At this time, at the initial position (disk H50), it can be seen that the game medal has been rotated by the angle A from the position where the third game medal was paid out. That is, when the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is the constant speed state, the disk H50 rotates by the angle A until the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the dispensing position. Further, the disk H50 does not rotate until the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the dispensing position to the initial position.

  Next, in the lower left part of FIG. 121, the driving of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed rotation, and the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fifth game medal. At this time, after the fourth game medal is paid out, the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the payout position to the initial position, but during this time, the disc H50 is not rotating, so that the fourth game medal is issued. It can be seen that the player has rotated by the angle A from the position where the fourth game medal was paid out in the same manner as when the player paid out the game medal.

  After the payout of the fifth game medal is performed as shown in the lower right section, the drive of the hopper motor H80 is turned off, and the payout of the game medal is completed. After the drive of the hopper motor H80 is turned off, the rotation of the disk H50 is stopped. However, the initial position (disk H50) is a position shifted in the rotation direction by an angle B from the position at which the fifth game medal is paid out. Stop. As a reason for such a configuration, particularly when paying out the first game medal, the hopper motor H80 does not immediately enter the constant speed state from the start of driving, but takes a predetermined time until the constant speed state. It costs. In other words, if the ejection urging means H70 is at the initial position when paying out the first medal (the hopper motor H80 is in the acceleration state to the constant speed state), the second and subsequent sheets (the hopper motor H80 is in the constant speed state) As compared with the case where the game medal is paid out, the hopper motor H80 is delayed by the acceleration state.

  Here, the process from the stop of the hopper motor H80 to the payout of the first game medal will be described in detail. When the hopper motor H80 is driven, the hopper motor H80 changes from a stopped state to a constant speed state via an acceleration state. Here, the rotation speed in the constant speed state is assumed to be A (m / t). The acceleration state is a state in which the acceleration process is performed from the speed 0 to the constant speed A, and the average rotation speed in the period from the speed 0 to the constant speed state (acceleration state) is B (m / t). ), B <A. Therefore, the average rotation speed C (m / t) from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is B <C <A.

  Next, from the payout of the first game medal to the payout of the second game medal will be described in detail. Since the hopper motor H80 is in the constant speed state at the time when the first game medal is paid out, it is in the constant speed state from when the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out. Will remain. Therefore, the average rotation speed from the payout of the first game medal to the payout of the second game medal is A.

  As described above, the second game after the payout of the first game medal is higher than the average rotation speed C from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out. Since the average rotation speed A until the medal is paid out is faster, the distance the disc H50 rotates from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out, and the first game If the distance that the disc H50 rotates after the medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out is the same distance, the first game from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped. The time required for the medal to be paid out is longer than the time required for the first game medal to be paid out and the second game medal to be paid out. .

  As shown in FIG. 121, in this example, after the last game medal (fifth game medal in the same drawing) is paid out as a game medal payout process, the disc H50 is set at a predetermined angle ( In the fifth embodiment, the rotation is stopped in the rotation direction by the angle B) (the rotation distance is increased). With this configuration, the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is set to 2 discs after the first game medal is paid out. The distance that the disc H50 rotates before the third game medal is paid out (the same distance that the disc H50 rotates from the time when the second game medal is paid out to the time when the third game medal is paid out. ), The time required from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is the second game after the first game medal is paid out. It will be possible to approximate (approximate) the time required until the medals are paid out, and by paying out the game medals at a good tempo, the player can play the game without feeling uncomfortable. It can proceed.

  The width (angle B) of the deviation in the rotation direction when the disk H50 stops after the driving of the hopper motor H80 depends on the period from the acceleration state to the constant speed state by the driving of the hopper motor H80. During this period, by taking into account the difference between the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the accelerated state and the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the constant speed state, the ejection urging means H70 ejects the disk H50 after driving the hopper motor H80. The amount of deviation from the initial position in the rotation direction to stop is determined. The difference between the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the accelerated state and the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the constant speed state corresponds to the dispensing position of the discharge urging means H70 from the position corresponding to the initial position of the discharge urging means H70 of the hopper motor H80. It is preferable that the angle B is sufficiently smaller than the angle A because the width is sufficiently smaller than the width up to the position where the angle A is. It should be noted that even when the rotation is shifted by the angle B in the rotation direction, the detection of the game medals by the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s is not affected, and the timing chart of FIG. Based on this, the game medals are detected.

<< Effects >>
With this configuration, when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out by a player who receives payout of game medals, the player can receive payout of game medals at substantially constant intervals from the first to the predetermined number. For example, by combining the configuration according to the fifth embodiment and the configuration according to the fourth embodiment, (1) game medals do not collide, and (2) medal clogging due to collision between game medals does not occur. It is possible to configure and play the game smoothly.

  In addition, after the last game medal is paid out, the disc H50 is configured to be deviated in the rotational direction by a predetermined angle (angle B in the fifth embodiment) to be stopped, so that the unauthorized device is ejected from the discharge port D240. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is illegally obtained by invading.

<<<<< Sixth embodiment control when communication between main control board and sub control board is not possible >>>>>
Next, as a sixth embodiment, a process when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disabled will be described. The case where the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disabled here is based on the assumption that various commands set from the main control board M to the sub-control board S cannot be transmitted. I have. For example, in the game progress control processing of FIG. 16, the main control board M transmits various commands related to the game to the sub-control board side based on the progress of the game and the like. In addition, as a process related to the subroutine, various commands are periodically sent from the main control board side to the sub control board side with a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, for example, a time of about 2 ms is set). Is configured to be transmitted. The sub-control board S is configured to receive various commands transmitted from the main control board M and execute an effect based on the commands. The communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is one-way from the main control board side, and the sub control board S can receive commands from the main control board M, It is configured so that it is impossible to send a command to The gaming machine has programs related to execution processing on the main control board M and the sub-control board S (the program of the main control board M is called a main-side program, and the program of the sub-control board S is called a sub-side program). For example, the sub-side program is configured such that the sub-control board S executes an effect by receiving a predetermined command from the main control board M as a trigger. That is, under the condition that the command cannot be received from the main control board M, the sub control board S cannot execute the processing configured in the sub-side program. As a case where a situation in which the sub-control board S cannot receive a command from the main control board M may occur, for example, a member due to poor contact of a harness for electrically connecting the main control board M and the sub-control board S may be used. There is a problem. However, even if the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible, the main-side program of the main control board M that controls the progress of the game can be executed. The game itself according to the main program is configured to be executable even when communication with the sub-control board S is disabled. Further, when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored from the situation where communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disabled, the progress of the program on the main side is determined. On the basis of this, a command related to processing after communication is restored is transmitted from the main control board side to the sub control board side, and the sub control board S receives a command related to processing after communication received from the main control board M is restored. The processing is executed based on. In the following, when communication with the sub control board S is disabled while various commands are being executed by the main control board M with reference to FIGS. An example of processing performed on the control board S will be described as a sixth embodiment.

<<< Sixth embodiment When the processing command and the channel are one-to-one with each other when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to settlement >>>
FIG. 122 shows a time-series flow of processing as an example of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disabled during execution of processing related to settlement. First, it is assumed that the number of games is a predetermined number of games, starting from the Nth game and starting from the (N + 1) th game. In the sixth embodiment, as a process performed by the main control board M, in particular, a command based on the progress of the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and a process performed by the sub-control board S is received from the main control board M. Executing an effect based on the given command is a set of processes (one order in the sixth embodiment). The sub-control board S does not execute an effect based on all commands received from the main control board M, and may execute an effect based on the received command, or may not execute an effect. is there. For example, in FIGS. 122 to 126, the sub-control board S executes the effect for each command transmitted by the main control board M as an example. However, when the effect is executed based on the reception of each command. In addition, there is a case that the production is not executed in some cases. When the settlement button is operated to execute the settlement of the credit in a situation where there is one or more credits, a sound during the settlement corresponding to the settlement of the game medal is output from the speaker S20 from the speaker S20. However, it is assumed that the audio channel that outputs the sound being adjusted is a channel corresponding to only the sound being adjusted. For example, the sub-control board S performs an effect based on a command received from the main control board M. In particular, when executing processing for outputting sound from the speaker S20, the sub-control board S receives the command from the main control board M. The associated command is associated with the audio channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sound is output from the speaker S20 from the sound channel corresponding to the received command. Note that the command and the audio channel need not have a one-to-one relationship. Specifically, one audio channel may be associated with a plurality of commands (for example, a command for starting adjustment and a plurality of commands for detecting a predetermined error). With this configuration, it is possible to output audio without increasing the number of channels even when the number of commands related to audio output increases.

<< Configuration 1 >>
FIG. 122 will be described in detail. First, as a processing order 1, the main control board M transmits a command based on the start of settlement to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the sound under settlement from the speaker S20 based on the received command. << Sixth Embodiment Processing when Disconnecting Communication between Main Control Board and Sub-Control Board During Execution of Processing Related to Payment When Command and Channel are One-to-One >> It is assumed that only the command related to the start of the settlement corresponds to the channel, and the other commands do not correspond. The communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off while the sub control board S is outputting the sound during the settlement. At this time, for example, as a case where the communication is disconnected, the electrical connection between the main control board M and the sub control board S such as a connection failure of a harness or the like that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S. The case where the specific communication is disconnected is not limited to this. Any case may be used as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the sound during the settlement, the main control board M executes the settlement processing based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed. By judging, the command relating to the end of the settlement is transmitted to the sub-control board side, and the sub-control board S receives the command relating to the termination of the settlement from the main control board M, thereby outputting the sound during the settlement. Execute the process to end.

  In order 2, the main control board M transmits a command for terminating the settlement to the sub-control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M is settled. Cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. Note that the main control board M and the sub control board M and the sub control board M execute the settlement processing based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button and determine that the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed. The communication with the board S is in a disconnected state, but the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is in progress.

  The main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and after the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. . At this time, the sub control board S has not received the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the processing related to the settlement has ended, and the Nth game Sets the command related to the next process.

  In order 3, when the game of the Nth game is started and it is determined that the game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command relating to the medal insertion reception to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, and outputs the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M. Since reception cannot be performed, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N game.

  In order 4, when determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation based on the reception of the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, while receiving a command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M. Since it is not possible, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

  In order 5, by determining that the rotation of the reel is started by the operation of the start lever, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on the reception of the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, and receives a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M. Since it is impossible, the output of the sound being adjusted is continued without terminating the output of the sound being adjusted. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game.

  As the order 6, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is completed and the player can perform the reel stop operation. By determining that the stop operation of the first reel (the first reel is the reel on which the player first performs the stop operation among the plurality of reels) is received, the main control board M sets the first reel The command relating to the reception of the stop operation is transmitted to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the end command cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next processing of the N game.

  As the order 7, it is determined that the stop operation of the second reel (the second reel is the reel on which the player performs the stop operation second among the plurality of reels) has been received, and the main control board M Transmits a command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the end command cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the reception of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next processing of the N game.

  As the order 8, by determining that the stop operation of the third reel (the third reel is the reel among the plurality of reels for which the player performs the stop operation third) is accepted, the main control board M Transmits a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, and Since the end command cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process relating to the reception of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the N game. As a command to be set at this time, all reels are stopped, and a command relating to stop of the stop display symbol is transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as a display symbol stop. As a command for the sub-control board S to output a sound based on a command from the control board M, a winning combination (for example, a push-bell combination) for which a game medal is paid out in the Nth game is determined, and a reel stop operation is performed. Based on, the command relating to the case where the symbol combination related to the condition device that has been won is stopped and displayed (in the sixth embodiment, the “command related to winning”), etc. are transmitted (as a command for the next process of the N game). It is also possible to configure.

  As the order 9, by determining that the stop operation of all the reels has been performed, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbol to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the command relating to the stop of the stop display symbol, based on the reception of the command relating to the stop of the stop display symbol, and outputs a command relating to the termination of the settlement from the main control substrate M. Since reception cannot be performed, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the stop of the stop display symbol has been completed, and ends the processing related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, a situation has occurred in which the sub-control board S cannot be received from the main control board M due to the temporary disconnection of both communications. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the main control board M from the sub-control board S is a command relating to the end of settlement, and in the period from the insertion of the N-th game medal to the stop operation of all reels. It is configured to continue outputting the sound being settled without ending the output of the sound being settled.

  Next, the processing proceeds to order 10 and order 11 as the (N + 1) th game item. As Order 10, as in Order 1 in the Nth game, the main control board M transmits a command for starting settlement to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the sound under settlement from the speaker S20 based on the received command. At this time, the sound during the settlement output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the sound during the settlement output in the Nth game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button in the (N + 1) -th game from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S receives the settlement of the N + 1 game received from the main control board M. The output of the sound during the settlement is started based on the command related to the start, while the output of the sound is ended during the settlement of the Nth game. (Sound output → Receive command for start of settlement for N + 1 game → End output of sound during settlement for Nth game → Start output of sound during settlement for N + 1 game)).

  In order 11, when the main control board M executes the payment process based on the detection of the operation of the payment button and determines that the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed, the main control board M issues the command related to the termination of the payment. Transmit to the sub-control board side. The sub-control board S executes a process of terminating the output of the sound during the settlement for the (N + 1) th game based on the received command.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected during the execution of the processing accompanied by the sound output, the player Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that a problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, since the game is configured to be able to proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game as an error, the game machine is not temporarily turned off due to an error or the like. By returning the communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of terminating the output of the sound while the game is proceeding.

<<< Sixth Embodiment Processing Command and Channel When Communication is Disconnected between Main Control Board and Sub Control Board During Execution of Processing Related to Settlement >>
<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, FIG. 123 will be described in detail. First, as a processing order 1, the main control board M transmits a command based on the start of settlement to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the sound under settlement from the speaker S20 based on the received command. << Sixth Embodiment Processing When Disconnecting Communication Between Main Control Board and Sub-Control Board During Execution of Processing Related to Payment When Command and Channel are Not One-to-One >> The channel supports not only the command based on the detection of the operation of the checkout button but also other commands (here, "error detection command by detecting door open error flag"). The communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off while the sub control board S is outputting the sound during the settlement. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the sound during the settlement, the main control board M executes the settlement processing based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed. By judging, the command relating to the end of the settlement is transmitted to the sub-control board side, and the sub-control board S receives the command relating to the termination of the settlement from the main control board M, thereby outputting the sound during the settlement. Execute the process to end.

  In order 2, the main control board M transmits a command for terminating the settlement to the sub-control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M is settled. Cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. Note that the main control board M and the sub control board M and the sub control board M execute the settlement processing based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button and determine that the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed. The communication with the board S is in a disconnected state, but the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is in progress.

  The main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and after the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. . At this time, the sub control board S has not received the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the processing related to the settlement has ended, and the Nth game Sets the command related to the next process.

  In order 3, when the game of the Nth game is started and it is determined that the game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command relating to the medal insertion reception to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, and outputs the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M. Since reception cannot be performed, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N game.

  In order 4, when determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation based on the reception of the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, while receiving a command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M. Since it is not possible, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

  In order 5, by determining that the rotation of the reel is started by the operation of the start lever, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on the reception of the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, and receives a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M. Since it is impossible, the output of the sound being adjusted is continued without terminating the output of the sound being adjusted. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game.

  As the order 6, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is completed and the player can perform the reel stop operation. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been received, the main control board M transmits a command related to the first reel stop operation reception to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the first reel stop operation acceptance based on the reception of the command related to the first reel stop operation acceptance from the main control board M, while the main control board M calculates Since the command related to the termination cannot be received, the output of the sound during the close-up is continued without ending the output of the sound during the close-up. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next processing of the N game.

  In order 7, by determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been received, the main control board M transmits a command relating to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the end command cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the reception of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next processing of the N game.

  In order 8, when determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been received, the main control board M transmits a command relating to the reception of the third reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, and Since the end command cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process relating to the reception of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the N game. As a command set at this time, a stop operation of all reels is performed, and a command related to stop of a stop display symbol transmitted immediately after a stop button is operated as a display symbol stop is exemplified. It is also possible to configure so that the sub-control board S transmits a command related to winning, etc. as a command for outputting sound based on a command from the control board M (as a command of the next processing of the N game).

  As the order 9, by determining that the stop operation of all the reels has been performed, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbol to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the command relating to the stop of the stop display symbol, based on the reception of the command relating to the stop of the stop display symbol, and outputs a command relating to the termination of the settlement from the main control substrate M. Since reception cannot be performed, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the stop of the stop display symbol has been completed, and ends the processing related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, a situation has occurred in which the sub-control board S cannot be received from the main control board M due to the temporary disconnection of both communications. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the main control board M from the sub-control board S is a command relating to the end of settlement, and in the period from the insertion of the N-th game medal to the stop operation of all reels. It is configured to continue outputting the sound being settled without ending the output of the sound being settled.

  Next, as the (N + 1) th game, the process proceeds to order 10. It is assumed that a predetermined error has occurred in order 10. As an error at this time, a door opening error will be described as an example, but the content of the error is not limited to this, and any error such as a charging abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a charging reception sensor retention error, etc. Good. When the main control board M determines that the door opening error occurs due to the front door DU being opened, the main control board M sends an error detection command to the sub control board S by detecting the door opening error flag. The sub-control board S performs processing to output a door opening error notification sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the error detection command by detecting the door opening error flag. Here, as described above, the command based on the detection of the settlement button and the error detection command based on the detection of the door opening error flag are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sub-control board S receives the error detection command by the detection of the door opening error flag in the N + 1th game while the output of the sound which is being settled from the Nth game is continued, so that the Nth game is performed. The sound output is ended during the settlement and the door opening error notification sound in the N + 1th game is started to be output.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected during the execution of the processing accompanied by the sound output, the player Since the output is not completed, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
Also, when an error occurs, for example, by associating the audio channel output from the speaker S20 with a plurality of commands such as a command related to error detection, an error notification sound is output reliably, and an error is output to the player. To provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of surely notifying that the event has occurred and returning to communication between the two so that sound output can be terminated while the game is proceeding. Can be.

<<< Sixth Embodiment Processing Command and Channel When Communication is Disconnected between Main Control Board and Sub-Control Board During Period in Which Minimum Game Time has Not Elapsed >>
<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, FIG. 124 will be described in detail. In particular, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disabled during a period in which the minimum game time from the operation of the start lever D50 to the start of reel rotation has not elapsed. The flow of the processing in the case where it is performed will be described. First, as the processing order 1, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect (hereinafter, referred to as a weight sound) related to the start lever operation from the speaker S20 based on receiving the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M. << Sixth embodiment Processing command at the time of communication disconnection between the main control board and the sub-control board during the period when the minimum game time has not elapsed and the case where the command and the channel are 1: 1 >>, a wait sound is output. As for the audio channel, only commands related to the start lever operation are supported, and other commands are not supported. Then, while the sub control board S is outputting the wait sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. At this time, for example, as a case where the communication is disconnected, the electrical connection between the main control board M and the sub control board S such as a connection failure of a harness or the like that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S. The case where the specific communication is disconnected is not limited to this. Any case may be used as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the wait sound, the main control board M is ready to start the reel rotation based on the start lever operation (here, the reel rotation start standby state). (Hereinafter referred to as “start”), a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state is transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state, and It is configured to execute a process of ending the output of the sound.

  In order 2, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. However, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M M cannot send a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, it continues outputting the weight sound without ending the output of the weight sound. Note that, while the main control board M is executing the process related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in the disconnected state. However, the process performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is in progress.

  After the main control board M completes the processing related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub control board S has not received the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, but the main control board M has completed the process related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. Then, the command relating to the next process of the Nth game is set.

  In order 3, by determining that the rotation of the reel has been started by the operation of the start lever, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reel rotation start based on the reception of the command related to the reel rotation start from the main control board M, while the main control board M relates to the reel rotation start standby state start. Since the command cannot be received, the wait sound output is continued without ending the wait sound output. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game.

  In order 4, it is assumed that the processing related to the start of rotation of the reels has been completed, and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been received, the main control board M transmits a command related to the first reel stop operation reception to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the first reel stop operation acceptance based on the command related to the first reel stop operation acceptance received from the main control board M, while the main control board M rotates the reel. Since the command related to the start standby state start cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next processing of the N game.

  In order 5, by determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been received, the main control board M transmits a command relating to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the main control board M rotates the reel. Since the command relating to the start standby state start cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the reception of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next processing of the N game.

  In order 6, when determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been received, the main control board M transmits a command relating to the reception of the third reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the main control board M rotates the reel. Since the command relating to the start standby state start cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process relating to the reception of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the N game. As a command set at this time, a stop operation of all reels is performed, and a command related to stop of a stop display symbol transmitted immediately after a stop button is operated as a display symbol stop is exemplified. It is also possible to configure so that the sub-control board S transmits a command related to winning, etc. as a command for outputting sound based on a command from the control board M (as a command of the next processing of the N game).

  As the sequence 7, by determining that the stop operation of all the reels has been performed, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbol to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the stop of the stop display symbol based on the reception of the command relating to the stop of the stop display symbol, and outputs the command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M. Since reception is not possible, the output of the wait sound is continued without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the stop of the stop display symbol has been completed, and ends the processing related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, a situation has occurred in which the sub-control board S cannot be received from the main control board M due to the temporary disconnection of both communications. At this time, the command that has not been received from the sub-control board S from the main control board M is a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state, and is a command from the game medal insertion of the Nth game to the stop operation of all reels. During the period, the output of the weight sound is continued without terminating the output of the weight sound.

  Next, the processing proceeds to order 8 and order 9 as the (N + 1) th game item. In order 8, by determining that the game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command relating to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, and starts the reel rotation of the Nth game from the main control board M. Since the command relating to the start of the standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next processing of the (N + 1) th game.

  In order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a wait sound based on the reception of the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. At this time, the weight sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the weight sound output in the Nth game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state in the (N + 1) th game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the sub control board S receives the reel rotation of the (N + 1) th game received from the main control board M. The output of the wait sound is started based on the command related to the start standby state start, while the output of the wait sound related to the Nth game is ended (the output of the wait sound related to the Nth game is performed as a process of the sub control board S). → A command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state for the (N + 1) th game is received → output of the weight sound for the (N + 1) th game is started → output of the weight sound for the (N + 1) th game is started).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected during the execution of the processing accompanied by the sound output, the player Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that a problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, since the game is configured to be able to proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game as an error, the game machine is not temporarily turned off due to an error or the like. By returning the communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of terminating the output of the sound while the game is proceeding.

<<< Sixth Embodiment Processing When Disconnecting Communication Between Main Control Board and Sub-Control Board During Execution of Payout Processing When Command and Channel are Not One-to-One >>>>
<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, FIG. 125 will be described in detail. Here, a description will be given of a flow of processing in a case where communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disabled in a state where game medals are paid out from the hopper H40. First, as a processing order 1, in a case where a winning combination (for example, a push order bell combination) in which a game medal is paid out in the Nth game wins and a game medal is paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M sets the hopper H40. A command relating to the start of payout of medals is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs, from the speaker S20, a sound effect related to the payout of the game medals (hereinafter referred to as a medal payout sound) based on receiving the command related to the start of the medal payout from the hopper H40. << Sixth Embodiment When the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during communication of the payout processing, the command and the channel are not one-to-one >> It is assumed that not only the command related to the medal payout start from the hopper H40, but also other commands are supported (herein, “command related to start lever operation”). Then, while the sub control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. When the sub control board S finishes outputting the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out for the winning, and pays out the number of game medals from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the winning. By determining that the command has been issued, the command related to the end of payout of the game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the end of the medal payout from the hopper H40, The processing for ending the output of the medal payout sound is executed.

  In order 2, the command related to the end of the medal payout from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S. However, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M is in the hopper H40. Cannot send a command relating to the termination of the medal payout to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of the medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the medal payout sound is continuously output without terminating the medal payout sound. Incidentally, the main control board M counts the number of payout game medals related to the winning prize, and while the judgment of paying out the game medals from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the winning prize is finished, the main control board of the game progresses. The processing performed by the control board M is in progress.

  After the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out for the prize and determines that the number of game medals has been paid out from the hopper H40 to be paid out for the prize, the main control board M and the sub control The communication with the substrate S is restored. At this time, the sub control board S has not received the command relating to the medal payout end from the main control board M, but the main control board M is paid out from the hopper H40 of the number of game medals to be paid out by the winning. Since it has been determined that this is the case, the processing of the Nth game is completed, and the command relating to the N + 1th game is set.

  Next, as the (N + 1) th game, the processing proceeds to order 3 and order 4. As the order 3, by determining that the game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion acceptance to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, while the medal payout of the Nth game from the main control board M ends. , The output of the medal payout sound is continued without terminating the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next processing of the (N + 1) th game.

  In order 4, the main control board M sends a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a wait sound based on the reception of the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. Here, as described above, the command related to the start of payout of medals from the hopper H40 and the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sub-control board S receives the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state in the N + 1th game while the output of the medal payout sound is continued from the Nth game, and thus the medal payout in the Nth game. The output of the sound is ended, and the output of the weight sound in the (N + 1) th game is started.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected during the execution of the processing accompanied by the sound output, the player Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that a problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, by associating with a plurality of commands such as a command relating to the progress of the game, the communication between the two is restored, so that the output of voice can be terminated while the game is proceeding, and a user-friendly game. Machine can be provided.

<<< Sixth Embodiment Processing When Disconnecting Communication Between Main Control Board and Sub Control Board During Execution of Payout Processing When Command and Channel are One-to-One >>>>
<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, FIG. 126 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, the main control board M and the sub-control board S are connected to each other for a predetermined period from the state where the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40 (here, the rotation of the reels is started (the acceleration processing is performed)). The flow of processing when communication is disabled will be described. First, as a processing order 1, in a case where a winning combination (for example, a push order bell combination) in which a game medal is paid out in the Nth game wins and a game medal is paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M sets the hopper H40. A command relating to the start of payout of medals is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on receiving the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40. << Sixth Embodiment Processing When Disconnecting Communication Between Main Control Board and Sub-Control Board During Execution of Payout Processing In the Case of One-to-One Correspondence between Commands and Channels >> It is assumed that only the command related to the start of the medal payout is supported, and other commands are not supported. Then, while the sub control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out for the prize, and pays out the number of game medals from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the prize. By determining that the game medal has been paid out from the hopper H40, the sub-control board S transmits a command related to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40. Thus, the processing for terminating the output of the medal payout sound is executed.

  In order 2, the command relating to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M It is not possible to send a command relating to the end of payout of medals from the hopper H40 to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of the medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the medal payout sound is continuously output without terminating the medal payout sound. Incidentally, the main control board M counts the number of payout game medals related to the winning prize, and while the judgment of paying out the game medals from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the winning prize is finished, the main control board of the game progresses. The processing performed by the control board M is in progress.

  Next, as the (N + 1) th game, the processing proceeds from order 3 to order 10. In order 3, by determining that the game medal has been inserted through the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion acceptance to the sub control board S, but the main control board M and the sub control board Since the communication with S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M cannot send a command related to medal insertion acceptance to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, it cannot output the medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, but does not finish outputting the medal payout sound. Continue outputting medals payout sound. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is in a disconnected state, the sub-control board S is in a state where it cannot receive the command related to the medal payout completion and the command related to the medal insertion reception from the hopper H40. Therefore, the state of outputting only the medal payout sound continues.

  In order 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S, but the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is performed. Is in a disconnected state, the main control board M cannot transmit a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S cannot output the sound effect related to the start lever operation, but the medal payout without ending the medal payout sound. Continue to output the payout sound. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is in a disconnected state, the sub-control board S uses the command related to the end of the medal payout from the hopper H40, the command related to the medal insertion reception, and the start lever operation. Since such a command cannot be received, the state of outputting only the medal payout sound continues.

  In order 5, the main control board M sends a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in the disconnected state, the main control board M M cannot send a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. At this time, the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, and thus cannot output the wait sound, but does not end the medal payout sound without terminating the medal payout sound. Continue the output of That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is in a disconnected state, the sub-control board S relates to a command relating to the medal payout termination from the hopper H40, a command relating to the medal insertion reception, and a command relating to the start lever operation. Since the command and the command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state cannot be received, the state of outputting only the medal payout sound continues.

  After determining that the main control board M has started the reel rotation start standby state, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S receives from the main control board M a command from the hopper H40 for the medal payout end, a command for the medal insertion acceptance, a command for the start lever operation, and a command for the start of the reel rotation start standby state. Although not completed, the main control board M determines that it is ready to start the rotation of the reel based on the operation of the start lever, and sets a command relating to the next process of the N + 1 game.

  In order 6, when the main control board M determines that the rotation of the reel has started by the operation of the start lever, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on the reception of the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S ends the medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M. Since such a command cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without terminating the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start of reel rotation has ended, and sets a command related to the next processing of the (N + 1) th game.

  As Sequence 7, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is finished and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been received, the main control board M transmits a command related to the first reel stop operation reception to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the first reel stop operation acceptance based on the reception of the command related to the first reel stop operation acceptance from the main control board M, while the main control board M causes the hopper H40. Since the command relating to the medal payout end from is not received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the acceptance of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command relating to the next processing of the (N + 1) th game.

  In order 8, when determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been received, the main control board M transmits a command relating to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S outputs the sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation. Since the command relating to the end of the medal payout cannot be received from the player, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without terminating the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the reception of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next processing of the N + 1 game.

  In Step 9, by determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S outputs the hopper H40 from the main control board M to the hopper H40. Since the command relating to the end of the medal payout cannot be received from the player, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without terminating the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process relating to the reception of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the N game. Note that the following processing of the (N + 1) th game is a command related to the start of payout of medals from the hopper H40 for the sake of simplicity, but during this time, the command transmitted by the main control board M to the sub-control board S is For example, it is also possible to transmit a command related to stopping the stop display symbol or a command related to winning.

  In order 10, when a winning combination (e.g., a bell in the pushing order) in which a game medal is paid out in the (N + 1) th game is determined, and the game medal is paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M transmits the game medal from the hopper H40. A command relating to the start of payout of game medals is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on receiving the medal payout start command from the hopper H40. At this time, the medal payout sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the medal payout sound output in the Nth game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command related to the start of payout of medals from the hopper H40 in the (N + 1) th game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the sub control board S receives the hopper of the (N + 1) th game received from the main control board M. The output of the medal payout sound starts based on the command related to the start of the medal payout from H40, while the output of the medal payout sound related to the Nth game ends. Output of medal payout sound → Receive command of medal payout start from hopper H40 pertaining to N + 1 game → End output of medal payout sound pertaining to Nth game → Start outputting medal payout sound pertaining to N + 1 game Become).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected during the execution of the processing accompanied by the sound output, the player Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that a problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, since the game is configured to be able to proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game as an error, the game machine is not temporarily turned off due to an error or the like. By returning the communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of terminating the output of the sound while the game is proceeding.

<< Configuration related to the number that can be applied to this example >>
Here, the configuration relating to the number of internal lotteries applicable to the present example will be described in detail below. Note that the following configurations are applicable to all the embodiments in this example.

  First, with reference to FIG. 127, a configuration relating to the number that can be applied to this example will be described in detail.

<When BB is not activated>
The gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 127 has one type BB (sometimes referred to as BB) and two types BB (sometimes referred to as MB), and a role related to one type BB (one type after winning). The symbol combination in which BB operates is a combination that can be stopped and displayed, and may be referred to as a type 1 BB combination), "1 type BB alone" (condition device that 1 type BB combination wins independently) and "1. Species BB + cherry ”(condition device in which one kind BB combination and cherry are won in duplicate). In addition, as a combination relating to two types of BBs (a combination in which a symbol combination in which the two types of BBs are activated after being won can be stopped and displayed, and may be referred to as a two type BB combination), “two types of BBs alone” (two types of BBs) A condition device in which the BB combination wins alone) and "two types of BB + cherry" (a condition device in which the two types of BB role and cherry win twice).

  In addition, as a winning combination (a combination having a symbol combination in which game medals are paid out by stopping display), there are four types of combinations of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry, and the bell with the largest number of wins (10400/65536 wins) is sometimes referred to as the main winning combination.

  "At the time of non-operation of BB" shown in the uppermost part of the figure is a table relating to the number of characters in a state in which the 1st type BB and the 2nd type BB are not operating (sometimes referred to as a normal gaming state). The “number of insertions” is the number of insertions assuming that the game has been executed with three bets in order to calculate various expected values to be described later. Although the number is two, the “input number” is set to three. The “payout number” is the number of game medals to be paid out when the “insertion number” is set to 3. For example, in a game in which one type of BB is activated, 15 bets are paid out for two bets. Only the winner is won, but since the “input number” is assumed to be 3, the “payout number” is also “15 × 3 ÷ 2 = 22.5”.

  The “number” is a number determined by an internal lottery for each condition device, and the denominator is 65536. The “probability” is a probability that the condition device is determined by an internal lottery.

  The “number of games” is the number of games required to calculate various expected values described later. For "1 type BB alone", "1 type BB + cherry", "2 type BB alone", "2 type BB + cherry", 1 type BB or 2 type BB in the game won by 1 type BB or 2 type BB Since the example is shown in which the symbol combination according to is stopped and displayed, the “number of games” is 1. In addition, "one kind BB" executes one kind BB after the symbol combination that activates one kind BB is stopped after winning "one kind BB alone" or "one kind BB + cherry" ( The “number of games” is 24 because the “execute” case is illustrated. Further, "two kinds of BBs" is executed after the symbol combination in which the two kinds of BBs are activated is stopped after the "two kinds of BBs alone" or the "two kinds of BBs + cherry" is won ( Since “execute” is illustrated, the “number of games” is eight.

  The “expected insertion number” is an expected value of the insertion number per game in consideration of the probability determined by the internal lottery for each condition device, and is calculated by “input number × probability × game number”. The "expected payout amount" is an expected value of the number of payouts per game in consideration of the probability determined by the internal lottery for each condition device, and is calculated by "payout number x probability x number of games". There is.

  Note that the configuration in the figure may be applied to a case where a game is played as follows.

<Game method 1>
The payout of the game medal is the game method that executes the game with the game method with the highest profit for the player, and is not a push order player such as push order bell, and wins the bell, watermelon, symbol or cherry. The game is executed in a stop operation mode in which a certain symbol combination is stopped and displayed (winning) (stop button operation mode, stop button operation timing, etc.). In addition, in a game in which a push order combination such as a push order bell (not shown in the figure, it may be configured to have a push order combination) is selected, the stop operation mode in which the payout number is the largest To run the game.

<Gaming method 2>
In a game in which a bell, a watermelon, a symbol, or a cherry, which is not a pushing sequence such as a pushing sequence bell, is won, a symbol combination with a payout of game medals is stopped and displayed (winning), and a stop operation mode (operation mode of a stop button) , And the game is executed in the order of pressing the stop button, the timing of operating the stop button, and the like. In addition, in a game that has been won for a pushing sequence such as a pushing sequence bell (not shown in the figure, but may be configured to have a pushing sequence), a random order is performed regardless of whether or not the pushing sequence navigation is performed. The game is executed in a proper stop operation mode (the stop button pressing order and the stop button operation timing are random). In addition, the random means, for example, that the pressing order of the stop button is to select all six types of pressing orders at an equal ratio, and the stop timing is to select the stop operation timing of all 20 frames at an equal ratio. It is to be.

  "Inside the inside" is a game after winning one of "one type BB alone", "one type BB + cherry", "two types BB alone", "two types BB + cherry", and one type BB Or, a game in which the symbol combination in which the two BBs are activated and the symbol combination relating to the bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry, and replay are not stopped (in a situation where the winning of the one BB or the two BB is carried over) (The game that did not win the small role or replay). In the figure, in 290/65536, a game in which a small win or a re-game is not won is executed in the situation where the winning of the 1st class BB or the 2nd class BB is carried over, and the "expected number of inputs" is about 0. .013275146, and the "expected payout amount value" is 0.

<1 type BB in operation>
"1st type BB in operation" shown from the top to the 2nd stage of the figure is a table relating to the number of units in the state where the 1st type BB is operating. During the one-type BB operation, the prescribed number is two, and the player is not selected for a loss but is selected for any of a bell, a watermelon, a symbol, and a cherry. In addition, the “payout number” is 15 for all of the bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry, and the bell is most easily elected (decided). In addition, one or more (or all) of the “number” to be won for the watermelon, the symbol, and the cherry may be configured to be the same as “when the BB is not activated”. As described above, in the game in which one kind of BB is activated, 15 bets are paid out for two bets in all games. "", "The number of payouts" of the "sum of one type") is 22.5.

<During operation of 2 types of BB>
The “during operation of two types of BBs” shown at the bottom of the drawing is a table relating to the numbers set in a state where the two types of BBs are operating. During the two-type BB operation, the prescribed number is two, and when the game is executed in a predetermined stop operation mode (for example, when the game is executed in a pressing order of “left → middle → right”) , Only the symbol combination related to the bell is stopped and displayed. The “payout number” when the symbol combination related to the bell is stopped and displayed is 15. As described above, in a game in which the two kinds of BBs are operating, a bet of two cards is paid out in all games, and therefore, the expected number of payouts when the specified number of three cards is paid (“the BB is not in operation”). “Number of payouts” of “combination of 2 types” in 2) is 22.5.

<BB not operating>
The “when the BB is not operating” will be described again in detail. "No replay" indicates four types of winning roles: bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry. "Including replay" means five types of roles: bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry, and replay. Is shown. The “winning OUT” in “no replay” is a value obtained by adding together the expected value of the number of payouts of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry, and is about 1.237258911. The “winning payout rate” in “no replay” is “value obtained by adding up expected number of payouts (winning out)” to “value obtained by adding up expected number of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries”. This is a value obtained by multiplying the divided value by 100, that is, the payout rate obtained by adding the winning combinations, which is about 222.8%.

  The “winning OUT” in the “including replays” is a value obtained by adding up the expected number of payouts of bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays, and is about 1.649246216. In addition, even if the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, the game medal is not actually paid out, but when the game is executed by betting on three pieces and the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, Since three automatic bets are executed, the “payout number” relating to the replay is three. The “winning payout rate” in “including replays” is obtained by adding “the value obtained by adding up the expected number of payouts (winning OUT)” to the expected value of the number of inputs of bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays. This is a value obtained by multiplying the value divided by the value by 100, that is, the payout rate obtained by adding the winning combination and the replay, and is about 170.5%.

  The “one type combined ball rate” is a value obtained by multiplying the value obtained by dividing the expected number of payouts of the “one type combined” by the expected number of inputs by 100, and is 750.0%. The “two types of calculated ball rate” is a value obtained by multiplying the value obtained by dividing the expected number of payouts of the “two types of sum” by the expected number of inputs by 100, and is 750.0%.

<Comparison of various values>
Here, when the above-described values are compared, the following relationship is obtained.
(1) “Expected number of payouts” of “sum of two types” <“Expected value of number of payouts” of “sum of no replays” (winning OUT)
(2) “Expected number of payouts” of “sum of two types” <“Expected value of number of payouts” of “sum of replays included” (winning OUT)
(3) Expected number of payouts of “sum of two types” <“Expected number of payouts” of main minor role
(4) “Expected input value” of “medium” <expected input value of main minor role>
(5) “Expected number of inputs” of “Inside” <“Expected number of inputs” of “Replay”

  Further, when the two-type BB is activated, the number of game medals that can be obtained by the player is smaller than when the one-type BB is activated, and the one-type BB is not won during the two-type BB operation. As a result, there is a concern that a player's expectation of the game may be reduced. Therefore, as described in (1) above, by designing such that “expected number of payouts” of “combination of two types” <expected value of number of payouts of “no replay”, the two types of BB are operating. It is possible to raise the "expected number of payouts" for small wins, and even when the 2nd BB is operating, the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) but the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating). This makes it easier for the player to feel, and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special state.

  Further, when the two-type BB is activated, the number of game medals that can be obtained by the player is smaller than when the one-type BB is activated, and the one-type BB is not won during the two-type BB operation. As a result, there is a concern that a player's expectation of the game may be reduced. Therefore, as described in (2) above, by designing such that “expected payout amount” of “combination of 2 types” <expected expected value of payout of the sum of “re-games included”, the 2 types of BB is operating. It is possible to raise the "expected number of payouts" for small wins, and even when the 2nd BB is operating, the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) but the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating). This makes it easier for the player to feel, and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special state.

  Further, when the two-type BB is activated, the number of game medals that can be obtained by the player is smaller than when the one-type BB is activated, and the one-type BB is not won during the two-type BB operation. As a result, there is a concern that a player's expectation of the game may be reduced. Therefore, as described in the above (3), by designing such that “expected number of payouts” of “sum of two types” <“expected value of number of payouts” of the main small role, it is possible to reduce the main number smaller than during the two-type BB operation. It is possible to increase the “expected number of payouts” of the role, and that the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) but the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) even during the two-type BB operating. This makes it easier for the player to feel, and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special state.

  In addition, as a gaming machine having one or a plurality of configurations of the above (1) to (3), during the two-type BB operation, the prescribed number is two, the average payout number per game is two, and the like. The payout rate (two-combined calculated ball rate) during the two-type BB operation may be reduced. With such a configuration, the effect in the case of having the above-described configurations (1) to (3) is further enhanced.

  In addition, in the case of “inside the inside”, when a player with low skill, such as a player who cannot be pushed, plays, a symbol combination related to the winning BB 1 or BB 2 cannot be stopped and displayed. There is a concern that low players will have significant disadvantages. Therefore, as described in (4) above, by designing such that the “expected input value” of “inside” is smaller than the “expected value of input number” of the main minor role, the main minor role is also achieved in “internal”. It is possible to increase the ratio of the game in which the bell is won, and it is possible to make the gaming machine hardly disadvantageous even when a player with low skill plays.

  In addition, in the case of “inside the inside”, when a player with low skill, such as a player who cannot be pushed, plays, a symbol combination related to the winning BB 1 or BB 2 cannot be stopped and displayed. There is a concern that low players will have significant disadvantages. Therefore, as described in (5) above, by designing such that the “expected insertion value” of “inside” is smaller than the “expected number of insertions” of “replay”, the replaying is performed even in “inside”. Can increase the ratio of games to be won, and can provide a gaming machine in which disadvantages are unlikely to occur even when a player with low skill plays.

<Combination of configurations according to this example>
As described above, the gaming machines having the configuration according to the present embodiment to the configuration according to the sixth embodiment have been described. In the configurations from the present embodiment to the sixth embodiment, it is possible to appropriately combine and configure. Hereinafter, an example of a gaming machine combined from the configuration according to the present embodiment to the configuration according to the sixth embodiment Are listed.

<Combination configuration 1>
For example, in the present example, << the configuration related to the start of the display of the push order navigation >>>><the configuration of the execution order of the push order navigation when there is no weight>, the configuration according to the <configuration 1> and the << configuration in the third embodiment <Third Embodiment Example of Medal Addition Processing by Insertion Sensor> A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of <<>.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized even if the player looks at either display device. In the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) cannot be performed in time, and the credit addition process is performed. Prevents game medals from getting into gaming machines (swallowing) despite not executing It is possible to provide a user friendly gaming machine is possible to.

<Combination configuration 2>
For example, in this example, << the configuration related to the start of the display of the push order navigation >>>><the configuration of the execution of the push order navigation when there is no weight>, the configuration according to the <configuration 1> and the <<<< in the fourth embodiment. <Fourth Embodiment Medal Returning Member >>> A gaming machine configured by combining with the configuration according to <>.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized even if the player looks at either display device. Can be reliably prevented, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 in the inward direction of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a situation where the game machine rebounds to the medal receiving slot D341.

<Combination configuration 3>
For example, in the present example, << the configuration related to the start of the display of the push order navigation >> and the configuration of the <configuration 1> of the execution mode of the push order navigation when there is no weight, and the << configuration in the fifth embodiment. << Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Payout Apparatus >>>> A gaming machine configured by combining with the configuration according to the above.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized even if the player looks at either display device. Can be reliably prevented, and when a player who receives payout of game medals pays out a predetermined number of game medals, the player can receive payout of game medals from the first to the predetermined number at the same interval. In addition, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give a player a sense of incompatibility.

<Combination configuration 4>
For example, in the present example, << the configuration related to the start of the display of the push order navigation >>>><the configuration of the execution order of the push order navigation when there is no weight>, the configuration according to the <configuration 1>, and the << configuration in the sixth embodiment >><Sixth Embodiment Processing When Communication Between Main Control Board and Sub Control Board Is Disconnected during Execution of Processing Related to Settlement When Command and Channel are One-to-One >>> Configuration of << Configuration 1 >> And a gaming machine constituted by combining the above.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, the push-order navigation is recognized regardless of which of the display devices the player sees because the timing of starting the push-order navigation on both the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. When the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while the processing accompanied by the output of the sound can be surely prevented, the player can Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that there is no problem in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 5>
For example, the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of <<<< an example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor >> in the third embodiment, and the <<<< fourth embodiment >> in the fourth embodiment. Embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining a medal return member >>>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, in a state where the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on, the credit addition processing is not yet performed, but in the case where an error occurs at this timing, The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to refund the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is performed. It is possible to prevent the game medal from entering (swallowing) the game medal even though the game medal is not executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is relative to the diameter of the game medal. It has a sufficient distance, and the first game medal that collided with the collision part is the medal receiving port D341. It is possible to provide a game machine and it is possible to prevent a situation arises that bounces off a.

<Combination configuration 6>
For example, the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of <<<< an example of the medal addition process by the insertion sensor >> in the third embodiment, and the <<<< fifth embodiment >> in the fifth embodiment. Embodiment It is assumed that a gaming machine is configured by combining the drive control of a medal payout device with a configuration according to >>>>>.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, in a state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process is not yet performed, but the error occurs at this timing. The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and returning the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) cannot be performed in time, and the credit addition process is performed. It is possible to prevent the gaming medals from getting into the gaming machine (swallowing) even if the game medals are not paid out, and the player receiving the gaming medals pays out a predetermined number of gaming medals. From the first to a predetermined number of game medals at the same interval, It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give a sense of discomfort to.

<Combination configuration 7>
For example, the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of <<<< Example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor >> in the third embodiment >> and <<<< Sixth implementation in the sixth embodiment >> Form A process when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during the execution of the payment-related processing. When the command and the channel are one-to-one >>>>> Combination with the << Configuration 1 >> configuration Gaming machine.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, in a state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process is not yet performed, but when an error occurs at this timing. The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and returning the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) cannot be performed in time, and the credit addition process is performed. It is possible to prevent the gaming medals from getting into the gaming machine (swallowing) even though the processing is not executed, and the main control board M When the communication with the sub-control board S is disconnected, the player does not finish outputting the sound, That Te does not occur is some kind of problem it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing.

<Combination configuration 8>
For example, the configuration according to <<<<< the fourth embodiment medal return member >>>>>> in the fourth embodiment and <<<<< the drive control of the fifth embodiment medal payout device >> in the fifth embodiment >> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to >>.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that has collided with the collision portion Can be prevented from bouncing back to the medal receiving slot D341. When a predetermined number of game medals are paid out by a player who receives payout of game medals, the same interval is set from the first to the predetermined number. , And a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give a sense of incongruity to the player can be provided.

<Combination configuration 9>
For example, the configuration according to <<<<< the fourth embodiment medal returning member >>>>>> in the fourth embodiment, and << the sixth embodiment in the sixth embodiment It is assumed that the gaming machine is configured by combining the processing command at the time of disconnection of communication between the control board and the sub-control board and the configuration relating to << configuration 1 >> of >>>>>.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that has collided with the collision portion However, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the main control board M and the sub-control board S are disconnected during the execution of the process accompanied by the sound output. In such a case, since the output of the sound is not terminated, the player can provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 10>
For example, the configuration according to <<<<<< Fifth embodiment: Medal payout device drive control >>>>>> in the fifth embodiment, and <<<< Sixth embodiment: Process related to settlement in the sixth embodiment It is assumed that the main control board and the sub-control board inside have a processing command at the time of disconnection of communication and a configuration related to << configuration 1 >> in the case of 1: 1 channel >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, when a player who receives a payout of game medals pays out a predetermined number of game medals, the game medals can be paid out from the first to the predetermined number at the same intervals. Therefore, if the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while the processing accompanied by the output of the sound is being performed without giving the player a feeling of discomfort, Since the output of the above does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can recognize that there is no problem in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 11>
For example, in the present example, << the configuration related to the start of the display of the push order navigation >>>><the configuration of the execution order of the push order navigation when there is no weight>, the configuration according to the <configuration 1>, and the << configuration in the third embodiment >><Third Embodiment Example of Medal Addition Process by Insertion Sensor >>> of << Configuration 1 >> and <<<< Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member >>> in the fourth embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining such a configuration.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized even if the player looks at either display device. In the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) cannot be performed in time, and the credit addition process is performed. Prevents game medals from getting into gaming machines (swallowing) despite not executing The depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal colliding with the collision portion rebounds to the medal receiving port D341. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of preventing a situation in which the game machine is lost.

<Combination configuration 12>
For example, in the present example, << the configuration related to the start of the display of the push order navigation >> and the configuration of the <configuration 1> of the execution mode of the push order navigation when there is no weight, and the << configuration in the third embodiment. <Third Embodiment Example of Medal Addition Process by Insertion Sensor >>> of << Configuration 1 >> and <<<< Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member >>> in the fourth embodiment It is assumed that the gaming machine is configured by combining such a configuration with the configuration according to <<<< Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Payout Device >>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized even if the player looks at either display device. In the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) cannot be performed in time, and the credit addition process is performed. Prevents game medals from getting into gaming machines (swallowing) despite not executing The depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that has collided with the collision portion rebounds to the medal receiving port D341. It is possible to prevent the situation that the game medal is paid out, and when the player who receives the payout of the game medal pays out the predetermined number of game medals, the player receives the payout of the game medal from the first to the predetermined number at the same interval. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give a player a sense of incongruity.

<Combination structure 13>
For example, in the present example, << the configuration related to the start of the display of the push order navigation >> and the configuration of the <configuration 1> of the execution mode of the push order navigation when there is no weight, and the << configuration in the third embodiment. <Third Embodiment Example of Medal Addition Process by Insertion Sensor >>> of << Configuration 1 >> and <<<< Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member >>> in the fourth embodiment Such a configuration, a configuration according to <<< Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Payout Apparatus >>> in the fifth embodiment, and a configuration according to the sixth embodiment <<<< Sixth Embodiment Settlement When the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the execution of the command. When the command and the channel are one-to-one, a game machine configured by combining the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of I do.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized even if the player looks at either display device. In the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) cannot be performed in time, and the credit addition process is performed. Prevents game medals from getting into gaming machines (swallowing) despite not executing The depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that has collided with the collision portion rebounds to the medal receiving port D341. It is possible to prevent the situation that the game medal is paid out, and when the player who receives the payout of the game medal pays out the predetermined number of game medals, the player receives the payout of the game medal from the first to the predetermined number at the same interval. In the case where the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected during the execution of the processing accompanied by the sound output without giving the player a sense of incongruity, Since the sound output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 14>
For example, in the present example, the configuration according to <configuration 3> of << configuration for starting display of push-order navigation >><execution mode of push-order navigation when there is no weight>, and << configuration in the third embodiment, <Third Embodiment An example of a medal addition process by an insertion sensor >> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the start timing of the push-order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant By setting the speed state → the period until the operation of the stop switch is valid), for example, even in a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push-order navigation lights the lamp (book). In the example, the reel window frame lamp D310 can be lit) and the like, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the pushing order navigation, and the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on. In the state, credit addition processing is not yet performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, C of the main control board M is The UC 100 determines that there is an error, and the execution process of the predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and returning the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is not executed. Nevertheless, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can prevent the gaming medals from entering the gaming machine (swallowing).

<Combination configuration 15>
For example, in the present example, << the configuration related to the start of the display of the push order navigation >> and the configuration of the <configuration 3> of the <executing mode of the push order navigation when there is no weight>, and the << configuration in the fourth embodiment. << 4th Embodiment Medal Returning Member >>>> A gaming machine configured by combining with the configuration according to the above.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, the start timing of the pushing order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → a period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel setting). By determining from the speed state to the period until the operation of the stop switch is effective, for example, even in a gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the pressing order navigation is turned on by a lamp (this In the example, the reel window lamp D310 is turned on), and it is difficult for the player to recognize the pushing order navigation. Has a sufficient distance to the diameter of the first game medal, and the first game medal that has collided with the collision portion rebounds to the medal receiving slot D341. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine which makes it possible to prevent the situation say.

<Combination structure 16>
For example, in the present example, << the configuration related to the start of the display of the push order navigation >>>><the configuration of the execution of the push order navigation when there is no weight>, the configuration according to the <configuration 3> and the << configuration in the fifth embodiment >><< Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Payout Apparatus >>>> A gaming machine configured by combining with the configuration according to the above.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, the start timing of the pushing order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → a period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel setting). By determining from the speed state to the period until the operation of the stop switch is effective, for example, even in a gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the pressing order navigation is turned on by a lamp (this In the example, the reel window frame lamp D310 is turned on), it is difficult for the player to recognize the pressing order navigation, and the player who receives the payout of the game medal has a predetermined number of game medals. Is paid out at the same interval from the first to a predetermined number of coins, the player will feel uncomfortable There it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 17>
For example, in the present example, << the configuration related to the start of the display of the push order navigation >>>><the configuration of the execution order of the push order navigation when there is no weight>, the configuration according to the <configuration 3>, and the << configuration in the sixth embodiment >><Sixth Embodiment Processing When Communication Between Main Control Board and Sub Control Board Is Disconnected during Execution of Processing Related to Settlement When Command and Channel are One-to-One >>> Configuration of << Configuration 1 >> And a gaming machine constituted by combining the above.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, the start timing of the pushing order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → a period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel setting). By determining from the speed state to the period until the operation of the stop switch is effective, for example, even in a gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the pressing order navigation is turned on by a lamp (this In the example, the reel window lamp D310 is turned on), and it is difficult for the player to recognize the pressing order navigation. When the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the player does not end the sound output, so that some problem occurs in the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine to be able to recognize that Flip is not.

<Combination configuration 18>
For example, in the configuration according to << configuration related to display termination of push-order navigation >> in this example, and << in the third embodiment << Example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor >> according to the third embodiment >> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to <Structure 1>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different from each other. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player has to visually recognize at the same time, and it is possible to reduce the player's game burden that the player can visually recognize the end of the push-order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push-order navigation occurs. In the state where the closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on, the credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error. , Predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turn off the blocker D100, the game meda to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100 A user-friendly gaming machine that can prevent game medals from entering the gaming machine (swallowing) even though the execution process of Can be provided.

<Combination configuration 19>
For example, in the present example, the configuration according to << the configuration related to the end of the display of the push order navigation >> and the configuration according to the fourth embodiment according to <<<< the fourth embodiment medal return member >>>>. A gaming machine configured in combination.

<Effect>
With this configuration, by changing the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, the two display devices can be displayed. Can be avoided at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. A situation in which the depth of the surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal colliding with the collision portion rebounds to the medal receiving slot D341. A user-friendly gaming machine that can prevent the problem can be provided.

<Combination configuration 20>
For example, in the present example, << the configuration related to the end of the display of the pressing order navigation >>, and in the fifth embodiment, <<<< the fifth embodiment, the driving control of the medal payout device >>>>. The gaming machine is configured by combining the configurations.

<Effect>
With this configuration, by changing the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, the two display devices can be displayed. Can be avoided at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, thereby reducing the game burden on the player and the gaming medal. When the player who receives the payout of the predetermined number of game medals is paid out, the player can receive the payout of the game medals from the first piece to the predetermined number at the same interval, so that the player is not user-friendly. A gaming machine can be provided.

<Combination configuration 21>
For example, in the present example, the configuration related to << configuration related to display termination of push-order navigator >>, and << in the sixth embodiment <<<< Sixth embodiment It is assumed that the gaming machine is configured by combining the processing command at the time of disconnection of communication with the control board and the configuration related to << configuration 1 >> in the case of 1: 1 channel >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different from each other so that the two display devices are displayed. Can be avoided at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, thereby reducing the game burden of the player, If the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off during the execution of the processing with the output, the player does not end the sound output, so that some kind of game machine is used. A user-friendly gaming machine that can recognize that no problem has occurred can be provided.

<Combination configuration 22>
For example, in this example, << the configuration relating to the reel control and the pressing order navigation >>, and in the third embodiment, << the third embodiment, an example of the medal addition process by the insertion sensor >>>> A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <Configuration 1>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if the stop button is operated according to the push-order navigation and the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be next stopped is pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Since it becomes clear, it is difficult for a player's unintended disadvantage such as the maximum winning number not being obtained due to a mistake in the pushing order to occur, and the credit is still credited in the state where the first loading sensor D20s is off and the second loading sensor D30s is on. If the addition process is not performed, but the error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and performs a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and using the blocker D100. Even if the credit addition process is not executed because the execution process of paying out the game medal to the outlet D240 is not in time. Razz, game medals can provide a user friendly gaming machine which can prevent a may enter the game machine (swallowing).

<Combination configuration 23>
For example, in the present example, << the configuration relating to the reel control and the pressing order navigation >> and the configuration relating to the <<<< fourth embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine configured in combination.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button is operated in accordance with the pressing order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed or the next reel to be stopped is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. For clarity, unintended disadvantages of the player, such as a failure to obtain the maximum number of cards obtained due to a pressing order error, are unlikely to occur. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine having a sufficient distance and capable of preventing a situation in which the first game medal that has collided with the collision portion bounces back to the medal receiving slot D341. .

<Combination configuration 24>
For example, in the present example, << the configuration related to the reel control and the pressing order navigation >>, and in the fifth embodiment, << the fifth embodiment, the drive control of the medal payout device >>. It is assumed that the gaming machine is configured by combining the configurations.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button is operated in accordance with the pressing order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the next reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Because it is clear, unintended disadvantages of the player, such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of coins due to a mistake in the order of pushing, are unlikely to occur, First, since the game medals can be paid out at the same interval from the first to a predetermined number, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine which does not give a sense of incongruity to the player.

<Combination configuration 25>
For example, in this example, << the configuration relating to the reel control and the pressing order navigation >>, and the sixth embodiment, the <<<< sixth embodiment >> the main control board and the sub-controller during execution of the process relating to the settlement. Processing when disconnecting communication with control board When the command and the channel are one-to-one >>> It is assumed that the gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button is operated in accordance with the pressing order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the next reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. For clarity, it is difficult for unintended disadvantages of the player, such as a failure to obtain the maximum number of cards to be obtained due to a pressing order error, to occur, and during execution of a process accompanied by audio output, the main control board M When the communication with the sub-control board S is cut off, the player does not end the sound output, so that it is possible to recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine. Machine can be provided.

  The example of the gaming machine combined from the configuration according to the present example to the configuration according to the sixth embodiment has been described above, but these are merely examples, and the configuration according to the sixth embodiment is appropriately changed from the configuration according to the present embodiment to the configuration according to the sixth embodiment. , Can be combined.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concept based on the further configuration shown in the above embodiments is added to these concepts, not to mention the combination and separation (conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (1)
It has a strip-shaped reel tape (eg, reel strip MO) wound around the outer periphery of a reel base (eg, reel frame MW),
In the reel tape, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the reel tape,
The type of the symbol has at least a first symbol (for example, a white seven symbol) and a second symbol (for example, a bell symbol),
The maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol,
The second symbol is arranged on at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the first symbol is not arranged on each of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. ,
The gaming machine is characterized in that a length of the reel tape in a longitudinal direction is longer than an outer circumference of a surface of the reel base on which the reel tape is wound.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (2)
Gaming machine body,
A front door (for example, a front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be openable and closable;
In a spinning drum type gaming machine provided with a reel unit (eg, reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine main body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A pedestal portion on which the reel unit is installed (for example, a pedestal portion BU);
A main tank member (e.g., hopper H40) that is installed below the pedestal portion and stores game media;
An auxiliary tank member (e.g., a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed near the main tank member for retracting surplus game media stored in the main tank member;
Part of the main tank member is provided with a slope portion (for example, an inclined surface H64) descending from the main tank member to the auxiliary tank member,
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by a locking component (for example, a screw BS),
A gaming machine, wherein the slope portion is located vertically below the locking component which is closest to the side on which the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to the present mode (3),
Gaming machine body,
A front door (for example, a front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be openable and closable;
In a spinning drum type gaming machine provided with a reel unit (eg, reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine main body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A pedestal portion on which the reel unit is installed (for example, a pedestal portion BU);
A main tank member (e.g., hopper H40) that is installed below the pedestal portion and stores game media;
An auxiliary tank member (e.g., a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed near the main tank member for retracting surplus game media stored in the main tank member;
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by a locking component (for example, a screw BS),
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the auxiliary tank member is positioned vertically below the locking component at the position closest to the side where the front door is opened and closed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (4),
A plurality of reels (for example, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40),
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect (for example, an effect display device S40);
An operation member (for example, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2) capable of changing display contents of the effect,
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped in response to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is stopped at the end of the plurality of reels. One game can be completed by performing a final stop switch operation, which is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel, and stopping all of the plurality of reels,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if a first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, , Standby screen) can be displayed.
When a predetermined operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) is operated after the end of one game, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the predetermined image is displayed by operating the predetermined operation member, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the first predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to the present mode (5),
A plurality of reels (for example, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40),
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect (for example, an effect display device S40);
An operation member (for example, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2) capable of changing display contents of the effect,
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped in response to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is stopped at the end of the plurality of reels. One game can be completed by performing a final stop switch operation, which is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel, and stopping all of the plurality of reels,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if a first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, , Standby screen) can be displayed.
When a predetermined operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) is operated after the end of one game, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the predetermined image is displayed by operating the predetermined operation member, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image,
The second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the first predetermined time,
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined time is displayed while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. If a specific operation member (for example, the cross key SB2) is operated before the elapse of the predetermined time, the predetermined image is displayed and displayed at a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. 2 Even if the predetermined time has elapsed, the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, the stop switch is newly added. Even if the above operation is performed, if the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, the specific image can be displayed on the effect display unit. It is composed of
When the final stop switch operation is performed, betting is performed before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. , The game is characterized in that the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit even if the first predetermined time elapses from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to the present mode (6),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
A setting switch (e.g., a setting switch) that is electrically connected to the main game unit and operated to shift to a setting change mode (e.g., a setting change mode) in which a set value related to the degree of advantage for the player can be changed. Key switch) and
The main game unit is configured to be able to execute an interrupt process, which is a process executed every predetermined time,
Power is cut off in a predetermined game state that is not in the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned on in a situation where power is not being supplied to the gaming machine, power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, and the mode is changed to the setting changing mode. After the power is cut off, when the power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine after the setting switch is turned off, it is configured to shift to the setting change mode,
A power failure occurs in a predetermined gaming state that is not the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned on in a situation where power is not supplied to the gaming machine, power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, and from the start of supply of the power. If the power is cut off before the predetermined time elapses and the power supply to the gaming machine is started after the setting switch is turned off, it is configured not to shift to the setting change mode. It is a gaming machine characterized by the following.

The gaming machine according to the present mode (7),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
A stop switch (for example, a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, a right stop button D43) provided for each of the reels and operated by a player when stopping the rotation of the reels;
Storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game media within a predetermined number range;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) for outputting a production sound,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the output of the effect,
The main game department is
Role lottery means for performing a role lottery,
When the stop switch is operated, reel control means for stopping and controlling the reel so as to correspond to the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
A storage number increasing process for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means,
And a payout process for paying out game media,
When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, the game medium can be given to the player,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when a specific number of game media is given, the storage number increasing process is executed. Is configured to execute payout processing without
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is provided. In the case, it is configured to execute the storage number increase process and not execute the payout process,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number When the game medium of is given, it is configured to execute the payout processing after executing the storage number increase processing,
The main game department is
After the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium provision information is configured to be transmitted to the sub game unit,
The sub game department,
Based on the reception of the game medium provision information, it is configured to be able to output from the speaker a game medium provision sound that is an effect sound related to the provision of the game medium,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when the specific number of game media is provided, the game medium provision information Based on the reception of the game media, a predetermined game medium imparting sound (for example, a game medium imparting sound output when the credit increases by one, a game medium imparting sound output when one game medal is paid out) is generated. Output is possible,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is provided. In this case, the predetermined game medium providing sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium providing information,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number When the game medium is added, it is possible to output the predetermined game medium addition sound based on the reception of the game medium addition information,
During execution of the stored number increasing process, a time value from when the number of game media stored in the storing means becomes A (A is a natural number) to A + 1, and N (N is a natural number and 2 ≦ N ) During the execution of the payout process for paying out the game media, M + 1 (M is a natural number, and 1 ≦ M ≦ (N−1)) from the start of the payout process for the (n−1) th game medium A gaming machine characterized in that the time value until the start of the execution of the payout process for the eye game medium is different.

The gaming machine according to this mode (8) includes:
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect,
A game lamp (for example, a lamp unit) that can be turned on at the time of performing the effect,
A setting value display unit (for example, a setting display LED) capable of displaying a setting value,
The game lamp has a plurality of lighting patterns (for example, element 6 in FIG. 77),
The lighting pattern is configured by combining a plurality of lighting modes (for example, element 5 in FIG. 77),
The lighting mode is a combination of a lighting color (for example, element 1 in FIG. 77) and a lighting time pattern (for example, element 4 in FIG. 77).
The lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time (for example, element 2 in FIG. 77) and a light-off time (for example, element 3 in FIG. 77).
It has a plurality of the lighting colors, has a plurality of lighting times, has a plurality of lighting times,
As the lighting pattern, a first lighting pattern that can be performed when a predetermined abnormality occurs, a second lighting pattern that can be performed when the set value is displayed on the set value display unit, and a set value display that is not during the predetermined abnormal state And a third lighting pattern that can be performed when the set value is not displayed in the section,
The first lighting pattern is configured to include a predetermined lighting mode,
The second lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the predetermined lighting mode,
The second lighting pattern is configured to include a specific lighting mode,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern do not include the specific lighting mode.

The gaming machine according to the present mode (9),
A storage means capable of electrically storing a game medium within a predetermined number range (for example, in the present example, a game medal can be electrically stored as a credit in the game machine),
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting game media stored in the storage means and that can bet a plurality of game media;
A predetermined lamp (for example, a 3-bet lamp D213) capable of informing that a specified number of bets, which is the maximum bet number per game in a predetermined game state, has been bet,
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid;
With role determining means that can determine the winning role,
As the winning combination determined by the combination determining means, it is configured to be able to determine a replaying combination,
The predetermined gaming state, and the replaying role has not been won in the game executed immediately before, and the sum of the game media stored in the storage means and the bet number is equal to or more than the specified number, And, in a situation where the bet number is less than the prescribed number, the specific lamp is configured to light up,
In a gaming machine, when the number of bets reaches the specified number in a situation where the specific lamp is turned on, the specific lamp is turned off after the predetermined lamp is turned on.

The gaming machine according to the present mode (10),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
It is provided with a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect,
The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main gaming section is longer than the time from the occurrence of power interruption to the end of power supply to the gaming machine. Is composed of
The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main game unit is longer than the time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the start of the program of the sub game unit. A gaming machine characterized by being configured as described above.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the internal drawing means determines a specific result different from the predetermined result, in each reel, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped. , Even if the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, which is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the predetermined symbol It is a game machine characterized in that it is configured not to give a game value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to the aspect (A2) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the respective reels. The predetermined symbol combination is displayed even when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the power-off process based on the detection of the power-off being performed and the stop operation performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming value corresponding to the combination is not provided to the player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop is performed as a final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the specific symbol combination is displayed by the stop operation at the timing, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed,
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and are specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Despite being stopped at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. Are

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, it is configured such that the next game can be executed regardless of the insertion of the game value,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value is Is configured so that the next game can be executed regardless of

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the drawing state, the first drawing state and the first drawing state have at least a second drawing state in which the probability that at least a specific result is determined is different,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation of a player,
It is a game executed in the first drawing state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, respectively. It is stopped, after the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, it is configured to be able to shift to the second drawing state,
It is a game executed in the first drawing state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, respectively. Despite being stopped, and after being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game machine is characterized in that it can be shifted to the second drawing state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel, and a predetermined lamp (for example, a re-game lamp D290) which can be turned on based on a specific result being determined,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to be turned on,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined Is a game machine characterized in that the lamp is turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel, and a predetermined lamp (for example, a re-game lamp D290) which can be turned on based on a specific result being determined,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to be turned on,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even if the stop operation was performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination was displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply was not changed. A game machine characterized in that the predetermined lamp is turned on after returning.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8) includes:
N (N is a natural number of 3 or more) reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) for outputting a production sound,
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In a game executed in a specific game state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the N-1st reel of the player, and a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel. After that, a predetermined effect sound (for example, tempai sound) can be output from the speaker,
In the game executed in the specific game state, a predetermined rotation with respect to the (N-1) th reel although the player has performed the stop operation at the specific timing as the stop operation for the (N-1) th reel A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined effect sound can be output from a speaker even after a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel due to a defect. .

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game values within a predetermined number range;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and that can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid;
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
One or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels have the specific symbol combination. Corresponding symbols are each stopped, after the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not made Is configured,
One or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels have the specific symbol combination. Corresponding symbols are stopped respectively, and even after the player has stopped at the specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the above-mentioned identification due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to notify that the specific lamp is effective even after a symbol combination other than the symbol combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game values within a predetermined number range;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and that can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid;
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
One or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels have the specific symbol combination. Corresponding symbols are each stopped, after the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not made Is configured,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel is provided with the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbols are stopped, and the power-off process based on the detection of the power-off is executed despite the stop operation being performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. A gaming machine characterized in that even if a symbol combination other than a specific symbol combination is displayed, the specific lamp is not notified that the specific lamp is valid after power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game values within a predetermined number range;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and that can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid;
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels have the predetermined symbol combination. After the corresponding symbols have been stopped, respectively, after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, it is notified that the specific lamp is valid. In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are respectively stopped, and the player is stopped at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the subsequent player. Regardless, it is configured to notify that the specific lamp is effective even after a symbol combination other than the prescribed symbol combination is displayed due to a prescribed rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a gaming machine characterized by that.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game values within a predetermined number range;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and that can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid;
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels have the predetermined symbol combination. After the corresponding symbols have been stopped, respectively, after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, it is notified that the specific lamp is valid. In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are respectively stopped, and the player is stopped at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the subsequent player. Regardless, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off process based on the detection of the power-off, it is notified that the specific lamp is valid after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by being constituted.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
The game state has at least a special game state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
When the end condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the ending condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal drawing means. In the game in which the predetermined winning combination is determined by, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and then the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and then the predetermined symbol After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the ending condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal drawing means. In the game in which the predetermined winning combination is determined by, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a game machine that does.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
The game state has at least a special game state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
When the end condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the ending condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal drawing means. In the game in which the predetermined winning combination is determined by, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and then the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and then the predetermined symbol After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze can be executed.
A special game state, which is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, and the internal drawing means In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined, the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off process based on the detection of the power interruption, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. A gaming machine characterized in that:

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are respectively stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. Is configured as
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the respective reels. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation of the player, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The gaming machine is configured not to give a game value corresponding to the game value to the player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are respectively stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. Is configured as
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the respective reels. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation of the player, and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming value corresponding to the combination is not provided to the player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. Each symbol is stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, the next game is played regardless of the game value being input. Is configured to be executed,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, in each reel, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped, respectively. , After that, as the final stop operation of the player, the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value is input. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the next game cannot be executed regardless of being played.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. Each symbol is stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, the next game is played regardless of the game value being input. Is configured to be executed,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value is A game machine characterized in that the next game can be executed irrespective of insertion of the game machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a gaming state, it has at least a special game transferable state that is advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
In the game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
After the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, until the specific symbol combination is stopped, it is configured to be able to enter the special game transition possible state,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation of the player and the special symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus) can be executed. ,
Not in a special game transferable state, and in the game in which the lottery result of the combination by the combination lottery means has a predetermined result different from the specific result, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Each is stopped, and is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, The gaming machine is configured so as not to execute the predetermined freeze.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
In the game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus) can be executed. ,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop is performed as a final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. A gaming machine characterized by having

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the drawing state, the first drawing state and the first drawing state have at least a second drawing state in which the probability that at least a specific result is determined is different,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation of a player,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the game is executed when the first drawing state is performed, and each of the games is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the second symbol is displayed. It is configured to be able to shift to the drawing state,
It is a game executed in the first drawing state, and in the game in which the predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the specific symbol combination on each reel. The symbols corresponding to are stopped respectively, and are stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, and symbols other than the specific symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. After the combination is displayed, the gaming machine is configured so as not to shift to the second winning combination lottery state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop is performed as a final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the stop operation is performed at the timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a special game) is configured to be executable,
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and are specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even if the stop operation was performed at the timing, even if the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to the power-off time processing based on the detection of power-off, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured.

The gaming machine according to the aspect (B2) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, it is configured such that the next game can be executed regardless of the insertion of the game value,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if a stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off time process based on the detection of the power interruption, the power source is turned on. It is a game machine characterized in that the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input after the return.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the drawing state, the first drawing state and the first drawing state have at least a second drawing state in which the probability that at least a specific result is determined is different,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation of a player,
It is a game executed in the first drawing state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, respectively. It is stopped, after the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, it is configured to be able to shift to the second drawing state,
In the game that is executed when the first drawing state is set, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is displayed on each reel. The symbols other than the specific symbol combination are executed by executing the power-off process based on the detection of the power-off even though the player is stopped and the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to the second drawing state after power is restored, even when a combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4),
N (N is a natural number of 3 or more) reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) for outputting a production sound,
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In a game executed in a specific game state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the N-1st reel of the player, and a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel. After that, a predetermined effect sound (for example, tempai sound) can be output from the speaker,
In the game executed in the specific gaming state, the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off even though the player has performed the stop operation at the specific timing as the stop operation on the (N-1) th reel. Is executed, even if a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel, the predetermined effect sound can be output from the speaker after the power is restored. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the drawing state, the first drawing state and the first drawing state have at least a second drawing state in which the probability that at least a specific result is determined is different,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation of a player,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the game is executed when the first drawing state is performed, and each of the games is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the second symbol is displayed. It is configured to be able to shift to the drawing state,
It is a game executed in the first drawing state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, respectively. Despite being stopped, and after being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game machine is characterized in that it can be shifted to the second drawing state even after is displayed.

P-turn body game machine, DU front door (door)
D door board, D10s input receiving sensor D20s first input sensor, D30s second input sensor D40 stop button, D41 left stop button D42 middle stop button, D43 right stop button D50 start lever, D60 settlement button D70 display panel, D80 door switch D90 coin shooter, D100 blocker D130 upper panel, D140 lower panel D150 decorative lamp unit, D160 reel window D170 medal slot, D180 start lamp D290 replay game lamp, D300 insertable lamp D200 credit number display device, D210 insertion number display light D220 Bet button, D230 Medal tray D240 outlet, D250 Special game status display D260 Keyhole, D270 Number of payouts display (push order display)
D280 AT counter value display device D310 Reel window frame lamp D340 Medal return member D341 Medal receiving slot D342 Medal falling surface D343 Medal non-falling surface M Main control board M20 Setting key switch, M30 Setting / reset button C Main control chip, M50 reel M51 Left reel, M52 Middle reel M53 Right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Game interval minimum timer S Sub-control board, S10 LED lamp S20 Speaker, S30 turn back light S40 Effect display, SC sub-control chip E power board, E10 power switch H medal payout device, H10s first payout sensor H20s second payout sensor, H40 hopper H50 disk, H50a disk rotation axis H60 game medal exit, H70 discharge urging means H80 hopper motor S50 bed buttonler , S60 Stop button lamp K turn body board, K10 turn body motor K20 turn body sensor IN relay board, SB sub input button KHc high security failure counter, YKc-1 advantageous section remaining game number counter FZt freeze execution timer RU reel unit, BU pedestal part, H62 discharge guide part, H64 slope HS medal auxiliary tank, BS screw, DE full detection electrode M55 first end, M57 second end, M58 superimposed part, M59 break MW reel frame, MO reel band

Claims (1)

First information display means,
A second information display means,
As a game section, it has a first section and a second section,
In the second section, after the predetermined processing based on the minimum game time is executed, the information about the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be displayed on the first information display means,
In the second section, after the specific processing based on the acceptance of the start switch is executed, the information about the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be displayed on the second information display means.
In the second section, the game in which the specific drawing result is determined by the internal drawing means is configured to have a case where the instruction game is executed,
In the first instruction game in which the specific drawing result is determined by the internal drawing means executed by accepting the operation of the start switch under the predetermined situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the stop switch on the first information display means After the information on the advantageous operation mode of is displayed, the information on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the second information display means.
In the second instruction game in which the specific drawing result is determined by the internal drawing means executed by receiving the operation of the start switch under the specific situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the stop switch on the second information display means After the information on the advantageous operation mode of is displayed, the first information display means is configured to display the information on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.

Images